Upload
meowmix
View
214
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 1/399
FM 38-701
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FIELD MANUAL FM 38-701MARINE CORPS ORDER MCO P4030.21DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY PUBLICATION NAVSUP PUB
DEPARTMENT OF THE AIR FORCE PAMPHLET AFPAM(I) 2DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY INSTRUCTION DLAI 4145.2
PACKAGING OF MATERIEL
PACKING
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY, THE NAVY, THE AIR FORCE,AND THE DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved f or public release; distribution is unlimited.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 2/399
FM 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP PUB 503/AFPAM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
*FM 38-701
MCO 4030.21D
NAVSUP PUB 503
AFPAM(I) 24-209
DLAI 4145.21 December 1999
DEP ARTMENTS OF THE ARMY,
NAVY, AND AIR F ORC E, AND THE
DEFE NSE LOGISTICS AGENCY
P ACKAGING OF MATERIE L
PACKING
CHAPTER PAGE
I N T R O D U C T I O NPU RPOSE .................................................. ....................................................... ....... 1
SCOPE ....................................................... ....................................................... ....... 1
REFERENCES.......................................................................................................... 8
CHAPTER 1 - P ACKINGGENERAL .................................................. ....................................................... .......1-1
SEQUE NCE OF PACKING OPERATION .................................................. ................1-1
DETERMINATION OF PACKING REQUIREMENTS................................................1-3
ITEM CHARACTERISTICS .................................................... ...................................1-3LOAD CHARACTERISTICS ................................................... ...................................1-7
MODES OF TRANSPORTATION ..................................................... .........................1-7
STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS.............................................. ...................................1-8
DESTINATION AND FIELD CONDITIONS..............................................................1-9
FUNCTIONS AND S ELECTION OF SHIP PING CONTAINERS ...............................1-9
ARRANGEMENT OF CONTENTS............................................................................1-9
BLOCKING AND BRACING .................................................. ...................................1-11
APPLICATION OF BLOCKING AND BRACING....................................... ................1-12
STRAPP ING REINF ORCEMENT FOR CONTAINERS ..............................................1-33
CUSHIONING..........................................................................................................1-35
PACKING PROBLEMS ................................................. ............................................1-51
PACKING SMALL, LIGHTWEIGH T ITEMS ...................................................... .......1-53
CLEARANCE BE TWEEN ITEM AND CONTAINER ..................................................1-54WEATHERPROOFING THE PACK...........................................................................1-55
TESTI NG OF PACKS ................................................... ............................................1-59
MARKING OF PACKS .................................................. ............................................1-68
ECONOMY IN PACKING ....................................................... ..................................1-68
PARCEL POST REQUIREME NTS ................................................... .........................1-72
*This field manual supersedes DLAM 4145.2, Vol II/TM 38-230-2/NAVSUP PUB 503, Vol
II/AFP 71-16/MCO P4030.21C, Pa ckaging of Mater iel – Pa cking (Volum e II), J un e 1977
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 3/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
ii
CHAPTE R 2 - FIBE RBOARD AND PAP ER BOARD CONTAINERS
FI BERBOARD BOXES .....................................................................................................2-1
TRIPLE -WALL CORRUGATED FIBE RBOARD BOXES (ASTM D 5168) ...................2-31
CHAPTE R 3 - WOODEN CANTAINERS AND PALLETS
CONTAINE R MATERI ALS .............................................................................................3-1
NAILED AND LOCK-CORNER WOOD BOXES (PPP-B-621)......................................3-7
NAILIN G REQUI REMEN TS ...........................................................................................3-20CLE ATED-PANEL BOXES (GEN ERAL)........................................................................3-30
CLE ATED PLYWOOD BOXES (PP P-B-601).................................................................3-34
BOXES,, WOOD-CLE ATED P ANELBOARD .................................................................3-42
WOOD-CLEATED, SKIDDE D, LOAD-BEARING BASE BOXES (MIL-B-26195).......3-42
WIREBOUND WOOD BOXES (PPP-B-585)...................................................................3-50
CLASS 3 MILITARY OVERS EA......................................................................................3-53
PALLE TS (GENERAL).....................................................................................................3-59
FOUR-WAY POST CONSTRUCTION PALLETS (MIL-P-15011).................................3-62
FOU R-WAY (PARTIAL) STRINGE R CONSTRU CTION P ALLETS (NN-P-71) ..........3-62
MAINTE NANCE OF PALLE TS ......................................................................................3-62
CHAP TER 4 - BAGS AND SACKS
NE ED FO R BAGS AND SACKS ......................................................................................4-1
BAGS DEFI NE D...............................................................................................................4-1
SACKS DEFI NE D ............................................................................................................4-1
SH IP PI NG BAGS AND SACKS .......................................................................................4-1
COTTON MAILING BAGS (A-A-2714) ...........................................................................4-1
PROCUREMEN T..............................................................................................................4-3
CUSHIONED PAPER SHIPPING SACKS (A-A-160, A-A-1588)...................................4-3
A-A-160 (CUSHION ED WITH POS T CONSU MER RE COVERED MATERIAL)........4-3
A-A-1588 (CUSH IONE D WITH CLOSE D CE LL P LASTIC F ILM) ..............................4-5
BURLAP SH IP PI NG BAGS (A-A-881)............................................................................4-7
CHAPTE R 5 - PAILS AND DRUMS
DESCRI PTION , CLASSIF ICATIONS, AND SELE CTION F ACTORS ........................5-1METAL SHIPPING AND STORAGE DRUMS (MIL-D-6054).......................................5-3
METAL DRUMS (STANDARD) (MISCELLANEOUS)..................................................5-9
FI BER DRUMS .................................................................................................................5-12
CHAPTE R 6 - CRATES
INTRODU CTION TO CRATES .......................................................................................6-1
CRATE MATERIALS........................................................................................................6-18
WOOD CRE ATES, OP EN AND COVERE D, MIL-C-52950 (GEN ERAL).....................6-29
TYPE I, STYLE A --HE AVY DUTY CRATE (MIL-C-52950)..........................................6-34
TYPE I, STYLE B--LIGHT DU TY CRATE (MIL-C-52950)............................................6-35
TYPE II, STYLE A--HEAVY DUTY CRATE (MIL-C-52950) .........................................6-37
TYPE III , STYLE B--LIGH T DUTY CRATE (MIL-C-52950).........................................6-40
TYPE IV, STYLE A--HEAVY DUTY CRATE (MIL-C-52950) ........................................6-43TYPE V, STYLE A--HE AVY DU TY (MIL-C-52950) .......................................................6-43
TYPE V, STYLE B--LIGH T DU TY CRATE (MIL-C-529502).........................................6-48
ASSEMBLY INSTRU CTION S (MIL-C-52950) ...............................................................6-58
OPE N WOOD CRATE S, MIL-C-3774 (GE NE RAL)........................................................6-60
OPEN BOLTE D CRATE S (MIL-C-3774) ........................................................................6-60
OPEN NAILE D CRATES (MIL-C-3774) .........................................................................6-72
SHEATHED WOOD CRATES, MIL-C-104 (GENERAL)...............................................6-84
ASSEMBLY (CLASS 1 CRATES ) ....................................................................................6-115
CRATE, SLOTTE D ANGLE, STEE L O R ALUMIN UM (MIL-C-9897) .........................6-141
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 4/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
iii
CHAPTE R 7 - CONSOLIDATION AND UNITIZATION FO R SH IP MENT
AND USE OF CARGO CONTAINERS
CONSOLID ATION AND UN ITIZATION FOR SHI PME NT .........................................7-1
PALLE TIZING UNI T LOADS (MIL-HD BK-774) ...........................................................7-2
SHRI NK FILM AND S TRETCH FILM PALLETIZATION ...........................................7-6
CONSOLIDATION CONTAINERS (GENERAL)...........................................................7-6
BOXES, SHIPPING INSERT CONSOLIDATION, MIL-B-43666 (GENERAL)...........7-6
TYPE I, WOOD CLEATED PLYWOOD CONSOLIDATION INSERT BOX(MIL-B-43666)................................................................................................................7-8
TYPE II, PLYWOOD WIREBOUND CONSOLIDATION INSE RT BOX
(MIL-B-43666)................................................................................................................7-11
TYPE III, F IBERBOARD CON SOLIDATION INSE RT BOX (MIL-B-43666)..............7-11
PACKING CONSOLIDATION CONTAINER.................................................................7-13
PACKING SE MI-PERISH ABLE S UBSIS TEN CE ITEMS ............................................7-14
CARGO CONTAINE RS (GEN ERAL)..............................................................................7-16
USE OF MILVANS AND SE AVANS ...............................................................................7-18
SHIPMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS.................................................................7-21
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 5/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE AND SCOPEP U R P O S EThis publication contains information on the fundamental principles and
appr oved meth ods and t echn iques used in t he pr otection of militar y supplies
and equipment against deterioration and damage during shipment and
stora ge. It is publish ed as an official document for use in operations and in
the training of military and civilian personnel from all segments of the
Department of Defense (DOD) and supporting agencies, as well as for
interested indust rial personnel. It conta ins inform ation based on
specifications, standards, and other pertinent documents, current as of the
date of prepar ation a nd coordination of the pu blication.
NOTE
For Air Force use, the pu blicat ion is n on-directive in na tur e.
S C OP EThis manual emphasizes the importance of packing of military supplies and
equipment. It contains detailed informa tion concerning the requirement s to
accomplish packing operat ions. The requirem ent s include use of exter ior
shipping containers; the assembling of items or packs into the container;
anchoring, blocking, bracing, and cushioning of items or packages within the
container; weatherproofing; strapping of containers; the testing of exterior
packs; palletization and unitization of loads; parcel post; and related subject
mat ter. Genera l exterior mar king in accordance with MIL-STD-129 is
discussed.
C HANGES AND P ROVISIONS
Changes or revisions to this manual are due to major changes in packing
concepts, policies and doctrine, and revision of specifications and other
official publications, will be made on a continuing basis, as required.
Informa tion contained h erein is curr ent a s of J un e 1996.
Users are encouraged to submit recommended changes or comments to
improve th is man ua l. Commen ts should be keyed to the specific page,
paragraph, and line of the text in which the change is recommended.
Reasons should be provided for each comment to insure understanding and
complete evaluation. Commen ts should be prepared using DA Form 2028
(Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) or appropriate
service form and forwarded direct to Dean, U.S. Army Ordnance School of
Military Packaging Technology, ATTN: ATSL-MPT, 360 Lanyard Road,
Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD 21005-5003.
OBJ ECTIVES OF M ILITARY P ACKAGING
The objectives for a chieving un iform pa cking of items of militar y sup ply are
to--
• Insure optimum life, utility and performance of materiel through
prevention of deterioration or dam age.
• Support t he ma teriel readiness posture of DOD.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 6/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2
• Provide for efficient receipt, storage, inventory, transfer and issue of
materiel.
• Assure that marking requirements are kept at the minimum
necessary for effective identification, handling, shipment and storage.
• Effect economies by requiring the use of packs which yield lowest
overall cost to the total DOD distribution system consistent with
known or anticipated shipment handling and storage conditions.Considera tions will include--
ο Minimization of mater ials, methods of preservation, a nd
documentation.
ο Accomplishm ent with optimum a mount of au tomated
operations.
ο Minimum weight an d cube.
ο Use of modular conta iners.
ο Ha ndling by u nitized load configur ation.
ο Use of containerization.
ο Exploitation of new ma terials, meth ods, an d techniques.
ο Disposability of packaging materials.
H AZARDS E NCOUNTERED IN TRANSPORTATION, H ANDLING, AN D STORAGE
Military supplies and equipment must be protected against pilferage and
damage due to force and exposure, not only until they reach their ultimate
destinat ion, but un til the items are placed int o actual use or service. Force
an d exposur e will reduce the u seful lifespan of the item or cause th e item to be
dam aged beyond rep air. The objective of packing is to exten d the lifespa n of
the item so that depreciation starts, not when it leaves the manufacturing
plant , but wh en it is placed into service.
F o r c e
Damage may result from hazardous forces encountered in transportation,
ha ndling, an d stora ge (figur e 1). Tran sportat ion ha zards involve forces
encoun tered thr ough rail, tru ck, boat, or air shipments. The dama ge caused
can result from abru pt st art s, stops, vibrat ion, an d jolting.
Ha ndling ha zards involve th ose dama ging forces received th rough loading,
un loading, and han dling dur ing stora ge opera tions. Exam ples of ha ndling
where dama ge often occurs ar e--
• Manual handling--dropping and puncture.
• Forklift truck handhng--dropping and puncture.
• Cargo nets--dropping, cru shing, an d wr acking.
• Grab h ooks--cru shing an d pun ctu re.
• Slings--cru shing, dr opping, a nd wracking.
•
Conveyers--jarring, sm ash ing, and dropping.Storage hazards involve those forces resulting from the crushing effect of
superimposed loads th rough sta cking.
E x p o s u r e
Exposure to the different climatic conditions and weather hazards, such as
high hu midity, rain, salt spra y, extreme cold, dry inten se heat , and t he cycling
of these weather conditions, will tend to accelerate the breakdown or
deterioration of unprotected items.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 7/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3
Figure 1. Ha zardous forces encountered in tra nsporta tion handling, an d storage.
Pi l f e r age
Theft of military supplies and equipment while in transit or storage is a significant
problem for the military. Small items of high value are especially vulnerable to pilferage
and should be protected as much as possible through packing techniques.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 8/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4
C o u n t e r m e a s u r e s To H a z a r d s O f P a c k
Items which are packed properly will resist the damaging effects of force and
exposure. Force is coun ter acted by--
• Using r igid shipping conta iners.
• Immobilizing the item with in the conta iner th rough an choring,
blocking, and bracing.• Damping forces th rough t he u se of cushioning m ater ials an d devices.
• Reinforcing shipping containers with metal and nonmetallic
stra pping or reinforcement ta pe as appropriate.
Exposure is coun tera cted by the use of--
• Weather-resistant shipping containers.
• Waterpr oof bar rier ma terials in various applications.
NECESSITY FOR A P ACKAGING P OLICY
To attain economy, efficiency, and uniformity in packing, and to provide a
un iform pr ocedure in conn ection with procur ement , the services an d a gencies
of th e Depart men t of Defense must h ave a common packing policy. This isprovided by the Department of Defense (DOD) 4140.1-R, Materiel
Management Regulation.
M ILITARY R EGULATIONS
The Joint Regulation AR 700-15/NAVSUPINST 4030.28C/AFJMAN 24-204/
MCO 4030.33D/DLAD4145.7, applies to all Department of Defense compo-
nents (Army, Air Force, Navy, Marine Corps, and the Defense Logistics
Agency) respons ible for packa ging an item t hr oughout it s life cycle.
This regulation on th e packaging of ma teriel implements DOD 4140. 1-R an d
covers packaging requirements, American Society for Testing and Materials
Standards (ASTM) specifications, levels of protection along with policies and
procedures for Performan ce Oriented Pa ckaging (POP) an d th e protection of
electrostatic discharge sensitive items.
M ILITARY P ACKAGING LEVELS OF P ROTECTION
Concep t o f Mi li t a r y Leve l s o f P r o t ec t i on
In regard to requirements for packing, the military services for many years
relied heavily on the term s "domestic" an d "overseas". Exper ience proved
that for military purposes, these words were vague generalities with no
clear-cut mean ing to them. Suppliers were often per plexed when confronted
with overseas r equirement s for items destined for domestic installations. It
was not apparent to them that the domestic destinations were merely initialreceiving points for projected overseas shipments, or that storage and
handling conditions were severe enough to justify an overseas type of
packing regardless of destinat ion. To permit th e military services to state
their requirements more objectively, the concept of levels of protection was
adopt ed. As defined in MIL-STD-2073-1C, levels of protection are a means
of specifying the level of military p reservat ion an d pa cking th at a given item
requires to assure that it is not degraded during shipment and storage (see
figur e 2). Specific levels of pr otection a re a s follows:
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 9/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5
Figure 2. Examples of protection.
• M i l i t a r y l eve l o f p r e s e r va t i on . Preservation designed to protect
an item during shipment, handling, indeterminate storage, and
distribution to consignees worldwide.
• Mili t a r y leve l s of pa ckin g .
o Leve l A. Protection required to meet the most severe worldwide
shipment , handling, and storage conditions. Level A pack mu st,
in ta ndem with t he a pplied preservation, be capable of protecting
material from the effects of direct exposure to extremes of
climate, terrain, operational and transportation environments.
Examples of situations which indicate a need for use of a Level A
pack are: War Reserve Material, mobilization, strategic and
theater deployment and employment, open storage, and deck
loadin g. Exa mples of cont ain ers used for Level A packin g
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 10/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6
requirements include, but are not limited to, overseas type wood
boxes and plast ic and meta l reusable containers.
o Leve l B. Protection required to meet moderate worldwide
shipment , ha ndling, an d storage conditions. Level B pack must,
in ta ndem with t he a pplied preser vation, be capable of protecting
mat erial not directly exposed to extremes of climate, t erra in, an d
opera tiona l tra nsporta tion environm ents. Exam ples of situat ionswhich indicate a need for use of a Level B pack are: security
assistance (e.g., Foreign Military Sales (FMS)) and containerized
overseas shipmen ts. Exam ples of conta iners used for Level B
packing requirements include, but are not limited to, domestic
wood crates, weather-resistant fiberboard containers, fast pack
containers, weather-resistant fiber drums, and weather-resistant
paper a nd m ulti-wall shipping sacks.
C o m m e r c i a l P a c k a g i n g . Commer cial packaging is defined as t he m ater ials
and methods used by the supplier to meet the requirements of the
distribution systems serving both DOD and commer cial consumers. The
requirements of MIL-STD-2073-1C shall only be applied to the packaging of
items that are expected to enter the military distribution system.Commercial packaging is to be used to the maximum extent possible for all
other items. Items n ot going into stock shall be packaged in accordance with
ASTM D 3951, Stan dar d P ractice for Commer cial Pa ckaging.
Commercial packaging will be acceptable for any level of protection when the
technical design of the package meets all conditions of the level of protection
specified. It will be ma rk ed to th e level it meet s. Use of comm ercial
packaging is contingent u pon no increase in packaging changes, size, weight,
or delay in delivery.
Bulk practices used in interplant a nd intr aplant movements or shipments t o
jobbers are not acceptable unless they are the usual trade practices for
individual commodities such as coal, textiles. petroleum, and subsistence.
The packaging details will be incorporated into standardization and
acquisition documen ts when applicable.
NATO S TANAG 4280, LEVELS OF R EQUIREMENTS FOR P ACKAGING
Participating nations agree to adopt the NATO levels of requirements -
defined in this STANAG as the basis for negotiation for the procurement of
packaged mater iel between nat ions. In defining levels of requiremen ts it is
necessary to take into account: The characteristics of the environment and
constraints imposed by the environment; the technical considerations to
define package tests; the four levels of packaging used in NATO; and, it also
shows comparison of these NATO levels against the nearest nationalpackaging requirement.
Type o f Load . The term "type of load" refers to the physical characteristics
of the item, including the nature of the item as it contributes to the support
of, or dam age to the conta iner. The sam e kind of conta iner can be designed
to provide adequate protection to various items by adjusting the
constru ctional requiremen ts. This may result in a light, medium, or
heavydut y container, as necessary. The design of th e shipping container t o
be used is influen ced by the typ e of load. Ther e ar e thr ee types of loads : Type
1, Type 2 an d Type 3. The t ypes of loads will be ment ioned un der the various
shipping containers and in section I (figure 3).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 11/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7
Figur e 3. Types of loads
Type 1 - easy load . The load is a single item or single interior container
which provides complete and uniform support to all faces of the shippingcontainer. Bulk practices used in interplan t and intra plant movements or
shipments to jobbers are not acceptable unless they are the usual trade
practices for individual commodities such as coal, textiles, petroleum, and
subsistence.
Type 2 - ave r age l oad . The load is composed of more than one item or
interior container which give some support to all faces of the shipping
container . The contents ar e of moderate density and relatively stur dy. Some
examples are goods in metal cans which are not packed in an interior
container, bottles individua lly cushioned, an d ha rdwa re in cart ons.
Type 3 - Diff icu l t load . The load gives little or n o support t o the sh ipping
conta iner. The cont ents can be extremely heavy, very fragile, very irregularin sh ape, bulk m ater ials which a re free to shift. and flow, or a combinat ion of
several of these factors. Some exam ples are rivets, bolts, and n uts, delicate
instruments and machined part s and assemblies.
E CONO MY IN P ACKING
The military concept of economy in packing is to obtain maximum output of
adequa tely protected items at a minimum cost. Economy measu res,
consistent, with the degree of protection required by an item or package
should be of prime concern to individuals engaged in the establishment of
packing requirements, an d to personnel in cha rge of, or performing packing
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 12/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
8
operat ions. Significant savings can be accomplished by reducing the ta re
weight, cubage, and packing cost of a commodity through proper
reengineering of the unit and exterior containers, use of newly developed
mat erials, an d employment of altern ate met hods and techniques.
R E F E R E N C E S
Throughout this manual, packing materials, equipment, processes, methods,etc., are referred to by their common names together with the appropriate
specificat ion, sta nda rd, or other p ublication symbols. Copies of specificat ions
and other documents required by activities of the Defense Logistics Agency,
the Depar tmen t of th e Army, Navy, and Air Force, and t he Mar ine Corps a re
obtained from supply sources thr ough established chann els. Copies of
specifications, standards, and drawings required by contractors connection
with specific procurement functions should be obtained from the procuring
activity or as directed by th e cont ra cting officer. Milita ry and Feder al
Specifications and Standards are available from: Standardization Document
Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue, Building #4, Section D, Philadelphia PA
19111-5094. Informa tion pamphlet titled "A Guide for th e Private In dustr y"
provides more detailed informa tion a nd is ava ilable upon requ est.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 13/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-1
CHAPTER 1
PACKING
GENERAL
P ACKING OF GENERAL SU P P L I E S
Some commodity items require preservation by procedures and materials
described in FM 38-700/MCO P4030.31D/NAVSUP PUB 502/AFJPAM 24-
237/DLAI 4145.14, Packaging of Materiel – Preservation, which provide unit
containers suita ble for shipment without fur th er packing. Other items may
require fur ther packing in containers suitable for shipment . This cha pter
relates to the packing of commodity items directly in shipping containers
with whatever protection is required to prevent damage in shipment,
han dling and storage. The container alone can not always provide full
protection for military items. Items must be properly anchored, braced,
blocked, or cushioned in th e cont ainer t o provide adequ at e protection. A
container is often blamed for damage to its contents when the cushioning,
blocking, or bra cing ar e at fault (fig. 1-1). Ever y packing operat ion, including
the final closure, strapping, and marking of the container, must be carefully
planned and executed to ensure that the contents will arrive at its
destinat ion in a u sable condition.
P ACKAGING OF H AZARDOUS ARTICLES
Commodities classified as hazardous materials come within the scope of
TITLE 49 Code of Federal Regulations which incorporates Department of
Transportation Regulation for the Transportation of Explosives and other
Hazar dous Articles by all modes. Inter na tiona l Shipments mu st be packaged
in accordance with the International Air Transport Associations DangerousGoods Regulation (IATA) and the International Maritime Organization
Dan gerous Goods Code (IMDG) codes. In addition, ha zar dous mate rials
which a re to be shipped via milita ry aircraft mu st be packaged in a ccorda nce
with the joint service manual AFJMAN 24-204/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB
505/MCO P4030.19/DLAM 4145.3, Preparing Hazardous Materials for
Military Air Shipmen ts.
SEQUENCE OF PACKI NG OPE RATION
The general sequence of military packing is divided into a series of basic
operations which may include some or all of the following steps, not
necessarily in the order given below:
D e t er m i n e t h e P a c k in g R e q u i r e m e n t sKnowing the item characteristics helps to determine the protection required
and the best way to provide it through the use of an adequate container,
suitable blocks, braces, and cushions, and a ppropriate bar rier m ater ials. This
study will include consideration of the characteristics of the item, its size,
shape, fragility, etc.; the types of loads (easy, average or difficult); the mode
of transportation (rail, ship, truck, or aircraft); the storage facilities (covered
or un covered); the dest ination (domestic or overseas in t he ar ctic, temperat e,
or tr opic zones); an d th e levels of protection r equir ed.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 14/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-2
Se l ect t h e Con t a i ner
Select and use an exterior container that will comply with the requirements
outlined in applicable cha pter s of th is ma nu al. This selection should consider
all factors pertinent to giving adequate protection at the minimum cost such
as the characteristics and limitations of the container; its initial cost and
upkeep expenses; its weight and cube; its availability or obtainability in
appr opriate quant ities; an d its reusability.
Prepa re protec t i ve barr iers
Prepare an appropriate barrier to give weatherproofing protection not
obtaina ble from th e conta iner a lone.
I n s e r t an d S ecur e t h e I t em t o t he Con t a i ner
Insert the item a nd secure it to the conta iner to contr ol or prevent m ovement
by mea ns of adequ at e cushioning, blocking, an d bra cing. The distinction
between cushioning and blocking is that cushioning permits controlled
movement of the item within the container, while blocking and bracing
usu ally is designed to prevent m ovement of the item within th e container .
Figure 1-1. Dama ged items as a r esult of improper/inadequa te packing.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 15/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-3
S eal the Ba rr ier i f Used
Seal the bar rier mat erial by mean s of adh esives, heat seals, pressur e seals, or
sealing tape to provide weatherproofness of the seams, joints, and closures
equal to tha t of the ba rr ier mat erial itself.
C lo s e t h e C o n t a i n e r
Close the container following the detailed requirements outlined in the
section of this m an ual which describes th e cont ainer selected.
R e i n f o r c e t h e C o n t a i n e r . Reinforce the container with metal or plastic
strapping or reinforced tape as appropriate and as required for the container
selected.
M a r k t h e S h i p p i n g C o n t a i n e r . Mark the container as appropriate to
identify the cont ents a nd to ensur e movement to its destinat ion.
DETERMINATION OF P ACKING REQUIREMENTSThe different types of items procured by the Depart ment of Defense r equire a
wide var iety of packing operat ions. Items var y from str ong, ru gged ones tha t
fit the container well and require no cushioning, blocking or bracing, to
others that are irregular in shape, delicate, or fragile, and require special
cushioning, blocking or bra cing.
B ASIC F ACTORS
To determ ine packing requirem ents, several ba sic factors mu st be considered,
namely, the item characteristics, the load characteristics, the mode of
transportation, the storage and handling facilities, the destination and field
conditions.
B ASIC R E F E R E N C EThe basic reference for blocking, bracing, and cushioning is MIL-STD-1186,
Cushioning, Anchoring, Bracing, Blocking, and Waterproofing, with
Appropriat e Test Methods. This stan dar d, appr oved by th e Depart ment of
Defense and mandatory for use by the Armed Forces, provides general
requirements and procedures concerning the arrangement of the contents
within th e shipping cont ainer for t he pr evention of physical damage.
SC O P E O F MIL-STD-1186
The standard covers common packing requirements which may be omitted
from detail specifications for items or categories of items when this standard
is referen ced in the deta il specificat ion. It does not cont ain requ iremen ts for
shipping containers, themselves or for unit packing, both of which also
provide physical protection.
ITEM CHARACTER ISTICSThe first step in any packaging operation is a careful study of the item to be
packed. It is necessary to consider the shape, size, weight, strength, and
degree of fragility of th e item in all directions. The ava ilability of moun tin g
provisions, the degree of disassembly permissible for shipment, corrosion
prevention requirements and special use requirements which affect the
packing opera tions mu st a lso be considered.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 16/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-4
SH A P E
The shape of the item to be packed is an important factor to consider in
designing blocking and bracing. A regular-shap ed item with rectan gular
surfaces requires a minimum of blocking, while an irregular-shaped item
with uneven surfaces, including projections, often require an elaborate
blocking system. Cur ved surfaces requir e car efully fitt ed blocking to preven t
damage caused by concentrated stresses at contact points, and to distributeinternal forces over a greater area of the faces of the container (fig 1-2).
Long, slender items, particularly if heavy, exert a tremendous concentrated
force on th e ends of th e container du ring ha ndling. This force may be
counteracted by securely blocking the item to the sides, top, or bottom of the
container, and by increasing the thickness of the ends of the container (fig
1-3). Relatively heavy, irregular -sha ped small items pr esent a pa rticularly
difficult pr oblem when t hey mu st be cush ioned a s well as blocked. Gener ally,
in solving this problem, it is desirable to even out the surfaces by means of
pads an d blocking to increase the bearing area. This in tu rn decreases the
load p er u nit a rea of bear ing on th e cushion (fig 1-4).
S IZE AND WE I G H T
A large item may require more extensive blocking and larger amounts of
cush ioning th an a smaller one. The blocking ma y be necessary to bridge the
relatively wide spans of the container faces, or it may be required to
distribute the cushioning over larger area s of the item. Since the impact
force developed by the abrupt stopping of a moving object is directly
proportional to its weight, the weight of an item is very important in
considering the blocking an d cushioning. In stu dying the item, consider th e
distribution of the weight with respect to the size and bearing ar eas. Where
the weight is concentrated, it may be necessary to distribute it over a larger
area . This may be done by tran sferring some of it from one conta iner face to
the edges or corners of the container by the use of end blocks.
Figure 1-2. Inter ior blocking for an irregular sh aped item.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 17/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-5
Fi gu r e 1-3 . Us e o f co r r uga t ed fi be r boa r d pa ds and l i ne r .
F i g u r e 1 -4 . I n t e r i o r b l o ck i n g t o p r o t e c t c on t a i n e r a g a i n s t e n d t h r u s t .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 18/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-6
STRENGTH AND F RAGILITY
Some items are rugged enough to withstand greater stacking loads and
ha ndling forces tha n th eir container s. Various components of vehicles and
tanks, in particular, require little protection against shipping hazards, but
are placed in conta iners for ease of ha ndling, stowage, and storage. On th e
other h and, there a re nu merous items th at require the maximum protection
afforded by packing mat erials. Equipmen t is considered ru gged or highlyresistant to shock when bracing and blocking within the container is all that
is needed for protection. Items th at r equire cush ioning for pr otection ar e
considered to be fragile. The degree of fragility of an item determines the
amount and type of cushioning required to protect it from damage during
han dling and shipment . Some items are inh erent ly strong and ru gged except
for one or more fra gile compon ent s. When t he fragile componen ts cann ot be
removed for separat e packing the entire item m ust be treat ed as fragile, even
though t his may resu lt in an u na voidably large, cumber some pack.
AVAILABILI TY OF MOUNTING P ROVISIONS
An importa nt factor to consider in packing is the availability of brackets a nd
holddowns on the item that can be used to mount it within the container.
Frequently, it is possible to mount an item within the container by using the
same bra ckets and h olddowns tha t ar e used for positioning an d securing it in
place when it is permanently installed. Mounting facilities should be
examined to determine if they are adequate, especially if the container is
likely to be tipped on end (fig 1-5). Compr essors, en gines, engin e componen ts,
generators, starters, an d carburetors are often secured in this ma nner.
Figure 1-5. Moun ting facilities of item m ust be adequat e.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 19/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-7
D ISASSEMBLING OF AN ITEM
Items should be thoroughly investigated to determine if disassembly of
simple parts can reduce the size of the conta iner r equired an d/or simplify the
packaging. Proper au th orization must be obtained before disassembling any
portion of an item that would require technical skills or special tools to
rea ssemble, rea lign, or recalibra te. The disassem bly of simple-to-rem ove
component s with stan dard tools (i.e.., han dles, wheels) does n ot require priorauthorization.
D i sa s s e m b l e d P a r t s
When practicable, items should be disassembled to afford protection of
components, attachments, and accessories against damage and pilferage and
to reduce cubage. Disassembled par ts should be wrapp ed, packaged,
anchored, braced, blocked, or cushioned within t he sh ipping container so tha t
parts or protective devices within the shipping container cannot be damaged
by mutu al cont act. Disassembled par ts sh ould be clearly and legibly mar ked
as to identity an d proper location on the assembled item. All fasten ers
removed dur ing disassembly should be secur ed in one of th e mating par ts. A
part should not be removed from an assembly unless it can be reassembled
rea dily in t he field with out special tools.
CAUTION
Proper authorization must be obtained before disassembling any
portion of an item that would require technical skills or special
tools to reassemble, realign or recalibrate. Disassembly of simple-
to-remove components such as handles, wheels, etc., requiring
stan dar d tools, does not n eed aut horization.
SPECIAL P ACKING R EQUIREMENTS
Reusable and other special purpose containers usually require special
consideration of the packing of the conten ts in th e container . For instan ce, inreusable containers, the blocking and cushioning must be arranged so that it
may be easily removed, and when replaced, it will adequately protect the
contents. However, reusable and special purpose containers should be
considered for use, especially if their use results in reduced weight, cube, or
cost. For examp le, th e reusa ble cont ain er for a missile nose cone, shown in
figure 1-6 while expensive to procure, may more than pay for itself through
its reusa bility and its designed protection featu res.
LOAD CHARACTER ISTICSThe proper selection of the shipping container for a given load is of the
utm ost importa nce. The kind of conta iner mu st be determined by the weight,
size, sha pe, and fra gility of th e load. To aid in th is selection, th e various
loads have been classified as Type 1-Easy Load, Type 2-Average Load, andType 3-Difficult Load. (See fig. 3 of the I nt roduction.)
MODES OF TRANSP ORTATIONThe mode of tra nsporta tion is an importan t factor in deter mining th e packing
requiremen ts. The hazar ds of ha ndling an d shipping vary greatly between
motor, ra il, ship, or aircra ft. As an exam ple, th ere could be consider able
difference in the amount of handling that an item being transshipped from
truck to rail to ship would receive, and the amount of handling an item
delivered by air freight would receive. Likewise, an item
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 20/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-8
Figure 1-6. Protection featu res of a r eusable missile container.
to be delivered by airdr op would require m uch more pr otection t ha n one to be
delivered by tr uck.
STORAGE CONSIDERATIONSTo assure serviceability of the contents after prolonged exposure to
deteriorating elements, not only the supplies, but the packing materials
which enclose them m ust be protected. There ma y be a considera ble periodfrom the time the material leaves the man ufacturer u ntil it is used. It may
be stored outd oors in domestic depots, then shipped to staging ar eas or ports
of embark ation to await tr an sportation overseas. Fina lly arr iving, it may
again be st ored in depots or su pply areas wh ich could be improvised shacks,
nat ive hut s, tents, caves, or even in th e open. At oversea supply points, the
packs are often broken open and smaller intermediate packs distributed to
forward ar eas. On the other ha nd, items may be shipped directly from the
supplier to th e user with a minimu m of delay. In th is insta nce, th e protection
provided by the pack could be considerably reduced from the amount
required for t he oversea pack.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 21/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-9
DESTINATION AND FIE LD CONDITIONSThe ultimate destination of items is generally unknown when they leave a
packing facility. Some item s may be used domest ically while the rest will
eventua lly go overseas. They may be shipped to the a rctic regions, the
island s of th e seas, or th e tropical jungles. They ma y be subjected to the cold,
heat, humidity, aridity, or the extreme temperature changes of the various
regions, all of which must be considered in planning the pack to assure
adequate protection through the time of delivery and after arrival at
destinat ion when they m ay be su bjected t o unfavorable field conditions.
FUNCTIONS AND SELECTION OF SH IP P ING CONTAINERS
F UNCTIONS
A shipping container is an y exterior box, cra te, dru m, etc., which is required
to enclose one or more items d ur ing tr an sit or storage. The ba sic functions of
a shipping container are to protect the contents and to provide for ease of
han dling. Shipping containers a ssist in th e han dling of a nu mber of items by
consolidation, and of a single item which is difficult to handle. The degree of
protection derived from the shipping container depends upon its type, thematerials used in its fabrication, its construction features, its final
destination, the nature of the contents, and the anticipated hazards.
Chapters 2 through 7 of this manual contain information on approved
containers for military shipments and should be consulted when making
selection of th e app ropriate containers.
SELECTION
The shipping container is usually established by specifications, directives,
technical orders, or oth er aut horized publications. Where a group of
containers is authorized, or when the proper container is not specified, the
packing supervisor is responsible for the selection of the appropriate
container. They must ba se their selection u pon the ph ysical cha ra cteristics of
the item; its destination; whether domestic or overseas; the level of protectionrequired; the type of load; the initial cost of the container; the weight and
cube of the container; the simplicity, economy and ease of assembly and
closure; the availability; and need for reusability of the container (fig 1-7).
Nailed wood boxes or similar heavy wooden containers will not be used
unless fully justified by past experience or environmental, geographical, or
security considerations.
ARRANGEMENT OF CONTENTSThe contents of a pack should be arranged within the shipping container so
as to provide maximum pr otection to its contents an d the cont ainer. Where
applicable, the arrangement should permit a container fabricated of
materials that will result in low tare weight, smallest practical cube,
convenient ha ndling, an d suitability for palletization. Conten ts should
completely fill the container or be secured therein with suitable clearance.
Packs of like items should contain like quantities and should be uniform in
size, shape, an d weight.
MOVABLE P ARTS AND P R O J E C T I N G P ARTS
Articles with moving external parts or projecting parts that might become
damaged by shock or vibration encountered in shipment should have these
part s ma de secure against movement by mea ns of blocking, bracing, tiedown,
or other adequate provisions, or should be disassembled, if practicable.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 22/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-10
Figur e 1-7. Conta iner selection factors.
SEGREGATION OF P ACKED C ONTENTS
So far as p racticable, contents of shipping conta iners sh ould be segregated in
th e following order: (a) th e ord er on th e packing list; (b) items of th e sam e
contract; (c) items of the same National Stock Numbers; and (d) items of the
same Feder al Supply Class.
C ONVERSION OF TYP E 3 LOADS
Where practicable, type 3 loads should be converted to type 1 or type 2 loads.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 23/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-11
BLOCKING AND BR ACING
B LOCKING AND BRACING DE F I N E D
Blocking and bracing is the process of providing physical and mechanical
protection t o an item by mean s of mat erials, oth er th an cushioning ma terials,
intended to prevent any free movement of the item within the container, and
distribute or transfer concentrated loads of the item to larger areas of other
faces of the cont ain er.
F UNCTIONS OF BLOCKING AND B RACING
Items which do not completely fill the shipping container should be blocked,
bra ced, an chored, or other wise immobilized with in the conta iner . Blocking
and bracing should be used to secure items or components so that they will
not shift within a container; to make irregular shaped items fit a regular
container; to distribute th e weight of irr egular items over all edges and faces
of the container; to protect projections from injury; to prevent projections
from damaging the barrier or container; to provide space for spare parts or
make room for desiccant; and to reinforce weak portions or mountings.
Blocking and bracing modifies the original shape of an item so that it isprotected adequa tely an d so th at it fits the cont ainer. The mat erials used for
this purpose differ from cushioning in that they are not intended to absorb
shocks. Item s having legs or oth er projectin g portions which may become
loose or broken, or which m ight pun cture th e conta iner, must be supported by
adequa te blocking and bra cing. The blocks an d braces should be applied
against portions of the container that are strong enough to resist forces
tending to distort them. Likewise, th e bracing should be arr an ged to
distribute forces to several reinforced sections of the surface of the item (fig
1-8). Items with movable par ts, items mounted sprin gs or other flexible
supports sh ould be braced secur ely to prevent m ovement , except wh ere su ch
mounting is part of the package cushioning or is designed to protect against
shock an d vibrat ion dur ing shipment.
Figure 1-8. Blocking an d bracing to prevent movement.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 24/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-12
ABRASION P ROTECTION
Protection should be provided when the surface of the item in contact with
the blocking an bracing can be damaged by relative motion between the
contacting surfaces or could become corroded as a result of such continuous
cont act. Pr otection aga inst a bra sion should be provided for highly finish ed or
easily marred surfaces by wrapping or covering with cushioning material.
Surfaces that might be damaged by contact with cushioning material shouldbe sepa ra ted by a covering of noncorr osive pa per conforming t o MIL-P-130 or
greaseproof barrier material conforming to MIL-B-121, grade A.
AP P LICATION OF BLOCKING AND BRACING MATER IALSThe materials selected for all blocking and bracing, the design and
application of the blocking and bracing should be compatible with the load to
be supported and the size, shape, and strength of bearing areas of the item.
The heavier the load needing support, the stiffer and stronger the materials
for blocks an d braces must be. Hen ce, th e choice of ma ter ials depend s upon
the size and sh ape of th e area s against which t he blocking an d bracing will be
placed, as well as the size and weight of the item being secur ed. Since a
shipping container may be dropped on any of its faces or corners, blocks andbraces must be designed to withstand the thrust and impact applied on any
direction. The choice of ma ter ials used for blocking a nd br acing vary widely.
The chief materials used are corrugated fiberboard in cells, trays, pleated
pads, and flat pads, for relatively lightweight items or for supplementary
prim ar y blocking of hea vy item s. Wood, plywood, rigid plast ic foam s, an d
meta l are used as t he prima ry blocking ma terials for lar ge and hea vy items.
F i b e r b o a r d
Open -end cells an d tra ys of corr uga ted fiberboar d. When used a s blocking,
corrugated fiberboard must be designed to fit the bearing area of the item to
support an d evenly distribute the load. Common forms of corr ugat ed
fiberboard blocking are die-cuts, open end cells, trays, pleated pads, and flat
pad s (fig 1-9). Fr equen tly, var ious combina tions of th ese forms ar e employed.They can be used to provide spaces for, and restrain the movement of,
disassembled parts, as well as provide openings for bags of desiccant.
Genera lly, cells an d tr ays should be held in shape with tape or sta ples.
Figure 1-9. Cells an d tra ys made of corru gated fiberboard.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 25/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-13
Figur e 1-10. Incorrect an d correct direction of corr uga tion.
Those surfaces of the cell or tray which are perpendicular to the contacting
surface of the item are called bracing supports and are the load bearing
members. No bracing support allowances should be ma de for the other
surfaces. To utilize all of the str ength of th ese bracing sup ports, they should
bear directly on th e item. The weight of the item mu st be exerted in th e
same direction a s the corr ugat ions. If not, the item is ina dequat ely supported
and d ama ge may result (fig 1-10). Open-end cells and t rays should be used
for blocking and bracing deep recesses; bridging long projections; providing
spaces for disassembling parts, accessories, and dessicants; and providing
clearan ce between item and conta iner. Bracing supports sh ould bear directly
on the a rt icle. Allowable loads for bra cing su pport s of open-end cells loadedin th e flut e direction sh ould be in accorda nce with ta ble 1-1. If flut e direction
is at right a ngles to the direction of th e load, t he a llowable loads should be 50
percent of th e valu es of ta ble 1-1. Tra ys should be scored a nd folded par allel
to the flute direction an d should n ot exceed 4 inches in h eight .
C ORRUGATED F IBERBOARD F ORMS
Corrugated fiberboard used for blocking and bracing should conform to
ASTM D 4727. Blocking and br acing forms sh ould be loaded in th e direction
parallel to the flutes wherever possible. The cutting, slotting, scoring, and
folding of fiberboard blanks to make blocking and bracing supports or forms
shall be such as to assur e proper fitting a nd distr ibution.
F OLDED P AD S
Folded pads of corrugated fiberboard may be used for blocking greater loads
tha n are feasible to support with cells and tra ys. The pads should be
designed to fit against a flat surface (flat pads) or along an edge (corner
pads). Conn ecting webs between flat pads should always contact the
container a nd not the item. All scores and folds should be made at right
angles to th e flute direction. Flat pa ds should be a minimu m of 2 inches
wide. Portions of folded pads in direct conta ct with t he item ar e bearing
area s. The maximum loads for these bearing areas should be in accordance
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 26/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-14
Table 1-1. Allowable loads for corru gat ed fiberboard . Colum ns loaded in the
flute direction.
Material
Allowable loads p er linea l inch
of bra cing su pport or column
Height u p to
4 inches
Height over
4 inches
Pounds Pounds
Double-faced fiberboard :
200-pound burst ing strength
275-pound burst ing strength
350-pound burst ing strength
2
2.5
3
1
1.5
2
Double-wall fiberboard :
275-pound burst ing strength
350-pound burst ing strength
500-pound burst ing strength
2.5
3
4
1.5
2
2.5
Triple-wall fiberboard :
1,100-pound burst ing st rength 5 4
Note. When a greater load is imposed than that permitted by the table, use wood
blocking and bracing
with ta ble 1-2. Accordion folded pads ha ve grea ter r esista nce to brea kdown
than open end cells because the load is spread over a large area rather than
on bra cing support s. Accordion folded pads with tight folds distr ibute th e
load more evenly to th e conta iner . The conn ecting web between t he folded
pleats should be placed in contact with the container rather than the item.
Creases for accordion folded pads should be made across the corrugations,
and t he pleat should be at least 2 inches in width. If necessary, a pleat 1 1/2
inches wide may be made, but extreme care must be exercised when folding
the pad to prevent cru shing the corru gations. Tape should be used to keep
accordion folded pad s in shap e. The load bea rin g capa city of a pa d is based
on the initial compressibility of th e corrugat ed mater ial. Increasing the
number of pleats does not increase the safe load limit; numerous pleats
increase the cushioning value only. Wide or long items a re better supported
by several accordion folded pads, placed side by side, than by one pad having
extremely wide folded pleats.
F LAT P AD S
Flat pads of corrugated fiberboard may be used to block very shallowprojections, su ch as hin ges or slight offsets on su rfaces; to level off projectin g
screw heads; to fill in the space between ends of inner flaps of slotted
fiberboard boxes to provide additional protection to contents at top and
bottom of boxes; an d to sepa ra te items with in a conta iner . Allowable load s
should be in a ccorda nce with table 1-2. Maximum a llowable loads per squar e
inch of bearing area on a flat pad are the same as those for a pleated pad.
Flat pa ds can be slotted t o form par titions, or th ey may be die cut or pun ched
to fit items or irregular sh ape. Figure 1-11 shows the assem bling of slotted
fiberboard par titions.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 27/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-15
Table 1-2. Allowable loads for folded corn er a nd flat p ads of corru gat ed fiberboar d
Flu te design Maximum a llowable load for bear ing
areas
Pounds per squa re inch
A-flut e (36"3 corru gat ions per foot)
B-flut e (50"3 corr uga tions per foot)
C-flut e (42"3 corr uga tions per foot)
2.0
3.0
2.5
Note. The flat crush resistance of the corrugations shall determine the load that may be carried
in flat loading of corr ugat ed fiberboar d. This shall not be constru ed to meet the bur sting
strength of the mat erial.
Figur e 1-11. Assembling of slotted fiberboard pa rt itions.
C O R N E R P AD S
The use of corner pa ds m ade of multiple layers of corru gated fiberboar d sh all
comply with t he load requirem ents of table 1-2. The pads sh all provide
required clearances and support for rectangular shaped items or for an inner
box in wh ich items ar e packed.
TUBES
Fiberboard tubes should be used as blocking when items mounted on an
auxiliary base ar e packed on fiberboard boxes. The bottom of the tu be shall
contact th e top of the au xiliary base an d th e top of the tu be sha ll contact th e
top inside surface of th e conta iner. The flutes sh all be oriented in th e top-to-
bottom direction of the t ube. The weight of th e item plus au xiliary base, in
pounds, divided by the perimeter of the tube, in inches, sha ll not exceed th e
appr opriate values given in table 1-2 for column heights over 4 inches.
C ORRUGATED F IBERBOARD L I N E R S
A liner is a continuous pad, bent to fully contact two or more inner faces of a
container . Liners ar e used to reinforce a conta iner a gainst crush ing by forces
imposed during stacking, or to take the place of two or more flat pads. A liner
may also be used as a holddown for base mounted items weighing not more
tha n 20 pounds. The creases in a liner should be made par allel to th e
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 28/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-16
direction of the corru gations of th e fiberboard, in order t ha t t he r esistance to
forces ordinarily encounter ed in sta cking be th e greatest .
C O R N E R P OSTS
Fiberboard corner posts should be used to reinforce the shipping container
an d provide blocking for plat form -mount ed equipmen t. The flutes shou ld be
oriented in th e top-to-bott om direction. The bottom end of th e corner postshall bear u niformly on the plat form, a nd t he t op end of the corner post sha ll
bear on the inner flap of the conta iner or top member of a crate. Corn er
posts, when installed, must so interlock with the contents and other inner
padding pieces in order not to become displaced du ring tr an sportation.
WOOD OR P LYWOOD
Wood or plywood may be used alone or in combination for blocking and
bra cing. Wood or plywood blocking an d bra cing mem bers should bear
against only those parts of th e packed item capable of withsta nding the
applied dyna mic forces or should bear a gainst blocking pads or pressur e
str ips tha t adequ at ely distr ibute th ese forces. Wood or plywood blocking an d
bracing should be designed to permit easy removal without damage to the
item. Both wood and plywood are u sed for blocking an d bracing becau se of
their h igh stren gth-weight r atio, genera l availability, and ea se of cut ting an d
fasten ing. Lumber ha s certa in weaknesses, such as low splitting resistan ce
parallel with the grain, and a tendency to shrink or swell with change in
moistur e content.
Plywood has h igh resistan ce to splitting an d h igh dimensional st ability with
cha nges in moistu re content . Because they are more resistan t to splitting
than solid wood, plywood panels are more often used in thinner dimensions
than lumber, and are readily nailed or fastened with screws near the edges.
Plywood is more apt to have a lower moisture content tha n lum ber because of
the manner in which it is manufactured and stored. Plywood, being
constructed of alternate plies at right angles to each other possesses moreuniformly distributed strength properties than lumber. When considering
lumber a nd plywood of compara ble sizes and quality, it is generally tru e th at
the strength properties of lumber parallel to the grain are greater than the
respective strength properties of plywood parallel to the grain of the face ply.
It is also true that the strength properties of lumber perpendicular to the
grain are generally less than the respective strength properties of plywood
perpendicular t o the gra in of th e face ply.
WOOD
Wood members of each size an d type u sed in t he blocking an d bra cing sh ould
be tested for moisture conten t. Stru ctura l members (those subject to critical
bendin g stresses) sha ll conform to class 1. All other blocking an d bracing
mem bers sh all conform to class 3. When ever possible, wood blocks or br acesshall be placed so that the load is applied against the end grain of the
member. En ds of braces shall be socketed or fitted an d secur ed into
appr opriate notches in load-bearing members.
P LYWOOD
Plywood u sed for blocking an d br acing sh ould conform t o A-A-55057.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 29/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-17
WOOD B LOCKING AND BRACING
The species of woods differ greatly in strength and related properties and,
accordingly, have been separated into four groups. Certain species, such as
those of Group IV, excel in toughn ess and shock r esistance, but care m ust be
exercised in n ailing th em to avoid splitting. Other species, such as south ern
yellow pine and Douglas fir of Group II, are high in bending strength and
stiffness ; an d na iling is a lesser problem. The char acter istics of th e groups of wood may be used to advantage in various forms of blocking and bracing (fig.
1-12). Thin pieces of lumber split more easily than thick pieces; hence, thin
pieces for blocking should be avoided if possible. If the dim ensiona l limits of
the item require t ha t t he blocking be th in, it is preferable to use plywood.
MOISTURE C ONTENT
The moisture content of lumber employed as blocking and bracing material
should not exceed 19 percent nor be less than 12 percent of its oven dry
weight at t he time of fabrication. Shr inka ge is objectiona ble because it allows
movement of the item and the item may actually break loose. Moisture in
lumber is objectionable because it is apt to evaporate into the pack, thus
raising th e hu midity of the pa ck and causing corr osion of meta ls or d ecay of
organ ic mat erials.
CAUTION
Lumber, plywood, or other hygroscopic materials should never be placed in direct
contact with critical metal surfaces since such materials tend to absorb and
reta in moisture n ext to the sur faces, finally cau sing corrosion. Pr ovide always a
water-vaporproof barrier between any critical metal surfaces and hygroscopic
packing materials, and a waterproof or moisture-resistant barrier between all
meta l sur faces an d h ygroscopic mat erials.
DE F E C T S I N BLOCKS AND B RACES
Wooden members used for blocking a nd bracing ar e often subjected to greatstress a nd careful consideration must be given to any weaken ing defects. If
the member functions as a beam or column, defects such as divergence of
gra in, kn ots, splits and decay should be avoided. This is especially import an t
if the defect is located near the center of the piece, because of the great
reduction in shock resistan ce. If a piece with a kn ot is used, the load is
placed so that the k not is in compr ession a s shown in y, Figure 1-12. Lumber
having kn ots of a diamet er exceeding one-fourth th e width of the piece should
not be used (fig 1-12). The slope of gra in in each piece should n ot exceed 1
inch in 10 inches of length , or splitt ing is likely to occur . Decayed wood is
avoided un der a ll circumstan ces because ther e is not way of determining h ow
much th e decay may ha ve weaken ed the wood. For additional inform ation on
wood knots, see chapter 3 an d figure 3-3.
Si ze o f Wood Br aces o f Ho l ddown s
Braces or holddowns must be of sufficient size to withstand the shocks
encoun tered. The size of a brace varies with t he weight of the item, th e
length of th e brace, an d th e type of loadin g. Table 1-3 used with figure 1-13
gives the recommended allowable load in pounds for the various sizes of
braces an d the various types of loading. For example, assume tha t the
weight of the item is 60 poun ds, the length of the brace is 24 inches, and th e
type of loading is the third type illustrated in figure 1-13 (loading in the
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 30/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-18
Figur e 1-12. Applicat ion of wooden blocks an d bra ces.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 31/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-19
Table 1-3
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 32/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-20
Figur e 1-13. Types of loadin g (use with ta ble 1-3).
center 4/5 to 1/3 of the u nsu pported length of th e brace). For th is type of
loading, multiply the weight of the item by the factor 3/4, as shown in figure
1-13. Three-fourth s times 60 equa ls 45. In the column h eaded "Length of
brace in inches", of table 1-3, find 24 inches and read to the right until a
value near 45 is found. The heading for th is colum n shows that t he proper
size of member and direction of loading is a 1 x 2-inch member used on edge,
or a 1 x 4 inch member used flatwise.
P OSITIONING LOADS ON BLOCKS AND BRACES
When wood blocking and bracing is used to secure heavy items, place the
block so that the load r ests on th e end grain of the piece, whenever possible.
If this cannot be done, the load should bear on the edge gra in. When so
placed, the ma ximum str engt h of th e brace is used (fig 1-14). Since wood is
relatively stable in dimension along the grain, there is little effect from
shrink age or swelling with a cha nge in moistu re cont ent. The brace should, if
possible, have its na rrow face against the item so that its maximum stiffness
is utilized. If a larger bear ing area is required, an d it becomes necessary to
have the flat face of the brace against the item, the size of the brace against
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 33/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-21
th e item, must be increa sed (ta ble 1-3). Lum ber which is relat ively wide for
its thickness must be reinforced throughout its length to prevent twisting or
buckling.
USING LUMBER AS A MOUNTING BAS E
If an item is to be secured to a base, and plywood is not available, use
dimensiona l lumber. Bases of dimensiona l lumber sh ould be constru ctedwith sufficient cleats at right angles to the grain of the baseboards, and
fastened with clinched nails to prevent the boards from splitting at the bolt
holes. Stren gth of th e bases must be adequa te to withsta nd any rough
han dling the p ack ma y be likely to receive.
SECURING LUMBER B LOCKING
Securing lumber blocking properly is the most essential factor in blocking
an d bracing. Wooden braces positioned between two faces of a cont ain er
should never be secured with end grain nailing, toenailing, or similar
meth ods, nor should th ey ever be insert ed into notches cut into the container
faceboard s. Instea d, the braces should be secur ed by cleats fastened to the
faces of th e conta iner with a sufficient nu mber of clinched na ils. When
pressures are great or an increased nailing area is required, backup blocks
are used to reinforce the cleats and give increased n ailing area . When
pressur e is from more th an one direction, a pocket cleat ar ra ngement is used
to hold the braces in position z fig 1-12. The backu p blocks are positioned
with their end grain in contact with the brace in order to make use of the
high stren gth property of wood in compression par allel to the grain. The
cleats and backup cleats | fig 1-12 are secured with clinched nails properly
staggered at intervals along their length. Sometimes, however, bolts are
used to fasten these mem bers in place. This is especially desira ble when the
entire weight of the item thrusts against the block, or when the cleat
supports a framework at tached t o one or more faces of the cont ainer.
Figur e 1-14. Positioning load accordin g to grain of wood
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 34/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-22
Fi gu r e 1-15. P r o t ec t i on fo r ba r r i e r an d it em s u r face s .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 35/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-23
P LYWOOD BLOCKING AND B RACING
Plywood is used to distribute the load when the face of an item is flat but
structurally weak and the weakness prevents that face from being used as a
bear ing area . By covering the face of th e item with a sh eet of plywood, so
tha t t he plywood bears on str onger portions of the face, the load of the item is
distributed uniformly against the container and injury to the weak face is
prevented. The edges of the p lywood sh eet a re pa dded with felt, if necessary,to prevent the plywood from marring the surface of the item (fig 1-15).
Plywood can be used for making pressure strips to distribute the load of an
item on th e gaskets when a floating water-vaporpr oof barr ier is used. This
meth od, which minimized th e possibility of barrier da mage du ring sh ipment,
is illust ra ted in figure 1-15. When it is not pra ctical to block an ir regu lar
item to transfer the load evenly to all faces of the container, it is wise to
secur e the item to a solid base which ma y in tu rn be blocked to evenly
distr ibute th e load. If th e conta iner is of fiberboar d, plywood serves as a good
pallet to which the item ma y be bolted or stra pped. The plywood, in tur n, is
securely blocked int o th e conta iner by a holddown or top pad . Thin plywood
is used to advantage where the blocking must be flexible to conform to a
cur ved su rface.
Plywood is used where th in mat erial is required as a br ace in ten sion. When
an item is to be bolted to a base or auxiliary base, plywood is used for the
base because of its resist an ce to splitting (fig 1-16). Since plywood is
obtaina ble in wide pa nels, it is especially useful in base constr uction. For
light item s, 1/2-or 3/4-inch plywood should be used. For mediu m an d hea vy
items, two or more pieces of plywood can be fastened together, or a series of
stren gthening cleats can be added to th e panel. The cleats also may be of
plywood to redu ce the possibility of splitt ing.
C OMBINED P LYWOOD AND L UMBER BLOCKING AND B RACING
Plywood and lumber, combined into a blocking and bracing assembly, unite
the advantages of a strong, lightweight sheet material with a material that is
easily cut an d na iled. Plywood is used a s a sh eet with wooden blocks nailed
to the sheet. The nu mber, dimensions, and p lacement of the wooden blocks
depend u pon th e sha pe of the item, its depth , the position of an y projections,
and th e loads to be supported at th e various bearing area s. The required
thickness of the plywood depends upon the span between the blocks and the
load to be distr ibuted . The sheet of plywood mu st be stiff enough t o resist
bending so as to evenly distribute th e weight of the item . Position the blocks
upon the plywood sheet at places where the item can withstand concentrated
loads. Wherever possible, locate the blocks and braces against the stronger
portions of the item. Choose nails that are long enough to permit clinching
after being driven thr ough the wooden blocks and th e plywood sheets. If
clinching is impr actical, drive the na ils th rough t he t hinn er piece first. Cover
all surfaces of wood blocks contacting the item with felt and glue in place.Where the felt-covered blocks normally contact critical surfaces of the item,
use greaseproof or water-vaporproof barrier material between the felt and
the item. Eliminate time consu ming constru ction of a framework at th e time
of packing by us ing prefabr icat ed blocking.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 36/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-24
Figur e 1-16. Uses of plywood for blocking an d br acing.
NAILS AND NAILING
Nails shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1667-95. All nails that
are not clinched shall be cement coated, etched or mechanically deformed
(helically or annu larly thread ed). Unclinched nails shall be as long as
practicable without splitting the material, but not shorter than three times
the thickness of the member holding the nailhead for tenpenny nails and
smaller, or not shorter than the thickness of the same member plus 1 1/2
inches for twelvepenny nails and larger. Nails loaded tr an sversely to their
length (later al) in blocking and bra cing joints need not be clinched. En d
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 37/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-25
grain nailing in solid wood or edge nailing in plywood shall not be permitted.
Nails shall be driven through the thinner member into the thicker member
wherever possible. Nails shall not be subject to withdra wal stresses. Nails
shall be driven not closer to th e end of a piece of lumber t ha n t he t hickness of
the piece and not closer to its side than one-ha lf its thickness. There sh all be
at least t wo na ils in each joint. Lat era l loading of na ils for blocking and
bra cing sha ll be in accorda nce with t able 1-4. En ds of blocks and bra ces sha llnot be fasten ed to a wood conta iner by end-grain na iling met hods. Blocking
and bracing shall be applied against areas of item(s) that are of sufficient
stren gth a nd r igidity to resist dama ge. A description of the various types of
nails and general requirements for their use are given in chapter 3.
Standard sinker and cooler nails are particularly well suited for use in
blocking and bracing and should be coated or chemically etched etched
especially if th e nails can not be clinched. If na ils fail when s ubjected to
forces of direct withdrawal, apply nails so that they are subjected to forces of
lateral displacement rather than direct withdrawal, that is, the direction of
the n ails is perpend icular to the direction of the load, rath er th an in line with
the direction of the load.
B OLTS AND BOLTING
Carriage or step bolts shall be used as fastenings for wood or plywood
blocking and bracing where necessary to facilitate disassembly for removal of
cont aine r conten ts. Bolts sha ll also be used for fast enin g blocking an d
bracing members th at ar e too thick for proper fastening with nails. Bolt
holes in wood or plywood sha ll be of th e same dia met er as t he bolts. Bolts
commonly used for blocking and bracing are machine bolts, carriage bolts,
and step bolts.
Step bolts are preferred for th is use because of th eir larger head diam eter. J -
or U-bolts are used for special conditions where regular bolts cannot be
app lied (fig 1-17). Tie rods and J -bolts ar e actua lly exten ded bolts, applied in
pairs either vertically (fig 1-18) or diagonally (fig 1-19), and are used where
stan dar d length bolts would not apply. See table 1-5 for the suggested
allowable load for th e various sizes of bolts. The following pr ecaut ions sh ould
be observed in th e use of bolts:
Items su ch as ma chines or su bassemblies having bolt h oles in part s which a re
stur dy enough to resist break age when rough h and ling should, if pra ctical, be
bolted t o one face of th e conta iner . If nonprecision bolt holes ar e involved,
the diameter of the bolt should be the nearest standard size consistent with
the diam eter of the h ole.
Table 1-4. Allowable later al loads for unclinched cemen t-coat ed or etched comm on wire nails
when used for blocking or bra cing.
Spe cies of wood Load, pounds per na il
4d 6d 8d 10d 12d 16d 20d 30d 40d
White pine, ponder osa pine, spruce and
other group I woods
14 17 21 25 26 29 38 42 48
Souther n yellow pine, Douglas fir,
western larch, an d other group II woods
21 26 32 39 40 45 58 65 73
Oak, ma ple, birch, beech, ash , and oth er
group III an d IV woods
26 32 40 48 49 55 71 80 90
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 38/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-26
Figur e 1-17 Bolts for blocking and bra cing.
Figur e 1-18. Vertical use of tie rods.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 39/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-27
Figur e 1-19. Diagonal use of tie rods.
Table 1-5. Suggest ed allowable lat era l loads for bolts-impa ct loading
Diameter of bolt (inch ) Allowable load
(pounds)
3/8............................... 35
1/2............................... 90
5/8............................... 150
3/4............................... 200
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 40/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-28
If precision bolt holes are involved, precautions should be taken to insure
that precision fitting bolts of the proper fit and characteristics are used to
prevent m ar ring or elongation.
Lag bolts should not be used for blocking and bracing.
Holes bored through containers or mounting bases must be the same size asthe diam eter of the bolts to be used. When mount ing items to cont ainer bases
equipped with skids, extend the bolts through the skids, whenever practical,
and in such insta nces counter sink th e bolt in th e outer sur face of the ru bbing
strip. Use standard cut washers under the nuts to decrease the possibility of
the bolt pulling through th e wood. Make sur e tha t th e nut s do not come loose
intransit by turning the nut securely on the bolt, and either upsetting or
nicking the t hrea ds of th e bolt beyond th e nu t; applying asph altum , paint, or
lacquer on t he t hr eads; using lock nut s; or u sing cotter pins with the nu ts; or
lock washer s. Metal plates or flat washer s are used between lock washers
and wood to pr event direct conta ct.
Bolts and nuts that are not corrosion-resistant must be completely covered
with corr osion preventa tive compounds. The compoun d must be thoroughlyset before th e bolts a re u sed.
Where the item has strong frame members fairly close to the face of the
conta iner, consider u sing U- or J -bolts. Whenever feasible, the n ut end of the
U- or J-bolt should be on th e out side of th e conta iner . In su ch cases, it is
especially important to upset the threads or otherwise prevent the nuts from
loosening.
Use tie rods as extended bolts to secure items when J- or U-bolts are
un suitable. Place tie rods in pairs, either diagonally or vert ically as may be
necessary. Attach the tie rods to a reinforced point of the cont ainer a nd u se
them with washer s bearing against the wood. Be sur e the tie rods pass
through the base at an angle which will not cause bending or kinking of the
rod. Any kinking will weaken t he r ods and increase t he possibility of failure.
ANCHORING
Anchoring of heavy items should be accomplished by securing the item to a
base by tension devices, either by bolts through mounting bolt holes on the
item (bolting down); or by metal strapping, cables, tie rods, chains, wire, or
other tension devices attached to, or applied over, the item (tiedown or
holddown); or by both. The sam e washe r requ irem ent a s specified for bolts of
equal diameter should apply to tie rods.
ANCHOR BOLTS
Carr iage or step bolts should be used. Articles having moun ting holes in
areas that can withstand rough handling without breakage shall be bolted toeither th e base of th e container or an a uxiliar y base. The bolt heads of
anchor bolts (those holding the item to the container base or the auxiliary
base) should be on t he outside of the cont ainer, other wise on t he u nder side of
the au xiliary base. The heads of all an chor bolts sha ll bear against a wide
washer conforming to FF-W-92, type A or B, grade I, class A, medium size,
except that the minimum diameter or minimum size of square bolts shall be
as specified in table 1-6 when th e member adjacent to th e bolt hea d is wood.
Bolts th rough m ounting bolt holes sha ll form a snu g fit, except t ha t p recision
holes shall be bushed to prevent dam age by an chor bolts. In a crate wher e
the item is bolted to a skid-type base, the an chor bolts shall pass th rough th e
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 41/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-29
skids or th rough loadbear ing members that a re bolted to th e skids. Bolt
holes in wood should be of th e same diameter as th e bolts. The ma ximum
allowable load for anchor bolts required and the minimum size of wood-
bearing washer s should be as specified in t able 1-6. When t he weight of th e
item exceeds that shown which can be anchored adequately using allowable
loads in table 1-6 and a ll of the a vailable mount ing bolt holes on t he item, the
excess weight shall be taken care of by tiedown provisions specified herein.After the nuts have been tightened, the exposed bolt thread should be
painted with aspha lt unless locknuts or cotter pins are used. The required
size and quantity of bolts used as tie rods or for anchoring the ends of the
tiedown ten sion member s should be in accordan ce with ta ble 1-6. Lag bolts
should not be used in lieu of carriage or step bolts.
METAL BRACKETS OR F RAMES
Many items have attachment points which provide facilities for bolting, but
often these points are not located on the base, so that brackets must be used
to fasten th e item to the container. In th ose situat ions wher e tie rods or U- or
J-bolts cannot be used, specially constructed brackets, sleeves, or frames
made entirely of metal, wood, or a combination of these, are used to act as
interm ediate connections between the item and the conta iner. These fram esor brackets mu st be designed with sufficient str ength an d fastening facilities
to hold the item to the conta iner securely. Select sleeves tha t will fit th e
interior of the container sn ugly and will ha ve sufficient str uctur al stren gth t o
sup port th e load (fig 1-20).
Table 1-6. Maximu m allowable loads and min imum sizes of wood-bearin g was her s for anchor or
tiedown bolts.
Diameter of
bolt
Wood-bearing washers Maximum allowable load per bolt
Minimum
diameter of
round
Minimum size
of squa re
Items weighing
200 pounds and
less
Items weighing
200 to 3,000
pounds
Items weighing
over 3,000
pounds
Inch Inch Inch Pounds Pounds Pounds
1/4 1.35 1.00 10 --------------- ---------------
5/16 1.75 1.25 30 --------------- ---------------
3/8 2.10 1.50 50 75 ---------------
2 2.85 2.10 100 150 300
5/8 3.60 2.65 150 225 450
3/4 4.70 3.25 --------------- 375 750
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 42/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-30
Figure 1-20. Use of meta l brackets, fra mes, and sleeves.
METAL ST R A P P I N G
Metal strapping used to tie down an item to the base or other face of the
container or to an auxiliary base should be flat steel strapping material
conforming to ASTM D 3953 and ASTM D 4675. Tiedown stra pping sh all be
securely att ached t o fig 1-20 or looped over th e item. It sh all be an chored to
the container or auxiliary base either by looping around a load bearing
member or by utilizing steel slotted anchor plates for flat strapping secured
to the conta iner or auxiliary base. Pad ding material or suitable edge
protectors, as applicable, sha ll be used under th e stra ps to prevent da mage to
the item. Whenever possible, all stran ds holding down an item sha ll be of
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 43/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-31
appr oximately the same length . Maximum allowable loads for each st ran d of
tiedown str apping sha ll be in accordance with ASTM D 4675. Ea ch t iedown
stra p passed over an item should be considered as one stra nd. All tiedown
stra pping sha ll be tensioned an d sealed or tied secur ely.
ST R A P P I N G P RECAUTIONS
Metal strapping may be the only convenient way in which an item orcont ain er can be secured or reinforced (fig 1-21). Meta l stra pping ma y be flat
steel mat erial. Stra pping is tensioned an d prefera bly sealed with specially
designed tools. If th is is not possible, flat st ra pping can be held in pla ce with
anchor plates. Genera l precautions on the use of meta l stra pping which
app lies to flat s teel a re a s follows-
Where possible, the item an d its supp ort mu st be completely encircled. When
it is impossible to do this, anchor the two ends of the metal strapping as
follows:
• For flat strapping, anchor the two ends of the strap to the container
base with anchor plates, or if the strap is designed for nailing, nail
the ends of th e strap to the container base. Place the n ails so th at th estra ps exert a pull at right angles to th e nail axis. For round wire,
anchor the two ends of the round wire to the container with
drivescrews and staples. Loop the wire around the sha nk of the
drivescrew and furth er anchor the wire by mean s of staples. Be sure
the wood is thick enough to hold the entire length of the drivescrew
an d tha t th e drivescrew is of adequa te gauge to car ry the load. When
drivescrews are used, place them so that the wire exerts a pull right
an gles to th e drivescrews axis. Apply tension to the stra p with a
tension tool an d seal the str ap in the cust omary mann er. Use a one-
piece stra p wherever possible. Stra ps should be placed only on those
strong portions of the item which can withstand the impact load and
weight of the item. Where strapping passes over a sharp edge of the
item, use corner protectors, if necessary, to prevent the strapping
from becoming fractured.
• Protective materials should be used between the item and the strap if
the str ap is likely to scratch or otherwise injure the item. Arran ge
strapping on the container, where possible, to further reinforce
blocking and bracing or anchoring of the item within the container.
Use an nealed str apping only for lighter items, since it str etches more
readily than the more highly tempered tension strapping.
M INIMUM LENGTHS OF STRAPS
The minimum total length of straps shown in table 1-7 does not include that
portion of material used to make a secure fastening at the ends of each
stra nd but is the sum of, an d does include, all lengths of ma terial betweensuch fasten ings. Overall lengths of each stran d shall be adequa te to permit
fasten ing as sp ecified above.
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOADS
The maximum allowable loads are based on available energy of 8,640 inch-
pounds per cubic inch of strap in tension and an assumed drop height of 30
inches, as established by ASTM D 3953. If grea ter loads ar e to be tied down
or if other sizes of strap a re u sed, additional st rap ping shall be applied on t he
basis of 300 poun ds of load per cubic inch of str ap in ten sion.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 44/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-32
Figure 1-21. Use of meta l strapping for bra cing and a nchoring.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 45/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-33
Table 1-7. Tape strips used in han dling rigid mat erials1
Type III tape band width in inches (minimum )
Gross weight of bundle Number of encirclements (Example: Thr ee encirclements could refer to ei ther three
separa tely located single wrapped ba nds or t o one ba nd which completely overlaps itself three
times)
Pounds
Up to 20 incl...............
Over 20 to 40 incl..........
Over 40 to 60 incl..........
Over 60 to 80 incl..........
Over 80 to 100
incl.........
Over 100 to 150
incl.......
Over 150 to 200
incl.......
Over 200 to 300
incl.......
Over 300 to 400
incl.......
Over 400 to 500
incl.......
1
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
........
......
.......
.......
.......
.......
2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
........
........
........
........
........
3
1/2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
........
........
........
........
4
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
........
........
........
5
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
........
........
6
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
........
7
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
........
8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/2
9
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
10
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1 If mater ial to be bonded is somewha t flexible, tape width s ma y be redu ced by 25 to 50 percent.
In n o case sh ould less th an 1/2 inch tape be u sed.
STRAP P ING REINFORCEMENT FOR CONTAINERS.
ST R A P P I N G R E I N F O R C E M E N T F O R C ONTAINERS
In additions to the use of metal strapping as reinforcement for blocking or
bracing, its widest use is for reinforcement of exterior wooden containers.
Only tempered high tensile strength, flat steel strapping should be used as
wood container reinforcement, except in limited instances such as reinforcing
of a crate corner where annealed nail-on-type flat steel strapping is
employed. For export shipments, bare meta l stra pping should not be used
due to its lack of corr osion resista nce. Ea ch militar y an d commer cial
container specification has a section or an appendix devoted to closure and
stra pping. It is import ant tha t the instr uction contained in these
publications be observed.
WE B ST R A P P I N G
The use of web strapping to tie down an item to a base, to other faces of the
cont ain ers, or to built up fram e, is NOT considered a good pra ctice. Web
strapping has a tendency to shrink or stretch with change in moisture
cont ent , th ereby losing its ability to hold the item firm ly in place. It is
hygroscopic, and may cause corrosion to contacting metal surfaces, and it isoften difficult to an chor pr operly.
R E I N F O R C E D TAP E S F O R P ACKING
Various kinds of tapes have been developed with longitudinal filament
reinforcing stra nds to provide high tensile stren gth. When such tapes are
properly applied to containers or bundled items, significant increases in
resistan ce to rough han dling are att ained. These tapes consist of either a
paper or plastic backing, which ha s been coated on one side with an insoluble
pressure-sensitive adhesive, or a gummed adhesive that is activated by a
solvent . The high tensile strength of th e tape is produced by filamen ts of
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 46/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-34
nylon, rayon, glass, or otherfibers that have been lineally aligned and
embedded in the backing mat erial. When th e tape is applied to the cont ainer
so that the direction of the rough handling stresses are parallel to the
embedded filaments of the tape, considerable container strengthening
results. Longitudina l tensile strength of these ta pes may be over 500 pounds
per inch of width. Some of th e advant ages claimed for their use are th at
sufficient tensile strength and elastic properties are present to enable apackage or pack to be highly resistant to shock loads. The a dhesive holds th e
tape to the area of application and thus prevents slippage during handling.
These tapes do not easily snag and do not interfere with stacking and
han dling of conta iners. No special equipment is needed for t heir a pplication.
They provide a means of reducing pilferage.
R E I N F O R C E D P A P E R , GUMMED TAPE A-A-1492, A-A-1671
There ar e thr ee types and two classes available. Type I (reinforced, asphaltic
laminat ed) and Type II (reinforced, nona spha ltic laminat ed) are int ended for
use in so called single strip closure un der th e Un iform F reight Classification
Rule 41, section 7. Types I an d II ar e used for closure of fiberboar d boxes for
domestic shipment an d storage and for securing wrap pers of packages. Type
II sha ll be used wh ere th e presence of asph alt would ha ve a deleterious effecton the cont ents, such as food products. Type III is inten ded for u se in general
sealing of cart ons, fiberboar d boxes, and wr appers an d for ban ding paper an d
paper pr oducts. Class 1 (strippable) is used when ease of opening and
removal of the tape is desired. Class 2 (non-strippable) is used when removal
of the tape from boxes is not necessary for reuse.
F ILAMENT R E I N F O R C E D, P R E S S U R E TAP E ASTM D 5330
These tapes ar e supplied in four types based on tensile strength . Type I (low
tensile strength) has a minimum tensile strength of 160 pounds per inch of
width. Type II (medium ten sile strength) has a minimum t ensile stren gth of
240 pounds per inch of width for Class A, and 300 pounds per inch of width
for Class B. Type III (high tensile strength ) ha s a minimu m ten sile strength
of 425 poun ds per inch of width. Type IV (high t ensile strength, weat her-
resistant) has a minimum tensile strength of 400 pounds per inch of width.
Only Type II has two classes, based on the t ra nspa rency of the tape. Class A
is opaque or nontransparent, and Class B is transparent enough to allow
reading of printed ma tter th rough one layer of th e tap e. These tapes are
intended for use in securing packages and reinforcing bundles and
containers.
R E I N F O R C E D TAP E APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Individual container specifications, and appropriate standards should be
checked for th e proper use of reinforced tapes. Some basic ru les that may be
helpful a re a s follows:
• Do not use a wide tape if a narrower tape is strong enough to
accomplish t he int ended pu rpose.
• If it is anticipated that high humidity conditions or excessive
moisture will be encountered in shipment or storage, use tapes with
water insoluble adh esives.
The adhesion of tapes to the surface of a container will depend upon the
condition of the su rface. Hence, in st rip applicat ions, th e strips should be
long enough to provide sufficient adhesion to take advantage of the full
potential strength of th e tape. This should require at least 6 or more inches
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 47/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-35
of good contact between the ta pe and t he cont ainer su rface. The ta pe length
should be equ ally divided over a s eam , scoreline, or oth er point of application.
In using reinforced paper gummed tape (A-A-1492, A-A-1671) for sealing
containers shipped under the jurisdiction of the Interstate Commerce
Commission, only th e cent er seam of a cont ain er needs to be sealed. This is
accomplished by using a strip at least 3 inches wide which must extend no
less than 2 1/2 inches over ea ch end of the cont ainer.
In using filament reinforced, pressure-sensitive tape ASTM D 5330, the
following inform at ion will serve as a guide in its u se. It sh ould be recognized
that special conditions will necessitate occasional deviations from these
recommen dat ions in the inter est of economy or good pra ctice. The filamen t
reinforced, pressure sensitive tapes are intended for use in reinforcing
fiberboard or fiberboard surfaced containers, strapping, bundling, and other
miscellan eous applications. Type I, char acter ized by high elongat ion an d low
tensile strength, is best suited for strip reinforcement of containers and
anchoring moving parts. Type II with lower elongat ion but h igh tensile
stren gth, is also suited for closures. Type III, with higher ten sile strength
and low elongation, is most effectively used in complete wraparounds such as
bundling an d other forms of circumferential binding. Type IV should be usedwhere weather resistance is required and should be used in the same length
as the type it replaces. These tapes should be applied in cont inuous strips.
Typical application are shown in figure 1-22. Tape should be smooth ly an d
firmly adhered to surfaces which are relatively smooth and nominally free
from du st, dirt, grea se, and moistur e. Care sh ould be taken to avoid excessive
handling of tape adhesive surfaces, particularly at the ends of the strips.
Such excessive handling might contaminate the surface of the adhesive and
redu ce its a bility to bond firmly.
The high t ensile strength tap es are also used for bu ndling of rods, shafts, or
tubu lar objects for ea sier han dling. Table 1-7 shows the correct a mount s of
Type III ASTM D 5330 tape for u se in bundling. The ta pe should be applied
with sufficient hand tension to "snug" the bundle and secure maximum
contact between the ta pe and th e bundled items.
CUSHIONING
C USHIONING DE F I N E D
Cushioning is the protection given to items against physical and mechanical
dama ge by means of appropriate ma terials which absorb the en ergy of shocks
and vibrations through a gradual but increasing resistance to the movement
of the item. The energy from shocks and impa ct is absorbed when th e
cushioning material is compressed, which in turn increases the pressure
upon the entrapped air within the cushioning material, resulting in a
damping or minimizing of the force to the item.
C USHIONING VE R S U S BLOCKING AND B RACING
The distinction between cushioning and blocking and bracing is that
cushioning permits controlled movement of the item within the container,
while blocking an d bra cing usu ally are designed to prevent movement of the
item within the cont ainer.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 48/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-36
Figur e 1-22. Use of filam ent r einforced tape.
C USHIONIN G AND C ORROSION
Where applicable, cushioning should be used in one or more of the followingways to provide necessary physical protection. Cushioning mat erials shall be
separated from surfaces which might be corroded at points of contact by
either noncorrosive wra pping pa per conform ing to Specificat ion MIL-P-130 or
grea sepr oof barr ier ma ter ial conforming t o Specification MIL-B-121, grad e A.
If a noncorrosive cushioning material is used, the wrap is not required.
Cushioning materials containing asphalt shall not be permitted to come in
direct conta ct with highly finished, varn ished, or lacquered sur faces.
F LOTATION OR SU S P E N S I O N
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 49/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-37
Delicate or fragile items should be protected against shock and vibration by
flotation or suspension within the shipping container by suitable cushioning
mat erials. These mat erials may be in sheet form a pplied to give support at
top, bottom, sides, and ends of the item. For items in stu rdy cabinets, cases,
consoles, or packed in an inner box, the cushioning material may be in the
form of prefabricated corner pads. Materials shall be bound fiber conforming
to PPP-C-1120; fiberboard conforming to ASTM D 4727; cellulosic materialconforming to A-A-1898; expanded polystyrene conforming to PPP-C-850;
prefoamed polyurethane conforming to MIL-P-26514; foam-in-place materials
complying with MIL-F-83671; or such other materials as specified in the
procurement documents.
ABRASION P ROTECTION
Protection against abrasion should be provided for highly finished or easily
mar red surfaces by wrap ping or covering with cushioning mat erial.
Surfaces damaged by contact with cushioning material should be separated
by a covering of noncorrosive paper conforming to MIL-P-130 or MIL -
P-17667 or gr easep roof bar rier m at eria l conform ing to MIL-B-121, Grad e A.
C OATINGS AND BARRIERS
Protection should be provided for strippable compound coatings and for
greaseproof, waterproof, or water vaporproof barriers at points of contact
with blocking, bra cing or projecting member s of cont ain ers. Cush ionin g
materials should be applied to reduce the static pressure at points of contact
of 30 pounds or less per squar e inch.
MOISTURE R ESISTANCE
Unless otherwise specified in the product specification, cushioning material
conforming t o A-A-1898 should be of th e wat er r esista nt type.
DUSTING
Cushioning materials that are not dust producing should be used for packing
items that are adversely affected by dust, unless a dustproof barrier is used
to prevent dust from reaching the item.
F ACTORS INFLUENCE CUSHIONING SELECTION AND USE
Shock resulting from rough handling or dropping of a shipping container is
the usu al cau se of mechan ical damage to th e contents. The purpose of
package or item cushioning is to reduce the intensity of the shock reaching
the pa cked item to a level which th e item can with stan d. Fa ctors influen cing
cush ion design a re t he fragility an d weight of the item, th e load-bearing ar ea
of the cushion, the dynamic, force deformation characteristics of the
cush ioning m ater ial, and t he equivalent height of drop (usually 30 inches) for
which pr otection is desired. Among th ese, the fragility an d weight of the item
are fixed values for any par ticular item. The load-bearing ar ea of the cush ioncan be altered by suitable blocking or by packing the item in an inner
container, if desired.
C O N C E P T O F C USHIONING
Cushioning is the protection from physical a nd mechanical dam age afforded
an item by means of compressible and resilient materials, known as
cush ioning m ater ials, designed t o absorb t he en ergy of shocks a nd vibra tion
caused by exter na l forces. Deta ils on "Pa ckage Cushioning Design" ma y be
obtained in MIL-HDBK-304.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 50/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-38
F UNCTIONS OF CUSHIONING
In order to properly utilize the many cushioning materials available in the
military supply system, it is necessary to understand the functions of
cushioning. Among th ese fun ctions (fig 1-23) th e more import an t ar e--
• Controls movement and prevents damage caused by vibration.
Cushioning, when properly applied, controls the movement of theitem within the barrier or container and dampens vibration.
• Pr otect fragile or delicat e componen ts. When fragile or delicat e
components form a part of an otherwise rugged item, they may be
disassembled an d packaged separa tely. If disassembly is not
permitt ed an d t hey mu st be left in place, cush ioning is ap plied to give
them protection.
• Prevent ruptu re of barriers and containers. Many items have sharp
corn ers or projections wh ich could pu nctur e th e barr iers or conta iners
in which they are packaged, resulting in the entry of moisture or
water . Cushioning is applied to these projections or corn ers to insur e
tha t wat erproof or water-vaporpr oof barr iers are n ot rendered u seless
by such da mage.
• Distribute forces. Cushioning mater ials reduce the shock to an itemby distributing forces over a large area, thus lowering the stress
concentra tion a t a ny one point on the surface of the item.
• Prevent a brasion. Items with h ighly finished surfaces which ma y be
marred by blocking, strapping, contact with container surfaces, or
contact with other items in the container, must be protected against
abra sion by cushioning. Usua lly, lesser amoun ts and th ickness of
cushioning materials are employed to accomplish this cushioning
function.
• Absorb shocks. Perh aps the most frequent and importan t use of
cushioning is to absorb the energy resulting when an impact shock
strikes a cont ainer. This shock energy is absorbed as th e cush ioning
mat erial is compressed by the impact.
MULTIPURPOSE CUSHIONING
The foregoing functions of cushioning should not be considered separately
because cushioning is often used for more than one purpose in the same
package. Material selected to protect an item against shock may at t he same
time minimize movement, prevent a brasion, protect bar riers, and cover sha rp
projections. Man y cush ionin g mater ials also act as good insu lation to protect
items against dra stic temper at ure cha nges. Cushioning may be required to
absorb liquids and consequently must have liquid-absorbing qualities to
prevent liquid flow in case of breakage of the containers.
R E Q U I R E M E N TS F O R T H E USE OF C USHIONING MATERIALS
In addition to the requirements established in cushioning specifications inregard to material quality, construction, and performance, other important
requirements must be met when cushioning materials are used within
water proof or water-vaporpr oof barr iers. Sound packaging design pr actices
dictate placing only the minimal required amount of cushioning material
within water-vaporproof barriers, thereby minimizing the barrier area and
the desiccant r equirement s. in ad dition,
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 51/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-39
Figur e 1-23. Fu nctions of cushioning.
• Cushioning shall be as dr y as pr acticable.
• If the item is coated with a preservative, the preserved item must
first be wrapped in a barrier conforming to MIL-B-121, Grade A, QQ-
A-1876, or MIL-B-22191, Type I or II, before applying the cushioning
material .
C USHIONING SELECTION F ACTORS
There ar e several factors tha t mu st be considered in selecting th e appr opriate
cush ioning mater ial for a given application. The nat ur e and physical
limitations of the item, the favorable and unfavorable characteristics of the
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 52/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-40
cushioning material, the destination of the packages, and the means of
transportation must all be taken into consideration before an item can be
properly cushioned.
NATURE OF THE I TE M
In planning to cushion an item, the nature and physical limitations of the
item must first be considered. The shock resistan ce, size, weight, sha pe,surface finish, and the degree of disassembly permitted will influence the
way a n it em is to be cush ioned (fig 1-24).
SHOCK R ESISTANCE OR F RAGILITY
Fra gility may be observed, but cann ot be measu red accura tely by eye. The
tendency is to overcushion seemingly fragile items and to undercushion
seemingly stur dy items. Fra gility-the grea test am ount of dynam ic force an
item can withstand without destruction--can be measured with scientific
instru ment s. The term "G-factor" has been a ccepted as indicating the shock
resistan ce of an item. This resistance is determined by measu ring the peak
acceleration (deceleration) an item will withsta nd dur ing impact a nd dividing
this acceleration value by the acceleration due to gravity (32.16ft/sec/sec).
This is expressed as--
G-factor = Acceleration of the Item
Accelerat ion due t o Gravity
The G-factor values of man y milita ry items are being determ ined. In th e
absence of known G-factor values, the selection of cushioning must be based
on experience with previous shipments and testing of similar items, or by
assum ing a G-factor for d rop test pur poses.
Figure 1-24. Item char acteristics determin es the selection
of cush ioning mat erials.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 53/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-41
S IZE
A large item m ay require a thin ner layer of cushioning th an a sm aller item of
the same weight because there is less load per square inch applied to the
cushioning. This should be kept in mind when an item is irregular in shape-
more cushioning may be required at th e small end than at the large end.
WE I G H TWeight in motion resu lts in force, and force can cau se dama ge. Thus, th e
weight of an item controls the thickness, quantity, and firmness of the
cush ioning mat erial to be used. Genera lly, the hea vier th e item, the firm er
the cushioning must be.
SHAPE
A regular-shaped item will ordinarily fit snugly into a container with a
minimum of cushioning, while an irregular-shaped one may require a
complicated arrangement of pads and cells or foamed-in-place cushioning to
bring it to a more regular sha pe. Light , small items which are irregular in
shape can be made regular an d at the sam e time positioned an d held in th e
container mer ely by a wra p of cush ioning mat erial. Large, irregular item s
may make it impractical to use cushioning materials to make them regular.Blocking and bracing will have to be employed to adequately protect such
items.
SURFACE F INISH
An otherwise sturdy item may have highly finished surfaces which could be
damaged by the rubbing action of harsh abrasive cushioning material, or the
surfaces may be corr oded an d pitted by chemical action due t o the pr esence of
moistur e an d acidic or basic element s in th e cushioning ma terial.
C HARACTERISTICS OF CUSHIONING MATERIALS
The chemical and physical properties of cushioning materials are many and
may display both desirable and undesirable characteristics. These
cha ra cteristics vary in importan ce for different applications. What might be a
highly desirable characteristic in one application, may be detrimental in
an oth er. For instan ce, high moisture absorbency is required for packaging
liquids, but is not desira ble when packaging corrodible met al items.
Compression set (fig 1-25) is the difference between the original thickness of
a cushioning material and the thickness of the same material after having
been released from compression under a standard load for a given period of
time. This is importa nt in determ ining whether a cushioned item can rem ain
in storage for an extended period of time without causing the cushioning to
lose its resiliency. Perm anen t compression set is undesirable when it creates
free-moving space in the container.
Resilience (fig 1-25) is the ability of a material to absorb a series of shocks
and retu rn to its original sha pe an d thickness after each shock. Few
materials are completely resilient and this quality is often greatly altered by
cha nges in tempera tu re. Rubber, for instan ce, is highly resilient in
temperate zones, but loses its resilience under extreme climatic conditions.
Rate of recovery (fig 1-25), or the time it takes for a cushioning material to
return to its original shape after compression, is also important as some
mat erials ha ve too rapid a rat e of recovery and "spring back" so quickly tha t
damage to the item may r esult .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 54/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-42
Figur e 1-25. Cha ra cteristics of cushioning compress ion set,
resilience, and rate of recovery.
Dusting, which results from the breakdown and disintegration of certain
mat erials used for cushioning, allows sma ll part icles to become detached an d
work into crevices and critical working surfaces of the cushioned item (fig
1-26).
The corrosive effect of some cushioning materials is undesirable when
packaging items with critical surfaces. When th is cann ot be avoided, the
item must be shielded from such materials by a neutral wrap or liner.
Cushioning mat erials with a high a cidic or basic content mu st n ot be enclosed
with in water proof or wat er-vaporpr oof bar rier s (fig 1-26). When cushionin g
material contains natural hair, it shall be treated with insecticide to prevent
carp et beetle infestation.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 55/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-43
Fu ngus resistan ce of some m ater ials is low an d a llows for the growth of mold,
mildew, and other fungi. Many mat erials can be treat ed to inhibit such
growth. However., such tr eated ma terials are often very corrosive to metal
surfaces and must be isolated from them (fig 1-26).
The abrasive characteristics of some materials are factors which must be
considered when protecting precision surfaces such as the lenses of opticalinstru ment s. Some cushioning mater ial ar e soft-textured an d genera lly can
be placed in contact with easily marred sur faces. Coarse textu red ma terials
should n ot be used on su ch sur faces (fig 1-27).
Figur e 1-26 Cha ra cteristics of cushioning dust iness, corrosiveness,
and fungus resistance.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 56/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-44
Low temperature performance of certain cushioning materials makes them
suitable for use in high altitude transport and in shipments to cold regions
because they remain relatively soft and resilient (fig 1-27).
Other characteristics which should not be neglected in choosing cushioning
materials are fire resistance or flammability (fig 1-27), and the possibility of
the mat erials cau sing skin irrita tion t o personn el who come in contact with it.
Des t i na t i on o f t h e I t em
The destinat ion of the item is a factor in cushioning. Many cushioning
materials change their characteristics under extreme climatic conditions.
Some mater ials become so rigid or brittle at extremely low temp erat ur es as t o
mak e them useless as cushioning mater ials. In tropical climat es, some
mat erials soften an d lose their cushioning qualities. In jungles or rainy
locations, some materials will pick up excessive moisture which will result in
the loss of resilience and will lead to growth of fungus and accelerated
corrosion.
M e a n s o f t r a n s p o r t a t i o n . The means of transportation must not be
overlooked. Haza rds a nd h and ling situa tions var y greatly between air, motor,rail, and ship. For example, there ma y be considerable difference between
the amount of handling that an item being transshipped from truck, to rail,
to ship would get and one th at is being shipped by air freight. Likewise, an
item to be delivered by air drop would require different protection from one
tha t would be delivered by tru ck.
R EPRESENTATIVE C USHIONING MATERIALS
Cus h i on i ng M a t e r i a l , Uncom p r es s ed Bou nd F i be r ( PP P -C-1120)
This material may consist of any suitable natural hair, vegetable fiber, or
synthet ic fiber bound with an elastic mat erial. Horsehair, sisal, an d cactus
fibers sprayed with lat ex are examples. It is fur nished in five types an d two
classes a nd th ree gra des. Type I is soft, Type II is medium soft, Type III is
mediu m firm, Type IV is firm, an d Type V is extra firm . When s pecified, each
type shall be identified with a color matching as closely as possible to colors
shown in Fed era l Stan dar d 595, as follows: Type I, brown; Type II yellow;
Type III, ora nge; Type IV, red; and Type V, black. Class A is wat er-resist an t
and Class B, a commer cial class, is not necessarily water -resistan t. Gra de 1 is
a flame r esistant mat erial; Grade 2 pr ovides low temperat ur e chara cteristics;
and Grade 3 is a standar d material . This material may be supplied as
un compr essed sheets an d rolls an d in molded shapes t o fit th e contour s of the
item. The ma ter ials have a high degree of resilience, low compress ion set,
fair damping quality, and do not disintegra te easily. They are neutr al and
have a low water-soluble acidity so that their corrosive effects are slight.
Moisture content and moisture absorption are both low; however, themat erials may need to be treat ed for fun gus resistan ce. Their perform an ce is
good at low temper atu re. They ar e intended to protect items against
vibrational and impact shocks where resilient and water-resistant cushions
are required.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 57/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-45
Figur e 1-27. Ch ar acter istics of cushioning abras iveness,
temperature performance and flammability.
Cel lu los ic Cu shion ing Mater ia l (A-A-1898)
This mat erial may be m ade of any kind of cellulosic matt er wh ich will result in a
product meeting specificat ion r equirement s. The cellulosic mat ter u sed may be
cotton, bonded fibers, na tur al fibers, or creped wadding. The mat erial isfur nished in two types--Type I, water a bsorbent , and Type II, water resistan t. It
is available in three classes-Class A, low tensile strength, Class B, high tensile
stren gth, and Class C, very high ten sile strength . Cellulosic cushioning mat erial
is readily moldable and fairly resilient. Its compression set is high, its damping
ability excellent, but dusting is great enough to require an excluding wrap
aroun d items susceptible to dust dama ge. Its performa nce in cold temperat ur e is
good. This m ater ial is intended for u se in packaging light weight , fragile items; as
a protection against abrasion; and Type I, specifically, for absorbing liquids from
containers broken in transit.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 58/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-46
So li d And Cor r u ga t ed F i be r boa r d ( ASTM D 4727)
Both solid and corrugated fiberboard are used in cushioning, but corrugated is
more frequen tly used becau se it has great er cushioning value. The most common
forms of fiberboard applications are die-cuts, open end cells trays, pleated pads,
an d flat pa ds (fig 1-28). Gener ally, cells and tr ays should be held in shap e with
tape. Those surfaces of the cell or tra y which a re perp endicular to the conta cting
surface of the item ar e called bracing supp orts an d ar e load bear ing members. Toutilize all of the str ength of these br acing su pports, th ey should bear directly on
the item. Pleated pads ha ve greater r esistance to break down than open end cells
because the load is spread over a large area rather than bracing supports.
Therefore, they should be used to cushion heavier loads (up to 2 poun ds per
square inch). Flat pads are used to block shallow projections, to level off
projecting screw heads, and to separ ate items within a conta iner. They can be
slotted to form pa rtitions, or may be die-cut or pu nched t o fit ar ticles or irregular
shape. Application of fiberboard cells, trays, and pads is illustrated in figure 1-29.
Uni ce l lu l a r P o l yp r opy l ene F oam (P P P- C-1797)
This material is a low density, resilient, unicellular (closed cell) polypropylene
foam material for use in cushioning and packing applications in the form of rolls
or flat sheets. Type I electrostat ic discha rge is required. It is useful thr oughout atemperature range from minus 65°F to 160°F. It is intended for use as a
cush ioning wrap for low density items. The foam can be lamina ted to a wide
range of products including paper, paperboard, and may be used for the
protection for optical lenses, equipment with critical surfaces, electrical and
electronic equipment , glasswar e, ceram ics, and m agnetic tape r olls. When stored
in closed containers it produces no trapped volatiles which could cause fire or
explosions. Polypropylene, by its nat ur e, is un affected by most exposur es to
grease water a nd most acids, bases an d solvents. It conta ins no plasticizers,
solvents, or lubricants.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 59/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-47
Figur e 1-28. Exa mples of fiberboar d tra ys, opened end cells, pad s,
an d die-cuts
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 60/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-48
Figur e 1-29. Applicat ion of fiberboard d ie-cuts, open en d cells,
trays, and pads.
E XPANDED P OLYSTYRENE (PPP-C-850)
This resilient cushioning material consists of expanded polymers or copolymers of
styrene for use in packaging applications. It is furn ished in two types. Type I is
in sheet form an d Type II is in roll form. Both types come in four classes a nd t wogra des. Class 1 is soft, class 2-medium , class 3-firm, class 4-extra firm . Grade SE
is self-extinguish ing. This cush ionin g ma ter ial is used with in packages to pr otect
items from damage due to shock, vibration, abrasion, and concentrated forces
dur ing handling and shipment . It is especially suited where a high degree of
energy absorption is required in a minimu m space and with a m inimum weight of
cushioning. It can also be used to provide tempera tu re insulation or when
cush ioning mat erial must per form at extrem ely low tempera tu re.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 61/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-49
C USHIONING, WR A P P I N G P APERBOARD (A-A-1051)
This is a pa perboard composed of a corr ugated sheet or a solid m olded pu lp sheet
firmly cement ed to a backing flat sh eet of un bleached su lfate fiber pa per. The
paperboard is furnished in two types--light and heavy-duty, and in two styles.
Style 1 mater ial must h ave a backing sheet. The backing sheet is optional for
Style 2. It is fur nish ed in sheets or rolls, as desired. Both styles are flexible in all
directions. This mater ial ha s high compress ion, low resilience, excellentdamp ing, and some dust ing. The moistur e content an d moisture absorption are
high. The moisture is not neutr al and hen ce has a h igh corrosion effect. Its
performa nce in cold weath er is poor, an d it is neither fungus n or flame r esistant .
Critical meta l items m ust first be wra pped in a chemically neutr al or greaseproof
barrier.
R IGID OR F LEXIBLE P OLYURETHANE F OAM (MIL-PR F -26514)
This material consists of both rigid and elastic types of foamed products obtained
th rough th e proper blending of complex synt het ic chemical compoun ds. By
proper combinations, reaction mixtures can be poured or pumped into various
sha ped cavities. Volatilization of th e blowing agen t cau ses ra pidly stiffenin g
resin to expand, completely filling th e space. The ma terial th en sets r apidly to a
lightweight, cellular str uctur e that ha s excellent cushioning properties. Themat erial is furnished in a form suitable for foaming in-place application or it may
be performed a nd su pplied in rolls, sheets, or m olded sha pes. Strong rigid foams,
tough elastic foams, soft flexible foams, and spongy water absorbent foams can be
obtained by the different choices of ingredients. Foams with densities as low as
.5 poun ds per cubic foot may be obta ined. These foam s can be adjust ed to give a
high or low compression set, excellent or poor damping, and high or low
resilience. In oth er words, the material can be tailor made to meet the
requiremen t of any type of cushioning required. There is no dusting problem;
moistur e content is negligible. The ma terial is flame an d fungus-resistant , and it
performs well in cold climates. For fur ther details regarding procedures an d
equipment used with polyurethane foam, see MIL-HDBK-775 and MIL-F-87075
respectively.
LATEX F OAM SP O N G E R UBBERS
These materials are made by incorporating into the rubber an inflating agent
such as baking soda, that gives off a gas which expands the mass during the
vulcan ization process. The rubber is made from slab rubber into sheets, strips,
molded or special shapes. These mat erials may be supplied in cored or u ncored
types; soft, medium, firm, and extra firm, classes; and in flame resistant and
nonflame-resistant gra des. The mater ials ha ve a very high resilience, low
compression set, fair damping properties, high moisture content, and high
moistur e absorption. They produce some dusting. If kept dry, th e corrosive
effects are slight. Their low temper atu re performan ce is poor. The mater ials
have a high density an d are expensive to use. The molded forms are often u sed
in conjunction with reusable containers and the initial cost is reduced by theamoun t of reuse obtained.
P LASTIC F ILM , H E AT SEALABLE , F LEXIBLE , C ELLULAR (PPP-C-795)
This material is constructed of a composite of two or more sheets of plastic film,
one face having uniformly distributed closed cells (bubbles), the other a flat
sur face. It is ava ilable in th ree classes : class 1-regular ; class 2-ant ista tic, tint ed;
and class 3-fire ret ard ant . All are u sed as cushioning for packaging applications.
Material is furnished with various cell sizes (air bubbles). It is intended for u se
within packages to protect items from damage due to shock, vibration,
concentr at ed forces, corrosion, contamin ation, and abra sion dur ing ha ndling an d
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 62/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-50
shipment and is especially suitable for use as inserts within transparent bags.
The use of class 1 material, due to its transparency, permits inspection of the
contents without opening th e pack. The flexibility of the ma terial perm its it to be
used as pads, bags, wraps, dunn age, or as a filler. Class 2 mat erial protects
sensit ive electr onic devices from electr ostat ic dischar ge dam age. When fire-
reta rda ncy is required, class 3 m ater ial is selected.
Note: Many of the ma terials made und er this specification are laminat es of
chlorinated plastic and polyethylene. Chlorinated organic ma terials give off
vapors of hydrogen chloride which can combine with water to form highly
corrosive hydrochloric acid.
UNICELLULAR P OLYETHYLENE F LEXIBLE F OAM (PPP-C-1752)
This specification covers six types and four classes of cushioning material. Type
refers to the den sity range of th e mater ial. For example, type VII has a density of
.9 to 2.0 pounds per cubic foot while type V has a density range of 6.0 to 10.0 per
cubic foot. The class genera lly describes the form the m at erial tak es and ma y be
solid or lamina ted planks, sheets, cut sh apes, rounds, or molded shapes. In
addition, type VII, class 4, mat erials are ant istatic. Temperat ure performa nce
has a useful range of minus 65o to plus 165oF. Compr ession set is low an d themat erials are n oncorrosive, nona brasive, and virtu ally dust free.
OP E N CE LL P LASTIC C USHIONING (PPP-C-1842)
This material is made of one sheet of plastic film or a composite of two or more
sheet s of film, formed int o a net work of un iformly distribu ted open cells. The
cells may be a hexagonal or fluted shape, depending upon whether a facing or
reinforcing top film lamina te is required. The hexagonal form is u sed when a
rein forcing top lamin at e is applied to the open face of th e cells. The fluted form is
used wh en a facing is ap plied to th e crowns of th e formed cells. The resu lting
mat erial is light weight , tra nspa rent , flexible, an d heat sealable. There ar e three
types; Type I, hexagonal; Type II, fluted; and Type III, hexagonal, electrostatic
free. The two styles describe whether or not the ma terial has a t op laminat e or
facing. All three t ypes are available with or without a top lamina te or facing and
are furn ished in rolls or sheets. The ma terial is noncorr osive, nonabra sive, has
low compression set, a nd per forms well at low temperat ur es. The cushioning is
intended for use within packages as inserts within transparent bags, wraps,
dun na ge, an d filler.
METHODS O F CUSHIONING
Cush ionin g is genera lly accomplished by one of th e following met hods:
• Floated item. The item is floated in cushion mater ial and placed within a
un it container (fig 1-30). This is perhaps t he met hod most commonly
used for cushioning small, lightweight, fragile items against shock,
vibra tion, and abr asion. Dryness and n oncorrosiveness of cushioningmaterials are most important since both the item and the cushioning
mat erial will be inclosed in the un it container. Greasepr oof barr iers are
required if the item is preserved. Cushioning mater ials must be secur ed
about th e item. Loose cushioning may resu lt in either t he displacement
of the material when the pack is subjected to shock, its disintegration
under repeated vibration, or the production of dust or loose particles
which will be ent rapp ed within th e pack. Since a cont ainer ma y be
dropped on any of its faces, edges, or corners, the cushioning material
must be designed to withstand the full impact of the entire weight of the
item in a ny direction.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 63/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-51
• Floated Pack. The item is packed in an interior container wh ich in tu rn
is floated in cush ionin g ma ter ials (fig 1-30). This met hod is gener ally
used in connection with semifragile items of medium size and weight.
The item is initially packed (which ma y includ e cushioning or blocking) in
an interior container, then floated in cushioning and placed into an
exterior container . In th is meth od, th e noncorr osiveness and moisture
content of the cushioning materials are not critical since the materialswill not come in conta ct with the item . The use of absorbent cush ioning
mat erials, when used in this m ethod, should be governed a s follows:
When both the interior and exterior containers are water-resistant, the
cushioning material may be simply placed between the two containers. When
either conta iner is nonwater-resistant , the cushioning ma terial mu st be placed in
the form of packs wrapped in a water resistant barrier material. An alternative
for the second case is to provide the interior container with a sealed water-
resistan t wrap and the exterior container with a sealed liner. The cush ioning
mat erial is then placed between th e two barr iers.
SHOCK MOUNTS
The item is cush ioned by mean s of shock mount s. This meth od is used t o cush ionfragile items and sensitive instruments or mechanisms that can be damaged by
shock an d vibrat ion. The weight a nd size of the item m ay vary from light an d
small to heavy and large. The shock moun ts ma y consist of elastomeric springs
or rubber blocks. This met hod of cushioning ma y be accomplished in four m ain
ways.
The item ma y be suspend ed directly by mean s of elastomeric springs. The item
may be blocked in a cradle and the cradle suspended by means of elastomeric
springs. The item may be boxed in an intermediate container and the
interm ediate cont ainer su spended by mean s of elastomeric springs. The item ma y
be boxed in an intermediate container and the intermediate suspended by means
of rubber sh ock m ounts.
P ACKING P ROBLEMSThe basic reason for packing any item is to provide enough pr otection against the
hazar ds it is likely to encounter du ring shipment. This minimizes the chances
that damage will occur during the interval between the time the pack leaves the
shipper an d when th e item is placed in use by the receiving activity. It is, of
course, an impossibility to evaluate all the hazards that might be encountered in
transit, as there are too many variables which can affect the condition in which
an item ma y be found upon ar rival at its destination. The guidelines to packing
present ed herein have indicated the principles an d practices th at ha ve been
found satisfactory in giving protection under average handling and storage
cond itions. If th e solut ion of a specific packing pr oblem is not locat ed in th is
section, the following procedures are recommended for shipment from depots:
DOMESTIC SH I P M E N T S
If an item is being sh ipped domestically, pack th e item in a m an ner which closely
duplicates t he pa ck in wh ich t he item was received.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 64/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-52
Fi gu r e 1-30. M e t hods o f cus h i on i ng .
OVERSEA SH I P M E N T S
If shipment overseas is involved, and no previous history of a container in which
the item had been shipped to a similar destination is available, construct a pack
embodying as ma ny as possible of th e principles outlined in th is section. This
pack should be prepared exactly as it would be shipped including complete
preservat ion an d inter ior packing. It is then t ested by subjecting it to the
applicable performan ce tests. The tests ar e based upon th e size as well as the
gross weight of the conta iner since both influence th e am ount of rough ha ndling
the cont ainer will receive. Small, light pa ckages are easier to move tha n th e
larger and heavier packs, and consequently, they can be expected to receive a
greater amoun t of ha ndling. Perform an ce tests are required for the primar y
purpose of determining the adequacy of all the operations entering into
prepar ation of a pa ck. At the conclusion of the tests, performa nce is based on t he
condition of the container, its contents, the blocking and bracing, cushioning,
preservat ion, and other pa cking mat erials. The pack should be examined for any
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 65/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-53
damage, noting in particular any obviously weak points which might need to be
strengthened. Usually the container, if constructed according to specifications,
will withsta nd th e rough ha ndling. If, however, the conta iner is damaged, a
study sh ould be made of th e causes. Deficiencies in th e blocking a nd br acing m ay
result in damage to the container, in which case these deficiencies should be
corrected. Other times th e natu re or shape of th e item may cause the container
to fail. Then , th e conta iner sh ould be reinforced. In an y event , when deficienciesbecome obvious, either in th e conta iners, th e conten ts, th e blocking a nd bracing,
cushioning, preservat ion, etc. the pack should be a ppropriately modified and the
test r epeated u nt il no damage occurs which affects t he u tility of th e pack.
P ACKING SMALL, LIGHTWEIGHT ITEMSAs previously pointed out, cushioning materials are frequently employed to block
lightweight items. In some insta nces, however, cush ioning mat erials such as
fiberboar d, are prim ar ily used for blocking. The effectiveness of fiberboar d as
blocking and bracing depends upon its strength and its resistance to moisture
when not protected by suitable moisture barriers. The domestic class of
fiberboar ds will rapidly absorb moistu re with a resulting loss of strength. The
weather-resistant class on the other hand, retains a greater proportion of its
stren gth in th e presence of moisture. Fiberboard is most frequently employed as
blocking in fiberboard containers because the items packed in them are usually
sma ll an d lightweigh t and do not requ ire hea vier types of blocking. Also, th e
container man ufacturer can provide an d fabricate pa ds, cells, tra ys, or pa rtitions
of the same mat erial a low cost.
Both solid and corrugated fiberboard are employed as blocking material, but the
corru gated is used more frequently becau se it has a greater cushioning value an d
because of its lower cost. Occasiona lly, a pa ck will conta in a compar at ively large
void which will necessitate blocking to prevent shifting of the item, In such cases,
a fiberboar d carton ma y be used for blocking th e item in place. The carton u sed
for blocking should be closed and sealed, and must be strong enough to provide
adequa te str ength in a ll directions.
P ACKING LARGE ITE MSLarge items require special attention to adequately secure them within the
container. Such items are anchored to the base of the container and blocked and
bra ced into a secur ed position on th e base. A clear an ce of a least 1 inch is
provided between the end, side, and top panels and the item is seldom blocked
and braced to these panels. Thus, the container mu st have a rigid base and th e
rest of it be mu st free to distort without placing stresses directly on the contents.
ANCHORING TO B ASE OF C ONTAINERS
Crat es for lar ge and hea vy items should have stu rdy bases to which th e items can
be adequately secur ed. Many ingenious met hods have been developed to hold
items to crat e bases. For sill and skid type crat es, it is essential that t he load becarr ied primar ily by the outside skids or sills. This means t hat loads th at cann ot
be secured to the side sills or bases mu st be pr ovided with load bea ring mem bers
that tran smit the load to them.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 66/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-54
Figur e 1-31. Wate rpr oofing of individua l packa ges.
B LOCKING AND BRACING A LARGE I TE M
After the item has been anchored to the base of the container to prevent its
movement in a vertical direction, it is blocked and braced to prevent its
movement in a h orizontal direction. An item should be anchored only to the base,
hence all bracing and blocking should be so secured.
CLEARANCE BE TWEE N ITEM AND CONTAINERWhen an item is blocked, braced, anchored, or tied down to the inside of one face
of a container or to an au xiliary base wh ich, in t ur n, is so secured, a clearan ce of
not less than 1 inch sh ould be provided between th e item an d all members of the
faces of th e conta iner . A minim um cleara nce of 2 inches sh ould be pr ovided
aroun d fragile part s of the item th at m ight be dama ged due to slight distortion of
the conta iner. A minimum 2 inch cleara nce should be provided between items
within floating bag barriers a nd a djacent m embers of th e container.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 67/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-55
WEATHER P ROOF ING THE P ACKAt this point in the sequence of packing operations, it is assumed that a careful
study has been made of the item to be packed; a suitable container has been
selected; blocking, bra cing, and cushioning h ave been designed; an d t he cont ents
are r eady to be placed into the container . The next step is to provide, when
necessary, a protective barrier in the form of a case liner, crate liner, shroud,
wrap, or tar pau lin fabricated from one of several materials. The barr iers areintended to prevent deterioration of the item, and the preservation and packing
materials used to protect it, by excluding the entry of water, by limiting the
entrance of water vapor, or by diverting water from the materials which are
subject to water da mage. In add ition, barr iers will afford protection from dust ,
dirt, and oth er foreign matt er. Barr iers designed to prevent th e entry of water
(waterproof barriers) will not be used when the interior packs have been
individually waterproofed as shown in figure 1-31, nor when the asphaltum in
the bar rier mat erial or sealant s may prove injurious to the inclosed items. The
water-vaporproof protection afforded by caseliners differs from that afforded by a
Method 50 package in th at wa ter a bsorbing desiccant is not used with caseliners.
WEATHER P ROOF ING (CASE LINE RS, WRAPS, AND SHR OUDS)
Except as provided herein, weatherproof liners, wraps, shrouds or other suitable
mean s sha ll be provided in shipping conta iners as necessary to shield the
contents from the effects of water, water vapor, dust, dirt, and other harmful
mat ter. When a completely inclosed barr ier is provided as in t he case of liners
and wraps, all seams should be completely and continuously sealed to offer
protection equal to the barr ier ma terial itself. Barr ier mat erials an d sealants
constructed with asphaltum shall not be used in the presence of mothproofing
chemicals such as par adichlorobenzene an d napht ha lene. Barr ier mat erials an d
sealants constructed of asphaltum shall not be used to protect items subject to
stain or other dam age cau sed by asphalt u nless such items are initially protected
to exclude asph alt.
TYPE S OF WE A T H E R P R O O F I N G B ARRIERS
The par ticular type of barr ier to be used depends on th e type of exterior container
or the inten ded use of the ba rr ier (table 1-8). In selecting th e type of barr ier to be
used , considera tion sh ould be given t o the following:
• Sealed case liners and sealed wraps are used to resist the passage of
wat er an d water -vapor. Fa brication of case liner s is covered below.
• Sealed case liners will not be used in the packing of material unless
specifically a ut horized.
• Crat e liners an d shr ouds are used to shed water from the t op an d sides of
th e item, allowing free circulat ion of air . Shr ouds are fabricated from
waterproof barrier material conforming to PPP-B-1055, Class E or
heavier. The seams are sealed with wa ter-resistant a dhesive conforming
to MMM-A-260. Shr ouds also may be made of ma ter ial conform ing to L-P-378.
It is important that shrouds be secured to prevent damage or loosening by
storms. They should be weight ed if necessary and a rr anged to avoid forma tion of
water pockets. Shrouds should never extend entirely to the base of a crate or to
the ground since the free circulation of air around the enclosed equipment is
thereby prevented.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 68/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-56
Table 1-8. Applicat ion of weat her proofing barr ier mat erials for packing
Use Barrier Ma teria ls
L-P-378 PPP-B-1055 MIL-B-121 MIL-B-131 MIL-B-
22191
Case Liner ....... Classes H-2, H-3(a),
H-4, H-5, L-2(b),and M-1 Wat erpr oof
Types I an d II,
Grade A, Class1 Water proof
Classes 1 and 2
Watervaporproof
Sealed Wraps
and Plastic
Bags
Type I
Water-
proof
Class es B-1, B-2, B-
3, C-1, C-2, C-2(a),
E-1, and E-2
Waterproof
.......... Classes 1, 2, and
3
Watervaporproof
Types II or
III
Waterproof
Crate Liner ......... Classes C-2(a), E-1,
E-2, E-2, H-5, L-
2(b), an d M-1
Watershed
Shroud Types I and
II
Watershed
Classes E -2, H-5,
and M-1 Watershed
Baling ......... Classes B-1, B-2, B-
3, and E-2Watershed
Temporary
Tarpaulin
Type I
Watershed
Class L-4 Wat er-
shed Class P-1
C AS E L I N E R S, OVERWRAPS , AN D P LASTIC B AG S
Flexible waterpr oof or water vaporproof case liner s, overwra p sh eets, an d plast ic
bag liners s hould be fabricat ed an d closed in accordan ce with MIL-L-10547.
They sha ll be fur nish ed in th e following types: Type I, high-top case liner (fig
1-32); Type II, double-top pa d liner (fig 1-33); Type III, overwr ap sheet , an d Type
IV, plast ic bag. Type II liner s may be used wh en a level, rigid sur face exists or
when t he depth of the case liner exceeds 36 inches. Type III overwrap sheets a re
barr iers used around int ermediat e boxes. Type IV plastic bag liners a re used in
the same m ann er as Type I and II case liners.
They are ava ilable also in six gra des as follows: Gra de A, wat erva porpr oof;
Grade B, waterproof, all temperatures; Grade C, waterproof, asphalt laminated
kraft; Grade D, waterproof and greaseproof; Grade E, waterproof, greaseproof,
transparent, all temperatures, and Grade F, waterproof, transparent, all
temperatures.
Table 1-9 shows the barrier material to use depending on the type and grade of
case liner, overwrap, or bag liner required and whether they are to be used for
subsistence or nonsubsistence items.
Case liners should be made large enough so that the weight of the load will be
born e entirely by the container, not by the liner. There should be no tension in
the wa lls or joints of th e liner after it h as been closed ar ound t he cont ents.
Experience has shown that under some conditions, especially when the contents
do not fill the case liner completely, waterproof case liners do more harm than
good by tra pping and holding water r ath er tha n preventing its ent ry. It is not
essential tha t th ere be openings in the sealed liner for th is to ha ppen. If the liner
material has low resistance to watervapor transfer (a common occurrence) water
can enter in th e form of vapor and conden se on items within th e liner. At the end
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 69/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-57
of an extended outdoor exposure period, sealed case liners h ave been opened and
found par tially filled with wa ter. When packed items need protection aga inst
water, it is preferable to incorporate the protection in the individual unit
packages in lieu of using case liners.
Linings for Dru ms, Kegs, Bar rels, and Bags. Linings should be provided for
drums, kegs, barrels, or bags when their contents require protection nototherwise provided by the containers against sifting, contamination, or free
wat er. The linin g ma ter ial should conform to PP P-B-1055 or MIL-B-22191.
Fabrication and closure seams should be heat sealed or sealed with adhesive
conforming to MMM-A-260, as applicable.
WATERPROOF AND WATERVAPORPROOF WR A P S
Waterproof and watervaporproof wraps shall be fabricated and sealed in
accordan ce with MIL-L-10547.
UNSEALED WA T E R P R O O F WR A P S
Unsealed waterproof wraps should be applied to shed water while permitting
breath ing and circulation of air.
Table 1-9. Barr ier mat erials for case liners, overwraps, an d plastic bag liners
Use Liners, overwraps,
an d bag liner
Specifica t ion Barr ier mater ia ls
Grade Types Classifica t ion
Subsistence item C
F
I, II, III
IV
PP-B-1055
L-P-378
Classes H-2 thru H-
5, M-1 Type I
Nonsubsistenceitem
A
C
D
E
I, III
I, II, III
I, II
IV
MIL-B-131
PPP-B-1055
MIL-B-121
MIL-B-22191
Classes 1, 2 and 3
Classes E -1, E-2, H-
1 thru H-5, L-2, M-1
Types I an d II,
grade A, class 1
Type II
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 70/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-58
Figur e 1-32. Usin g and closing of high top caseliner .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 71/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-59
Figur e 1-33. Double top pad closur e caseliner .
TESTING OF P ACKS
P U R P O S E O F TESTING
The purpose of testing is to prove the adequacy of packaging design and the
workm an ship of fabrication. Testing may be performed in th e research and
development phase or by tests at the operational level. Since containers in the
storage and shipment cycle are subjected to various and constantly changing
storage and shipping hazards, it is difficult to develop complete data for their
design by merely observing the containers in service. Examinations of failures
will reveal the weaknesses and suggest the specific principles of design to
overcome such failures. Since service test s are not perform ed und er cont rolled
conditions, labora tory tests are necessary to simulate field hazar ds. Ea ch test is
designed to reproduce one or more of the stresses encountered in the field.
During the test cycles the sequence of failures can be observed, classified, and the
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 72/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-60
weaknesses from which the failur es result determined. By means of such tests
any number of containers can, in turn, be subjected to exactly the same actions,
thus providing the data necessary to produce balanced construction and
workm an ship. On th e following pages ar e described a number of meth ods th at
have been devised for subjecting containers to hazards similar to those
encountered in the field. Both laboratory and field testing are necessary since
there are certain conditions inherent in each method of testing that cannot beduplicated in t he other.
TYPE S OF T ESTS
Development an d testing of packs and containers should be star ted as soon as
possible after initiat ion of item development . Some of th e tests most comm only
used in p roving design ad equacy include th e vibration, rough ha ndling, and cyclic
exposure tes ts (fig 1-34). One or more of th ese test s are u sua lly app licable to the
design of milita ry packs. In ma ny cases the technical activity having design
responsibility, has intervals test s an d procedur es th at are applicable to a specific
design problem. The docum ents m ost genera lly used for test guidance are MIL-
STD-1186. ASTM D 4169, Per form an ce Testin g of Sh ipping Cont ain ers an d
Systems, and ASTM D 5276, Drop Test of Loaded Containers by Free-Fall, should
be referenced.
TESTING (MIL-STD-2073-1)
After an item has been packed in accordance with one of the MIL-STD-2073-1
meth ods, tests ar e conducted to determ ine the effectiveness of the pa ck. The
types of tests condu cted will depend on the par ticular m ethod used. The tests
called for in MIL-STD-2073-1 are not all-inclusive, however, and additional or
different tests are sometimes required. The types of tests specified in MIL-STD-
2073-1 for proving the adequacy of unit protection are the leakage test, rough
han dling test s, cyclic exposure tests, a nd t he h eat-seal seam t ests.
TESTING (MIL-STD-1186)
When packs prepared for shipment in accordance with the detailed requirements
of MIL-STD-1186 are tested for any rough ha ndling required, th ere sh ould be no
settlement or shifting of cont ents. Fu rth er, the testing should cause no dam age
to the cont ents and should not loosen, break , or displace th e an choring, blocking,
or bracing. The testing should not render t he interior containers, wra ps, liners,
barriers, or cushioning ineffectual in providing continued and adequate
protection to the conten ts.
TYPE S OF R OUGH H ANDLING TESTS
The var ious types of rough h an dling tests include: free-fall drop test ; corn erwise
drop test; pendulum impact test; incline-impact test; edgewise drop test;
vibrat ion test; and other s. The part icular test s employed usua lly depend upon
the size an d shape of th e package. Completed packages as prepared for shipmen t
are given a rough handling test when specified. When a rough handling test isrequired, it precedes applicable tests specified to detect leaks and inadequate
seals or closur es an d preserva tive retent ion.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 73/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-61
Figure 1-34. Examp les of conta iner test.
Inspection and tests for leaks in barrier materials, seals and closures, and
preservative retention, when required, are performed on the contained unit
pack(s) following the rough handling test to determine existence or extent of
detr iment al effects. Un less a part icula r test is specified, selection of th e
applicable rough handling test should be in accordance with ASTM D 5639,
Selection of Corrugated Fiberboard Materials and Box Construction Based on
Performance Requirements.
SMALL C ONTAINERS
Only free-fall drop tests an d vibration t ests sh all apply to sma ll containers; both
or eith er vibrat ion test sh all be condu cted at the option of the contr actor. Small
containers are t hose having a gross weight of 110 poun ds or less. Any container
with skids is tested as a large container. Any conta iner holding an item th at h as
a net weight of more tha n 100 poun ds and wh ich is fasten ed to a base within or to
the base of the container will be tested as a lar ge container.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 74/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-62
LARGE CONTAINERS
All rough handling tests, except for free-fall tests, shall apply to large containers;
both or either vibration test shall be conducted at the option of the contractor.
However, tipover test s will ap ply only when a dditiona lly specified. Eith er impa ct
test sh all be conducted at t he option of th e contra ctor. Large shipping conta iners
are those measuring more than 60 inches on any one edge or diameter, or thosewhich when loaded, have gross weights in excess of 150 pounds or those which
have skids.
F R E E -FALL DROP TEST (F IG 1-35)
The pack may be tested in accordance with ASTM D 5276. A drop tester is an y
suitable apparatus which will allow an absolutely free, unobstructed fall of the
container a t th e orienta tion and th e direction requ ired. A lifting device tha t will
not damage the container will be used and a level steel or cement surface to
absorb all shock with out displacemen t will be provided. The height from which
the specimen should be dropped is dependent upon the weight, size, kind of
container, an d level of pack. This test is mean t to simulate t he fall of an item
dropped by a person from a height they would normally use to lift and carry an
item of that size.
The container should be dropped from the designated height onto a steel,
concret e or stone su rface of sufficient ma ss to absorb t he sh ock with out deflection
in such a manner that the designated surface of the container absorbs the full
force of th e fall (fig 1-35). This test sh ould be rep eat ed un til the designa ted
nu mber of drops have been mad e. (The height refers to th e distance from the
steel, concrete, or stone surface to the nearest surface of the container when
suspended prior to the fall.) The fall shall be a free fall, in th at no ropes or other
suspending media are att ached to the conta iner dur ing the fall. If th e container
is of the dr um t ype, th e top and bottom of the dr um sh ould be mar ked so th at t he
circle of the top and bottom is quartered, and the test should be applied to each
quar tered section.
T IPOVER TE ST (F IG 1-34)
The loaded container is placed on its bottom and slowly tipped until it falls freely
(by its own weight) on its side to a smooth level, concrete slab or similarly
un yielding surface. Stru ctura l damage to th e exterior shipping container wh ich
would result in either spilling of contents or failure of the container in
subsequent h an dling is cau se for rejection. This test is mean t to simulat e the
impacts of accidenta lly tipping over a conta iner. It is intended t ha t th e tipover
test be u sed only on cont ainers t hat are susceptible to accidental tipovers.
E DGEWISE DR OP TE ST (F IG 1-36)
The loaded conta iner sh ould be sup ported a t on end of its base on a sill or block 6
inches in height and at r ight a ngles to the skids. The opposite end of thecontainer should be allowed to fall freely from the specified height onto a steel,
concrete, or stone surface of sufficient mass to absorb the shock without
deflection. The test should be app lied twice to each end of th e conta iner . If th e
size of the container and the location of the center of gravity are such that the
drop tests cann ot be made from th e prescribed height, th e height of the sill will be
increased.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 75/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-63
Figure 1-35. Free fall drop test .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 76/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-64
Figur e 1-36. E dgewise-drop test .
C ORNERWISE -DR OP TE ST (F IG 1-37)
The container should be supported at one corner of its base on a block 6” in
height . A 12” block should be placed und er th e oth er corn er of th e same end of
the conta iner. The lowest point of the opposite end of the conta iner should th en
be raised to the specified height for the weight and allowed to fall freely onto a
steel, stone, or concert surface of sufficient mass to absorb the shock without
deflection.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 77/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-65
Figur e 1-37. Corn erwise-drop test .
I MPACT TESTS
Packs having a gross weight exceeding 150 pounds or any dimension exceeding
60 inches, closed for shipment, may be subjected to one of the following guided
impa ct tests. A single impact should be applied to each of two opposite ends. The
tests are performed to simulate railroad jumping or other accidental impacts,
evaluating the adequacy of the blocking, bracing and tie downs used to secure a
load on or a in a rail car.
I NCLINE -IMPACT TE ST (F IG 1-34)
This test in accordance with ASTM D 5277 simulates the abuses encountered by
packs in freight cars or trucks when the vehicles are subjected to the sudden
starts a nd stops.
The pack, mounted on a movable platform dolly which rides on a plane inclined
20 degrees from th e horizonta l, is released from a k nown distan ce up th e incline
an per mitted to strike against a fixed backstop at th e bottom of th e plane. The
magnitu de of impact shock is var ied by using different release points.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 78/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-66
Figure 1-38. Impact t est.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 79/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-67
SU P E R I M P O S E D -LOAD T E ST (F IG 1-34)
The pr ocedur e is ap plicable for determinin g th e a bility of shipping cont ainers to
resist loads such as imposed on the bottom container of a stack of similar
cont ainer in stora ge, or on a container su pporting top dunn age an d superimposed
lading. Test is applicable for determining t he a bility of shipping conta iners to
resist loads su perimposed on t heir tops as imposed by piling without t op dunn age
man y small, heavy packs on a conta iner.
Stackability, with dunnage tests, are conducted by placing a prescribed load on
the top of the container in a manner simulating the effect of similar containers
being sta cked on t op, an d th e load sh all be allowed to rema in in place for 1 h our.
A check shall be made of any changes or breaks in the container, such as
appa rent bu ckling or failur e of members in the sides or ends. Observations
should be made to deter mine if the distortions are enough to dam age or dislodge
the int erior pa cking or conten ts.
The un iformly distribut ed, with out dun nage su perimposed load t est is condu cted
by placing weights not greater than 10 x 10 inches in outside length and width,
on top of the conta iner in a symmetr ical pat tern appr oximating u niform load an d
allowed to remain in place for 1 hour. Measurem ents of distortions sha ll be madeimmed iately before the load is removed. Checks should be made of an y cha nges
or brea ks in th e cont ainer, such a s appa rent buckling of failure of members in the
top, sides or ends.
VIBRATION TE ST (F IG 1-34)
The forces and motions typical of railroad cars, motor trucks, and air
tra nsporta tion can result in vibra tion wh ich frequent ly produces deterioration or
partial crushing of unit or interior packing which reduces resistance to other
shocks, such as impa ct from droppin g, jolting, or bum ping. Testin g can disclose
weakness in assembly of th e packed item. The pack may be vibrat ion test ed in
accordan ce with ASTM D 3580.
VIBRATION (R EPETITIVE SHOCK) T E ST
Test is used to indicate whether or not a package and its contents will withstand
transportation shocks and vibration without damage when the shipment is not
securely tied down to the floor of th e vehicle. The pa ckage is placed on, but not
fastened to, a platform supported on a mechanism that will maintain the surface
essentially horizont al as it vibra tes th e platform. The am plitu de of the vibrat ion
will be 1 inch total. The frequency will be variable within a s a pproximat e ra nge
from 3 t o 5 Hz. Fences, barr icades, or blocking can be a tta ched to th e platform to
keep the package in position without unnecessarily restricting the vertical or
ra tional movement of th e pa ckage. Un less failur e occur s, tota l time of vibrat ion
will be 2 hours if the package is tested in one position; 3 hours if tested in more
tha n one position.
VIBRATION (S INUSOIDAL MOTION) TE ST
Test in accordance with ASTM D 4169 is used to determine the adequacy of
packages that contain items susceptible to damage from vibration encountered
dur ing shipping an d are tied down to the floor of the carr ier. The package is
attached securely to a platform supported on a mechanism that will maintain the
surface essentially horizontal as it vibrates the platform vertically. Controls are
provided to vary th e frequ ency form 2 to 500 Hz as specified. If th e package
might be shipped in more than one position, the package will be tested in each
position.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 80/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-68
S IMULATED CONTENTS
Simulated contents of the same dimensions, weight, center of gravity, and
physical properties as the actual contents may be substituted in the tests
described above. A shock-recording inst ru men t of an a ccepta ble type should be
appr opriately installed within the shipping conta iners. This provision is
intended to avoid unnecessary damage or complete destruction of valuable
commodities.
I NTERP RETATION OF R ESULTS
All ma ter ials an d componen ts sha ll be free from dam age or eviden ce of
displacemen t which affects th e ut ility of th e pack. When specified, functional
tests should be conducted on the items or equipment to determine freedom from
opera tiona l m alfun ction.
MARKING OF P ACKSMarking permits ready identification of military supplies and equipment for
shipment a nd storage. No mat ter how well an item is made or packed, it is
valueless if it cann ot be identified u pon rea ching its destinat ion.
ASTM D 996, Standard Terminology of Packaging and Distribution
Environments, defined marking as "the applications of numbers, letters, labels,
tags, symbols, or colors to provide identification and to expedite handling during
shipment and storage".
MARKING STANDARD
The publication that provides the requirements for the uniform marking of
militar y supplies and equipment is Military Sta nda rd 129, Marking for Shipment
and Stora ge. This publication is appr oved for use by all Depart ment a nd
Agencies of the Depart ment of Defense. It a ccommodates th e requiremen ts for
coded an d in th e clear da ta an d th e forms required by DOD 4500.25-1-M, Militar y
Standard Requisitioning and Issue Procedures (MILSTRIP); DOD 4000.25-2-M
Military Standard Transaction Reporting and Accounting Procedures
(MILSTRAP); and DOD 4500.32-R, Militar y Sta nda rd Tran saction an d Movement
Pr ocedur es (MILSTAMP).
All required marking and any additional special marking which may be required
depending u pon th e item a nd container being shipped (fig 1-39) can be foun d in
MIL-STD-129.
ECONOMY IN P ACKING
STANDARDIZATION
Economy in packing is the responsibility of everyone concerned with military
supply. The Secretary of Defense ha s established policies on pa ckaging th at mu st
be followed. These policies empha size th at th e militar y services sta nd ar dize th eirpreservation, packaging, and packing. For example, the services, by using
packaging standards, assure the same requirements for the same type of items,
thus reducing the number of materials, methods, and procedures - whether these
requiremen ts ar e performed by th e contr actor or by th e depot.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 81/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-69
Figure 1-39. Shipping container identification, address,
and special mar kings.
F ALSE E CONOMY
Defense material must be protected against all hazards at the lowest possible
cost, with the tar e weight an d cube kept to a minimum . Any att empt, however,
to relax stan dar ds to anything less than adequa te, is false economy. To associate
the size and price of an item with the cost of packing is also false economy. Items
of small size or low monetary value are often essential to the proper function of a
million dollar a ssembly. To use more mat erial or more expensive material th an
is essen tial is a lso false economy.
R EDUCING TAR E WEIGHT AND CUBE
One important way to reduce overpacking is through the use of pilot packs
carefully engineered and tested for a par ticular item. The redesigning of
established packs and the use of standardized processing forms may result in
substa ntial savings. Wherever the selection of th e container is optional, study
the comparative initial cost, the labor handling and storage costs, and any
possible reduction in tare weight a nd cube. Probably no area is more fru itful in
realizing savings th an in th e reduction of tar e weight an d cube.
P OTENTIAL AREAS FOR E CONOMY
There are two ar eas of great saving potent ial. One is repair par ts and genera l
stores items which account for the greatest shipping volume through high
tur nover. The other is items of large cubic volume on which sh ipping cha rges are
high, such as pontoons, fuel tanks, electronic equipment, and machine tools.
Figure 1-40 shows an example where savings in weight and cube, together with
reduction in top heaviness, were achieved by remounting the item on its side.
The length of the crate framing members and diagonals was reduced, and the
basic strength of the crate was increased by having the angles of the diagonals
near er to the ideal 45 degree.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 82/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-70
Figure 1-40. Savings achieved through crating of an item .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 83/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-71
Use the most economical container t ha t will adequately han dle the load. For
example, do not use a Style 2 wooden box having a load limit of 1000 pounds,
when a Style 4 box with a load limit of 400 pounds will give all the protection
needed. Do not use a wooden box when a lighter cont ainer is adequa te for th e
pack.
Develop an active training program for packing supervisors and personnel to
alert th em to the consta nt n eed for the redu ction of weight a nd cube. Figure 1-41
shows how saving in weight, cube, and m ater ials resulted from a simple redesign
of th e pack.
Make a vailable a greater selection of light weight conta iners on th e packing lines.
Operat ors will not be as likely to use hea vier cont ainers when fiberboar d or other
lightweight conta iners ar e available and can do just as well.
Consolidate multipack shipments into low cost containers to eliminate the
shipping weight of smaller individua l containers. The wood, wireboun d, and
triple wall fiberboard pallet boxes are all light in weight, are economical andsuitable for consolidat ing mat erials for domestic and air sh ipments.
OT H E R E CONOMY AREAS
There a re several other area s in which economies can be achieved.
MANPOWER
Any reduction in manpower cost will have a definite bearing on the economy of
packing. One way to reduce manpower cost is to recognize that th e well tra ined
packer is the economical packer. This means using the right m an on the right
job.
MECHANIZATION
Savings of considerable importance can be derived from the proper use of
mechanization. Powerized conveyor belts, mechanized ha ndling systems, and
automatic packing machinery, all help to reduce handling and speed up
operations.
R EUSE OF MATERIALS
Another field in which savings can be effected is th rough t he sa lvage an d r euse of
mat erials. Lumber, cush ioning, blocking and bra cing materials, containers, an d
meta l fasten ers can be reused with a little careful plann ing (fig 1-42).
P a r c e l P o s t
One other area for achieving savings is the more efficient use of parcel post.
Frequ ently, par cel post redu ces th e n eed for docum enta tion, allows a lowering of the level of protection, cuts down on marking requirements, and permits faster
delivery. Remember, to obtain t he m aximum value for each Defense dollar , one
must be awake t o every new idea th at m ay lead to the r eduction in pa cking costs.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 84/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-72
Figure 1-41. Savings achieved by redesigning a cont ainer.
P AR C E L P OS T R E QUI R E ME NTS
GENERAL SU P P L I E S Military requirements for parcel post shipments must conform to the Postal
Service Manu al an d th e various Armed Service regulations.
Nonm ai l ab l e M a t t e r
Nonmailable matter includes all matter which is by law, regulation, or treaty
stipulation, prohibited from being sent in t he m ail or wh ich cann ot be forwarded
to its dest ina tion because of illegible, incorr ect, or in sufficient add ress .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 85/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-73
Figure 1-42. Reusing packaging mat erials means economy.
H a r m f u l Ma t t e r
With certain exceptions, any articles, compositions, or materials, which may killor injure another or injur e the mail or other pr operty, are nonma ilable. This
includes but is not limited to--
• All kinds of poisons, including controlled subst an ces.
• All poisonous animals, except scorpions, all poisonous insects, all
poisonous r eptiles, and all kinds of sna kes, tur tles and spiders.
• All disease germs an d scabs.
• All explosives, flammable material, internal machines, and mechanical,
chemical, or oth er d evice or compositions wh ich m ay ignite or explode.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 86/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-74
GENERAL E XAMPLES OF H ARMFUL MATTER
Harmful matter includes, among other things, that which is likely to destroy,
deface, or otherwise damage the contents of the mailbags or harm the person of
an yone en gaged in th e Postal Ser vice, such a s caust ic poisons (acids an d a lkalis),
oxidizing materials, or highly flammable solids; or which is likely under
conditions incident to transportation to cause fires through friction, through
absorption of moisture, through spontaneous chemical changes or as a result of retained heat from manufacturing or processing; explosives or containers
previously used for shipping high explosives having a liquid ingredient (such as
dynamite), ammunition; fireworks; highly flammable liquids or substances;
rad ioactive ma terials; matches; or a rticles emitting a bad odor.
H ARMFUL MATTER R EQUIREMENTS
Harmful items should not be shipped parcel post without prior approval of the
Postal Service. Whenever th ere is doubt a bout t he ma ilability of a par ticular
item, a request for a r uling should be mad e to the local postmaster . Mailability
ru lings ma y also be obtained from a near by mail classification center or from the
Office of Mail Classification, US Posta l Service, Washin gton, DC 20260.
TYPE S OF SH I P P I N G C ONTAINERS
G e n e r a l
Postal regulations require containers strong enough to retain and protect their
conten ts from th e weight of other mail.
C o m m o n C o n t a i n e r s U se d
The following containers, with applicable specification are most commonly used,
depen ding on size, weight , and na tu re of th e art icle(s): Cotton Mailing Bags (A-
A-2714); Burlap Cotton and Waterproof Laminated Textile Shipping Bags (A-A-
881); Folding Boxes (PPP-B-566); Fiberboard Boxes (ASTM D5118); Sacks,
Shipping, Paper, Cushion (A-A-1588) and Cans, Fiber, Spirally-wound (MIL-
C-3955).
M ai l bags
Mailbags ma y be used a s conta iners for consolidated shipment s of un breaka ble or
nonfragile items going to the same location, provided projections are cushioned to
prevent ru ptu re of th e bag dur ing shipmen t. Use of one of th e three available
sizes of mailbag should be based on volume of material going to individual
customers.
U s e d Co n t a i n e r s
Used cont ain ers in good rigid condition with all flaps int act ar e accepta ble. If a
container of desired size cannot be found, a large one may be cut down to meet
the n eeds.
Si ze an d Weigh t o f Con t a i ne r
The shipping containers must be of the proper size to accommodate the item(s)
being shipped. Su fficient spa ce for cush ionin g ma ter ial should be allowed at t he
time of container selection, avoiding both the underpacking and overpacking of
the item and rem aining with in the weight limitat ions. The size and weight of
packages mailed at most post offices is limited to 108 inches, length and girth
combined, an d 70 pounds.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 87/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-75
M e a s u r e m e n t
Comput e th e size of a par cel as follows (see Figur e 1-43):
• Measure t he longest side.
• Measur e the distance around th e parcel at its th ickest par t (girth).
• Add both measur ements.
Some military post offices overseas have more restrictive size and weight
requiremen ts. The weight of an addr essed piece of parcel post must be 16 ounces
or more.
R e u s a b l e Co n t a i n e r s
The use of reusable containers may be determined by considering the following
factors:
• When the military characteristics of the item are such that a reusable
type container is necessary. When th e container can ser ve a dual pur pose
of shipping container a nd case while th e item is in u se. When th e item is
designa ted a s r ecoverable-repaira ble item.
• The cost of a reusable container is offset by multiple use as compared toth e cost of single tr ip, disposable conta iner s.
• When the cost of the item and/or its critical characteristics, or the need
for periodic inspection or exercising justifies the use of a reusable
container.
Reusable drums with protruding closure devices, such as locking rings, shall be
cushioned t o prevent injur y to postal employees, equipment or other m ail.
O u t s i d e Wr a p p i n g a n d C l os u r e
When a box itself is an adequate shipping container, paper wraps should be
omitted. If a paper wra p is used as an outside cover for boxes, the pa per should
have at least 60 poun ds basis weight. Closure a nd reinforcement sh ould be made
by the u se of tape.
Closure and reinforcement is accomplished by using gummed and pressure-
sensitive tapes, adhesive, stra pping, an d staples for boxes and bags. Various
friction closures, screw caps and locking devices for cans and similar containers.
General purpose transparent mending tape and masking tape shall not be used
for closure or reinforcement, but may be used to augment adhesive closure on
envelopes or to cover sta ples on ba gs. Pressu re sen sitive filament reinforced tape
or reinforced paper t ape is recommen ded for closur e an d reinforcement. Except
for pressure sensitive filament tape, tapes used for closure and reinforcement
shall be not less tha n 2 inches wide.
When strapping is used for closure and reinforcement, it should encircle thelength an girth of th e package at least once. Twine and cord should not be used.
Loose strapping is not acceptable because it presents a hazard to employees and
equipment a nd does not reinforce the conta iner.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 88/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
1-76
Figure 1-43. Post office measur ement r equirement s.
M ar k i ng o f Pa r ce l s an d U.S. M a i lbags
Par cels shall be m ark ed to sh ow the consignor; consignee; Tran sportation Contr ol
Number (TCN); and required delivery date, project code, and mark for, when
specified.
Marking of U.S. mailbags shipped both domestically and overseas should be
tagged in the space located on the locking device to prevent possible opening in
tra nsit. Suggested wording of the tag is "OFFICIAL MAIL FOR
ORGANIZATION OF ADDRESS. DO NOT OPEN IN TRANSIT."
In addition to the postage tag located on the locking device of the mailing bag, an
additional tag will be atta ched. The ta g will notify the local postal aut horities
that the bag is to be delivered intact to its destination and will contain the
complete addr ess to which the bag is destined and th e retur n addr ess.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 89/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-1
C H AP T E R 2
FIBE RBOARD AND P AP ER BOARD CONTAINERS
FIBE RBOARD BOXES
DE S C R I P T I O N O F F IBERBOARD BOXES
A fiberboard box is a container made of one or more pieces of corrugated or
solid fiberboard . The pieces are creas ed, slott ed, joined, an d folded according
to standard styles described in ASTM D 5118, ASTM D 1974 and illustrated
in figures 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, and 2-9.
US E O F F IBERBOARD BOXES
The quantity of fiberboard boxes used in military shipments are increasing
stea dily an d rapidly. A fiberboar d box weighs considera bly less th an a
wooden box of th e sam e cap acity. This differen ce in weight is a factor wh enlarge shipments are involved, as any saving of weight is reflected in lower
shipping cost and easier handling. The main requirement s for a shipping
container are light weight, low cost, ability to withsta nd r ough ha ndling, and
ability to protect the cont ents against loss or damage. Motor trucks,
airplanes, container cars, skid platforms, lift trucks, platform slings, and
palletized loads have been important factors in reducing transportation and
han dling hazar ds, thu s expanding t he u se of lightweight fiberboard boxes.
Advant ages in the Use of Fiberboard Boxes. Fiberboard boxes are ada pta ble
to a great var iety of packa ging an d pa cking cond itions. They offer th e
following advantages:
• They are made of materials of exactly the specified strength andwater resistance.
• They are pr efabricated.
• They are made in several styles to suit different shapes and sizes of
items.
• They are shipped and stored in the flat, and hence save shipping and
storage spa ce.
• They are easy to assemble and ha ndle.
• They are light in weight an d relatively strong.
• They are neat in appeara nce and easy to mark.
• When packed, they occupy less space than most other containers of
the sa me inside dimensions.
C LASSIFICATION OF F IBERBOARD BOXES
Fiberboard boxes, for domestic and oversea shipments, have been
consolidat ed under ASTM D 5118 and ASTM D 1974. Fiberboard mat erial
mu st conform to ASTM D 4727. Boxes may be procur ed or fabricated in th e
following t ypes a nd classes :
• Types (see fig 2-1)
ο Type CF Boxes - Type CF boxes are fabricated from
corru gated fiberboar d (CF) stock. Corr ugated fiberboar d ha s
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 90/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-2
two var ieties: Single-wall (SW) an d double-wall (DW)
construction.
ο Type SF Boxes - Type SF boxes are fabricated from solid
fiberboar d (SF).
• CLASSES
ο Domestic class boxes are made to meet the requirements of
table 1, ASTM D 4727 for burst ing stren gth a nd t he weight of
th e facing mat erials. (See figur e 2-1, ta ble 2-1.)
• Corrugated fiberboard, class weather-resistant (WR), and
waterproof and water vapor resistant (WWVR) - The WR and
WWVR boxes, both single and double wall, will meet the bursting
strength and thickness for the grade and variety as described in
ta ble 2, ASTM D 4727. (See figure 2-1, ta ble 2-2).
Gr a des o f fi be r b oa r d
Different str engths of fiberboar d are indicated as grades. Grades of
fiberboard for class domestic are types CF an d SF . Type CF is different iatedby PSI (poun ds per squar e inch) of bursting st rength (tables 2-1 th rough 2-4).
Weather-resistant grades of fiberboard are identified by a letter-number
combina tion such a s V2, V3, W5, an d W6 which repr esent different burst ing
stren gths. The num eral in each combina tion represent s the gra de of ma terial
and th e letter in each combina tion represen ts a kind of fiberboar d (V- or W-
boar d). V-board is a heavy-dut y, highly weath er-resistant board, and W-
boar d is a lower st rength , highly weath er-resistant board (see table 2-2).
Type CF (corrugated fiberboard) can be obtained in grades 3, 5, 6, 11, 13, and
15, with complian ce symbols of V3c, W5c, W6c, V11c, V13c, an d V15c. The
sma ll “c” indicates corr uga ted fiberboard .
Figur e 2-1. Classificat ion of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 91/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-3
Type SF (solid fiberboard) can be obtained in grades 125, 175, 200, 275, 350,
500 and 600 with compliance symbols of V2s, V3s, V4s, W5s, and W6s, as
shown in figure 2-1, tables 2-3 and 2-4, which are taken from ASTM D 4727.
The sma ll “s” indicat es solid fiberboar d.
Waterproof and water vapor resistant (WWVR) grades of fiberboard are
identified by a letter-number combination followed by the letter "WWVR".Waterproof and water vapor resistant boxes are fabricated from type CF
(corrugated fiberboard) and can be obtained in grades V3c, W5c, V15c, and
W6c (each followed by “WWVR) in th e single wa ll variety a nd gra des V11 an d
V13 (each followed by “WWVR”) in the double-wall variety.
Table 2-1. Type CF (Corrugated Fiberboard), Domestic
Variety Grade
Combined Weight
Fa cings Only, min
Bursting Strength, Dry,
min A
lb/1000 ft 2 (g.m2) psi (kPa)
SW 125 52(254) 125(862)
SW 150 66(322) 150(1034)
SW 175 75(366) 175(1207)
SW 200 84(410) 200(1379)
SW 275 138(674) 275(1896)
SW 350 180(879) 350(2413)
DW 200 92(449) 200(1379)
DW 275 110(537) 275(1896)
DW 350 126(615) 350(2413)
DW 500 222(1084) 500(3447)
DW 600 270(1318) 600(4137)
Puncture
in. oz/inches
of tear (J)
TW 1100 264(1289) 1100 (33)
A Only one burst of th e initial six may fall beneat h th e minimum r equired. Domestic board
failing to pass this test will be accepted if, in a retest consisting of 24 bursts (12 from each side of th e boar d), not more tha n 4 burst s fall below the minimu m value required.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 92/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-4
Table 2-2 Type CF (Corrugat ed Fiberboard), Weath er-Resistan t, and Wat er an d Water Vapor
Resistant Classes (WWVR)
Thickness, in. (mm )B Bursting Strength, psi (kPa), min
avg
Variety GradeA,C Corrugating
Medium
Outer Facings Dry Wet D
SW V3c 0.010(0.254) 0.023(0.584) 400(2758) 150(1034)
SW W5c 0.010(0.254) 0.016(0.406) 275(1896) 100(689)
SW W6c 0.010(0.254) 0.010(0.254) 175(1207) 50(345)
DW V11c 0.010(0.254) 0.023(0.584) 600(4137) 300(2068)
DW V13C 0.010(0.254) 0.016(0.406) 400(2758) 200(1379)
DW V15c 0.010(0.254) 0.010(0.254) 300(2068) 100(689)
A Includes WWVR gra des.
B A - r%, or u nlimited plus tolerance sha ll be permitt ed.C For doublewall fiberboard, th e inner facing shall be the sa me th ickness a s th e out er facing.D After 24 h immer sion (see 9.2.1)
Table 2-3 Type SF (Solid Fiberboar d): Class Domestic, All Gra des
Grade Combined Weight of Plies Before
Lam inat ion, lb/1000 ft2(g/m2), min
Bursting Strength, psi (kPa),minA
125 114(557) 125(862)
175 149(727) 175(1207)
200 190(928) 200(1379)
275 237(1157) 275(1896)
350 283(1382) 350(2413)
500 330(1611) 500(3347)
600 360(1758) 600(4137)
A Only one burs t of th e initial six ma y fall beneath the m inimum requir ed. Domest ic board failing to pass
this test will be accepted if, in a retest consisting of 24 bursts (12 from each side of the board), not more
tha n 4 burst s fall below the minimum value required.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 93/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-5
Table 2-4 Type SF, Class Weath er-Resistant , All Grad es
Grade Thickness, in . (mm)A Bursting Strength, psi (kPa)
V2s 0.090(2.29) 550(3792) 500(3447)
V3s 0.090(2.29) 400(2758) 150(1034)
V4s 0.080(2.29) 400(2758) 150(1034)
W5s 0.075(1.91) 275(1896) 100(689)
W6s 0.060(1.52) 175(1207) 50(345)
A A" 10% toleran ce shall be perm itted.
Capa b i l it i e s o f F i be r boa r d Boxes
The th ree pr incipal factors a ffecting th e carrying capacity of corrugat ed a nd
solid fiberboard boxes are resistance to compression, strength at the score
lines, and resistan ce to puncture. A four th factor th at sh ould be taken into
consideration is the ability of fiberboard to resist the weakening effect of
moistur e. The importa nce of th e first th ree factors varies according to the
commodity for which a particular box is designed, and the type of interiorpacking employed.
Resistance to compression, for example, is a relatively minor factor when the
contents support the walls of the container or when the interior packing
fur nishes the necessary support. When these factors ar e not present, the
shipper must make certain that the container has sufficient resistance to
compression t o prevent it from caving in wh en it is placed in t he bottom t ier
of a pile of similar boxes. Corru gat ed an d solid fiberboar d boxes ma y be used
to ship articles that are not readily susceptible to damage resulting from
ordinary distortion of th e container. The man ner in wh ich a commodity is
packed governs to a great extent its condition on arrival at destination.
Therefore, the selection of the proper style, class, and grade of fiberboard box
should be carefully considered to ensure the commodity against the hazards
of storage, shipment, an d ha ndling.
The items normally packed in fiberboard boxes are type 1 or type 2 loads.
Type 3 loads should be converted to type 1 or type 2 loads by proper interior
packing.
Us es and L i m i t a t i ons o f C l a s s Dom es t i c F i be r b oa r d Boxes
The uses of fiberboar d boxes ar e essent ially as indicated above. Man y
variations of special die-cut inserts, scored pads, and partitions can be
fabricated to give add itional pr otection to th e item. The colum ns for
corrugated and solid fiberboard (CF and SF) show the minimum bursting
strength of the fiberboard in pounds per square inch which determines thegrades.
Us es and L i m i t a t i ons o f C l a s s Wea t h e r - r e s i s t an t a nd WWVR F i be r boa r d Boxes
V-board was developed primarily for the fabrication of exterior containers for
oversea shipment. W-board was developed primarily for the fabrication of
interior containers which are packed in exterior containers for oversea
shipment . At oversea point s, the exterior pa ck is sometimes rem oved and t he
W-board boxes become th e exter ior conta iners . When W-board boxes are
used as exterior containers, their weight and dimensional limitations should
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 94/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-6
not be exceeded. Although both V- an d W-board s are h ighly water resistan t,
boxes made from these materials will permit the entrance of water through
the corn ers and joints. When packed items ar e of such a nat ur e as to be
dama ged by water, wat erproofing is provided by the u se of individua l wraps
of ma ter ial conforming t o PPP -B-1055; by th e use of case liners conformin g to
MIL-L-10547; or by the use of waterproof, pressure-sensitive tape conforming
to ASTM D 5486, applied as shown in figure 2-2 after proper closure of thebox. In accorda nce with ASTM D 5118, ta bles 2-5 an d 2-6 are used t o
determine the weight and size limitation when class weather-resistant
fiberboar d boxes ar e requ ired. Compliance symbols ar e given in the first
column.
Figur e 2-2. Sealing Method B.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 95/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-7
Table 2-5 Size an d Weight Limita tions for Types CFA and SFA Domestic Fiberboar d Boxes
Type CF Variety Type SF Max Weight of Boxes Max Inside
Dimensions
SW4 DW4 and Contents Length + Width +
Depth
Grade Grade Grade lb (kg) in .
125 .......... 125 20 (9.1) 40
150 .......... .......... 30 (13.6) 50
175 .......... 175 40 (18.1) 60
200 200 200 65 (29.5) 75
275 275 275 90 (40.8) 90
350 350 350 120 (54.4) 100
500 500 140 (63.5) 110
600 600 160 (72.6) 120
A Explana tion of abbreviat ions in Table 1
CF - Corrugated Fiberboard
SF - Solid Fiberboard
SW - Singlewall Fiberboard
DW - Doublewall F iberboar d
Table 2-6 Size and Weight Limitations for Class Weather-Resistant (WR) and Water/Vapor
Resistant (WWVR) Fiberboard Boxes Used a s E xterior Cont ainers A
NOTE - The gross weight and size limit expressed in the circular or rectangular boxmaker's certificate
shall conform to the requirements of the Uniform Freight Classification or National Motor Freight
Classificat ion Rules, as a pplicable, and m ay not necessar ily be the sa me as those stipula ted in Table 2.
GradeB (Compliance
Symbol)
Max Weight of Boxes and Contents Max Inside Dimensions Length + Width
+ Depth
lb (kg) in. (mm)
V2s 120 (54.4) 100 (2540)
V3s, V4s, and V3c 90 (40.8) 90 (2286)
W5s and W5c 65 (39.5) 75 (1905)
W6s and W6c 30 (13.6) 30 (762)
V11c 160C (72.6) 120 (3048)
V13c 120 (54.4) 100 (2540)
V15c 90 (40.8) 90 (2286)
A Not applicable to interior boxesB Referen ce Specification D 5118/5118M for specific deta ils of const ru ctionC Maximum weight ma y be increa sed to 225 lb (102 kg) provided th e ma nufactur er's body joint is fast ened
with met al fastener s spaced not more than 1 in. (25 mm) apar t (see 8.1.8)
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 96/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-8
MATERIALS
C o r r u g a t e d F i b e r b o a r d
Corrugated fiberboard is fabricated of flat sheets of paperboard (called
facings) glued to the crowns of a corrugated sheet of the same material.
Strength requirements are obtained by varying caliper, number, and quality
of th e component facings and th e corrugat ed medium. Corru gated fiberboardhas low resistance to puncture but affords a high degree of resilience and
cushioning. Single-wall (SW, also called double-faced), corr uga ted fiberboar d
consists of two outer paperboard facings laminated to a corrugated sheet
between t hem (fig 2-3). Double-wall (DW) corru gat ed fiberboar d consist s of
three flat facings and two corrugated sheets, a center facing, a corrugated
sheet , an d a facing (fig 2-3). It is this combina tion of flat a nd corr uga ted
sheets that gives corrugated fiberboard its qualities of strength and
resilience. Corru gated fiberboard is constr ucted with different k inds and
arr an gements of flutes. The "A" flut e, with 36 plus or minu s 3 flutes per
linear foot, is gener ally used wher e cush ionin g of cont ent s is desired. The "B"
flute, with 50 plus or minus 3 flutes per linear foot, is used where the
cont ent s tha t su pport t he box ar e of low fra gility. The "C" flut e, with 42 plus
or minus 3 flutes per linear foot, can be made to serve either propose. The"E" flut e is 94 flut es per foot, plus or m inu s 4 flutes (fig 2-4). The "A" flut e is
the largest of the three and its strength is realized in stacking applications.
Its ability to withst and impact as well as its resistan ce to flat crushing is th e
lowest of th e four flut e sizes due to th e lesser n um ber of flut es per linear
span. The smallest stan dar d flute size, "E", is the weakest in terms of
stacking strength, but it performs very well under puncture and flat crush
str ess. The "C" flut e, which is the middle size flute, will perform moder at ely
well in all th ree areas--stacking, puncture, and flat cru sh. It is used where
maximum strength in any one area is not required, but where weakness in no
area can be tolerat ed.
Figur e 2-3. Types and var ieties of fiberboar d.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 97/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-9
Figure 2-4. Corru gated fiberboar d flutes.
D o m e s t ic F i b e r b o a r d B o x es
Variety SW fiberboard used to fabricate type CF boxes will be A, B, C, or E
flute at the option of the supplier. Variety DW fiberboard used t o fabricate
type CF boxes will be any combination of A, B, C, or E flutes, except they
sha ll not be BB, EE , or BE flute. Type CF boxes, fabr icat ed from var iety SW
or DW fiberboard sh all have th e flutes r un ning perpen dicular to the scores of
th e box open ings. When sp ecified, th e flutes for variet y SW or DW fiberboar d
will run horizontal to the scores of the box openings for boxes of a size that
the t op and bottom openings are on the sma llest pan els.
Weat h e r - Res is t an t And WWVR F i be r boa r d Boxes
Variety SW fiberboard used to fabricate type CF boxes will be either A, B, orC flute as specified. Conventional slotted type CF boxes shall have the flutes
ru n perpen dicular to th e scores of th e box openings. When specified, th e
flut es for t hese boxes sha ll run horizonta l to the scores of th e box openings for
boxes of a size an d style tha t t he t op and bottom openings are on t he sm allest
pan el. For Styles DBLCC an d IC boxes (fig 2-7), th ey shall have th e flutes
ru n th e depth of the box perpendicular to the opening.
So li d F i be r boa r d , Type SF
Solid fiberboard consists of two or more flat plies of paperboard laminated
together with an adh esive applied over the en tire ar ea of contact between th e
sheet s (fig 2-3). The combined m at erial is solid, ha rd, an d rigid, an d boxes
fabricated from it r esist pun cture t o a h igh degree but offer little cushioning
to th eir conten ts. They do, however, offer grea ter resist an ce to rough
handling and wear, and are better adapted for use in shipping heavier and
less fra gile items tha n th ose shipped in corrugat ed fiberboard boxes. If the
weight of the box and contents does not exceed 40 pounds, the fiberboard will
not be less tha n two-ply. If th e weight exceeds 40 poun ds, the fiberboard will
be not less th an th ree-ply.
T a p e s
Among the tapes most commonly used for closing and sealing fiberboard
boxes a re--
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 98/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-10
• ASTM D 5486, a pressure-sensitive water-resistant, paper-backed
ta pe, norma lly used to close inter ior conta iner s. ASTM D 5486 is also
a pressure-sensitive waterproof tape, used to close and waterproof
interior a nd exterior fiberboar d boxes.
• A-A-1492, A-A-1671, a reinforced, paper-gummed tape, used for
sealing fiberboard conta iners for d omestic shipment an d storage.
Adhes i ve
Adhesive used for closing fiberboard boxes will conform to MMM-A-250.
M et a l fa s t en i ngs
Metal fastening for securing the manufacturer's joint and closing class
weather-resistant and WWVR fiberboard boxes, will be commercially
preformed sta ples or staples from commer cial steel stitching wire. The
staples will be treated with a commercially applied coating of zinc or copper
wash to resist corrosion. ASTM D 5118 and ASTM D 1974 specifies th e sizes
of sta ples to use.
R e i n fo r c i n g m a t e r i a lsFlat steel strapping ASTM D 3953; nonmetallic strapping, ASTM D 3950; or
pressure-sensitive, filament-reinforced tape ASTM D 5530 are used to
rein force packed and closed fiberboar d boxes. Another documen t to referen ce
is ASTM D 4675, Standard Guide for Selection and Use of Flat Strapping
Materials.
Fa br i ca t i on o f t he Boxes
Cutt ing, scoring, and slotting. Special machines are u sed to cut, score, and
slot t he fiberboard ma terial so tha t it can be made int o a box.
Body j oi n t ( m an uf ac t u r e ' s jo i n t )
Domestic boxes, types CF and SF. The body joint (man ufactu re's joint) of
domestic, corrugated fiberboard boxes will be either overlapped or butted, as
specified (fig 2-5). The type SF joint sha ll be overlap ped.
O v e r la p p e d J o i n t (J o i n t Ta b )
The joint sh all be made with fiberboard joint t ab overlap not less th an 1 1/4
in. (32 mm) wide with the length of the overlap equal to the inside depth of
the box. The joint ta b may be an exten sion of either th e end or side pan el of
the box. When specified the joint ta b may extend into the flap ar ea an d be
secur ed. The joint ta b shall be fasten ed either inside or outside th e adjoining
panel and the top and bottom edges of the front tab shall be no more than
3/16 in. (5 mm) below th e top or above the bottom scoreline of th is pan el. The
overlapped joint of type CF boxes shall be fastened with adhesive. The
toxicity requirement may be waived when packing items other than food.When a dhesive is used it sh all be applied so as to cover th e full area between
the joint tab and the adjoining pan el. The adhesive shall substa ntially
exten d to all edges of th e overlap . The overlapped joint of type SF boxes sha ll
be fasten ed with met al fasten ers. Metal fasten ers for the type CF and t ype
SF boxes having a depth dimension of 18 in. (457 mm) or less shall be spaced
not more tha n 3 in. (76 mm) apart center to center .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 99/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-11
Figur e 2-5. Body joint s for fiberboard boxes.
Metal fasteners for the type SF box having a depth dimension greater than
18 in. (457 mm) shall be spaced not more tha n 2 2 in. (64 mm) apa rt center to
center . The distance between th e ends of the joint an d the near er end of thenear est fasten er shall not exceed 1 in. (25 mm). Metal fasten ers may be
applied diagonally, vertically or horizontally at the option of the supplier.
Weat h e r - r e s i s t an t a nd WWVR Boxes , Type CF a nd SF
The lap joint sha ll be used on weat her-resistant an d WWVR grade boxes (fig
2-5). The lap joint will overlap either in side or outside th e box not less th an 1
1/2 inches, an d will be secur ed with st eel staple or steel stitching wire. The
staples or stitches will be spaces not more than 2 inches apart, and the
distance between th e outer st itches a nd t he en d of the joint will not exceed 1
inch. An additiona l tie-stit ch will be used a bout 1/4 to 3/4 inch from ea ch end
of th e joint .
In lieu of a tie-stitch joint, boxes may be stapled or stitched with the samenumber of fasteners (including tie-stitches) equally spaced in a single row.
When specified, th e body joints of gra des W5c, W6c, a nd V3c fiberboard boxes
ma y be secured by t he u se of adh esive conform ing to MMM-A-250.
B u t t e d J o i n t (T y p e C F O n l y)
The but ted joint sha ll be ma de by fitting th e edges of the pa nels to be joined
closely together a nd secur ing them with gumm ed tape. Tape used to secur e
th e body joint of boxes ha ving gross weight , of 40 lb (18 kg) or less (grade 125
to 175) shall be tha t n ormally used by th e industr y for this pur pose.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 100/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-12
Tape used t o secur e th e joints of boxes having a gross weight of more tha n 40
lb (18 kg). (Grades over 175) shall be reinforced with sisa l, cloth, glass, ra yon
or double stra nd n ylon fibers. The ta pe shall be not less than 2 in. (51 mm) in
width for boxes having a gross weight of 65 lb (30 kg) or less (grade 200 and
below) and not less than 3 in (76 mm) in width for boxes having a gross
weight over 65 lb (30 kg) (grade above 200). The t ape sh all be cent ered onthe joint a nd exten d its full length, or within 3/8 in (10 mm) or full length be
centered on the joint and shall adhere over not less than 90% to the entire
area of cont act with the fiberboard .
St y l e s o f F i be r boa r d Boxes
The st yles covered in figures 2-6, 2-7, an d 2-8 are t he ba sic styles of domestic,
weath er-resistant , an d WWVR fiberboard boxes.
RSC, Regu lar S lo t t ed Box ( figur e 2-6)
In th is design, all the flaps (inner a nd outer) are of equal length. The outer
flaps meet in t he center wh en closed. This style is the m ost commonly used.
SFF , Spec ia l Fu l l F lap Slo t t ed Box ( figur e 2-6) In th is design the inn er flaps meet in th e center of the box. A one-fourth inch
gap is permitt ed.
FOL, Fu l l Over lap Slo t t e d Box ( figur e 2-6)
In this design, the length of the outer flaps shall be not less than the inside
width of the box minus 1 inch. This design results in a conta iner with at
least two thicknesses of fiberboard covering the entire top and bottom
surfaces.
OSC, Over lap Slo t t ed Box ( figur e 2-6)
In t his box, when closed, the inn er flaps must not overlap, an d th e outer flaps
will overlap the dista nce specified in th e order or invita tion for bids. The
inner flaps will be of the same length as the outer flaps, except when the
relation of width to length would cau se the inn er flaps to overlap. In su ch a
case, th e inner flaps will be cut t o meet in t he center of th e box.
CSSC, Cen ter Spec ia l S lo t t e d Box ( figur e 2-7)
This box is designed so that the inner and outer flaps meet in the center
giving a double thickness for top and bottom.
CSOSC, Cen ter Sp ec ia l Over lap Slo t t ed Box ( figur e 2-7)
This box is designed the same as the CSSC except the outer flaps are the
same length a s the inner flaps and ma y overlap. No flap cut ting is required.
HSCC, Ha l f S lo t t ed Box With Cover ( figur e 2-7) This box consist s of a box body an d a cover. The body is formed from
fiberboard, scored, slotted, and stitched to form a tube having four flaps of
equal length, approximately half the width of the box, on the bottom only.
Un less oth erwise specified the cover sha ll be a Type I. When sp ecified th e
cover sha ll be a Type II. The dept h of th e cover is 3 in. un less oth erwise
specified.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 101/399
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 102/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-14
Figur e 2-6. Styles of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 103/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-15
Figur e 2-7. Styles of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 104/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-16
Figur e 2-8. Styles of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 105/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-17
Figur e 2-9. Styles of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 106/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-18
FP F, F i ve Pa ne l Fo l de r Box (f igu r e 2 -8 )
This design consists of a single scored slotted sheet. When set u p th e out er
end flaps will fully overlap. This box is used to an a dvant age in th e packing
of stacked or nested items which can be arr an ged on t he flat scored sh eet an d
when in position, the box is folded over th e cont ent s.
TSC, Ton gu e an d Slo t Closur e Box (f igu re 2-9)
This box is const ru cted of one piece fiberboard , scored an d slotted a s shown.
Slee ves (fig 2-11)
A sleeve may be specified for use with any of the box styles to provide added
stren gth. Sleeves will be made from class weath er-resistant fiberboard of th e
sam e type an d gra de as t he box. A sleeve will closely fit t he box over wh ich it
is placed and will cover th e top and bottom, and both end s. The length of the
sleeve (length of the stapled joint ) will be th e sam e as t he inside width of the
box. Un less oth erwise specified, th e corru gations will be at right an gles to
the score lines. If a but t joint is used it may be taped or th e overlap joint ma y
be stapled, stitched or glued. Alter na tively, th e location of th e body jointshall be in th e center of the top or bottom pan el, providing t he joint does not
interfere with t he r equired ma rking.
Line rs (Fig 2-12)
Liners a re ma de from one piece of fiberboar d. They ar e scored to cover the
end an d side panels of the boxes. The height of th e liners sh all be the full
inside depth of the boxes for which they are intended and the ends of the
liners shall be about in th e center of the side pa nels of the boxes.
Unless otherwise specified, liners for class domestic boxes shall be
constructed for double-wall fiberboard, grade 275. The joints shall be secured
with m inimu m 2 inch wide tap e conform ing to A-A-1492, A-A-1671. Liners
shall be constru cted from th e same class of mat erial as th e boxes th emselves.
Unless otherwise specified liners for class weather-resistant boxes shall be
cons tr uct ed of V15c fiberboar d. When s pecified gra de W5c, W6c, V3c, or V13c
sha ll be used. Liner s fabr icat ed from single-wall fiberboar d sha ll be A or C
flute and liners fabricated from double-wall fiberboard shall be any
combina tion of A, B, or C flut es, except BB flut es sha ll not be used . The
flut es sha ll be perpen dicular to th e box openin gs (as sh own in fig 2-12). The
joints sh all be secur ed with minimu m 2-inch wide tape r un ning n ot less th an
thr ee quart ers the length of the joint.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 107/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-19
Figur e 2-10. Cover assemblies.
B OX MAKER 'S CERTIFICATE (F IG 2-13)
Each fiberboard box will be plainly marked with the box maker's certificate,
signifying compliance with the requirements of the applicable freight
classificat ion ru les. Type CF an d type SF, class domest ic boxes are not
required to be mar ked as being in compliance with ASTMs. There is no
objection to marking boxes that are manufactured in compliance with the
specification. Types CF a nd SF, class weath er-resistant boxes, in addition to
the box maker's name, will be marked with the date of manufacture
expressed in month an d year, su ch as 7-93; th e identification symbol, such a s
V3s; and the specification compliance data and the minimum average
burst ing strength gua ra nteed in excess of....PSI. The figure to be inserted
should be that corresponding to the dry mullen requirements in ASTM D
4727 for the part icular grade of fiberboar d used. For shipments to
Government agencies include the national stock number (NSN), inside
dimensions and outside cube marked below the specification data on allexterior boxes procur ed as an item of supply.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 108/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-20
Figur e 2-11. Use of fiberboar d sleeve.
Figur e 2-12. Use of fiberboar d liner .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 109/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-21
Figur e 2-13. Sam ple of box ma ker 's cert ificat e.
C lo s u r e R e q u i r e m e n t s
All boxes should be securely closed. Inn er an d outer flaps of slotted style
boxes should be drawn together as closely as possible to insure proper
closure. The length wise flaps should m eet on (RSC, CSSC, DSC) or overlap
on (OSC, CSOSC, FOL, SFF ), as specified. The flaps sh ould not pr oject over
the side or end edges, and th e application of adh esive or meta l stitches should
be such as to prevent lifting of free edges and corners of outer flaps on
assem bled boxes. ASTM D 1974, sta nd ar d pra ctice for meth ods of closing,
sealing, and reinforcing fiberboard shipping containers describes several
methods to close seal and reinforce solid and corrugated (excluding triple
wall) fiberboard .
Solid and corrugated fiberboard (excluding triple wall) boxes will use the
methods for closure, sealing, and reinforcing which are described in ASTM D
1974, Standard Practice for Methods of Closing, Sealing and Reinforcing
Fiberboar d Shipp ing Conta iner s. The ASTM lists, by box style, th e
appr opriate closur e meth od use of adhesives, tape, stitches/staples. For each
methods listed, details concerning the amount of adhesive required, or the
type and size of tape used, or the number pattern of stitches/staples for thatmet hods ar e ind icat ed. For exam ple, to close a 12" wide (inside width ) RSC
container for governmen t use, u sing stitches/staples, ASTM D 1974 indicat es
a closur e method 2D3 may be used. The staples must have a 1/2" crown an d
be evenly distributed where the inner and outer flaps overlay each other.
The number of 1/2" staples required to close the container is taken from the
ASTM D 1974 ta ble one referenced in th e 2D3 met hod. (See ta ble 2-7). The
left column of the ASTM D 1974 table indicates the inside width of the box -
in our exam ple 12". Read to the right from our box width u ntil it int ersects
with th e colum n for closur e meth od 2D3. Ten 1/2" staples or fasten ers ar e
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 110/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-22
required for each end of the box. The pat tern required for even distribut ion
per closure met hod 2D3 is indicat ed in figure 2-14. Figur es 2-15 thr ough 2-
19 provide examp les of th e closure met hods for fiberboar d boxes.
There are four methods of box sealing, Methods A through D (fig 2-19). They
are described in section 7 of ASTM D 1974. Within each sealing method, the
type of material authorized, its size, and its location on the box are specified.
Appl ica t ion of re in forcem en t (f igur e 2-20)
When only one band is required on a box in given direction, it shall be
centered except in the case of lengthwise bands on styles RSC and CSSC
boxes. On t hese styles the lengthwise band sh all be offset slightly from th e
seam formed by th e top and bottom flaps in th e closed position. When t wo or
more bands are used around the box in the same direction they shall divide
the box int o units of equal length. Cross banded boxes shall have th e longer
ban d applied first . Boxes carr ying loads having rest ricted point s of cont act
shall be banded, wherever pra cticable, over these points of contact. Bands
shall be applied straight an d shall be sufficiently tensioned. Metal bands
shall be embedded into the edges of the box, but shall not cut or tear the
fiberboard or crush th e contents. When a sleeve is specified the ban ds sha llbe applied after the sleeve is placed on the box.
Metallic an d nonmeta llic stra pping requirement s are listed in ta ble 2-8. The
required n umber of reinforcing ban ds ar e identified in t able 2-9.
Figur e 2-14. Closur e of class weat her -resista nt a nd WWVR fiberboard boxes with ad hesive
an d/or stitches.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 111/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-23
Table 2-7 Nu mber of 2 in. Crown Sta ples or St itches for Regular Slotted Container s
Inside Width of
Box in A
Num ber of Fa sten ers a t Ea ch End of Box, by Method
2D1,
Commercial,Fig 5
2S2, Rule 41,
Fig. 6
2D3
Government, Fig7
6 2 2 6
7 2 4 6
9 4 6 6
10 4 6 8
11 4 6 8
12 4 8 10
14 6 10 12
16 6 10 14
17 6 12 14
18 6 12 16
19 8 14 16
20 8 14 18
22 8 16 20
24 10 16 22
A One in ch = 25.4 mm
Nu mber of Wide Crown Stap les or St itches for Regular Slotted Conta iners
Inside Width of
Box in A
Num ber of Fa sten ers a t Ea ch End of Box, by Method
2D4,
Commercial,
2D5, Old
Rule 41, Fig
2D6,
Government, Fig
8 1 1 4
10 2 2 5
12 2 2 6
14 2 2 8
16 2 4 9
18 2 4 10
20 2 4 11
22 3 5 12
24 3 5 14
26 3 5 15
A One in ch = 25.4 mm
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 112/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-24
Figur e 2-15. Closur e meth ods of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 113/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-25
Figur e 2-16. Closur e meth ods for fiberboard boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 114/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-26
Figur e 2-17. Closur e meth ods for fiberboard boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 115/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-27
Figur e 2-18. Closur e meth ods of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 116/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-28
Figur e 2-19. Closur e meth ods of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 117/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-29
Table 2-8. Meta llic an d nonmet allic str app ing requ iremen ts. IAW ASTM D 4675.Gross weight of
container and contentsASTM D3953/ ASTM D4675
AS TM D3950 Non m et a lic B AS TM D38 53 Zin c Ga lve nize d
(Pounds) Type I Type II Type III Grade 1 Grade 2
Up t o 35 1/4 x 0.015
5/16 x 0.012
5/8 x 0.010
3/8 x 0.015
3/8 x 0.018
or 1/4 x 0.025
or
0.027
7/16 x 0.017
1/2 x 0.015
16-1/2 16-1/2
Over 35 t o 70, in cl. 3/8 x 0.015
A/
3/8 x 0.015
3/8 x 0.024
or
1/4 x 0.025
or
0.027
or
7/16 x0.025
7/16 x 0.017
1/2 x 0.015
16 15
Over 70 t o 110, in cl. 3/8 x 0.020
1/2 x 0.015
1/2 x 0.015
3/8 x 0.020
7/16 x 0.025
or
1/2 x 0.022
1/2 x 0.015
7/16 x 0.017
14 13
Over 110 t o 225 in cl. 1/2 x 0.020
5/8 x 0.015
1/2 x 0.020
5/8 x 0.015
7/16 x 0.025
7/16 x 0.023
1/2 x 0.020
13
A Size 1/4 by 0.015 in str ap m ay us ed for Type 1 loads an d FTC boxes of frozen foods.
B / Other t ype and sizes may be applicable.
Table 2-9. Required nu mber of rein forcing bands
Direction of bands1
Lengthwise Gir thwise Hor izontal2
Out side width of box Number of bands (min)3
Outside length of box
Number of bands(min)3
Ou t sid e d ep th of box N um be r of b an ds(min)3
Inches Inches Inches
Up to 9............................. None Up to 20 1 Up to 18 None
Over 9 to 18..................... 1 20 to 30, incl. 2 18 t o 30, incl. 1
Over 18 t o 30................... 2 Over 30 t o 48 3 Over 30 t o 48 2
Over 30 t o 48................... 3 Over 48 to 60 4
Over 48............................ Over 604 Over 484
1 Lengt hwise--Encircling top, bottom, and ends, Girth wise--En circling top, bottom, and sides. Horizonta l--En circling
sides and ends.
Note tha t the location of the openings determines t he designation of the panels, rath er tha n norma l storage position.
2 Horizonta l bands a re only occasionally required. where contents exert severe pressur e on vertical score lines, they
should be used.
3 Full telescope-style boxes, having corners not otherwise sealed to bodies, will usually require use of one or more
additional bands, both lengthwise and girthwise when dimensions approach the upper range of the size brackets listed
in above table. Additional bands, when required, will be specified by the pr ocuring a gency.4 As directed by the procuring agency.
NOTE
Reinforcement may be omitted from class weather-resistant boxes containing
non-perishable subsistence items and clothing which are to be palletized or
containerized An exception to this is nonperishable subsistence materiel
consigned to the Naval Supply Center at Norfolk and Oakland for subsequent
tran sfer at sea.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 118/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-30
Figur e 2-20. Str app ing of fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 119/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-31
R e u s e a n d C o n s e r v a t i o n o f F i b e r b o a r d B o x e s
It is important that attention be given to the reuse and conservation of
fiberboar d boxes. This mu st be looked up on from an economical sta ndp oint .
If care is used in opening incoming fiberboard boxes, some of them may be
reused as interior intermediate containers, but never as exterior shipping
cont ain ers, with t he exception of good V-board boxes. The condition of th e
box is a big factor in its reus e. No box tha t ha s been cut, torn, pierced, ordama ged by water or moistur e should be reused. If used, V-board boxes are
included in th is cat egory, they may be reused for domestic shipment s. Used
boxes shall have all old markings pertaining to previous shipments
oblitera ted before reu se as int erior or exterior cont ain ers. If th e whole boxes
cannot be reused, consideration should be give to the use of clean, sound
fiberboar d a s ma ter ial for one of the following a pplicat ions:
Fa brication of blocking an d bra cing. Blocking an d bracing ar e used to
prevent movement of the item within the container, contact of items among
themselves (when more than one is packed in a shipping container), or
contact of an item with t he faces of the conta iner.
Fa brication of die-cut s, cells, tra ys, pads, et c., for cushioning pu rposes.Triple-wall Corr uga ted F iberboard Boxes (ASTM D 5168)
TRI P LE-WALL COR RU GATED FI BER BOARD BOXES (ASTM D 5168)
DESCRIP TION AND C HARACTERISTICS
A triple-wall corrugated fiberboard box is a container made of triple-wall
corr uga ted fiberboard in accorda nce with ASTM D 5168. Triple-wall
corrugated fiberboard consists of three corrugated sheets laminated to four
flat facings (fig. 2-3) resulting in a thick, relatively sturdy structural
mat erial. Boxes made of this mat erial have t he following char acteristics:
• They are especially suited for difficult, heavy loads that require
exceptionally large containers.
• They are extremely resistant to sudden forces such as those
encoun tered wh en th e box is dropped.
• They have a high resistance to compression and can sustain heavy
loads for long periods of time.
• They are lighter in weight and smaller in cube than wooden
conta iners ma de for the sam e items.
• They have certain inherent cushioning characteristics due to the
corr ugated st ock from wh ich th ey are ma de.
The fire-retar dan t requ irement s of boxes are inten ded to reduce losses due to
fire destruction.
Classes an d Styles. Triple-wall, corr uga ted fiberboar d boxes ar e fur nish ed in
th e following classes, styles, an d typ es of end s:
Nonweather resistant .
Weather resistant.
Fire-retardant.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 120/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-32
Style A - One-piece fiberboard, five-pan el, with one of four types of ends , an d
with end s inser ted in box body (fig 2-21).
Style B - One-piece fiberboard , five-panel, with one of four types of ends , an d
with end s inser ted in box body overlapped on box ends (fig 2-21).
Style C - Two-piece fiberboard, three-panel, with one of four types of ends,an d with end s inser ted in box body overlap ped on th e box ends (fig 2-21).
Style D - Two-piece fiberboard, three-panel, with one of four types of ends,
and with en ds insert ed with outside edges of the box body overlapped on box
ends (fig 2-22).
Style E - A regular slotted fiberboard box conforming to style RSC ASTM D
5118. The body (man ufacturer's) joint should be 2 inches wide, crush ed, and
stapled on a slant n ot more than 1 inch ap art (fig 2-22). The corru gations of
that portion of the side panel in which the body joints overlap shall also be
cru shed. Style E boxes may also be mad e with a 1 1/2-inch crush ed overlap
on the t op and bottom pan el of the box. This is called an a lterna te st yle E box.
Style F - A full t elescopic fiberboard box, consistin g of a body an d a cover each
of one-piece slott ed an d scored t riple-wall fiberboard . The inside dept h of th e
cover sh all be t he overa ll depth of th e body (fig 2-22).
Style G - Ha lf regu lar slotted box with short top flaps a nd cover. Style G box
is similar to style F, except that all the top flaps are 4 inches long and are
crush ed-rolled 1 1/2-inches at th e edges. A cover, at least 6 inches deep,
forms the top of the cont ainer. The cover may be constr ucted so that t he end
and side flanges form a butt joint at each of the four corners (fig 2-23), or it
may be made with end or side flaps which are stapled to the adjacent flange
of th e top.
Wood End s
There are four types of wood or wood-cleated panel ends that can be used
with st yles A, B, C, an d D triple-wall, corru gate d fiberboar d boxes. The wood
used to fabricate the ends m ust conform to wood groups I a nd II as
set forth in PP P-B-621. The en ds ar e of th e following designs (fig 2-24).
Nu mber 1 end--A single piece of nomin al 2-inch lumber .
Number 2 end--Two thicknesses of nominal 1-inch lumber with the grain at
right angles, the two thicknesses securely joined by clinched nails, and no
piece less tha n 2 1/2 inches in width.
Number 3 end--Nominal 1-inch material with a nominal 1-inch thick cleatminim um width of 2 1/4 inches, securely joined by clinched n ailing.
Number 4 end--Cleated panel ends consisting of two sets of overlapped cleats
with a pan el of triple-wall corrugat ed fiberboard. The cleats sha ll be nominal
1-inch thick, 2 1/4 inches wide, and shall be assembled with clinched nailing.
The fiberboard shall be fastened to the inside of the cleats with either nails
or staples.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 121/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-33
Figur e 2-21. Styles A, B an d C tr iple-wall corru gat ed fiberboard boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 122/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-34
Figur e 2-22. Styles D, E, an d F, triple-wall corr uga ted fiberboard boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 123/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-35
Figur e 2-23. Style G tr iple-wall corru gat ed fiberboard box.
Figure 2-24. Types of ends to be used with styles A through D triple-wall corrugated fiberboard
boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 124/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-36
Li m i t a t i ons
Maximum weight and size limitations for triple-wall corrugated fiberboard
boxes ar e not given in ASTM D 5168. When tr iple-wall, corr uga ted
fiberboard boxes are to be used for commodities covered in Rule 41 of the
Uniform Freight Classification and item 222 of the National Motor Freight
Classification, the su m of the inside length, width , and depth shall not exceed
125 inches. Conta iners exceeding th ese limitations must be made un der aspecial package per mit.
Sea l i ng
When sealing against the entry of water or dust is required, all seams and
joints of the boxes shall be covered with minimum 2-inch tape conforming to
ASTM D 5486, Type V. Closur e of slotted boxes is frequ ent ly done pr ior t o
sealing.
Cl os u r e
The kinds of closure for triple-wall, corrugated fiberboard boxes will depend
on the style of box to be used, and may be made by means of nails, staples,
steel straps, filament-reinforced tape, or a combination of these materials.
When nails are used for closure or for fastening blocking and bracingmembers t o the inter ior of the boxes, it is recommen ded th at each na il should
pass through an oversize washer, piece of banding, or clips designed to
prevent pu lling of th e nail heads thr ough the triple-wall mat erial. Whenever
rein forcing needed , DOD personn el may u se ASTM D 3950, ASTM D 3953, or
ASTM D 4675.
Closur e of s ty le A boxes
This style may be closed with zinc-coated or copper-washed staples, with
divergent points an d minimu m dimen sions of 14 gauge wire, 3/4 inch crown,
and 1 1/4 inch legs; with flat, Type I, Class A or B, 5/8 inch wide and 0.018
inch thick steel straps conforming to ASTM D 3953 or with nonmetal
strapping in accordance with ASTM D 3950, Type I or II (when Type I is used
it shall be Grade B) with a nominal width of 5/8 inch; or with pressure-
sensitive, filament-reinforced tape meeting the requirements of ASTM D
5330, Type III, 1/2-inch wide, except for Styles E and F, which shall be 1 inch
wide. On weat her-resistan t boxes, the ASTM D 5330 tape sh all be Type IV,
3/4 inch wide, except for Styles E a nd F , which sha ll be 1 inch wide.
Using n a i l s for c losur e of s ty le A boxes
When nails or staples are used, they shall be spaced not more than 2 inches
apar t an d staggered as permitt ed by the th ickness of the ends of the box. The
nails or staples shall extend through each thickness of fiberboard and into
th e wood ends. If th e box is 24 inches long, a st rip of filamen t-reinforced tape
shall be placed at the center of the outside top flap so as to extend onto the
top flap 5 inches and onto the side panel 5 inches. For length great er th an 24inches, one such strip will be added for each additional 18 inch increment of
length greater t han 24 inches. The total number of strips will be spaced
even ly (fig 2-25).
Us i ng s t r ap s f or c lo s u r e o f s t y le A boxes
When steel or nonmetal straps are used, one band will be placed at each end
of th e box to encircle th e top, sides, an d bottom of th e box. The st ra ps will be
placed not more than 3 inches in from the ends to bear evenly on the wood
ends. If the box is 24 inches long, a stra p will be added at the center.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 125/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-37
Filament -reinforced tape may be used in lieu of th is additional str ap. For
lengths greater than 24 inches, one such strap will be added for each
additional 18 inches of length an d placed so that th ey are evenly spaced (fig
2-25).
Us i ng Tap e Fo r C l os u r e Of St y l e A Boxes
When filament-reinforced tape is used, a 10-inch strip will be placed 2 inchesin from each end of th e box. For boxes 24 inches long an over, additiona l
strip requiremen t ar e the same as for steel strapping. All the tape strips will
be applied perpendicular to the joint formed by the top flap a nd t he side wall
of th e box. They will be cent ered over th e joint a nd exten d 5 inches onto th e
top flap an d 5 inches on t he side wa ll (fig 2-25).
Closur e Of Sty le B Boxes
Style B boxes may be closed with nails or staples in the same manner as
Style A boxes; but, in addition, a staggered row of nails or staples, spaced not
more than 2 inches apart, must be driven through the overlap portion of the
top flap into the face of the wood ends. When u sing steel straps or filamen t-
reinforced tape for closure, the same requirements as given for Style A boxes
also apply to Style B (fig 2-25).
Closur e of S ty le C Boxes
This style of box will be closed along the top and sides by means of nails,
staples, or steel straps as specified for Style A boxes, except when using nails
or staples they will be spaced not more than 2 inches apart and staggered
and driven th rough t he t op one-half of the box into th e wooden en ds along the
two end edges of each side panel and both end edges of the top panel (fig 2-
26).
Closur e of S ty le D Boxes
This style of box shall be closed along the top and sides by means of nails,
sta ples, or steel str aps a s specified for style A. In ad dition, a stagger ed row of
nails or staples sha ll be driven t hrough th e overlapping top flaps in to the face
of th e wooden ends. For boxes 24 inches long and longer, str ips of ta pe will
be applied as for style A box (fig 2-26).
Closur e of S ty le E Boxes
Style E boxes may be closed by the use of staples, steel or nonmetallic
stra pping, or with t ape.
C lo s u r e w i t h S t a p le s
Staples will not be used for boxes fabricated with class weather-resistant
fiberboard. Stap les are placed not more than 1 1/2 inches, or less tha n 1 inch,
from the free edge of th e flap. Spa cing ar ound t he edge of each flap is not
more tha n 5 inches, center -to-center of the st aples. Additiona l staples are sospaced with in th e boun dar ies outlined by the edge sta ples so tha t n o area will
have a diameter greater than 4 inches without a staple, with a minimum
nu mber of eight st aples in each flap. Sta ples are flat wire, 0.050 inch th ick,
0.085 inch wide, with a 1 1/4-inch crown (fig 2-27).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 126/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-38
Figur e 2-25. Closur e of styles A an d B, tr iple-wall corru gat ed
fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 127/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-39
Figur e 2-26. Closur e of styles C an d D, tr iple-wall corru gate d
fiberboar d boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 128/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-40
Cl os u r e Wi t h M e t a l o r Nonm e t a l li c S t r a pp i n g
The requirem ents for closur e with str apping is th e sam e as for style A boxes,
except th at a lengthwise stra p may be applied to hold the girthwise stra p flat
(fig 2-27).
Cl os u r e Wi t h Tap eA 12-inch strip is applied to each end of the two top and bottom flaps so that
6 inches of each strip is attached to the flap and 6 inches of each strip is
att ached the end pan el. The strips are located adjacent to the inner length
edge of th e flaps, appr oxima tely 2 inches from th is edge. The use of
add itional st rips will be specified for style A boxes.
Cl os u r e o f S t y le F Boxes
This style may be closed with steel or nonmetallic straps or filament-
reinforced tape. When str aps a re used, th ey will be applied as described for
style E boxes. When ta pe is used, one str ip will be used on each side and
each end. The str ips will be not less than 12 inches long and will be applied
at t he center of th e side and end pa nels and exten d to the bottom of the box.
When t he length of th e box is 24 inches, an additional strip will be added toeach side and the two will be evenly spaced. Additional strips a s requ ired for
length will be added to the ends wh en t he box is 24 inches or great er in width
(fig 2-28).
Closur e of S ty le G Boxes
When this box is used in conjunction with a pallet, closure and sealing will be
as specified by the procur ing activity. Without a pa llet, an additional strip
will be added to each side an d th e box will be closed with str aps. One st rap
will be centr ally located a round the top, ends, and bottom. Two straps will be
applied around the top, sides, and bottom, at a distance from the ends equal
to thr ee-four ths th e length of th e inn er flaps. If th e distan ce between the
straps exceeds 24 inches, additional straps will be spaced not more than 24
inches a par t (fig 2-29).
P a p e r b o a r d B o x es
Paper boar d boxes are mainly used for inter ior pa cking. They are a vailable in
various types, styles, and sizes, and must conform to requiremen ts of PPP -B-
566, and PP P-B-676. In man y instan ces, depending upon the item, a
paperboard box may be used in packing when u tilizing par cel post. For
fur th er det ails on pa perboard boxes, see FM 38-700.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 129/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-41
Figur e 2-27. Closur e of style E, tr iple-wall fiberboard box.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 130/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-42
Figur e 2-28. Closur e of style F, tr iple-wall fiberboard box.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 131/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
2-43
Figur e 2-29. Closur e of G style triple-wall fiberboard box.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 132/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-1
CHAPTER 3
WOODEN CONTAINERS AND PALLETSCONTAINER MATER IALS
WOOD AS A CONTAINER MATERIAL
Wood is particularly valuable as a container material because of its high
stren gth-weight ra tio which compares favora bly with mild steel. Tests and
experience have shown that the strength of a wooden container depends
largely upon th e type of wood used in its const ru ction. The du ra bility of wood
and its ability to withstand shock and impact stresses are important
properties in the selection of wood for containers. Military Handbook MIL-
HDBK-7, "Lumber and Allied Products", provides a ready source of
information on wood products normally procured in considerable quantity for
Depart ment of Defense installations. This handbook is not intended forreference in purchase specifications or other contractual documents.
However, it will assist mat erially with installation r equisitioning, receiving,
inspection, stora ge, an d ha ndling of cont ain er wood ma ter ials. Also see
ASTM D 6436, Quality of Wood Members for Cont ain ers a nd P allets.
Wood Gr oup s
All woods fall into two gener al categories: Eith er softwoods, which come from
coniferous or needle-bearing trees; or hardwoods, which come from broad-
leafed trees. For pu rp oses of cont ainer const ru ction, wood is divided int o four
groups based on nail holding power, tendency to split, comparative strength
as a beam , and shock resisting capacity (fig 3-1). Over 90 percent of all
wooden containers are made from Group I and II woods however, the
materials given in Section 3 of the applicable container specification must be
used. When a wood group is specified in t he cont ract, an y species in t ha t
group ma y be selected.
G r o u p I includes the softer woods such as white fir, ponderosa pine, yellow
poplar, cottonwood, cedar, an d oth ers. These woods ar e relatively free from
splitting when being nailed, have a moderate nail-holding power, moderate
stren gth as a beam, an d moderate shock resisting capacity.
G r o u p I I includes the harder soft woods such as Douglas fir, southern pine,
hemlock, and larch. They have great er nail-holding power tha n th e Group I
woods, as well as greater st rength an d shock resisting capa city. Group II
woods are more inclined to split, the grain often deflects nails and causesthem to run out at the side of the piece.
G r o u p I I I includes the medium density har dwoods. Ash, elm, an d cherr y
are exam ples. These are similar t o Group II woods in n ail-holding power an d
strength a s a beam, but have less tendency to split and sh atter under impact.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 133/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-2
Figur e 3-1. Cha ra cteristics for the classificat ions of wood.
G r o u p I V includes th e tru e har dwoods such as oak, har d maple, and h ickory.
These woods have the greatest shock resistance and nail-holding power, are
extremely strong, but ar e very susceptible to splitting. They are t he hea viest
and ha rdest woods, an d ar e difficult to work.
Wood Defec t s
All boards should be cut t o the correct length an d be free from a ll defects t ha t
materially weaken them, expose the contents of the box to damage, or
inter fere with t he pr escribed fabr icat ion or n ailing (fig 3-2).
Knot s . Knots in wood are most weaken ing when located in the m iddle third
of the length of the board. Across the width of th e board , the weaken ing
effect is proportional to the effective diameter of the knots, measured as
shown in fig 3-3. No knot, or series of kn ots across the face of the board ,
within a length equal to the width of the board, shall have a diameter or sum
of diameter s great er tha n one third th e width of the board. No knot will
exceed 4 inches when m easur ed across the width of th e board .
Slope o f g r a i n . Any board with a slope of grain st eeper th an a r atio of 1 in
10 of length is not perm issible. Figur e 3-2 shows the resu lts of excessive
slope or cross gra in.
M oi s t u r e C o n t e n t
It is importan t th at t he moisture conten t of lumber requ ired by an applicable
cont aine r specification be followed. High moistu re cont ent in lum ber will
cause excessive tar e weight. Shr inkage, due to the loss of high moisture
content in the boards of a nailed wood box will cause gaps between the pieces
of lumber. Shrinkage will also cause the loss of nail holding-power, splitting
of the lum ber at t he na ils, and th e loosening of stra ps. Moisture cont ent is
determ ined by the u se of electric moistur e meter s or by th e oven dr y meth od,
as out lined in ASTM D 2016.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 134/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-3
M ois t u r e Me t e r M e t h od
The moisture meter method is faster than the oven dry method, but less
accura te. A moistur e met er consists essentia lly of an electrical device
designed to measure the resistance or the capacitance of the wood between
two electrodes in conta ct with t he sam ple. The values obtained will vary with
the wa ter cont ent of th e wood. They will also vary as a result of a n umber of
other factors, most important of which are they temperature of the wood, itsspecies, and density. Although correction tables are furnished with each
instrument which must be used for even approximations of true values, the
readings obtained are still only appr oximations because th e effect of th e other
variables cannot be determined with scientific accuracy. Instruments of this
type can not be used where a n a ccur acy of plus or minu s 1 percent is required.
In view of this, the moisture m eter m ethod is primar ily usable for screening
inspections of large lots of lumber, while the oven dry method is almost
always resorted to in th e event of disputes. The meter used should be
capable of giving instantaneous readings of moisture content within a range
of 7 to 20 percent, and should be equipped with correction tables to permit
the correction of meter readings for temperature, species, and density. The
meter should be adjusted prior to use in accordance with the manufacturer's
instru ctions. When a series of readings are being made, the adjustm ent
should be checked periodically. Batt eries should be replaced whenever initial
adjustm ent can not be accomplished, or whenever it is obvious t ha t ina ccur ate
readings a re being obtained because of weak ba tter ies. The following general
precautions sh ould be observed:
Figur e 3-2. Wood defects.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 135/399
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 136/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-5
O v e n D r y M e t h o d
Use a dr ying oven capable of mainta ining a consta nt temper atu re of 212oF. to
221oF., and a scale that is acura te to within one-half of 1 percent. To
determ ine th e moisutre content, u se th e following procedure:
• Cut off a least the first 12 inches of the piece in order to avoid the
effects of end d rying.• As soon as possible, cut off a piece approximately 1 inch the full
thickness by the full width of the piece.
• Immediately after sawing, remove all loose splinters and determine
W, the weight before drying.
• Place th e wood in the h ot oven and leave overnight. The next day,
weigh the specimen and replace in the oven. Repeat at 2-hour
intervals until the weight is the same at the end of two successive 2-
hour periods. This will occur after approximat ely 24 hour s. If more
than one, specimen must be open-piled in the oven to allow free
access of air to all pa rt s of th e pieces.
• The final weight of the piece immediately after removal from the oven
is D, the oven dr y weight.
• Calculate the percentage of moisture content by using the following
formula:
(W-D)
_____X100=% Moisture
W
OT H E R MATERIAL SKIDS USED IN C ONTAINER C ONSTRUCTION
The following additional materials are used in container construction as
applicable.
Na ils (ASTM F 1667-95)
These may be box, corker, sinker, cooler, or common nails. Sinker and cooler
nails are relatively slender, can be driven into denser woods and withstand
shocks well. The h eads do not brea k off or pull thr ough th e wood easily (fig
3-4). The resistan ce of na ils to withd rawa l varies with a n umber of factors
such as the hardness or density of the wood, surface condition of the nails
and t he shape an d form of na ils. Dense woods hold nails much better th an
soft woods. To get th e same na il str engt h with softer woods, more na ils or
larger na ils are r equired. The use of chemically etched or coated n ails is
part icularly importa nt with soft woods. Resistance of na ils to withdr awal
also varies with the area of contact of the nail with the wood, increasing
directly with the diameter of th e nail an d the depth of penetr ation. Nails
may be subjected to forces which withdraw them directly, that is, in the
direction of th eir length, or to forces which displace th em later ally. Na ils
offer greater resistance to lateral displacement than to direct withdrawal.Cement coating or etching increases the resistance of nails in direct
withdrawal more than in lateral withdrawal, since the nail shank is distorted
in lateral withdrawal about the same, whether coated or uncoated. Etched
nail sur faces ha ve certa in adva nta ges over cement coated surfaces. The effect
of etching in increasing withdr awal r esistance is relatively perma nen t, while
cement coatings deteriorate a few months after nailing. Etched nails are
effective with woods of all densities, while cement coatings tend to rub off
when n ails are driven into dense woods. Here is a simple procedur e for
etching na ils. Pr epar e a 10 percent solution (by weight) of comm ercial
monoammonium phosphate in water . Do not use meta l conta iner for
prepar ing or storing the solution. Keep the solution nea r room temper atu re
(about 68o). Immer se the nails in th e solution for about 7 hours, stirring
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 137/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-6
occasiona lly. Five gallons of solution is sufficient to etch a bout 100 poun ds of
nails and rinse with wat er. Fina lly, airdry the na ils to prevent ru sting.
Screws (FF-S-111) Sometimes it is particularly desirable to use screws for
closing wooden boxes when the contents are such that they need to be
checked, lubricated, or inspected.
Cor r uga t ed Fa s t ene r s (FF -F-133)Corrugated fasteners are used in the construction of built-up faceboards in
wooden boxes (figure 3-11). When u sed for this pur pose, na iling ma chine
opera tors do not have to align each board prior to nailing. Corru gated
fasteners also help to prevent pilferage of contents during storage or
shipment.
.
Figur e 3-4. Na ils.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 138/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-7
Sta ple (ASTM F 1667)
Staples are used to atta ch cleats to panels on cleated-panel boxes. Stap les
with crowns not less than one-ha lf inch must be long enough to penetr ate t he
thickness of both the panel material and the cleat with a minimum clinch of
one-eighth of an inch.
Wi r e F a s t e n e r s
Fasteners, other than nails, and staples, may be used to attach cleats toplywood or veneer pa nels. They must pr ovide later al displacement equa l to
tha t of na ils properly spaced an d driven. Wire fasten ers are form ed and
driven by ma chine from a roll of knu rled wire.
S t r a p p i n g
Either flat metal or round wire conforming to ASTM D 3953, ASTM D 4675,
and ASTM D 3950, to strap wooden cont ainers.
P lyw ood (A-A-55057)
Plywood used for boxes, either for domestic or oversea destinations, shall be
as specified in th e procur ement docum ent or other directive establishing th e
container requirements. Plywood will be purchased in accordance with A-A-
55057.
Fiberboard (ASTM-D-4727)
For oversea cleated pan el boxes, solid V-board with a minimum dry bur sting
stren gth of 400 pounds is th e only mater ial au thorized. For domestic cleated
panel boxes, either solid fiberboard, solid pulp-board, or double-faced
corrugat ed boar d may be used.
P a p e r O v e r l a i d Ve n e e r
This material, made of thin veneer covered on both faces with heavy kraft
paper, is used as panelling material for paper overlaid veneer boxes,
conforming to PP P-B-576.
NAILED AND LOCK-COR NER WOOD BOXES (P P P -B-621)
DESCRIP TION AND SELECTION
The nailed wood box is constructed of wood, assembled by fastening the top,
sides, and bottom to the ends with nails, or by gluing the lock-corners of the
sides an d ends and fasten ing them to the top and bottom with nails. The
placement of cleats on the ends or the lack of cleats determines the style of
box. Na iled wood boxes will not be u sed if fiberboard or less expen sive light -
weight boxes will provide ad equat e protection for shipment and storage.
C HARACTERISTICS
Nailed wood boxes are satisfactory shipping containers for supplies and
equipment, especially for items that ar e susceptible to dam age. Thesecontainers ha ve th e following favorable an d u nfavora ble cha racteristics.
• Favorable char acteristics.
ο Maximum protection to contents a gainst dam age due to punctur e,
distortion, and brea kage.
ο Ability to support loads due to stacking during transit and
storage.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 139/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-8
ο Ability to contain difficult loads without undue distortion.
ο Adapt ability to complex wood blocking an d bra cing.
ο Adaptability to varying strengths by adjusting the style of box,
thickness of materials, and group of wood.
ο Easy workability an d simple constr uction.
• Unfavorable char acteristics.
ο High tar e weight an d cube.
ο Not watertight.
ο Tendency to crack.
Cl as s an d Gr ad es ( F i g 3-5 )
The classes of na iled wood boxes ar e--
• Class 1, dom estic boxes. These boxes are subject to storage,
rehandling, or shipment to domestic destinations in which no sea
tra nsporta tion is involved. Net weight is limited to a m aximum of 600
poun ds (see tables 3-1 and 3-2).
•
Class 2, oversea boxes. These boxes are subject to storage,reha ndling, or reshipment to offshore and oversea destinat ions. Net
weight is limited to a ma ximum of 1,000 poun ds. Class 2 boxes (all
styles) sha ll be fur nish ed in the following grad es, as specified. When
no grade is specified in the contract, purchase order, or other
procur ement documen t, Grad e B sha ll be supplied (see ta bles 3-3 and
3-4).
ο Grad e A--With pr eservative treatm ent.
ο Grade B--Without preservative treatment.
St y l e s an d L i m i t a t i ons
Class 1 and 2 boxes are described simultaneously, as applicable, in the
covera ge of th e box styles. Styles 1, 2, 2 1/2, 4, 4 1/2, 5, 6, and 7 ar e perm itted
for Class 1 (domestic) and Styles 2, 2 1/2, 4, 4 1/2, 5, and 7 are permitted forClass 2 (oversea ) shipm ent s. Weight limita tions for each class, as applicable,
ar e given un der t he des cription of each st yle of box.
St yle 1 Bo x (fig 3-6)
Style 1 box is ident ified by lack of cleat s on th e end faceboar ds a nd single line
na iling of sides to ends, and of top an d bott om to ends a nd sides. Style 1 box
is inten ded for domestic shipment s only. It is restricted to Type 1 an d 2
loads . Style 1 box may n ot exceed a load limit of 50 poun ds for t wo-piece
sides an d 100 poun ds for one-piece sides. Direction of th e grain on St yle 1
box must r un in th e direction of the gr eatest dimension. This box is limited
to a height of 10 inches a nd t otal dimensions (length, width, a nd d epth) of 50
inches.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 140/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-9
Figur e 3-5. Classes of na iled wood boxes.
St yle 2 Bo x (fig 3-6)
Style 2 box is identified by two vertical and two horizontal cleats on each end.Vertical cleats are positioned at right an gles to the grain of the en d. They
are one-eighth of an inch shorter than the edge of the end at the top and
bottom. Horizont al cleats, which ar e placed para llel to th e grain of end, are
butt -joined to th e vertical cleats a nd a re flush with th e top and bottom edges
of the box. The top, bottom, an d sides extend over th e ends an d cleats an d
are na iled in a staggered patt ern. Thus, ther e is some side-grain na iling on
all edges. The cleat pat ter n provides ease of ha nd ling. Weight limita tion for
Style 2, Class 1 box (domestic) is 600 poun ds. Weight limitat ion for Style 2,
Class 2 (oversea) box is 1,000 poun ds.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 141/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-10
Figur e 3-6. Styles of na iled woods boxes.
St yle 2 1/2 Box (fig. 3-6)
Style 2 1/2 box is identified by two vertical notched cleats and two horizontal
cleats on each end. It has th e same advanta ges as the Style 2 box but is
slightly higher in cost. Vertical cleat s are notched appr oximat ely one-fourt h
to three-eighth s inch to support the horizont al cleats. Vertical cleats are
positioned one-eight h inch above th e bottom edge of th e end. Weight
limitat ion for St yle 2 1/2, Class 1 box (domestic) is 600 poun ds. Weight
limitat ion for St yle 2 1/2, Class 2 box (oversea ) is 1,000 poun ds.
St yle 4 Bo x (fig 3-7)
Style 4 box is ident ified by two vertical cleats on ea ch end. Vertical cleats ,
which are positioned at right angles to the grain of the end, are one-eighth
inch shorter th an t he outside surfaces of the t op and bottom of the box. The
top and bottom cover th e sides. They fit between the cleats a nd a re at tached
to the ends by stra ightline, side-grain n ailing. The sides overlap the ends
and cleats, providing for a staggered na iling patt ern. Weight limitation for
Style 4, Class 1 box (domestic) is 250 pounds. Weight limitation for Style 4,
Class 2 box (oversea ) is 400 pounds.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 142/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-11
St yle 4 1/2 Box (fig 3-7)
Style 4 1/2 box is identified by two horizont al end cleats. Horizonta l cleats ,
which are positioned at right angles to the grain of the end, are one-eighth
inch short er tha n th e out side surface of the sides. The sides extend over th e
ends, and p rovide for str aight-line, side-grain n ailing. The top and bottom
extend over the ends and cleats, an provide for both side- and end-grain
na iling. Weight limitat ions for both class es of boxes ar e the sa me as for Style
4 boxes.
St yle 5 Bo x (fig 3-7)
Style 5 box is identified by interior vertical cleats. The cleats extend to within
one-eight inch from the top and bottom edges of th e end of th e box. Oth er
than the placement of cleats, construction and nailing pattern for this
container is the same as for Style 4 box. The interior cleats may be
rectangular or triangular, provided the cross section area of the triangular
cleat is not less tha n th at of th e required rectangular cleat. Weight limitation
for St yle 5, Class 1 box (domestic) is 250 pound s. Weight limita tion for St yle
5, Class 2 box (oversea ) is 400 pounds.
St yle 6 Bo x (fig 3-7)
Style 6 box is identified by th e lockcorner const ru ction wh ich is glued. This
box has about th e same advan tages an d disadvanta ges as Style 1 box. Style 6
box is int end ed for domest ic shipm ent s only and Type 1 and 2 loads . This box
has a weight limitation of 50 poun ds, but m ay go to 100 pounds if the box has
one-piece sides.
St yle 7 Bo x (fig 3-8)
Style 7 box is an internally reinforced box consisting of a skidded base with a
separate hood assembled from the top, sides and ends. Style 7 boxes are for
contents ra nging from 100 to 1,000 poun ds. The contents mu st readily
permit at tachmen t to the skids. The base is assembled to 2 X 4 inch skids to
facilitat e moun ting to a skid base. The skids are positioned across the
extreme ends of the bottom pieces to permit attachment of all end pieces tothe skid edges. Vertical and horizontal framing members and reinforcing
members in the form of a rectangle, and cross diagonals, as applicable, are
att ached to th e int erior surfaces of the prefabricated box pan els. Fra ming
members a re requ ired when cont ents exceeds 250 poun ds or when side length
is greater t han end length.
End panels are identified by vertical sheathing which extends within one-
eighth of an in ch of each skid bottom. The hood assembly is placed over th e
item mounted to the base, then na iling and stra pping is accomplished. Style
7 boxes are int ended for both Class 1 a nd Class 2 u se.
Sh a l low Box (f ig 3-9)
When t he inside dept h of a box is five inches or less, cleats a re not u sed. If cleats were applied to shallow boxes, they would be so small tha t in at taching
them to the ends th ey would split. The end of th e box may be made of one
piece, or if the end is approximately square, it may be made of two pieces
placed so th at t he gra in ru ns in opposite directions. For Style 2, 2 1/2, 3, 4,
and 4 1/2 boxes, the th ickness of the ends sh all be not less th an th e combined
thickness of the en d and cleat, as specified. Slides overlap th e ends. Top an d
bottom overlap th e sides an d ends. Top, bottom, and sides are a tta ched to the
ends by sta ggered nailing. Weight limita tion is 1,000 poun ds for oversea
shipments.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 143/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-12
Cons t r uc t i on De t a i l s
When nailed wood boxes are built locally, use the following information for
constru cting and closing the various styles. If pur cha sed and r eceived in
shook form, the sides, top, an bottom will be ready to be attached to the
constru cted ends. Figure 3-10 shows the amoun t of acceptable splitting
allowed in th e component par ts.
Figur e 3-7. Styles of na iled wood boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 144/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-13
Figur e 3-8. Style 7 nailed wood box.
Figur e 3-9. Sh allow boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 145/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-14
Size of lum ber
The size of lumber used in nail wood box construction is found in tables 3-1,
3-2, 3-3, an d 3-4. Informa tion necessar y to use th ese tables is: Class of box,
type of load, n et weigh t, st yle of box, an d group of wood.
Figure 3-10. Split boar d ru les
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 146/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-15
Cons t r uc t i on Of Bu i l t -Up F aceboa r d P i ece s (F i g 3 -11)
The number of pieces in any side, top, bottom, or end will be chosen so that
no single solid piece or built-up piece shall be less than 2 1/2 inches in width
measu red across the face, an d will not exceed th e nu mber given in t able 3-5.
Built-up face-board pieces may be constructed according to the following
conditions:
• The Linderma n joint when glued.• Butt joints glued under pressure.
• Tongued a nd gr ooved joints glued und er pr essure.
• Tongued and grooved joints glued with two or more corrugated
fasteners d riven from one side.
• Tongued and grooved unglued joints with two or more corrugated
fasteners dr iven from alter na te sides.
Figur e 3-11. J oined pieces of lum ber.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 147/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-16
Table 3-1. Boxes for domest ic shipment , type 1 (easy) and t ype 2 (average) loads; thickness of sides, tops, bott oms, and en ds, and thickness
and widt h of cleats.
Weight of content sSt yle of Box6
Groups I an d II woods1 Groups III and I V woods2
Exceed-ing
Notexceeding
Thicknessof sides,tops, andbottoms
Thickness of ends
Thicknessand widthof cleats
Thicknessof sides,tops, andbottoms
Thicknessof ends
Thickness andwidth of cleats3
Pounds Pounds Inch Inch Inches Inch Inch Inches-- 50 1 3/8 1/2 -- 1/4 1/2 --
-- 50 4,4-1/2,5 3/8 1/2 1/2 by 2 1/4 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
-- 50 2 3/8 3/8 3/8 by 2 1/4 3/8 3/8 by 1-3/4
-- 50 6 3/8 1/2 -- 1/4 3/8 --
50 100 14 3/8 1 -- 3/8 3/4 --
50 100 4,4-1/2,5 3/8 5/8 5/8 by 3 3/8 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
50 100 2,2-1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 by 2 3/8 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
50 100 64 3/8 1 -- 3/8 1/2 --
100 250 4,4-1/2,5 1/2 5/8 5/8 by 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 2-1/4
100 250 2, 2-1/2,7 1/2 5/8 5/8 by 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
250 4005 2, 2-1/2,7 5/8 1 1 by 3 1/2 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
1Nominal. The dressed sizes of wood shall equal or exceed the m inimum sizes shown in Table I of 20-70. For th e purpose of this
specification, reference to STD 20-70 shall be limited to th e above.2Thickness toleran ce shall be " 1/16 inch for par ts 3/8 inch thick an d thicker, except as other wise specified. Thickness t olerance shall be +
1/16 - 1/32 inch for pieces less t han 3/8 inch t hick.3Width t olerance shall be " 1/16 inch, except a s other wise specified.4Providing the boxes have one-piece solid sides of sawed lumber a nd conten ts a re packed in inter ior container s.5When load t o be carried by th e box exceeds 400 pounds, u se Table 3-3; when load exceeds 600 pounds, us e Table 3-4.6Styles 2, 2-1/2, 4, 4-1/2 boxes. Unless oth erwise specified, when t he inside dept h of a box is 5 inches or less, end cleat s sha ll not be used.
Thickness of th e ends shall be not less tha n the combined thickness of the end an d cleat , as specified. Each side and end sha ll be mad e
from one piece, except when the end is approximately square, a two-piece end may be used with each end piece of approximately equal
thickness, and with t he grain of each piece runn ing at right angles to the other. Two-piece ends shall be nailed together with at least two
clinched na ils.
Table 3-2. Boxes for domest ic shipment , type 3 (difficult) loads; thickness of sides, top, bottoms, an d ends, an d th ickness and widt h of
cleats.
Weight of content sSt yle of Box5
Groups I an d II woods1 Groups III and I V woods2
Exceed-
in g
Not
exceeding
Thickness of
sides, tops,and bottoms
Thick-
ness of ends
Thickness
and widthof cleats
Thickness
of sides,tops, andbottoms
Thickness
of ends
Thickness a nd
width of cleats
3
Pounds Pounds Inch Inch Inches Inch Inch Inches
- 50 4,4-1/2,5 3/8 5/8 5/8 by 2 3/8 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
50 100 4,4-1/2,5 1/2 1 1 by 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
50 100 2,2-1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 by 2 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
100 250 4,4-1/2,5 5/8 1 1 by 3 1/2 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
100 250 2,2-1/2,7 5/8 1 1 by 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 2-1/4
250 400 2,2-1/2,7 1 1 1-1/4 by 4 3/4 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
400 6004 2,2-1/2,7 1 1 1-1/4 by 4 3/4 3/4 3/4 by 2-5/8
1Nominal. The dressed sized of the wood shall equa l or exceed the m inimum sizes shown in Table I of STD 20-70. For th e purpose of thisspecification, reference to STD 20-70 shall be limited to th e above.2 Thickness t olerance shall be " 1/16 inch, for part s 3/8 inch thick and t hicker un less otherwise specified.3Width t olerance shall be " 1/16 inch, unless other wise specified.4When load t o be carried by th e box exceeds 600 pounds , use Table 3-4.5Styles 2, 2-1/2, 4, 4-1/2 boxes. Unless oth erwise specified, when t he inside dept h of a box is 5 inches or less, end cleat s sha ll not be used.
Thickness of th e ends shall be not less tha n the combined thickness of the end an d cleat , as specified. Each side and end sha ll be mad e
from one piece, except when the end is approximately square, a two-piece end may be used with each end piece of approximately equal
thickness, and with t he grain of each piece runn ing at right angles to the other. Two-piece ends shall be nailed together with at least two
clinched na ils.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 148/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-17
Table 3-3. Boxes for overseas shipm ent , type 1(easy) and type 2 (average) load; thickness of sides, tops, bottoms, an d ends, and t hickness
and widt h of cleats.
Weight of content s
Style of box1
Groups I an d II woods2 Groups III and I V woods3
Exceed-
ing
Not
exceed-
in g
Thickness of
sides, tops,
and bottoms
2/
Thickness
of ends 2/
Thickness
and width of
cleats 2/
Thick-ness of
sides, tops,
and bottoms
Thickness of
ends
Thickness
and width of
cleats 4/
Pounds Pounds Inch Inch Inches Inch Inch Inches
-- 50 4,4-1/2,5 3/8 5/8 5/8 by 2 3/8 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
50 100 4,4-1/2,5,7 1/2 1 1 by 3 3/8 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
100 250 4,4-1/2,5 5/8 1 1 by 3 1/2 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
100 250 2,2-1/2,7 5/8 5/8 5/8 by 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 2-1/4
250 400 4,4-1/2,5 1 1 1 by 3 3/4 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
250 400 2,2-1/2,7 1 1 1 by 3 3/4 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
400 600 2,2-1/2,7 1 1 1 by 3 3/4 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
600 1000 (see Table 3-
c1Styles 2, 2-1/2, 4, 4-1/2 boxes. Unless other wise specified, when t he ins ide depth of a box is 5 inches or less, end cleat s sh all not be used.
Thickness of th e ends shall be not less than t he combined th ickness of the en d and cleat as s pecified. Each side an d end shall be made fromone piece, except when t he end is appr oxima tely squar e, a two-piece end may be used with each piece of approximat ely equal thickness, a nd
with t he grain of each piece ru nning at r ight angles to the other . Two-piece ends shall be nailed together with a t least t wo clinched nails.2Nominal. The dressed sizes of the wood shall equal or exceed the min imum sizes shown in Table I of STD 20-70. For th e purposes of this
specification, reference to STD 20-70 shall be limited to th e above.3Thickness toleran ce sha ll be plus or minimu m "1/16 inch for par ts 3/8 inch thick and t hicker, unless otherwise specified.4Width t olerance shall be " 1/16 inch unless oth erwise specified.
Table 3-4. Boxes for overseas shipm ent, type 3 (difficult) load; thickness of sides, tops, bott oms, and ends , and t hickness an d width of
cleats.
Weight of content s
Style of box1
Groups I an d II woods2 Groups III and I V woods3
Exceeding Not
exceeding
Thickness of
sides, tops,
an d
bottoms2
Thickness
of ends2
Thickness
and width of
cleats2
Thickness of
sides, tops,
and bottoms
Thickness
of ends
Thickness and
width of cleat s4
Pounds Pounds Inch Inch Inches Inch Inch Inches
-- 100 4,4-1/2,5 1/2 1 1 by 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
-- 100 2,2-1/2,7 1/2 5/8 5/8 by 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 by 1-3/4
100 250 4,4-1/2,5 5/8 1 1 by 3 1/2 3/4 3/4 by 2-1/4
100 250 2,2-1/2,7 5/8 5/8 1 by 3 1/2 3/4 1/2 by 2-1/4
250 400 4,4-1/2,5 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 by 4 3/4 7/8 7/8 by 2-5/8
250 400 2,2-1/2,7 1 1 1-1/4 by 4 3/4 3/4 3/4 by 2-5/8
400 600 2,2-1/2,7 1 1 1-1/4 by 4 3/4 7/8 7/8 by 2-5/8
600 800 2,2-1/2,7 1 1-1/4 1-1/4 by 4 3/4 7/8 7/8 by 2-5/8
800 1000 2,2-1/2,7 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 by 5 7/8 1-3/8 1-3/8 by 3-1/4
1Styles 2, 2-1/2, 4, 4-1/2 boxes. Unless other wise specified, when t he inside dept h of a box is 5 inches or less, end cleats shall not be used.
Thickness of th e ends shall be not less than t he combined th ickness of the en d and cleat as s pecified. Each side an d end shall be made from
one piece, except when t he end is appr oxima tely squar e, a two-piece end may be used with each piece of approximat ely equal thickness, a nd
with t he grain of each piece ru nning at r ight angles to the other . Two-piece ends shall be nailed together with a t least t wo clinched nails.2Nominal. The dressed sizes of the wood shall equal or exceed the min imum sizes shown in Table I of STD 20-70. For th e purposes of this
specification, reference to STD 20-70 shall be limited to th e above.3Thickness toleran ce shall be plus or m inimum 1/16 inch for par ts 3/8 inch thick and t hicker, unless other wise specified.4Width t olerance shall be " 1/16 inch unless oth erwise specified.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 149/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-18
Table 3-5. Num ber of Pieces in any Box Part .
Widt h of box par t Maximum number of
pieces single solid or
built-up
Exceeding Not exceeding
Inches Inches
0 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2 -1 /2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1
2 -..1 /2 ........ ....... ...... .. 5 .. ....... ....... ....... ...... ... 2
5 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 7 -1 /2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3
7 -1 /2 ... ....... ....... ...... .. 1 2...... ....... ....... ....... ... 4
12. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. (See note )
Note: The width of pieces in box par ts exceeding 12 inches the a verage width of pieces shall be not less thea n 3 inches.
No single solid or built-up piece shall be less tha n 2-1/2 inches in width across th e space.
Ad d i t i on a l C le a t s a n d B a t t e n s
Additional cleats will be made of the sam e size lumber as t he r egular cleats.
They are placed on the ends of a box when required, according to length of
un supported span (table 3-6). Additional cleats applied to ends r un across
the grain of the end (right angle to grain direction) and midway between the
regular cleats. Batt ens are made of the sam e size lumber as regular cleat s.
Batt ens ar e used on the sides, top, and bottom when t he limit of un supported
span is exceeded (ta ble 3-6). Where ver possible, an d without increa sing the
size of the container, battens should be placed inside the box. When battens
are r equired to be placed on th e outside of a box without sk ids, not less th an
two sets shall be atta ched across the sides, top, and bottom. They shall be
applied so that those on the top and bottom extend over the ends of the side
batt ens. They shall be located not less tha n 2 1/2 inches nor more tha n one-
sixth t he length of th e box with r espect to each box end. However, tha t
distance and the interval between sets of battens shall be not more thanmaximum sp an specified in ta ble 3-6. Exterior batten s shall be applied to
boxes with skids in the same manner as required for interior battens except
that the bottom battens shall be fabricated from one piece of lumber a
minim um of 2 1/2 inches h igh an d 3 1/2 inches wide.
Dia gon als ( f ig 3-12)
Sometimes diagona l reinforcing mem bers ar e added to the interior or exterior
surfaces of the box. Diagona ls used on both th e end an d side panels are th e
same width and thickness as required for cleats and are nailed in the same
man ner. The presence of interm ediate batten s or cleats, required by table 3-
6, determine t he n umber of single diagonals on each pa nel. Single diagonals
in each of two adjacent areas of one panel are arranged to peak at the center
and bear at the upper end of the intermediate batten. Three or morediagonals in adjacent areas of one panel are arranged in a zigzag manner.
When a 24-inch minimum strapping interval is required, the inner surface of
the exterior diagonals must be notched slightly to permit the strapping to
pass un der each diagona l.
S k i d s
Boxes (except style 7) with items packed therein, having a gross weight in
excess of 200 pounds, or containers with length and width dimensions of 48
inches by 24 inches or more and weighing more than 100 pounds, shall be
provided with a minimu m of two skids. The skids shall be fabricated from
one piece of 2 1/2 inches high an d 3 1/2 inches wide. Skids sh all replace
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 150/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-19
exterior battens on box bottoms when battens are required in table 3-6.
Skids shall be placed par allel to and extend t he full width of th e box and shall
be positioned n ot closer th an 2 1/2 inches nor more t ha n one sixth the length
of the box from each end of the box. The distan ce between skids, measur ed
between th e inside edges, sha ll not exceed the d istance between batt ens, an d
when ba tten s are n ot required, shall not exceed 48 inches. Additiona l skid(s),
as required, shall be positioned so as to divide the distance between the end
skids into units of equal length. When bolt fastening is provided for t he itembeing packed, additional skids, as needed, shall be located on the box bottom
so as to enable the item to be bolted thr ough the skids. The skids shall be
notched as applicable to provide clearance for either girthwise or lengthwise
stra pping. When 4-way fork ent ry is required, skids shall be a minimu m of 3
1/2 inches high and 3 1/2 inches wide, cut out a min imum of 2 inches, in
depth an d of such width as t o accommodat e forks a nd slings for han dling, and
may be placed length wise flush with th e box sides. The skids shall be
secur ed to the box by nails. The na ils shall be driven from the inside th rough
the bottom into th e skids and be clinched not less than 1/8 inch. Altern ative
to clinching, n ails conforming t o Type II, style 18 of ASTM F 1667-95 ma y be
used of such length as to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 the thickness of the
skids an d shall not protrude thr ough the skid. The nails shall be arran ged in
two rows in a staggered pattern, with space between nails in each row not to
exceed 6 inches. Na ils sha ll not be located less th an 1/2 inch from edges of
the skid nor less than approximately 1 1/2 inches from ends of the skid.
Variation in specified thickness of skids may be plus or minus 1/8 inch and
th e variat ion in specified width of skids ma y be plus or minu s 1/4 inch. When
skids are specified and box requires 2 or more inside battens (table 3-6), the
inside bottom batt ens need not be applied. However, a skid shall be att ached
to the outside of the box bottom placed in alignment with each side bat ten.
Table 3-6. Requiremen ts for Additional Batt ens or Cleats.
Thickness of ends, side, top, or bot t om Maximum
length of
unsupportedspan
Groups I and II woods Groups III and
IV woods
Inches Inches Inches
.............................. 1/4 19
3/8 ........................... 21
............................ 3/8 23
1/2 ........................... 30
.......................... 1/2 34
5/8 ........................... 38
.......................... 5/8 42
......................... 3/4 47
1 ........................... 50
........................... 13/16 54
1-1/4 7/8 64
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 151/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-20
Figur e 3-12. Style 2 reinforced box.
NAILING RE QUIREMENTS
SP ACING AND S IZES
Na il spacing an d sizes will conform to ta bles 3-8 an d 3-9.
NAILING OF TOP AND B OTTOM
When specified, the t op and bottom sh ould be na iled to t he box sides.
NAI L S IZES
Sizes of nails are determined from the following information:
• Nail sizes for fastening sides, top, and bottom to ends and cleats aredetermined by the group of wood and thickness of the pieces being
fastened together (table 3-7).
• Nail sizes to secure top and bottom to the sides are determined from
the group of wood being used and the thickness of the side (table 3-8).
• Nails to fasten cleats to the ends will be long enough to penetrate
both the cleat and the end and be clinched at least one-eighth of an
inch. However, when eightpen ny nails or sma ller are u sed, they may
be clinched not more th an thr ee-eighth s inch.
• If correct nail size is not available, or splitting is encountered, one
size smaller is used, and the spacing will be one-fourth of an inch
closer.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 152/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-21
NAI L SPACING
The spa cing of na ils is deter min ed from th e following:
• Nail spacing for fastening sides, top, an bottom to the ends will
depend on the size of nails used, and whether driven into side-grain
or end-grain. If nails are driven into both side- an d end-grain , the
spacing is the same as for end-grain nailing (table 3-9).• Nail spacing for fastening th e top an d bottom to th e sides of th e box is
determ ined from th e thickness of sides. If the thickness of the sides
is less tha n th ree-fourth s of an inch, no nailing is permitted. There is
a minimu m an d ma ximum spa cing (table 3-8).
When attaching cleats and battens, the nails are driven in two parallel rows
spaced alternately as given in table 3-9, so that the end nails are not less
tha n th ree-fourth s of an inch from the end of th e cleat or batten. All nails
shall pass through both the cleat and the end (or batten and side, top and
bottom) and be clinched. Nails are dr iven a pproxima tely three-eighth s of an
inch from the edge when th e cleat or batten is 2 inches or under in width, an d
one-half of an inch when it is over 2 inches in width.
NAILING R ULES
It is imperative that poor nailing practices be avoided and correct nailing
procedur es be followed. Both ar e shown in figur es 3-13 an d 3-14, an d
stressed in t he following r ules:
• Each single solid piece or built-up piece in the sides, top, or bottom
will have at least two nails or other acceptable fasten er at each end.
• Each single piece or built-up piece is fastened to each vertical cleat or
batt en with n ot less tha n two nails or other a cceptable fasten er.
• Wher ever possible, side-grain nailing should be accomplishe d. In
nailing to both the end and the cleats, at least half of the nails are
driven into th e cleat.• Where a cleat is attached to an end, at least one end nail will be
adjacent to the inside edge of the cleat.
• Na ils are clinched a cross the gr ain of th e wood, if possible.
• Nails must be driven so tha t n either th e head n or the point will project
above the su rface of th e wood.
• Occasionally, overdriven nails are permitted. Nails overdriven more
tha n one-eight h th e thickness of the piece are not perm itted.
• Cement-coated or chemically-etched nails have a holding power
considerably greater than that of uncoated and consequently 25
percent more na ils of the sa me size are needed when smooth na ils are
used in place of cement -coated or chem ically-etched na ils. The
comparative holding power of nails is illustrated in figure 3-15.
Bright, un coated na ils mu st be clinched.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 153/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-22
Table 3-7. Size of cement-coat ed or chemically-etched cooler, sinker , and st anda rd box nails for boxes.
Species of wood Thickness of ends or cleats to which sides, tops and bottoms are nailed (inch)
Exceeding ........
..
7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 13/16 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4
Not exceeding 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 11/16 13/16 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 ......
G rou p I ............ S ize of
nail (penny)
4 5 5 6 7 8 8 9 9 10 12
Group II........... 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 9 9 12
Group III ............ 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 9 10
Group IV......... 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 8 8 9
Table 3-8. Size of nails a nd spacing for nailing tops an d bottoms t o sides of boxes.
Thickness of side (inches) Gr oup I wood G roup II wood Gr oups III and IV woods Spa cing
Minimum Maximum
U n de r 3 /4 ........... ......... . N o n a il in g p er m it t ed
3/4 thru 7/8 incl............. 7d 6d 5d 6 8
15/16 thru 1-1/16 incl..... 8d 7d 6d 6 8
Over 1-1/16................... 10d 9d 8d 8 10
Table 3-9. Spacing of cement -coated or chemically-etched nails for boxes.
Size of Nails Spacing when dr iven
into side grain
Spacing when driven
into end grain 1
Inches Inches
Sixpenny or smaller 2 1-3/4
Sevenpenny........... 2-1/4 2
Eightpenny............. 2-1/2 2-1/4
Ninepenny.............. 2-3/4 2-1/2
Tenpenny............... 3 2-3/4
Twelvepenny.......... 3-1/2 3
Sixteenpenny......... 4 311/2
Twentypenny.......... 4-1/2 4
1When nails a re alt erna tely driven into end-grain of end and side-grain of cleat
(such as n ailing sides t o ends in St yles 2, 2-1/2, 3, 4, 4-1/2, 5 and 7) use spa cing
based on driving nails into end-grain.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 154/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-23
Figur e 3-13. Na iling.
SETTING UP OF STYLE 1 AN D 6 BOXES
The set ting u p of th ese styles is accomplished in t he following order :
• Select n ails and glue.
ο Size of coated and etched nails and proper spacing is determined
from ta bles 3-7, 3-8, and 3-9.
ο Glue for securing sides to ends of Style 6, lock-corner box, is any
commercially available wat er-resistan t glue.
ο Fasten the sides to the ends by straight-line nailing, using cement-
coat ed or chem ically-etched na ils.
ο
Apply glue to both surfaces of the sides and ends of the lock-corn ers of Style 6 boxes.
ο Nail the top and bottom.
ο Use na ils an d proper spacing determined a bove.
ο Secur e th e bottom of the box by nailing into the ends.
ο After the load is inserted, secure the top of the box in the same
mann er as the bottom.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 155/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-24
Figure 3-14. Pr oper an d improper nailing.
SETTING UP OF STYLE 2 AN D 2 1/2 BOXES
The set ting u p of th ese styles is accomplished in t he following order :
• Select n ails and proper spa cing.
ο Select proper size and spacing of coated or etched, and bright,
uncoated nails from tables 3-7 and 3-8.
ο Fasten t he cleats to the ends.
ο Nail cleats to end, using a staggered na iling patter n.
ο Nails for nailing cleats to ends may be bright, uncoated, but must
be clinched .
ο Position t he vertical cleats on the en d at right a ngles to the grain of
the end.
ο Fasten t he sides to the ends.
ο Lap th e sides over th e ends an d cleats.
ο Nail the sides to the ends a nd cleats with coated or etched na ils in a
staggered pattern .
ο Nail the top and bottom.
ο Lap th e top and bottom over the ends a nd cleats.
ο Nail the top and bottom to the ends and cleats with coated or
etched na ils in a staggered patt ern.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 156/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-25
Figur e 3-15. Na il holding power.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 157/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-26
Set t in g u p of s ty le 4 , 4 1 /2 , 5 , an d sh a l low boxe s
The set ting u p of th ese styles is accomplished in t he following order :
• Select na ils and pr oper spacing. Select th e proper size and spacing of
coated or etched, an d bright, u ncoated na ils from ta bles 3-7, 3-8, and 3-
9.
• Fasten the cleats to the ends.
• Nail the cleats to the end using a staggering nailing patt ern.
• Nails for nailing the cleats to the ends may be bright, uncoated, but
must be clinched.
• Fasten the sides to the ends.
• Lap th e sides over th e ends a nd cleats on Style 4 and 5 boxes.
• Fast en th e sides to the ends a nd cleats in a sta ggering nailing pattern .
• Lap t he sides of Style 4 1/2 and sh allow box over th e end s.
• Drive the nails in a straight line for Style 4 1/2 box and in a staggered
pat tern for shallow boxes.
• Nail the top and bottom.
ο Nail the bottom of th e box to the en ds an d sides.
ο On Style 4 and 5, boxes nail the top and bottom to the end with
stra ightline na iling.ο On Style 4 1/2 and shallow boxes, nail the top and bottom to the
ends with a staggered na iling pattern.
S t r a p p i n g R e q u i r e m e n t s
Stra pping used on nailed wood boxes may be either round or flat. Proper size
of strapping is determined by the net weight of contents and the number of
stra ps used (tables 3-10 and 3-11). All straps ar e applied perpendicular t o the
edges of the box over which they pass a nd a re dr awn t ight so as to sink int o the
wood at th e edges. Stra ps shall be applied just prior to shipment wh ere
pra cticable. Stra pping requiremen ts a re foun d in th e Appendix to Specification
PPP-B-621.
C LASS 1 (D OMESTIC) B OXESUnless otherwise specified, Style 1 and 6 boxes, regardless of weight, and Style
2, 2 1/2, 4 4 1/2, 5, and 7 boxes, with weight of contents exceeding 100 pounds,
sha ll be stra pped. When sp ecified, Style 2, 2 1/2, 4 4 1/2, and 5 boxes, with
weight of content s less tha n 100 pounds, sha ll be stra pped.
C LASS 2 (O VERSEA) B OXES
All boxes used for a sh ipmen t int end ed for oversea s sha ll be str app ed (fig 3-16).
P l a c e m e n t o f St r a p s
On m ost boxes, the first stra ps ar e positioned girth wise about one-sixth of the
length of the box from each end, not to exceed 9 inches from the ends.
On Styles 1 and 6, the first strap is lengthwise, followed by two girthwisestraps.
When strapping is required on Style 7 boxes, one strap is applied parallel to,
and imm ediately adjoining the inner edge of each skid. Three or more stra ps,
equally spaced, are r equired when spacing between stra ps exceeds 24 inches.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 158/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-27
Table 3-10. Minimum gage of round wir e for var ious weights of boxes.
Net weight of contents Gage of wire when differ rent number of wires are used
Two bands Three or more bands
Exceeding Not exceeding Class B Class A Class B Class A
Pounds Pounds Inch Inch Inch Inch
0........................ 70..................... 0.0720 (15 ga ge) 0.0625 (16 ga ge) 0.0720 (15 ga ge) 0.0625 (16 ga ge)
70...................... 125.................... 0.0800 (14 ga ge) 0.0720 (15 ga ge) 0.0800 (14 ga ge) 0.0720 (15 ga ge)
125.................... 175.................... 0.0915 (13 ga ge) 0.0800 (14 ga ge) 0.0915 (13 ga ge) 0.0800 (14 ga ge)
175.................... 250.................... 0.0915 (13 ga ge) 0.0915 (13 ga ge) 0.0915 (13 ga ge) 0.0915 (13 ga ge)
250.................... 400.................... 0.1055 (12 ga ge) 0.0990 (12-1/2 ga ge) 0.0915 (13 ga ge) 0.0915 (13 ga ge)
4 00 ... ....... ....... ... 1 ,0 00 .. ....... ....... ..... .... ....... ....... ....... ... . ....... ....... ....... ....... .. 0 .1 05 5 (1 2 ga ge ) 0 .0 99 0 (1 2-1 /2 g a ge )
Table 3-11. Minimum sizes of flat met al bands for various weigths of boxes.
N et w ei gh t of con t en t s D im en s ion s of fl at m et a l b an d s w he n d iffe re nt
numbers of bands are used
Exceeding Not exceeding Two bands Three or more bands
................. 70............. 3/8 by 0.015...... 3/8 by 0.015
70............. 125............ 3/8 by 0.020...... 3/8 by 0.020
125........... 175........... 1/2 by 0.020...... 1/2 by 0.020
175........... 250............ 5/8 by 0.020..... 5/8 by 0.020
250........... 400............ 3/4 by 0.020..... 3/4 by 0.020
400........... 1,000......... ...................... 3/4 by 0.023
Additiona l straps a re placed girth wise so that the dista nce between st rap s does
not exceed 24 inches.
Small boxes less than 12 inches long and having less than 35 pounds of
contents r equire only one girthwise strap. The single girth wise stra p may be
16 gage roun d wire, or 3/8 X 0.010-inch flat st ra p.
When the outside length of unreinforced style 2, 2 1/2, 4, 4 1/2, 5 and shallow
boxes exceeds 36 inches, thr ee or more st rap s will be applied girthwise so t hat
the dista nce between str aps is not more than 24 inches.
W o r k m a n s h i p
Throughout the fabrication, setting up, nailing, and strapping of nailed wood
boxes, good work ma nsh ip should be pra cticed at all times. Figur e 3-17 shows
some of th e defects wh ich m ust be avoided.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 159/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-28
Figur e 3-16. Str app ing of na iled wood boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 160/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-29
Figur e 3-17. Defects of nailed wood boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 161/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-30
P r e s e r v a t i o n
When specified, each PPP-B-621 box or all of the finished wood parts shall be
preserved by immersing for a minimum of one minute in one of the following
wood preservat ive solutions: 2 percent copper Mapht hen ate, 3 percent zinc
nap hth enat e, or 1.8 percent copper-8-quinolinolate. These three chemicals
exhibit characteristics which are acceptable for DOD-wide use provided
ha ndling instr uctions prescribed by the ma nu factu rer ar e followed. After th e
dip treatment, the boxes or wood parts must be air dried (or dried for anappr opriate time in a k iln or oven) for a per iod of 24 hours minimum in a well-
ventilated area allowing full air circulation around all surfaces of the
individua l wood box or wood part. The boxes or pa rts m ust be dr ied prior to
shipment . Dryness can be determ ined by the absence of discoloration of the red
oil soluble dye when test ed as sp ecified in P PP -B-621.
CLEATED-P ANEL BOXES (GENER AL)
DE S C R I P T I O N
Cleated-panel boxes are made by attaching wood cleats to sheets of plywood,
fiberboard, or paper-overlaid veneer to form panels that are later fastened
together a t the cleats to form a container. When plywood is used as panelmaterial, they are called wood-cleated plywood boxes, specification PPP-B-601;
when fiberboard is used, they are called wood-cleated fiberboard boxes,
specification PPP-B-576; and when paper-overlaid veneer is used, they are
called wood-cleated , pap er-overla id veneer boxes. In each type of box, th e
cleats a ct to reinforce the edges and to aid in n ailing.
C HARACTERISTICS
The chief char acter istics of cleat ed-pan el boxes ar e: Lightweigh t, high
resistance to diagonal distortion, resistance to corner damage, and ability to
withsta nd severe tumbling an d dropping. They are easy to mar k and han dle,
almost dustpr oof, and lend th emselves to easy fabrication. Pan els may be
bought in large quantities in the knocked-down form, which can be easily
stored in a m inimu m of spa ce. These boxes afford t hr ee choices of cleat ed pan elboxes for use in th e shipping of militar y supplies and equ ipmen t. Selection of
the panel material for the box is based upon the destination of the shipment,
the minimum protection required, the weight of the item, and the container
limitations.
I n t e n d e d U s e s a n d L i m i t a t i on s
The styles of boxes permitted for domestic and oversea shipments, with
limitations for cleated plywood, cleated fiberboard, and cleated paper overlaid
veneer boxes are cited in table 3-12.
Over sea Typ e Boxes ( see figur e 3-18)
Styles A and B are the only ones permitted, for cleated fiberboard and veneer.
Cleated plywood boxes perm it Styles A, B, I, and J . Plywood and pap er-overlaid boxes will take a ll th ree types of load s. Cleated fiberboard boxes will
ta ke Type 1 an d 2 loads only. Style A lends itself to ease of asse mbly and
opening. Style B has greater st rength , but is more difficult to open. The
designs of these boxes and their load limit for oversea shipments are given in
the respective container specifications.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 162/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-31
Figur e 3-18. Oversea st yles of cleat ed pan el boxes.
Dom es t i c Type Boxes (see f igur e 3-19)
Domestic boxes are intended f or normal use when the additional strength of
the oversea type is not required. The selection of th e style depends largely on
the n atu re an d weight of the item, an d how it is to be supported. Styles B, D,
E, an d G ha ve 3-way corn ers an d ar e satisfactory if the boxes are n ot to opened
for insp ection a nd r eclosed. If the boxes ar e to be opened an d reclosed, Style A
and K ar e preferred. The full-cleated Styles A an d B ar e the strongest and
most suitable for h eavy items, if the weight can be applied over t he en tire a rea
of an y face. Styles A an d B requir e only one size of na ils for assem bling the
box, whereas, two sizes of nails are required for Styles C and K, inclusive.
Paper-overlaid veneer boxes are only available in Styles A and B for domestic
shipment . All thr ee types of loads ar e permitted.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 163/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-32
Figur e 3-19. Styles of cleat ed pan el boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 164/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-33
Table 3-12. Comparison of cleated pa nel boxes.
Items of compar ison Cleat ed plywood (PPP-B-601) Paper over laid veneer
(PPP-B-576)
S tyle s.................................. A, B, I a n d J ........................ A a n d B .
Cla ss of u se....................... dom est ic a nd over sea s....... 1 a nd 2
St yles, over sea .................. A, B, I an d J ........................ A a nd B
St yles, dom es tic................ A, B, I an d J ........................ A a nd B
Weight limit vs. styles
Over sea ............................ A, B, I a nd J 1,000#............. A a nd B - 350#
Dom es tic.......................... A, B, I a nd J 1,000#............. A a nd B - 400#
Typ es of loa ds vs . we igh t .. 1 , 2 an d 3............................. T yp e 1 - 2 D om es tic 400 #
Type 3 - Domestic 300#
Type 1 - 2 Overseas 350#
Type 3 - Overseas 250#
Unsupported span for
intermediate cleats, maximum
Type 1 and 2 loads - 24"......
Type 3 loa d - 20"..................
Type 3 load, Class 2 use - 20"
All other - 24"
Size limitOver se a............................ N o size l im it ......................... N o size l im it
Dom es tic.......................... N o s ize lim it ......................... N o s ize lim it
Strapping
St yles A an d B..................
2 lengthwise straps, and strap
over a ll intermediate cleats,
except cleats located on ends of
plywood container s
All class 2 boxes and Class 1 when
over 150#
S t yl es C t h r u K..... ....... ...... C on su lt Ap pe nd ix of S pe ci fi ca t ion
S taples .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 4" max imum f rom corners, approx imate ly 6" apar t the rea fte r (except
over ban ds on bottom of box for plywood)
Table 3-13. Plywood PS-1 and PS-51, comm ercial stan dar ds.
Box type PS-51 PS-1
Domest ic. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Type I I I, grade 3 -4 veneers. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. C -D
Overseas. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . Type I , g rade 3 -4 veneers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. C -D, with ex ter ior
1Plywood is furnished un san ded. If smooth finish or snaded panels ar erquir ed, appropriated san ded grades should be specified in the contract
or order.2End grain butt joints shall be prohibitied for grade 4 veneers.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 165/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-34
CLE ATED P LYWOOD BOXES (PP P -B-601)
C ONSTRUCTION OF P ANELS
Plywood will conform to th e minimu m commer cial sta nda rd gr ades in table 3-
13. Plywood for domest ic boxes will conform to H PMA-HP 1983, Type III,
Gra de 3-4, and PS -1, sta nd ar d inter ior. Plywood for oversea boxes will conform
to HPMA-AP 1983, Type I, Grade 3-4, and P S-1, stan dar d inter ior with exterior
glue (see tables 3-14, 3-15). If it is kn own th at th e boxes will not be exposed to
the weather during storage and handling to its final oversea destination,
plywood as specified for domest ic type boxes should be specified. Cleated -
plywood boxes are classified as Grade A, with preservative treatment, and
Grade B, without preservative treatm ent. Plywood an d cleats for Grade A
boxes shall be treated with water-repellant preservative conforming to the
following: 2% copper Map ht hen at e, 3% zinc na pht hen at e, and 1.8% copper -8-
quinolate. Treated boxes sha ll be dried before shipment . Shipment s of
subsistence and clothing shall not be made in boxes fabricated from toxic
trea ted plywood. If smooth finish for sanded pan els are r equired, appropriate
sand ed grades should be specified. The minimu m t hickness of the plywood and
size of cleat s should be as shown in t ables 3-14 or 3-15, as ap plicable. The
plywood is at tached t o the cleats in t he following m ann er:
Ar r a n g e t h e C le a t s
Each panel for styles A and B will have two through cleats and filler cleats.
Position the through cleats opposite each other at the edges of the panel
mat erial; th en position the filler cleats between th e thr ough cleats at th e edges.
Style A an d B boxes may ha ve the top pa nel modified. When sp ecified, style A
shall ha ve edge cleats a nd filler edge cleats placed on t he u nder side of the top
pan el (fig 3-20). Style B boxes are m odified by providing th rough edge cleat s
only on the un derside of the pan el. These un derside cleats sha ll be of the same
width an d thickness as the outer cleats.
Table 3-14. Domestic type, requirem ents for cleats a nd plywood (PPP-B-601).
St yle of boxWeight of contents Minimum t hickness of plywood Size of clea ts1
Exceeding Not exceeding PS-1 (see t able
3-13)2
HPMA-HP 1983
(see table 3-13)3Thickness Widt h
All Wood grou ps
(incl)
All Wood group s
(Incl)
Pounds Pounds Inch Inch Inch Inches
A, B, I and J 0 75 5/164 6 1/8 3/4 1-3/8
A, B, I and J 75 150 5/164 6 1/8 3/4 1-3/4
A, B, I and J 150 300 5/164 6 3/164 3/4 1-3/4
A, B, I and J 300 500 5/16 6 3/16 3/4 1-3/4
A, B, I and J 500 800 5/16 1/4 3/4 2-1/4
A, B, I and J 800 1000 3/8 5/16 3/4 2-5/8
1At no place shall the actual t hickness be less than the required th ickness, minus 1/16 inch, nor t he actual width be less than the r equired
width, minus 1/4 inch.2Alterna tively low density wood plywood conforming t o HPMA-HP 1983 (ta ble 3-13) ma y be used.3Low density wood plywood conforming t o HPMA-HP 1983 (ta ble 3-13) shall n ot be us ed.43/30 minimum inch th ick plywood conforming to t ype III, gra de 4 of HPMA-HP 1983 ma y be used in place of the 5/16 inch (3/20 th ick plywood
is not st andard thickness in HPMA-HP 1983).5Except that commercial tolerance shall apply.6At th e option of the supplier, 1/14-inch san ded plywood may be furnish ed.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 166/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-35
Table 3-15. Overseas t ype, requirement s for cleats an d plywood (PPP -B-601).
Weigh t of con ten ts Min im um th ickn ess of plywood6 Sizes of edge cleats for
all groups1
Exceeding Not
exceeding
Types 1 and 2 loads Type 3 load Thickness Widt h
PS-1 (see table
3-13)2
HPMA-HP 1983
(see table 3-13)3
PS-1 (see table
3-13)2
HPMA-HP 1983
(see table 3-13)3
Style Style St yle St yle
A&B I and J 4 A&B I and J 4 A&B I and J 4 7 A&B I and J 47
Pounds Pounds Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
5/168
5/168
5/168
5/168
5/168
5/16
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
3/165
3/165
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
5/16
5/16
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
5/168
5/168
5/16
5/16
5/16
5/16
3/8
1/2
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
5/8
5/8
3/165
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
5/16
3/8
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
5/8
5/8
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
1-3/4
1-3/4
1-3/4
1-3/4
2-1/4
2-5/8
3-1/4
3-1/4
1At no place shall the actual thickness be less than the r equired thickness, minimum 1/16 inch, not the actua l width be less than t he required
width, min us 1/4 inch.
2Alterna tively low density wood plywood conforming t o HPMA-HP 1983 (ta ble 3-13) ma y be used.3Low density wood plywood conforming t o HPMA-HP 1983 (ta ble 3-13) shall n ot be us ed.
4Top and bottom pa nels of I and J boxes only, all other panels a s specified for st yles A and B.5Minimum 3/20 inch th ick plywood conform ing to type I, grade 4 of HPMA-HP 1983 ma y be used in place of the 3/16 inch th ick plywood. (3/20
inch thick plywood is not a sta ndar d thickness in H PMA-HP 1983).6Except that commercial tolerance shall apply.7The maxim um weight of content s for Air Force shipment s for st yle I and shall be 150 lbs.8At th e option of the supplier, 1/4 inch sanded plywood may be furnished.
Figur e 3-20. Top pane l modificat ion of unn ailed closure, P PP -B-601, style A box.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 167/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-36
Unless otherwise specified filler edge cleats shall be either th e sam e length as
the d istance between th e th rough edge cleats or a pproximat ely one-eighth inch
shorter.
Filler edge cleats on top and bottom panels, except on top only when the box is
provided with skids, shall be either the same length as the distance between
the through edge cleats or approximately one-fourth inch shorter for oversea
type boxes.
When the filler cleats are the same length as the distance between through
edge cleats, each end shall be either cut at an angle or notched to provide a
drainage area between the filler cleat and the plywood of approximately one-
fourth inch by one-four th inch. Draina ge areas are not applicable on th e
underside cleats of the top panels of the unnailed closure Style A box.
Each cleat shall be a single u njointed piece.
Fast en t he pa nel mat erial to the cleats (fig 3-21).
Nails, staples, wire stitches, or other fasteners positioned lengthwise of a cleat
are staggered in two parallel rows, approximately three-eighths inch from the
edge of th e cleat .
The distance between the nearest edge of a fastener and the edge of a cleat
shall not be less tha n th ree-eighth s of an inch an d not closer th an thr ee-four ths
of an inch nor more th an 1 inch from th e end of the cleat.
Space the nails not more tha n 6 inches apa rt length wise in each row. Usua lly,
nail or sta ple through t he plywood and th en cleat a nd clinch. Reversal of this
sequence is permitt ed only for na ils.
Cons t r uc t i on o f P l ywood J o i n t s
In the construction of large cleated plywood boxes, it frequently becomesnecessar y to join sheets of pan el ma ter ial. Bottom pan els of boxes not
exceeding 72 inches in length or 48 inches in width, an d top an d bottom pan els
of Style I boxes sha ll consist of a single piece of plywood. All oth er p an els sha ll
consist of one or two pieces of plywood joined by either a lap or butt joint (see
fig 3-22) as specified below. Ea ch piece of plywood in two-piece pa ne ls sha ll be
not less tha n 24 inches in length or width. Plywood joint s in adjacent pa nels
should n ot be closer t ha n 12 inches of being in line.
Lap J o i n t
Overlap two pieces of pan el ma terial at least 3 inches. Fast en the sheet
together with m etal stitches thr ough the overlap and clinch. Use not less than
two par allel rows of stitches. Space stitches not less tha n 2 inches apar t. The
average spacing of stitches in each row must n ot exceed 4 inches. Themaximum thickness of plywood to be used for this type of joint shall be 3/16
inch.
Bu t t Jo i n t
But t two pieces of plywood at t he m idwidth of a joint cleat . Fa sten each piece
of plywood to th e joint cleat. The t hickness of a joint cleat will be the sa me a s
an e dge cleat . The width of a joint cleat for a domestic box will be no less th an
2 1/4 inches. If the edge cleat is m ore tha n 2 1/4 inches wide, the joint cleat will
be of th e same widt h. For oversea type boxes, th e joint cleat will be not less
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 168/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-37
than 1 1/3 times the required width of the edge cleats or never less than 2 1/4
inches.
De t er m i ne t he R equ i r emen t s
Additional wood cleats, of the same width and tickness as the edge cleat, are
applied to an unframed area which exceeds 24 inches in any dimension or 20
inches for oversea type boxes with Type 3 loads. Aditional cleats are applied to
any face of a box having a load concentration near the center of the unframedarea.
Fas t en t he C l ea t s
Apply cleats perpendicular to the greater of the two dimensions between edge
cleats. Space and drive fasten ings in th e same man ner a s for edge cleats.
ASSEMBLY OF BOXES
Style A (Oversea )
Assembly Of The Pa nels
Arrange the panels so that one through cleat and one filler cleat forms each
edge of th e box. Arra nge th e cleats t o form a st an da rd box corner (fig 3-18).
Arran ge the top and bottom panels to overlap the sides and en ds.
Na i l i ng t h e Pan e l s Toge t her
Nail all panels to each other by single line na iling. Use either mechanically
deform ed, cement coat ed or chemically-etched na ils. Spa ce th e na ils in
accordance with the type of load and the thickness of cleats (tables 3-16 and
17).
Figur e 3-21. Spa cing of fasten ers.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 169/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-38
Figur e 3-22. Acceptable plywood joints .
Table 3-16. Domestic type, sizes and spacing of nails for fastening
together adjacent cleated panels.
Cleats
Thickness
Maximum spacing of nails
all wood groups
Size of nails for wood groups 1
Types 1
and 2
loads
Type 3
load
I II III IV
Inch 3/4 Inches 5 Inches 4 Penny 7 Penny 7 Penny 7 Penny 6
1If the nail protrudes t hrough the last edge clear or splits cleat, t hen th e next
smaller size penny nail shall be used.
Table 3-17. Oversea type, sizes and spacing of nails for fast ening together adja cent cleated panels.
C lea ts, th ickness (Inch) Maximum spacing of na il s,
all wood groups
Size of nails for wood groups 1
Types 1 and 2
loads
Type 3 load I II III IV
3/4................................. Inches 5 Inches 4 Penny 9 Penny 8 Penny 7 Penny 6
1If the nail protrudes t hrough the last edge cleat or if it splits the cleat, then t he next sma ller size penny nail shall be used.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 170/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-39
Table 3-18. Diamet er of round wire stra pping.
Diameter of wire when different numbers of wire are used
Weight of content s 2 wires 3 or more wires
100,000 pounds per
square inch tensile
strength
140,000 pounds per
square inch tensile
strength
100,000 pounds per
square inch tensile
strength
100,000 pounds per
square inch tensile
strength
Pounds Inch Inch Inch Inch
Up t o 70, incl...........
71 t o 125, incl..........
126 t o 175, incl.......
176 t o 250, incl.......
251 t o 400, incl.......
401 to 1,000, in cl....
0.0720 (15 gage)
0.0800 (14 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
.............................
..............................
0.0720 (15 gage)
0.0720 (15 gage)
0.0800 (15 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
...............................
................................
0.0720 (15 gage)
0.0800 (14 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
0.1055 (12 gage)
0.0720 (15 gage)
0.0720 (15 gage)
0.0800 (14 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
0.0915 (13 gage)
0.0990 (12-1/2 gage)
Table 3-19. Size of flat m etal ban ds
Weight of content s
not exceeding
Dimension of flat metal bands when different numbers of
bands are used
2 bands 3 or more bands
Pounds Inch Inch
Up t o 70, incl................. 3/8 by 0.020 3/8 t o 0.020
71 to 125, incl................ 3/8 by .020 3/8 by .202
126 t o 175, incl............. 1/2 by .020 1/2 by .020
176 t o 250, incl............. 5/8 by .020 5/8 by .020
251 t o 400, incl............. 3/4 by .020
401 t o 1000, incl........... 3/4 by .023
Table 3-20. Size of type III, twist-tied flat meta l strap ping
Weight of contents not
exceeding
Dimensions when different numbers of bands
are used
2 st raps 3 or more st raps
Pounds Inch Inch
70 0.140 by 0.031 0.138 by 0.025
St y l e B ( ove r s ea )
Assembly o f the Pa n els
Arrange the panels so that one through cleat and one filler cleat forms each
edge of th e box. Arra nge th e cleats t o form a 3-way int erlocking corn er (see fig
3-18). Arran ge the top and bottom to overlap the sides; then ar ra nge the ends
to overlap the top and bottom and, finally, arrange the sides to overlap the
ends.
Na i l i ng t h e Pan e l s Toge t her
Nail each through cleat to two other through cleats at the corner with nails
driven at right an gles to each other . Nail the panels to each oth er by single
line nailing. Use either m echan ically deformed, cemen t-coat ed, or chemically-
etched nails. Space the nails in accordance with t he type of load an d the
th ickn ess of th e cleat s (table 3-16 an d 3-17).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 171/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-40
Styles A, B, I an d J (Domes t ic )
Four styles are available for domestic use; Styles A, B, I an d J , depending on
the cleat ar ra ngement . A stud y of figure 3-19 shows the cleat a rra ngement for
each style. For Styles I and J the plywood along each un cleated edge is
fastened to the cleat on the adjacent panel by nails passing through the
plywood and int o th e cleat. Nails shall not be less tha n 1 inch longer t han th e
thickness of the plywood through which they pass for domestic type and 1 3/8
inches for oversea t ypes and th eir spacing shall not exceed 3 inches.
App l i ca t i on o f Sk i d s
Unless otherwise specified, boxes with items packed therein, having a gross
weight in excess of 200 pounds or length and width dimensions of 48 inches by
24 inches or more, and gross weight of 100 pounds or over, shall be provided
with a m inimum or two skids. The skids shall be minimum of 2 1/2 inches high
and 3 1/2 inches wide. When 4-way fork ent ry is required, skids sha ll be
nominal 4-by-4-inch, placed lengthwise not less than 1 1/2 inches nor more
tha n 2 1/2 inches from th e container sides and cut out a minimum of 2 inches in
depth a nd of such width a s to accommodat e forks and slings for han dling. Each
skid sha ll be notched sufficiently to provide clear an ce for str app ing. The skids
shall be placed par allel to, and extend t he full width of th e box (th e shorter of
the two horizontal dimensions), and sha ll be set n ot less than 2 1/2 inches nor
more than 1/6 th e box length form each end. The distance between skids,
measu red between th e inside edges, shall not exceed 48 inches. Filler cleats of
the same thickness as the end cleats of the bottom panel and not less than the
width of the sk ids shall be provided between each skid an d th e bottom pa nel of
th e shipping conta iner . Additiona l skid(s), as requ ired, shall be positioned so
as to divide th e area between th e end skids int o un its of equal lengths. When
boltholes are provided in the item, additional skids if needed shall be located so
as to enable the item to be bolted to the skids. The skids shall be secur ed to the
box by na ils. The na ils shall be driven th rough th e bottom pan el, th e filler
cleats, and the skids, and shall penetrate a minimum of three-fourths the skid,
thickness. The na ils shall be pallet na ils ha ving mechan ically deformed sha nks
conforming to ASTM F 1667-95. These nails shall not protrude t hrough t hebottom sur face of the skid. The na ils shall be ar ran ged in two rows in a
staggered pattern, with spacing between nails in each row to be not more than
6 inches. Ea ch row of na ils sha ll be appr oxima tely one-ha lf inch in from th e
edge of the skid and the nailing pattern shall begin and end approximately 1
1/2 inches in from the end of each skid and shall not be nailed through the
strap notch.
Closure
The top panel shall be positioned a nd n ailed. The size and spacing of nails
shall be shown in tables 3-16 and 3-17. Drive na ils stra ight to prevent th em
from protru ding.
S t r a p p i n g R e q u i r em e n t sStrapping requirements are found in the appendix to PPP-B-601. The sizes of
round wire an d flat m etal str aps ar e found in ta ble 3-18, 3-19 and 3-20. Styles
A or B boxes that have modified tops will be closed with flat steel strapping.
Other m eans a re prohibited.
St y l e s A, B, I and J ( Ove r s ea )
Str ap Styles A, B, I an d J , unless other wise specified (see figure 3-23). On
Styles A an d B, apply two lengthwise stra ps on th e edge cleats over t he en ds,
top, an d bottom. On Styles I and J , apply two lengthwise stra ps on th e edge
cleats over the ends and sides. Place a girthwise strap over interm ediate
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 172/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-41
cleats, when r equired, on t he sides, top an d bottom (fig 3-24). Draw st rap ping
tightly so as to sink into the edges of th e cleats. Fa sten st rap ping to the cleats
with staples spaced approximately 6 inches apart, and within 4 inches from
the edge of the box over which the strap passes (except over bands on the
bottom of th e box an d bands app lied over filler cleat s on th e top). Sta ples
shall be applied just prior to shipment where pr acticable. Str apping used for
un na iled closure boxes sha ll not be stapled. Altern ately, each length wise and
girthwise strap may be replaced by four corner straps each 8 inches long andsecured to the box with three staples on each leg pneumatically driven
thr ough the stra p into the cleat. However, corner stra ps shall not be used on
un na iled closur e boxes. Exercise car e in str apping domestic styles so tha t t he
straps do not pass over voids between cleats and thus become susceptible to
snagging.
Figur e 3-23. Str app ing of cleat ed pan el boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 173/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-42
Styles A, B, I an d J (Domes t ic )
Stra p domestic styles only where specified. Stra p in accordance to th e
appendix to PPP-B-601.
Dimens ions
Dimensions shall be given in the sequence of length, width and depth of the
inside measurem ents. The first t wo dimensions will be the open face of the
box. A toleran ce of plus or minu s 1/8 inch is perm itted in t he dimen sions.
BOXES, WOOD-CLE ATED P ANELBOARDWood-cleated panelboard boxes are intended for use as containers for domestic
and overseas equ ipment of general m ater ials and supplies, not exceeding 500
pounds for domestic or 400 pounds for overseas shipments.
Wood-cleated, water-overlaid veneer boxes take all three types of loads to a
maximum weight of 500 pounds for domestic use (class 1 boxes), and 400
pound s for oversea u sed (Class 2 boxes), in accordan ce with P PP -B-576. Styles
A and B only are aut horized for both domestic an d oversea sh ipments. Tables
3-21 and 3-22 contain the requirements for the paper-overlaid veneer
panelboard and the cleats for class 1 and 2 boxes, respectively, according tothe weight of conten ts.
Skids are att ached to th e bottom of boxes having a gross weight of more tha n
200 pounds, or when the length and width dimensions are 48 inches by 24
inches or over an d th e gross weight is 100 pounds or over. The skids sha ll be a
minimum of 2 1/2 inches high and 3 1/2 inches wide and m ay be fabricated
from more tha n one piece of lumber to mak e up th e required height. The skids
shall be set not less than 2 1/2 inches not more tha n 4 inches in from each end.
Filler cleats of the same thickness as the edge cleats and the same width as
the sk ids and t he bottom panel of the box.
WOOD-CLEATED , SKIDDE D, LOAD-BEARIN G BASE BOXES
(ASTM D6256)These boxes may be used for t he sh ipment of items which can be secured t o a
load-bearing base. The sides, tops, and ends a re of cleated pa nel constr uction.
Panels may be plywood, fiberboard, or paper-overlaid veneer and comply with
the applicable requirements of PPP-B-601 and PPP-B-576, respectively.
Styles A, B, and C are used for Type I, domestic, and Type II, oversea
shipment s. The bases are fabricated a s Class 1, plywood base, and Class 2,
lumber base (see fig 3-25).
I NTENDED USE
Boxes covered by ASTM D6256 are intended to be used for items which can be
att ached to a load-bearing base. It is intended th at t he entire load be carr ied
on the base. The super-stru cture (tops, ends, and sides) provides only forsuperimposed loads and protection against t he elements. It is not int ended for
the box to be lifted or moved other tha n by the base. The super-stru cture ma y
be removed when it is not required.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 174/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-43
Figur e 3-24. Spa cing of inter media te cleats .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 175/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-44
Figur e 3-25. Classes 1 an d 2 bases for wood-cleat ed, skidded,load-bearing ba se boxes, ASTM D6256.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 176/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-45
Table 3-21. Class 1 boxes: Requiremen ts for paper overlaid veneer panelboard and cleats
Weight contents Size of cleat s Paper over laid veneer panelboard
Exceeding Not exceeding Minimum width Min imum thickness Types 1 and 2 loads Type 3 loads
Min im um t hick nes s Min im um t hick nes s
Pounds Pounds Inches Inch Inch Inch
0 75 1-3/8 5/8 0.070 0.090
75 150 1-3/4 5/8 0.115 0.140
150 225 1-3/4 3/4 0.115 0.140
225 300 1-3/4 3/4 0.170 0.195
300 400 1-3/4 13/16 0.225 -------
Table 3-22. Class 2 boxes: Requiremen ts for paper overlaid veneer panelboard and cleats
Weight contents Size of cleat s Paper over laid veneer panelboard
Exceeding Not exceeding Minimum width Min imum thickness Types 1 and 2 loads Type 3 loads
Min im um t hick nes s Min im um t hick nes sPounds Pounds Inches Inch Inch Inch
0 100 1-3/4 5/8 0.070 0.120
100 250 1-3/4 3/4 0.140 0.180
250 350 1-3/4 13/16 0.225 0.195
F a b r i ca t i o n o f P a n e l s
When panels are fabricated locally, they are made according to information
cont ained in ta ble 3-13 an d HP MA-HP 1983. Also see PP P-B-601 const ru ction
of pan els. Even filler cleat t oleran ce and dr aina ge shall be in accordance with
PPP -B-601. Cleat arra ngement on top panels is illustra ted in figure 3-26.
When joists are required for the super-structure to hold superimposed loads,they a re selected in a ccordance with ta ble 3-23. Joist supports are required t o
be placed beneath each joist (see fig 3-27). The vertical and material supports
shall comply with the material requirements for the cleat stock, except that
the thickness shall not be less than one inch for container loads up to 1,000
pound s. For loads in excess of 1,000 poun ds, the su pports sh all be not less
tha n 2 inches. The vertical joist supports sh all be nailed to the side panels
with n ails long enough to pass t hr ough th e clinch of 1/8 inch for Gr oups II, III,
an d IV woods a nd 1/4 inch clinch for Group I woods.
Fa br i ca t i on o f Bas e Com p onen t s ( s ee fi g 3 -24)
S k i d s
Skids will be made of Group II, III, or IV lum ber. The cross section an d lengthof skids are chosen from table 3-28, based upon weight of contents and load
cond itions, as illust ra ted in figure 3-27. For boxes whose out side width
exceeds 36 inches, a thir d skid conform ing to ta ble 3-28 is added. The th ird
skid is placed equidistan t between the outer skids. At the ends of each skid,
the lower half is beveled approximately 45 degrees.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 177/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-46
Load Bear i ng M em ber s
Load bearing members will be free of defects which could materially weaken
th em. They are selected in accorda nce with ta ble 3-25. The cross section of
load bearing mem bers for a pa rticular load is determin ed either by assum ing a
total width of such load bearing members and determining the thickness
necessary, or by assuming a thickness and determining a total width of load
bearing members.
Lumber Floor ing
Lumber flooring will be a minimum of 1-inch thick, and not less th an 4 inches
wide. Lumber is laid at right angles to the skids. The boar ds are separated
one-eight h to one-fourt h of an inch to allow for swelling and dr ain age. The
boar d ends a re placed flush with t he outer edge of the skids.
Plywood Floor ing
Unless otherwise specified, plywood used for Type I boxes shall conform to
HPMA-HP 1983, Type II, Grade 3-4, PS1, standa rd interior. The minimum
thickness shall be three-eighth s of an inch. See table 3-13. It ma y be th e full
length a nd width of the ba se, or it m ay be a centr ally located squar e piece with
th e lengt h equa l to the base width . When a full piece of plywood is used, a
drainage hole one-half inch in diameter is placed in each corner of the base.
Additional drainage holes are placed every three feet along the side of the
base. When load bearin g floorboards ar e placed over plywood pan els, at least
one draina ge hole is placed on each side of th e base between t he load bear ing
floorboards.
En d H eader s
En d headers ar e placed at th e ends of th e box. Header s are nominal 2 X 4
inches.
Ru bb i ng S t r i p s
When specified, rubbing strips shall be applied under each skid to facilitate
forklift han dling. They will pr ovide a nomina l 3-inch clear an ce for fork liftentry.
Table 3-23. Selection of joists for wood cleated, skidded, load bear ing
base boxes (joists s paced 24 inches--center to center)
Nominal joist s ize (Inches) Outside wid th of box (Inches)
None requ ired 24
1X4 25-36
2X4 37-60
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 178/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-47
Table 3-24 . Nominal sizes an d ma ximum len gths of skids for wood cleated,skidded, load bearing bas e boxes.
Weight of
Content s (Pounds)
Load
Condition1/
Nominal Sizes
2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 8 4 X 4 4 X 6 6 X 6
Maximum Length of Skid (Feet)
0 - 100 AB
C
D
E
1616
16
16
16
----
--
--
--
----
--
--
--
----
--
--
--
----
--
--
--
----
--
--
--
101 - 200 A
B
C
D
E
16
16
16
16
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
201 - 400 A
B
C
D
E
11
13
8
10
13
15
16
12
15
16
16
--
16
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
401 - 600 A
B
C
D
E
8
9
5
7
9
11
14
8
10
14
14
16
11
14
16
16
--
16
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
601 - 800 A
B
C
D
E
7
7
4
5
7
9
10
6
8
10
11
14
8
10
14
16
16
16
16
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
801 - 1000 A
B
C
D
E
6
5
3
4
5
8
8
5
6
8
10
11
7
8
11
16
16
16
16
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1001 - 1200 A
B
C
D
E
6
4
3
3
4
7
7
4
5
7
8
9
5
7
9
16
16
13
16
16
--
--
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1201 - 1400 A
B
C
D
E
5
5
0
3
5
7
6
4
4
6
8
8
5
6
8
14
16
11
14
16
16
--
16
16
--
--
--
--
--
--
1/ The load condition is determin ed by the man ner in wh ich the load is applied to the skids (figure 3-27)
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 179/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-48
Table 3-24 (cont). Nominal sizes an d maximu m length s of skids for wood cleated,skidded, load bearing base boxes.
Weight of
Contents (Pounds)
Load
Condition1/
Nominal Sizes
2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 8 4 X 4 4 X 6 6 X 6
Maximum Length of Skid (Feet)
1401 - 1600 A
B
C
D
E
5
3
0
3
3
6
5
3
4
5
7
7
4
5
7
13
16
18
12
16
16
--
15
16
--
--
--
16
---
--
1601 - 1800 A
B
C
D
E
5
3
0
0
3
6
5
3
3
5
7
6
4
4
6
12
15
9
11
15
16
16
14
16
16
--
--
16
--
--
1801 - 2000 A
B
C
D
E
4
3
0
0
3
5
4
0
3
4
6
5
3
4
5
11
13
8
10
13
15
16
12
15
16
16
--
16
16
--
2001 - 2220 A
B
C
D
E
4
0
0
0
0
5
4
0
3
4
6
5
3
4
5
10
12
7
9
12
14
16
11
14
16
16
--
16
16
--
2201 - 2400 A
B
C
D
E
4
0
0
0
0
5
3
0
0
3
6
4
3
3
4
10
11
7
8
11
13
16
10
13
16
16
16
16
16
--
2401 - 2500 A
B
C
D
E
4
0
0
0
0
5
3
0
0
3
6
4
3
3
4
9
10
6
8
10
13
16
10
12
16
16
--
16
16
--
Table 3-25. Allowable load (pounds) per in ch of width of load-bearing floor m embers
Length
between
outside
skids
(inches)
Nominal 1-inch thick boards
(lbs per inch)
Nominal 2-inch thick boards
(lbs per inch)
Nominal 3-inch thick boards
(lbs per inch)
Wood Groups Wood Groups Wood Groups
I or II III or IV I or II III or IV I or II III or IV
12 38 46 176 211 459 551
18 26 31 118 142 306 367
24 19 23 88 106 230 276
30 15 18 70 84 183 220
36 13 16 58 70 154 185
42 11 13 52 62 131 157
48 10 12 44 53 115 138
54 9 11 39 47 102 122
60 7 8 35 42 92 110
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 180/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-49
Figure 3-26. Styles A an d B cleat a rr an gement for wood cleated,
skidded, loadbearing base boxes.
Figur e 3-27. Atta chmen t of joist sup ports for wood cleated , skidded, load bea ring bas e boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 181/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-50
As s em bl y o f t he Ba s e
Depending upon the weight of the item, load condition, size and length of
skids, and whet her it is a Class 1 or Class 2 base, th e base part s are cut t o size
for fabrication. The na iling of plywood an d lumber floorin g to th e skids is
illustrated in figure 3-25.
Load bearing floor members over 2 inches thick and up to 4 inches in width
are bolted to th e skids with one carriage bolt at each end. Two car riage boltsare used at each end of load bearing floor members when they exceed two
inches in th ickness an d 4 inches in width. The load bear ing floor members ar e
fasten ed to skids with 3/8-inch car riage bolts. Load bear ing members less
tha n 2 inches in th ickness ar e nailed to the skids. Nails shall be as large as
pra cticable without splitting the piece. The end headers ar e fasten ed to the
skids with 3/8-inch car riage bolts.
As s e m b ly o f t h e S u p e r s t r u c t u r e
The assembly of the cleated plywood, cleated fiberboard, and cleated paper-
overlaid veneer panels into the superstructure shall comply with the
applicable requirements of the specifications already described.
As s e m b ly o f t h e S u p e r s t r u c t u r e t o t h e B a s e
The end and side panels are assembled to the base with lag bolts (sometimes
referred to as "lag screws"). One 3 inch lag bolt, three-eighths inch in
diameter, is placed through the lower longitudinal cleat of the side panel and
into the skid, at a distance not less than 2 inches from the end of the cleat.
The distance between additiona l lag bolts shall not exceed 12 inches. In
att aching the en d to th e header , one lag bolt is placed thr ough th e lower filler
and into the end header, at a distance not less tha n 2 inches, not m ore th an 3
inches from th e end of th e filler cleat . A minim um of two lag bolts ar e
required t hr ough each end filler cleat.
CAUTION
Lag bolts shall not be driven with a ha mmer except to star t them . They
shall be tur ned in their holes the full distan ce. If th e threa ds become
stripped in t he wood, the lag bolt is to be removed an d insert ed in a new h ole
near th e old position. A washer is placed under t he hea d of each lag bolt.
Coun tersinking of lag bolts is not per mitted.
WIREB OUND WOOD BOXES (P P P -B-585)A wirebound wood box is a resilient engineered structure deriving both
strength and economy from the substitution of steel wires for a considerable
portion of wood. The sides, top, an d bott om of th is conta iner a re sta pled to
several binding wires and are fasten ed to a framework of cleats a t each en d by
staples driven astride the end binding wires. The ends ar e nailed, stapled, or
wired to the cleat framework t o form th e conta iner.
Descr ip t ion of Box Com pon en ts ( fig 3-29)
B l ank
A blank is th e assembled pa rt s of a wireboun d wood box. The wood faceboards
of th e box are held together by wires which ar e stapled to them . Blanks ar e
"set up" to form a box.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 182/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-51
Figur e 3-28. Load distribut ions of skids.
Figur e 3-29. Componen ts of wireboun d wood boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 183/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-52
Cleats
Cleats form the framework to which the ends of the faceboards or slats are
fasten ed. They are made with mitered or mortised an d tenoned ends
(tongued-and-grooved). Int ermediat e rows of cleats ma y be required to
reinforce unsupp orted spans.
Faceboards
Faceboards a re the th in board s tha t form t he six faces of the box. They arema de of veneer , resa wn lumber , plywood, or pa per-overlaid veneer . Their
chief function is to hold th e cont ent s of th e box in p lace.
Bi nd i n g Wi r e s
They hold the faces of the box together and carry most of the weight in the
box.
S t a p l e s
They hold the faceboard s an d cleats t o the binding wires.
Ends
The ends may be either plain, linered, or battened, according to the type of
mat erials used, the weight of cont ents, an d type of load. Only ends made from
plywood are plain.
Bat tens
They ar e pieces of wood used on t he en ds of wireboun d wood boxes to reinforce
the en ds, to reinforce th e cleats, an d to increase the stren gth of the box so that
it ma y car ry hea vy stacking loads.
L iners
They are thinner pieces of boards stapled to the ends in order to tie all parts
together a nd to stren gthen th e fasten ing section. The grain of the liner is
placed at right an gles to th e grain of th e end faceboard. They are stapled to
either t he outside or inside face of th e ends. Liners for Styles 1 and 2 boxesare always vertical; liners for Style 3 boxes are always horizontal.
S k i d s
A wirebound box has t wo skids add ed when it carries a gross weight in excess
of 200 pounds or when the gross weight exceeds 100 pounds, but the length
and width a re 48 inches by 24 inches or more. Additional skids are added if
the dista nce between them exceed 48 inches. They are secured by two rows of
nails in a staggered pat tern . PP P-B-585 stipulates other requiremen ts
concerning the addition of skids.
Cl as s e s
Class 1 Domes t icFor domestic shipments not involving sea transportation, but subject to
storage, reha ndling, or reshipmen t to domestic destinat ions. Weight
limitation is 500 pounds.
Class 2 Norm al Oversea
For off-shore and oversea shipments contemplating projected storage and
comm ercial-type han dling. Weight limita tion is 400 poun ds.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 184/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-53
CLASS 3 MILITARY OVER SEAFor oversea shipments and handling in military supply systems, subject to
repeated rehandling and unprotected storage, and which may also be
subjected to extr eme climat ic cond itions. Weight limita tion is 300 poun ds.
If required, Class 2 and 3 boxes are preserved with the same preservative
trea tmen t a s PP P-B-621 and PP P-B-601 wood boxes.
STYLE O F BOXES
Three styles of wirebound wood boxes are used for domestic and oversea
shipment s. These styles differ primar ily in th e man ner of closur e of th e
binding wires. Ea ch style can be easily recognized in figure 3-30. Style 1 ha s a
twisted wire closure, Style 2 has a looped wire closure, and Style 3 has a
looped wire closure and has the ends reinforced with wire instead of battens.
Unless end battens are used, the Style 3 box is not recommended for Type 3
(difficult ) loads.
OR D E R I N G DAT A
Wirebound wood boxes are engineered and manufactured commercially and
are n ot made locally by militar y activities. Procurement documen ts shouldinclude the specification number (PPP-B-585); the inside length, width, and
depth to the nearest one-sixteenth of an inch; the style of box; the class of box;
the type of load; and the weight, qua ntity, and ma rking of th e content s. If
blocking or bracing is required, it is suggested that a drawing or a sample of
the item be furn ished to th e box manu factu rer.
C ONTAINER MANUFACTURER 'S I DENTIFICATION
Unless otherwise specified, each box is imprinted with the following
informat ion, which is limited t o 15 square inches a nd placed in a lower corner
of one side pa nel:
• Federal Specification PPP-B-585.
• Box manufacturer's name.• Plant location.
• Maximum weight of contents...poun ds.
• Class...box. For type...load. Style...Box.
B OX USAGE
Each box is manufactured to do a specific job. When used for the proper
maximum weight of contents, type of load, and class of use, it will afford
adequa te protection to th e item being shipped. It is importa nt th at th e
container ma nu factu rer's identification be utilized prior to packing. The
following points mu st be considered :
• In using the boxes, care should be exercised to select the box designed
for th e type of load t o be shipp ed. A Type 2 load will not be packed in
a box designed to carry a Type 1 load, and a Type 3 load will not be
packed in a box designed t o carr y either a Type 1 or a Type 2 load.
• Type 1 an d 2 loads, th e inside dim ensions of the box will be sufficiently
exact so that the contents fit snugly into the box and give support to
all its faces.
• Type 3 loads, other than bulk loads, the contents will be firmly bolted,
blocked, braced, or otherwise anchored to the frame of the box in such
a manner that shifting of the contents will not occur during handling
of the sh ipment.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 185/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-54
E CONOMY F ACTORS
Wirebound wood box contains approximately one-half as much lumber as a
nailed wood box of the sa me size which car ries th e sam e am ount of conten ts.
Wirebound wood boxes ar e usu ally available at a lower price tha n m an y other
shipping containers of more rigid construction.
Style 3 boxes are resilient on all six faces. Items r equiring this char acteristic
in the box can use a St yle 3. Style 3 boxes ar e the most economical of th estyles. The original cost of th e box is less th an t ha t of the other styles. The
savings of time in setting up th e boxes is advan tageous. Since the a mount of
lumber in a wirebound wood box is great ly reduced, compared to other types of
wood containers, the tare weight is lower. Accordingly, the freight charges on
a given size shipment a re correspondingly lower. There is a sa ving in labor
operations due to the simplicity of assembly and the ease of closure.
Styles 2 and 3 boxes can be opened and reclosed at intermediate stages of
distribution much easier tha n other kind s of conta iners.
Wirebound boxes can be repar ied and r esused.
Figur e 3-30. Styles of wireboun d wood boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 186/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-55
SE T T I N G U P T H E B OXES
Boxes arrive from the manufacturer in a knockdown condition and are stored
knockdown unt il the time of use. each box is then set u p prior to loading of
shipment . The meth od of setting up depen ds upon th e style of th e box.
Set t in g u p of S ty les 1 an d 2 ( fig 3-31)
Lift th e sides of th e blank slight ly before folding. Fold the box by raising th e
sides at r ight angles to th e bottom. Fast en th e ends to th e side cleats using asteel na iling table or an end stapling machine. En ds are fasten ed to side
cleat s by either st aples or cemen t-coat ed and chem ically-etched na ils. Un less
other wise specified, sta ples for Class 3 use boxes are galvan ized. The length
of each fastening will be not less than the thickness of the end boards plus
three-quarters the thickness of the cleats or battens. The points of the
fasten ings will not protru de from t he cleats or bat tens, but , if driven th rough,
they mu st be clinched. The avera ge spacing of the fastenings will not exceed 2
1/2 inches.
Drive sevenpenny cement-coated or chemically-etched cooler or sinker nails
through side cleats into adjacent battens and through bottom cleat into
interm ediate batt en. Boxes ha ving both vertical and horizontal batt ens
adjacent and parallel to cleats should be fastened by nailing through bottom
faceboar ds and cleats into the batt ens only. The spacing of nails driven into
adjacent bat tens will not exceed 5 inches.
Set t in g u p of Style 3 ( f ig 3-32)
Bend u p looped end wires of end s using th e hollowed end of a bon ender . Lift
sides of the blank slightly before folding and raise sides at right angles to
bottom. Pa ss the bent end loops thr ough notches in th e cleats. Using the
tapered end of the bon ender, bend back the looped wire over and around the
binding wir e of th e side.
When batt ens ar e used on the en ds of style 3 boxes, batt ens adjacent t o batt en
cleats are nailed by driving sevenpenny cement-coated or chemically-etchedcooler or sinker nails through the bottom boards, through the cleat and into
the adjacent batten . Spacing of na ils will not exceed 5 inches. Inter mediate
battens are secured by driving one sevenpenny cement-coated or chemically-
etched cooler and sinker nail through the board and cleat into the end of the
intermediate batt en.
S t r a p p i n g R e q u i r e m e n t s
Where strapping is required, the top cleats shall be brought in contact with
the side cleats and the strapping is applied before the wires at the closing
edges ar e twist ed or looped. This elimina tes occasiona l slack which ma y
develop when st rap ping is applied after closur e is made. Stra pping is placed
as indicated in figure 3-33 wire strapping cannot be smaller than 13-gauge.
Flat stra pping cannot be less tha n 5/8 X 0.020 inch.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 187/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-56
Figur e 3-31. Sett ing up of styles 1 and 2, wirebound wood boxes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 188/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-57
Figur e 3-32. Sett ing up of style 3 wireboun d wood box.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 189/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-58
Figur e 3-33. Str ap ping of wireboun d wood boxes.
Cl osu r e o f t he Boxes
Closu re o f S ty le 1
Style 1 boxes are closed by using special tools (fig 3-34). When in ter media te
battens are used on the ends of the box, one sevenpenny cement-coated or
chemically-etched sinker or cooler nail is driven through the top board andcleats and into the end of each intermediate batten. This is done prior to
mak ing th e closures of the binding wires.
Closu re o f S ty les 2 an d 3
These styles are closed by using a Sallee closer. Per form the steps, as shown in
figure 3-35. Insert the Sa llee closer th rough th e side loop an d catch the top
loop in th e notch on the en d of th e tool. Raise th e han dle of th e Sallee closer to
slightly beyond a vertical position a nd push the top loop down a gainst t he side
of th e box. Complete closing by swinging th e ha nd le of the Sa llee closer d own
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 190/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-59
as far as possible. Drive a na il th rough the top cleat into each inter mediate
batt en. Do not nail into the ends of the batt ens tha t are adjacent to the cleats.
Note. The ap plicable tools for makin g closur es are illustr at ed in figures 3-34
and 3-35. Correct tools are available from box man ufacturer. Do not use
screw drivers, pliers, etc., because an adequate closure cannot be made and
their u se is time-consuming an d may be a safety hazar d.
PALLETS (GENERAL)
DE S C R I P T I O N
A pallet is a portable platform on which material is placed to facilitate
han dling and tr an sportat ion. This platform is genera lly a two-deck stru ctu re
which permits mechanical handling and tiering of unit loads of supplies an
equipment.
Types o f Pa l le t s
Pallets are classified as expendable an perma nent . They are also classes as
general pur pose and special pur pose.
E x p e n d a b l e P a l le t s
Expendable pallets are designed generally for one shipment and then
discarded . Their constr uction is usua lly of wood, fiberboard , or a combinat ion
of th e two. In order to be effective as one-trip pallets, they mu st be
light weight an d low in cost. When t he cost of usin g them is equalled or
exceeded by the savings realized during a single trip, they are truly
expendable pallets. Examp les of expendable pallets are illustr ated in figure 3-
36.
P e r m a n e n t P a lle t s
Perm an ent pa llets are ter med as genera l purpose an d special purpose pallets.
G e n e r a l P u r p o s e P a ll e t sThe general pu rpose pallets ar e constru cted of ha rd wood an d ar e normally 40
inches by 48 inches in size. They fit economically int o ra ilroad an d, motor
vehicles, an d tra ilers. Two general pur pose pallets are th e 4-way entr y post
pallet and the 4-way (partial) four-stringer pallet (fig 3-37).
S p e c ia l P u r p o s e P a l le t s
Pallets made of metal, which are suitable for certain heavy duty usage, are
special purpose pallets. They are more rugged and will stan d more abuse tha n
wood pallets. There ar e no fasten ers to work loose and cause dam age to
flexible containers a nd th eir contents. Pa llets mad e of aluminu m ha ve been
developed that a re light in weight. The initial cost of metal pallets is high in
compa rison t o pallets m ade of wood.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 191/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-60
Figur e 3-34. Closing of style 1 wireboun d wood box with special tools.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 192/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-61
Figur e 3-35. Closing of style 2 an d 3 wirebound wood boxes.
Figure 3-36. Examp les of expanda ble pallets.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 193/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-62
F OUR -WAY P OST CON STR UCTION P ALLETS (MIL-P -15011)These pallets are available in two types: Type I (assembled) and Type II
(una ssembled). Ea ch type is ava ilable in two classe s: Class 1 (seasoned
lumber, 22 percent m aximum average moisture content); Class 2 (Unseasoned
lumber, unspecified moistu re content). There ar e four styles. Style 1 is the
general storage pallet and is of the standard 40 inch by 48 inch size, and
un less other wise specified, is const ru cted of high den sity wood. Style 1A
pallets are constructed the same as Style 1 pallets except that the size is 35
inches long by 45 1/2 inches wide. The sm aller, Style A1 pallets ar e designed
for better u tilization in int ermodal tra nsporters a nd t he fourt h st yle, style 2 is
a light-weight, air cargo pallet, 40 inches by 48 inches in size. It is const ru cted
of th e low or medium den sity woods with th ickness less th an th at for St yles 1
And 1A. These pallets provide full 4-way entry to materials han dling
equipment. As indicated in figure 3-37 nine posts are placed on t he bottom
boards with drive-screw nails conforming to Type II, Style 18, of ASTM F
1667-95. Stringers extending th e length (40 inches, Styles 1 and 2 and 35
inches for Style 1A and 42 inches for Style 1B) of the pallet are fastened to
each row of posts. The deck boar ds are na iled thr ough the str ingers and intothe posts. Style 1B pallets ar e constru cted the same as St yle 1 pallets except
that the size is 42 inches long by 53 inches wide.
FO UR-WAY (PARTIAL) STRINGE R CONSTRUCTION P ALLETS
(NN-P -71)Two-way and four-way stinger pallets are available in several types and may
be assembled or un assem bled (fig 3-37). Ea ch type is available in var ious
sizes. They are used wherever two-way or par tial four-way entr y is required
by conventional mater ials ha ndling equipment . Four str ingers made form 2
inch by 4 inch lumber are nailed or bolted at right angles to the bottom deck
boar ds. The stringers are cut out to enable fork lift entr y. The top deck
boar ds are na iled to th e stringers.
MAINTENANCE OF P ALLETSWooden pallets ar e susceptible to dama ge and mu st be kept in consta nt repair.
Broken or split deck boards must be replaced when their holding power is
impaired. Fast enings tha t work loose should be carefully repaired. When
nails must be replaced, snip off nail heads and drive into stringer or block.
Make sure that new nails do not line up with previously occupied nail holes.
It is recommended that a stock of repair parts be available for making all
repairs.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 194/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
3-63
Figure 3-37. Four-way entry post and (part ial)four -stringer pa llets.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 195/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-1
CHAPTER 4
BAGS AND SACKS
NEE D F OR BAGS AND SACKSWhile a considerable amount of the materiel furnished to the military
services is shipped in fiberboard, metal, or wooden containers, there are
man y supplies which can be m ost economically shipped in bu lk qua ntities in
bags and sacks. Items such as food products, building mater ials, some
chemicals and minera ls are effectively shipped in bags an d sacks. Bags and
sacks possess the inherent advantages of having low tare weight ratio (that
is, the ratio of the weight of the container to the weight of the contents);
being flexible; providing ease in filling and handling; requiring a minimum
storage space; and being constructed of low cost materials.
BAGS DEF INEDA bag is a preformed container made of flexible material, generally closed on
all sides except one which forms an opening that may or may not be sealed
after filling. It ma y be made of a single ply or mu ltiple plies of flexible
mat erial, or a combina tion of two or m ore mat erials such a s paper , meta l foil,
cellulose, and plastic films and textiles, any of which may be coated,
laminated, or treated to provide the properties required for packaging,
storing, and distributing th e commodity.
SACKS DEF INEDA sack often u sed as a synonym for a bag, generally refers t o heavier dut y or
shipping bags. No exact line of separa tion can be dra wn between wha t is
referred to as hea vy dut y bag and sh ipping sack. In th is section, both ba gsand sacks are discussed and may be employed to handle the same weights
an d kinds of comm odities. Usu ally, a conta iner designed to carr y over 50
pounds is considered a shipping sack.
SHIP P ING BAGS AND SACKSFor shipping military supplies, there are four flexible containers that are
app roved for use by th e DOD. These conta iner s are: cott on mailing bags (A-
A-2714); cushioned paper shipping sacks (A-A-160); burlap (A-A-1588); and
shipping bags (A-A-881).
COT TON MAILING BAGS (A-A-2714)
This description covers cloth ma iling bags with a dr awst ring closure. Cottonmailing bags are intended for packaging and mailing small miscellaneous
items.
Class i f i ca t ion
Bags sh all be of th e following types an d sizes:
Type 1 - Regular
Type 2 - Fire Retar dan t
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 196/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-2
Size A - 3 inches wide X 4 inches high
Size B - 3 inches wide X 5 inches h igh
Size C - 4 inches wide X 9 inches h igh
Size D - 4-1/2 inches wide X 8 inches high
Size E - 5-1/2 inches wide X 14 in ches h igh
Size F - 6 inches wide X 9 inches h igh
Size G - 6-1/2 inches wide X 10 inches highSize H - 7-1/2 inches wide X 18 in ches h igh
Size I - 8 inches wide X 10 inches h igh
C HARACTERISTICS
C o m p o n e n t s
Bags furnished under this description shall be made from components
meeting th e requirem ents of table 4-1.
C o n s t r u c t i o n
All seams sha ll be sewn with stitch type 401, seam type EF a-1 of FED-STD-
751, with 4 to 6 stitches per inch. Bottom an d side seams sha ll ha ve a
stitchin g ma rgin of not less th an 1/4 inch from th e edge of th e bag. The top
seam shall have a stitching margin of not less than 3/8 inch to allow for
insertion of th e dra wstring. A twine drawstr ing shall be inserted thr ough
the hem at the top of the bag so that each end of the drawstring projects not
less tha n 2 inches from the bag. The total length of th e drawstr ing shall be
not less th an t wice the overa ll width of th e bag plus an a dditiona l 6 inches. A
tag, made from cloth lined paper stock and measuring 3 ± 1/16 inches by 5-
1/2 ± 1/16 inches, shall be inserted into the bottom of the bag and shall be
sewn in place. When the bag is tu rn ed with t he seam edges inside, the tag
shall extend n ot less than 5 inches from th e bottom of th e bag. The paper
side of the t ag shall have a h ard su rface suitable for pen and ink addr essing.
D i m e n s i o n sDimensions shall be outside dimensions, expressed as overall width X overall
height . The tolera nce for each dimension sha ll be + 3/8 inches, or - 1/4
inches.
W o r k m a n s h i p
The bags shall be uniformly made, neatly trimmed, free from holes, stains,
tears, or other defects which may impair their serviceability or appearance.
The ta gs shall be firmly atta ched.
P a c k a g i n g , P a c k i n g , a n d M a r k i n g
Packaging, packing, and marking shall be as specified in the contract or
order.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 197/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-3
Table 4-1
Component Test Requ irement Test Method
Fabr ic Breaking Force
Fa bric Count
Surface Flammability (applies
only to fabric for Type 2 bags.)
Specific
Optical Density of Smoke
(Applies only t o fabric for Type 2
bags.)
Warp, not less than 48 pounds. Filling, not
less than 35 pounds.
Warp yar ns, not less tha n 40 per inch. Filling
picks, not less tha n 40 per inch.
Average flame sprea d index, not more th an
25.
Avera ge m aximum specific optical den sity,
not more than 100.
ASTM D 5304
ASTM D 3775
ASTM E 162
ASTM E 662
Seam
Thread
Breaking Force Average breaking force, not less than 3.0
pounds
ASTM D 2256,
Option A1
Drawst r ing Breaking Force Average breaking force, not less than 24
pounds
ASTM D 2256,
Option A1
P R OC UR E ME NTBuyer s sh all specify th e following:
• Type and size required;
• Preser vation, packaging, packing, labeling, an d ma rking requ ired.
• Item Ident ifiers/Reference Part N um ber System. (For cataloging use
only.)
A-A-2714 - 1 B This example describes a regular 3 inch high bag.
Size A - 3 inches wide X 4 inches high
Size B - 3 inches wide X 5 inches h igh
Size C - 4 inches wide X 9 inches h igh
Size D - 4-1/2 inches wide X 8 inches high
Size E - 5-1/2 inches wide X 14 in ches h igh
Size F - 6 inches wide X 9 inches h igh
Size G - 6-1/2 inches wide X 10 inches high
Size H - 7-1/2 inches wide X 18 inches high
Size I - 8 inches wide X 10 inches h igh
Type 1 - Regular
Type 2 - Fire Retar dan t
CUSH IONE D P APE R SHI P P ING SACKS (A-A-160, A-A-1588)Cushioned paper shipping sacks are made of two sheets of kraft paper
separa ted by an evenly distributed cush ioning medium. They may be used
for interior or exterior packaging where insulation, water resistan ce, or light
cush ioning effect is r equired for items weighing not m ore th an 10 pounds.
CUSHIONED WITH P OST CONSUMER RE COVERE D MATERIAL
(A-A-160)
C HARACTERISTICS
C o n s t r u c t i o n
The walls of the sack shall consist of 2 layers of kraft paper with a cushioned
medium such as macerated paper inserted between the layers. The outer
layer of kra ft paper shall be water resistan t. The fabricated sacks shall pass
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 198/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-4
the water resistan ce test an d the impact resistan ce test. The edge of the
inside seam sh all be located not more th an 1 inch from th e side of the sack.
D i m e n s i o n s
Dimensions of the sacks shall be outside measurements, expressed as width
by length . Dimen sions shall be as specified with a toleran ce of ± 1/4 inch.
Sack opening sh all be on t he sh ort side.
W o r k m a n s h i p
Sacks sha ll be uniform ly constru cted and free from h oles, tear s, cuts, splits,
or other defects wh ich m ight impair t heir u sefulness.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
E x a m i n a t i on o f t h e E n d I t e m F o r D i m e n s i o n s a n d Wo r k m a n s h i p
The samp le unit sha ll be one sack. The Inspection Level shall be S-2 with a n
Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in accordance with
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993.
T e s t in g o f t h e E n d I t e m F o r W a t e r R e s i s t a n c e a n d i m p a c t r e s i s t a n c e
The same u nit sha ll be one sack. The Inspection Level shall be S-1 with an
Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in accordance with
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993.
Wat e r Res i s t an ce Test
Two drops of water shall be placed on the outside of the sack and covered
with a watchglass. The water sh all remain on the outside of th e sack without
being absorbed for n ot less than 30 minut es.
I m p a c t R e s i st a n c e T e s t
Determine the cubic capa city of th e sack by multiplying th e th ree factors F1,
F2, and F3, together :
Cubic capa city = F1 x F2 x F3
F1 = sp ecified lengt h
F2 = 90% of specified width
F3 = 10% of specified width
Fill a graduated cylinder or similar volumetric device to 75 percent of the
cubic capacity of th e sack with d ry, un popped, popcorn. Tra nsfer th e popcorn
to the sack and seal th e open end of th e sack with pa ckaging ta pe. Drop each
sack six times from a height of 36 inches onto a h ard, u nyielding sur face such
as un carpeted concrete. The sack shall be dropped once on each face and
once on each side. If an y popcorn sp ills from th e sack, the sa ck does not pas s
the impact resistan ce test.
E x a m i n a t i on o f p a c k a g i n g , p a c k i n g a n d m a r k i n g
The sample unit for this examination shall be one fully prepared shipping
cont aine r. The Inspection Level sha ll be S-2 with an Acceptable Quality
Level (AQL) of 4.0 percent defective in accordance with ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-
1993.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 199/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The manufacturer/contractor shall certify that the kraft paper used to make
the sacks contains not less than 5 percent post consumer recovered material.
The Government reserves the right to require proof of such content prior to
the first delivery and thereafter as may be provided for under the provisions
of th e contra ct. Post consumer r ecovered mat erial is defined as paper,
paperboard and fibrous wastes from factories, retail stores, office buildings,homes, etc., which has passed through an end use as a consumer item,
including: Used corru gated boxes, old newspap ers, old ma gazines, mixed
waste paper, tabulating cards, used cordage; and all paper, paperboard, or
fibrous wa ste collected from m un icipal solid wa ste.
P ACKAGING, PACKING AND MARKIN G
Packaging, packing, and marking shall be as specified in the contract or
order.
CUSH IONE D WITH CLOSE D CEL L P LASTIC FILM (A-A-1588)
C HARACTERISTICS
C o n s t r u c t i o n
Sacks shall be fabricated from a composite material consisting of kraft paper
bonded to closed cell plast ic film cush ioning mate ria l. The composite
mat erial shall have a th ickness of not less th an 0.131 inches. The sacks shall
be fabricated so that the kraft paper forms the outside surface of the sack.
The open end of the sack shall be provided with an adhesive sealing flap
extending the ent ire width of the sack. The sealing flap shall have a str ip of
pressure sensitive adhesive, protected by a liner, extending across the entire
width of th e flap. The weight a nd test volume for each size sack sha ll be as
specified in ta ble 4-2. The fabricated sa cks shall pass the impa ct r esistance
test and t he creep test .
Table 4-2
Min imum inside Test load,
Size dimensions, inches Weight per sack, maximum pounds
000 3-3/4 x 6-1/4 0.44 oz. (12 g) 0.3
0 5-3/4 x 8-1/4 0.77 oz. (22 g) 0.8
1 7 x 10 0.99 oz. (28 g) 1.4
2 8-1/4 x 10 1.1 oz. (31 g) 2.0
3 8-1/4 x 12-1/4 1.4 oz. (40 g) 2.4
4 9-1/4 x 12-1/4 1.5 oz. (43 g) 3.0
5 10-1/4 x 13-3/4 1.9 oz. (54 g) 4.2
6 12-1/4 x 16-3/4 2.5 oz. (71 g) 7.2
7 14 x 17-3/4 3.0 oz. (85 g) 10.0
D i m e n s i o n s
Dimensions of the sa cks shall be inside measu remen ts, exclusive of th e flap,
expressed as width by length. Inside dimensions for each size, excluding th e
flap, sh all be not less tha n specified in table 4-2. Sack opening sha ll be on the
short side.
W o r k m a n s h i p
Sacks sha ll be uniform ly constru cted an d free from holes, tears, cuts, splits,
or other defects wh ich m ight impair t heir u sefulness.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 200/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
E x a m i n a t i on o f t h e E n d I t e m F o r We i gh t , D im e n s io n s , a n d W or k m a n s h i p
The sample un it shall be 1 sack. The Inspection Level shall be S-2 with an
Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in accordance with
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993.
T e s t in g o f t h e E n d I t e m F o r I m p a c t R e s i s t a n c e a n d C r e e p
The samp le unit sha ll be 2 sacks, 1 for each t est. The Inspection Level shall
be S-1 with a Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in
accordan ce with ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993.
Impact resistance shall be verified using the test load for each size specified
in from table 4-2. The t est load for Sizes 000, 0, 1, 2, and 3 sh all consist of
dry, un popped, popcorn. The test load for Sizes 4, 5, 6, an d 7 shall consist of
bond pa per, writing paper, or pap erback books. For each size sack, th e test
load shall weigh within ± 0.1 poun d of th e weight specified in table 4-2. The
popcorn shall be placed in plastic bottles or vials which will fit in the sack
being tested. The test load ma y be distributed am ong more th an 1 bottle orvial. Cap the bottles or vials. The paper or paperback books may be wrapp ed
in paper or plast ic for ea se of insert ion a nd r emoval from th e sack. Place the
appr opriate test loads into the sack selected for th is test. Remove the liner
from th e flap, close an d seal th e sack. Drop each sack 6 times from a h eight
of 36 inches onto a hard, unyielding surface such as uncarpeted concrete.
The sack sha ll be dropped once on each face and once on each side. If an y
tears more than 1/2 inch long, extending from the exterior through to the
interior of the sack, are present at the conclusion of the impact resistance
test, the sa ck does not pass the impa ct resistance test.
Creep Tes t
Four test specimens, each 3" 1/8 inches square, shall be cut from each sack
selected for th e creep te st. Two specimens sha ll be cut from th e front face of the sa ck, an d 2 from th e rear face of the sack. The specimens shall be evenly
stacked on a piece of glass approximately 3-1/2 inches square. The bottom
specimen shall be placed bubble side up, the second specimen bubble side
down, the third specimen bubble side up, and the top specimen bubble side
down. A second 3-1/2 inch squa re piece of glass sh all be placed on top of th e
stack an d a weight sufficient t o exert a pr essure of 1.0 " 0.1 pound p er squa re
inch on the tes t specimens sh all be placed on t he top piece of glass. After 60 "
5 minutes, the vertical distance between the glass plates shall be measured
at ea ch of the 4 corn ers of th e stack with an instru ment capa ble of measuring
to 0.001 inch. The measu remen ts sha ll be taken carefully so as not to disturb
the stack. The average of these 4 measurem ents sha ll be recorded as the
initial stack thickness. The initial stack th ickness divided by 4 sha ll be
recorded as t he th ickness of th e composite mater ial. The weight shall be kepton the stack for a total of 168 " 2 hours, then the distance between the glass
plates shall be measured and averaged in the same way as was done for the
initial stack thickness. This measur ement sh all be recorded as the final stack
thickness. The final sta ck th ickness sh all be not less th an 80 percent of th e
initial stack th ickness.
Examina tion of packaging, packing an d mark ing. The sample unit for this
examinat ion sha ll be one fully prepared sh ipping container. The Inspection
Level shall be S-2 with an Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) of 4.0 percent
defective in accorda nce with ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 201/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-7
R EGULATORY R EQUIREMENTS
The manufacturer/contractor shall certify that the kraft paper used to make
the sacks contains not less than 5 percent post consumer recovered material.
The Government reserves the right to require proof of such content prior to
the first delivery and thereafter as may be provided for under the provisions
of th e contra ct. Post consumer r ecovered mat erial is defined as paper,
paperboard and fibrous wastes from factories, retail stores, office buildings,homes, etc., which has passed through an end use as a consumer item,
including: Used corru gated boxes, old newspap ers, old ma gazines, mixed
waste paper, tabulating cards, used cordage; and all paper, paperboard, or
fibrous wa ste collected from m un icipal solid wa ste.
P ACKAGING , P ACKING , AND MARKING
Packaging, packing, and marking shall be as specified in the contract or
order.
P ROCUREMENT
Buyer s ha ll specify:
• Size, as listed in ta ble 4-2.
• Packaging, packing, and mar king required.
BUR LAP S HI P P ING BAGS (A-A-881)This description covers sta nda rd n ew or u sed burlap bags for u se in domestic
and overseas shipment of supplies and ma terials.
C HARACTERISTICS
Cloth
The bags shall be fabricated from jute burlap cloth conforming to the
requiremen ts in t able 4-3.
C o n s t r u c t i o n
Bags sha ll be furn ished new or used, as specified.
The bags shall have open-mouth tops and shall have bottom and/or side
seams. The minimum avera ge nu mber of stitches shall be 3.0 to th e inch,
machine sewn a nd of stitch type 301 or 401 of Fed. Std. No. 751. The ra w
edges of the bag shall be sewn with export seams, such as those in Fed. Std.
No. 751, SSd-1. Seams sh all have a break ing load of not less tha n 80 percent
of the brea king load of the bur lap from which th e bags are m ade. Raw top
edges of bags shall be hem med. Selvaged edges sha ll be sewn with flat
seams, and r aw edges with export seams.
The size or capacity of the bags shall be as specified in the contract order.When specified, bags shall be suitable for subsistence items. Ea ch ba g shall
be fur nished with a polyethylene liner inser ted. The liner sha ll have a Water
Vapor Transmission Rate of now more than 15g per m 2 per day. The liner
shall extend not less tha n 3 inches beyond t he top of th e burlap.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 202/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
4-8
Table 4-3
Fa bric Count
Minimum
Yarn s per inch
Maximum
Weight, per linear yar d
by 40 inch width
(+8, -2 percent )
Warp
Filling
8
8
11
11 7.5 ounces
W o r k m a n s h i p
Bags shall be clean, dry, and free of holes, tears, frayed threads, objectionable
odors, or foreign ma tter impregna ted in or a dhering t o the sides of the bags.
The bags sha ll be free from other defects which may affect serviceability. If
mended, there shall be no more tha n t wo mends per bag, and th e maximum
size of each mend sha ll not be more t ha n 2 inches.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Tes t i ng o f Bur l ap C l ot h
The bur lap cloth sh all be tested in accordance with t he m ethods listed below.
The sa mple un it sha ll be one r oll of cloth. The In spection Level sha ll be S-2with an Acceptable Qu ality Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in accorda nce
with ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993.
TESTS METHODS
Fabric Count ASTM D 3775
Weight ASTM D 3776
Breaking Load ASTM D 1682 (Grab Test)
Tes t i ng o f Po l ye t h y l ene
The polyethylene shall be tested in accordance with ASTM Method F 372,
Water Vapor Tran smission Rate. The sample unit shall be one roll of
polyeth ylene. The Insp ection Level sha ll be S-2 with a n Acceptable Quality
Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in accordance with ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-
1993.
Examination of the end item for defects in workmanship, size, or capacity.
The sample un it shall be one bag. The Inspection Level shall be S-2 with an
Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in accordance with
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993.
T e s t in g o f t h e E n d I t e m F o r S e a m S t r e n g t h
The sam ple unit sh all be one bag. The In spection Level sha ll be S-1 with an
Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) of 2.5 percent defective in accordance with
ANSI/ASQC Z1.4-1993. Ea ch seam of th e sample un it shall be test ed inaccordance with ASTM Standa rd Test Method D 1682, Gra b Test. The test
specimens shall be cut so that the seam to be tested is in the middle of the
specimen, para llel to the 4 inch sides. One determ ination sha ll be made on
each seam of the sam ple un it. Breaks in the fabric outside the seam ar ea,
including jaw breaks, are acceptable provided they yield breaking loads in
excess of 80 percent of the br eaking load of the burlap. Any seam wh ich h as
a breaking load less than 80 percent of the breaking load of the burlap from
which t he bags ar e made is a defect.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 203/399
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 204/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-1
CHAPTER 5
PAILS AND DRUMS
DESCR IP TION, CLASSIFICATION, AND SELE CTION FACTORS
DE S C R I P T I O N
P a i l s
Pails are cylindrical containers made of metal or plastic, with or without a
bail ha nd le. They have a capa city of 1 to 12 gallons. Meta l pails are
constru cted of 20 gage or h eavier metal. The sides and bottoms of the p lastic
pails are integral units having a minimum thickness of 0.045 inches and
designed so they can be easily stacked. Pa ils may have fixed heads
employing pour spouts of various designs or have full removable heads.
D r u m s
Drum s a re cylindrical, straight-walled conta iners made of meta l plastic fiber
or plywood, or a combina tion of th ese mat erials. Dru ms ma y be provided
with r olling hoops pressed or expanded from th e body of the dr um, or I bar s
welded to th e body. Dru ms ha ve fixed or removable heads.
Note. Can s are lightweight containers made of meta l, paper boar d,
pulpboar d, or a combinat ion of meta l and paper board or pulpboard. Since
cans usually are associated with unit packaging, information concerning
them is found in FM 38-700.
C LASSIFICATION Pails and drums are classified as to usage, that is, interior or exterior
containers, an d reusa ble an d nonreu sable conta iners. They are also
classified as to composition--metal and nonmetal.
I n t e r i o r a n d E x t e r i o r C on t a i n e r s
Interior
Inter ior container s a re covered in FM 38-700.
Exterior
These conta iners consist of pails, reusable type meta l containers, a nd d ru ms.
Exterior containers ar e designed to withsta nd rough usage. They may be
palletized for convenience in handling.
R e u s a b l e An d N o n r e u s a b l e C o n t a i n e r s
Reusable
Certa in meta l cont ainers and drum s ar e designed for reuse. The reusable
type is very convenient for the ret ur n shipment of repaira ble items. This
feature is particularly advantageous in cases where repairable instruments
or accessories can be packed for shipment to the maintenance overhaul
activity in the container in which the replacement item was received.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 205/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-2
Multiple trip pails and drums may, under certain conditions, be refilled and
reused for t he sh ipment of liquid, powdered or gra nu lar commodities.
Nonr eus ab l e
Single-trip containers usually are discarded after their first use. One type,
the strippable drum, is filled with a hot liquid which solidifies after cooling.
At destinat ion, the drum is torn away from the enclosed product. Othersingle-trip containers, designed of light gage metal, are discarded after the
first trip because of Department of Transportation (DOT) Regulations, or
because the general physical condition of the container would not warrant
another trip.
M et a l an d N onm e t a l Con t a i n er s
Pails and drums are made from metal, although some may be made from
fiberboar d. The most common met al used for drum s is mild steel. Some
drums, however, are made of aluminum, nickel, stainless steel, various
alloys, or plast ics.
USE AND SELECTION F ACTORS
Us e
A wide range of items and commodities are adaptable for shipping in pails
and dr um s. Liquids, semiliquids, semisolids, granu lar, flaked, and powdered
mat erials, and solids ma y be shipped in specified types of these conta iners.
Fragile items and precision instruments may be given the high degree of
protection th ey require by the use of cans or dru ms. Ha zardous mat erials,
such as corrosive liquids, flammable solids, flammable liquids, and acids
which cannot be shipped in any other type of container may be shipped in
appr oved types of pails and dru ms.
Selec t ion
When selecting a pail or drum, it must be remembered that these containers
are stru ctu rally rigid in design an d are dustpr oof. They may also be
waterproof or water-vaporproof. They are easy to mark and afford excellent
physical protection of conten ts during shipment an d stora ge. Pails and
drums may be less susceptible to pilferage than some other types of
containers. Care must be tak en when selecting conta iners. This is
par ticularly tru e when selecting a cont ainer for sh ipment of dan gerous items;
it is also tru e when selecting the corr ect conta iner for other items. For
example, a squar e item in a cylindr ical conta iner ta kes about 1-1/2 times th e
cube required for the same item when packed in a squa re container. In
addition to the loss of valuable cube, excess dunnage is required to fill the
voids when a conta iner of the wrong sha pe is used.
Note. Containers used for shipment s of ha zardous mat erials can n ot be madein accordance with the Department of Transportation (DOT) Specifications
after 1 October 1994 and may n ot be used for sh ipment a fter 1 October 1996.
At that time, all containers for Hazardous Materials must be made in
accordan ce with th e United Na tions Specifications. However, packages filled
prior to October 1, 1991, conforming to old requirements, and marked with
"INHALATION HAZARD" as appropriate, may be offered for transportation
and t ran sported unt il 1 October 2001.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 206/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-3
METAL SHIP P ING AND STORAGE DR UMS (MIL-D-6054)
DE S C R I P T I O N
These reusable steel shipping and storage drums are fabricated of 18 to 22
gage steel and incorporate a full removable (recessed or dome style) cover.
Bolted-ring or lever lock closures are used to seal the cover onto the drum
body (fig 5-1). Gask ets for th e covers may be tu bula r or solid. The covers,gaskets and locking rings are interchangeable within each diameter group.
Rolling hoops, which increase the strength, rigidity, and ease of handling,
also provide the means of anchoring internal dunnage through the use of
split expan ding steel rings wh ich fit int o th e grooves (fig 5-2). When pr operly
sealed, the d ru ms provide a highly effective water -vaporproof container , th us
affording a degree of protection suitable for Method 40 and Method 50
preservation.
Figur e 5-1. Bolted rin g and lever actua ted type closur es (MIL-D-6054).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 207/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-4
C LASSIFICATION
The drums are available in various capacities ranging from 3 to 80 gallons,
and from 40 to 250 poun ds gross weight. The dru ms a re available with inside
diameters ranging from 10.5 inches to 30 inches, and inside usable heights
ran ging from 8.08 to 41.12 inches. The capacities an d dimensions, which a re
available in different combinations, are specified in Military Standards
MS27683 and MS27684.
USE
These metal drums are intended to be used for storage and shipment of
military material . Drums are r equired by test to withstand intern al pressure
of 15.0 pounds per square inch (psi), which will allow them to be used for
packing of hazar dous mater ials for tran sportat ion by military aircraft. These
drums are also used as overpacks for shipments by air of containers which
will not meet 15 psi. All size dru ms ar e suita ble for all meth ods of
preservat ion wher e a rigid container is specified. The use of dru ms ar e
affected by the following factors:
S i z e a n d C a p a c i ty
There is no specified rule for the selection of a container for a particular item.it is obvious, however, that a container will be selected which will be
adequate to contain the item and its blocking and cushioning, yet allow
sufficient clearance between the item and the container, or between the
blocking and th e container walls, to prevent da mage to the item when th e
dru m is ha ndled roughly. The cont ainer must n ot be too large, as this will
involve the use of extra spa ce an d weight. This is a disadvant age when a
large nu mber of such dru ms ar e to be shipped or stored.
Figur e 5-2. Int ern al locking rings in position (MIL-D-6054).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 208/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-5
I n t e r na l Lock i n g R i ngs
The split steel locking ring is designed to fit snugly within the rolling hoop of
a m etal conta iner a nd provide a circular flange sup port for interior blocking
(fig 5-3). Car e must be used in t he design of th e inter ior blocking or oth er
fitt ings to pr event displacemen t of th e locking rin g when loaded. Without
some safety device, the locking ring may be loosened by rough handling of the
container du e to th e load imposed on th e ring. Figure 5-3 illustra tes a safetyrin g ma de of plywood. If th e item being packed precludes th e use of a safety
ring, the same function may be performed by using three blocks equally
spaced around the internal locking ring and secured to the dunnage by
screws. This perm its the rem oval of th e blocks for unpa cking.
Cup -Type Inser t s
The cup-type meta l insert was developed primarily as a m ount for gener ators
and starters for metal container packing, but it may be adapted to other
items. Figure 5-4 shows the meta l cup, with plywood fasten ed to the two
ends to aid in blocking while figure 5-5 shows the cup in position, anchored
between the locking ring and t he conta iner cover. The nu merous bolt h oles
thr ough th e cup allow it to be bolted to various items as r equired.
Figur e 5-3. Use of inter na l locking rin g (MIL-D-6054).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 209/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-6
Figur e 5-4. Cup-type met al inser t (MIL-D-6054).
Figur e 5-5. Cup-type ins ert locked in place (MIL-D-6054).
Crate-Type In ser t s
The cra te-type meta l insert is shown in figure 5-6. In use, the item being
packed is bolted to two adja cent side member s. Plywood disks on the end s of
the insert provide some cushioning. The base of th e item packed will be
insulated from the insert with barrier material conforming to MIL-B-121,
Grade A, to prevent the possibility of corrosion from reaction of two
dissimilar meta ls. The maximum weight of the packed item should not
exceed 25 pounds for the 10-1/2 inch diameter insert, or 30 pounds for the 13
13/16 inch insert.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 210/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-7
Figur e 5-6. Item ins ta lled in cra te-type insert (MIL-D-6054).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 211/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-8
Cl os u r e
There ar e two styles of closure for these drum s. They are th e bolted ring
closur e an d th e lever activated locking closure. Closur es ar e ma de in one of
the following ma nn ers:
• Bolted-rin g closure. The closure ma y be made in two ways. A device
may be used which encircles the locking ring and applies pressureun iformly ar ound the circumference of the ring. The closur e is
effected by tightening the bolt and nut after uniform pressure is
applied at all points around the ring. Care should be taken th at t he
gasket is properly seated in the groove of the cover prior to closure.
Alternately, closure may be made by tightening the closure bolt (fig 5-
7). The locking ring is tapped a t various points a bout th e closure r ing
while the closure bolt is being tightened. The tighten ing is continued
until at least a minimum torque of 6 foot-pounds plus or minus one-
ha lf is applied. In lieu of th e specified torque indicat ing device,
closur e of an exterior m etal conta iner h aving a slotted-head bolt m ay
be accomplished by using a common screwdriver having an overall
length of app roximat ely 17 inches. If th is procedur e is followed, a
spot check of torque with a torque indicating device should be madeto assure adequa te tensioning. Drum s used for shipping commodities
by Parcel Post will have the bolt end and protruding edges of the
closure rin g wra pped, ta ped, cushioned or otherwise securely covered
to prevent damage to postal employees, mail bags, and other
conta iners dur ing shipment . Cont ainers shall be overpacked in
fiberboar d boxes when this extr a p recaution is considered n ecessary.
When overpacked, containers shall be secured within the fiberboard
box with fiberboar d or other su itable dunn age.
Figur e 5-7. Tapp ing locking ring while tighten ing bolt to insu re
an effective seal (MIL-D-6054).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 212/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-9
• Lever actua ted locking closure. When specified in the cont ra ct or
purchase order a lever actuated type locking ring may be used
instead of the n ut a nd bolt type locking ring. Use may be ma de of a
device which encircles the locking ring and applies pressure
un iformly about th e circum ference of th e locking ring. The closur e is
then affected by closing the locking lever and then the wire and lead
seal lever which locks th e locking lever in position. When th eencircling device is not available for use, tension is applied by the
locking lever and the ring is tapped repeatedly around the
circumference until the ring is seated and the lever is in a locking
position. The lever is th en locked into place by the wire a nd lead sea l
lever lock.
Sea l i ng
Sealing of the conta iner is effected by mea ns of a wire a nd meta l seal which is
app lied after t he closure is complete. Drill 3/32 inch diam eter h oles in each
locking rin g lug if th ey ar e not alrea dy predrilled. The sealing wire is
inserted through the holes and the loose ends are twisted together tightly,
after which th e seal is crimped over the t wisted ends of the wire.
R e p a i r a n d R e u s e
The components of the metal shipping and storage drums are repaired and
reu sed a s follows:
• Conta iners, cover, ring, and gasket. Due to the welded constr uction
of an exterior type metal container, dents are considered repairable
even though a seam or joint is involved. Dents a re rem oved, painted
surfaces retouched, an d the container r eused or retu rn ed to stock. If
the container is distorted beyond practical repair, or has a dented or
otherwise damaged sealing lip, it is unfit for further use and should
be handled accordingly.
• Metal insert s and du nn age. It is not norma lly considered advisable to
repair met al inserts or dunn age, due to the fact tha t once distorted or
deformed, the metal insert would probably be weaker if bent back
into the origina l sha pe, and th us be incapable of affording the
necessary protection. If bent back an d reinforced, the spring ra te of
the material might be greatly changed, thus transmitting any shock
directly to the pa rt to be packed and causing dam age. However, in an
emergency they may be repaired under competent engineering
supervision. Immediat ely upon removal of an item from a metal
insert type mount, the interior locking rings and metal inserts must
be retur ned to stock, un less required for immediat e reuse. Al inserts
and interior locking rings are stocked and handled as separate items,
an d never as component par ts of th e container a ssembly.
METAL DRUMS (STANDARD ) (MISCELLANE OUS)
DE S C R I P T I O N
Metal dru ms are cylindr ical, single-wall shipping conta iners with a capacity
which usually ranges from 12 to 110 gallons, 55 gallons being the most
common capacity. Metal drums are equipped with rolling hoops which
provide additional str ength to the side wall and pr ovide for ease of handling.
The r olling hoops may be pa ra llel to each oth er or be offset t o facilita te closer
nesting for palletization and carloading. Metal drums may have full
rem ovable hea ds or tight hea ds (fixed) (fig 5-8). A dr um wit h a t ight h ead is
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 213/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-10
provided with a 2 inch diamet er bun g and 3/4 inch diameter vent h ole for
filling and emptying. These openings may be on the drum h ead or in th e
dru m body. Drum s may be unlined or lined with lacquer, varnish, enamel
and p lastics, rubber, lead, or aluminu m.
C LASSIFICATION
The DOD uses many kinds of drums for the shipment of various materials.Listed in ta ble 5-1 is th e Feder al specification n umber an d t itle (PP P-D-729)
and the DOT specification number and title. Figure 5-8 shows the type of
drum classified in Federal Specification PPP-D-729 and the corresponding
DOT-5B. DOT designates the DOT 17E and DOT-37A drums as single-trip
containers.
Figur e 5-8. Types of dru m closures an d typical ma rk ings for
domestic drums (PPP-D-729).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 214/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-11
Table 5-1. Specifications an d Titles of Meta l Dru ms .
Federa l specification num ber and title DOT specification, number and title
PPP-D-729 drum, metal, 55 gallon (for
shipmen t of noncorrosive mat erials)
Type I..............................................................(Class A-Closehead, Class B-Openhead)
Type II.............................................................
Type IV............................................................
Type V.............................................................
Type VI............................................................
Type VII...........................................................
DOT-5B Steel barr els or dru ms. Removable head containers whichwill pass all required tests ar e auth orized.
DOT-17E Steel drum s, single trip container. Removable head
containers not authorized.
DOT-17H Steel drum s, single trip container . Removable head
required.
DOT 5A - Straight side, unlined steel for acid and corrosive liquids.
DOT 5C - Straight side, corrosion-resistant steel for acid and
corrosive liquids.
DOT 5D - Closehea d str aight side, lined steel for acid an d corrosive
liquids.
USE
The tight (fixed) head drums are primarily used for the shipment of liquids.
Emptying may be through either the filler or vent hole, although the filler
hole is most commonly utilized. A spout ma y be affixed to th e thr ead ed
portion of th e hole to facilitate emptying. A pum p, either h an d or
hydra ulically operated, may be utilized in th e hole. Greases, dry powdered,
flaked or granular materials, etc., may be shipped in a full removable head
dru m. The full removable head dr um pr ovides th e easiest access to th e
contents.
R E U S EMost metal drums are initially filled at the manufacturer's plant and are
reusa ble except for single-trip cont ainers. When empty, the dru ms ma y be
ret ur ned to dest inat ion for refilling. If refilling is done by th e initia l user ,
care should be taken not to reuse drums which have been used to ship
hazardous materials, until such drums are cleaned and tested in accordance
with UN recommendations. Failure to do so may create a serious health
hazar d. When filling dru ms with dan gerous mat erials, only UN
recommen ded type dru ms may be used for th at commodity. The dru m
specification number, the name, initial, or symbol of the manufacturer; the
letters "US" to indicate tha t th e drum is the property of the Governmen t; the
letters "STC" if the drum is a single-trip container; and a numerical
indication of th e th innest gage of metal u sed in t he constr uction, th e capacity
of the drum in gallons, and the year of manufacture are embossed on thebottom of th e dru m (fig 5-8). For exam ple, 18-55-74 mean s tha t dru m is 18
gage metal, 55-gallon capa city, and was mad e in 1974. When filling th e
dru ms, the conten ts ma y not exceed the m ar ked capacity minu s 2 percent for
outage.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 215/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-12
FIBE R DRU MS (P P P -D-723)
DE S C R I P T I O N
Fiber drums are cylindrical shipping containers with bodies made of
fiberboard, either lapped or parallel wound (convolutely) in the form of a
hollow cylinder. They may be eith er single un it or telescopic body type. The
heads ar e of meta l, wood, plywood, or fiberboard. There are ma nychara cteristics of fiber dru ms wh ich give them advan tages over other t ypes of
containers. Included am ong these are cleanliness, dura bility, low uniform
tare weight, retard temperature fluctuation, easy opening and closing, water
and moisture resistance, stackability, easy handling, product protection and
wide ra nge of diameter s and heights. Fiber drum s are easily opened and
reclosed.
C LASSIFICATION
Fiber drums are available in the types, grades, and classes shown in table 5-
2.
USE
The intended u ses are shown in ta ble 5-2. The other factors covered by this
para graph m ust a lso be observed.
Dom es t i c Type ( Type I )
Fiberboard drums covered by this specification are intended for use as
domestic shipping containers. Grade A drum s are for dr y or solid mat erials.
Class 1 regular construction should normally be used; class 2 foil laminated
should be used for highly hygroscopic materials needing a barrier, such as
desiccan ts. Use of grade B dru ms should be limited to semisolid ma terials
having a consistency similar to asphalt, lubricating grease, petrolatum,
refractory cement, caulking compounds, roof coatings, adhesives, textile
sizing, and food produ cts such as jellies and fond an ts. The consist ency of
asphalt materials and lubricating greases should not exceed 350 units when
measured in accordance with method 311.6 of FED-STD-791 (ASTM D 217).
Class 2 is normally used when high moisture barrier is required or when the
type I, grade A, class 2 is supplemental by the aluminum liners it may be
used to deter electrostat ic charges and pr event explosion. Grade C dru ms ar e
for hot-poured materials that solidify on cooling and should be limited to
materials poured at temperature not exceeding 400oF. Grade E drums are
for nonregulated liquids or articles in liquids.
Type I , Gr a de D
This is also intended for norma l overseas shipment . When substitu ted for
type II drum s, the dru ms sha ll be mark ed type II, overseas type (nonweather
resistant).
T y p e I I O v e r s e a s (N o n w e a t h e r R e s i st a n t ) Fiberboard drums covered by this specification are intended for use for
normal overseas shipment where numerous handling and storage at
destination are not anticipated.
Type I I I Ove r s ea s (Wea t h e r Res i s t an t )
Fiberboar d dr ums covered by th is specification a re int ended for un protected
weather exposure usage for added protection in high humidity or outdoor
storage environment.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 216/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-13
E x c e p t io n a l R e q u i r e m e n t
Exceptional commodities, especially dangerous articles (hazardous material),
may require better material and construction requirements than are covered
by th is specificat ion.
C o m p l ia n c e M a r k i n g
In addition and adjacent to the drum manufacturer 's markings required byUniform Freight Classification, National Motor Freight Classification or DOT
rules or regulations, each drum is stamped or printed in black capital letters
not less tha n 3/16 inch in h eight with informa tion concerning t he t ype, class,
gra de, specificat ion nu mber , etc. For examp le, th e informa tion for the Type I
dru m is sh own below:
Type I
(DOMESTIC TYPE)
COMPLIES WITH FE D. SPEC. PP P-D-723J
FOR DOMESTIC SHIPMENT _____________
GRADE_______CLASS__________________
MAX. WT. OF CON TENTS ___________LBS.
MAX. CAPACITY OF CONTENTS ______GAL.
In addition, Grade D drums shall have stenciled or printed on the cover and
side wall in letters not less than 3/4 inch in height, the following
precautionary markings:
STAND ON EN D
KEEP COOL AND DRY
Only contents of the type, grade, and class as indicated in the compliance
mar kings are to be placed in these drum s. The weight an d capa city must a lso
conform to th ese requiremen ts.
Table 5-2. PP P-D-723 Fiber drum s
Types, grades, a nd classes. Fiber dru ms covered by this specification
shall be of the following types, grades, and classes, as specified.
Type I
Type II
Type III
- Domestic (nonweat her r esistant )
- Overseas (nonweather resistant)
- Overseas (weather resistant)
Grade A
Grade B
Grade C
Grade D
Grade E
- For dry an d solid ma terial (applicable to all types)
- For sem iliquid ma terial (applicable to all types)
- For hot poured materials that solidify on cooling (applicable to types I and II only)
- For rolled or cylindrical items (applicable to types I and II only)- For liquids or articles in liquid - nonregulated (applicable to all types)
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
Class 5
- Regular constr uction (applicable to only types I and III grade A dru ms)
- Foil laminat ed constr uction (applicable to only types I and III grade A dru ms)
- Integral plast ic lining (applicable to only grade E dr ums)
- Semi-rigid plastic component (open h ead loose liner applicable to only grade E drum s
- Molded rigid one-piece plastic component (closed head liner) applicable to only grade E drums
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 217/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
5-14
Cl os u r e
The closure of fiber drums must be such that they may be opened and
reclosed by ha nd or simple tools. These ar e thr ee types of closures wh ich ar e
comm only used. They ar e th e friction-type or telescopic slip on covers, wh ich
are secured with pressure sensitive tape, lever-activated locking bands, and
th e m eta l clip or lu g closur e (fig 5-9).
Figur e 5-9. Types of fiber dr um closures (PP P-D-723).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 218/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-1
CHAPTER 6
CRATESINTRODUCTIO N TO CRATES
NOMENCLATURE AND R ELATED TE R M S
Crates are rigid containers constructed of structural members fastened
together t o protect the conten ts. Crat e design involves num erous nam es and
terms which must be defined if the construction of crates is to be explained
without confusion. When the na mes of th e separat e component s are known,
although they differ in various specifications and drawings, their functions
and r elationsh ip to each oth er are more easily un derstood. In order tha t both
general and detail design requirements may be clearly understood, reference
to items des cribed in ASTM D 996 an d below is recommen ded.
N o m e n c l a t u r e
Baf f l e
A piece of plywood, wood, or m eta l placed over ven tilat ion holes to d eflect air
or water entering the crate.
B o t to m S h e a t h i n g
Boards na iled to the bottom sur face of th e fra me mem bers of a sill base. Also
kn own as flooring.
Br i dg i ng
Members of the same depth as joists or sills placed at right angles to theintermediate longitudinal or crosswise sills or headers to prevent lateral
tu rn ing or buckling of th e joists or sills.
Cleats
Auxiliary reinforcements for plywood pan els placed between vertical st ru ts to
strengthen the pan el.
Covered Cra te
A crate with open-type frame with an outside covering of plywood or paper-
overlaid veneer.
Cr a t e Bas e
The bottom load bear ing unit of a crat e.
Crate Cover in g
A lightweight material fastened to the frame of an open crate to give more
positive weather proofing tha n is offered by an open crat e an d shr oud.
Diagonals
Frame members positioned between parallel frame members and placed at
angles of nearly 450 to the latter.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 219/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-2
Diagon al Floorboard s
Usua lly 1-inch board s, cut at 450 angle to the skids and placed between the
forklift areas.
En d Fr am e M em ber s
Members of the top panel of an open crate, placed crosswise at each end of
the top.
En d S i l l s
Members forming the ends of a sill frame.
Fi l ler S t r ips
Boards placed across the ends of thin, nonload bearing floorboards which fill
the space below the lower frame m ember of the sides.
Floor Mem bers
Board s an d timbers nailed or bolted to th e top of the skids form ing a plat form
for the contents a nd a bottom closur e for t he crat es.
Forkl i f t Area Area extending 42 inches in from ea ch end of th e crate, u sua lly floored with
2-inch boards.
Fr am e Member s
Those wood members which form th e fun dam enta l structu re of the crat e.
Gus s et P l a t e
A square piece, usually plywood, placed at the junction of the diagonals for
reinforcement.
Ha nger , Meta l
Metal strapping formed in a manner to support intermediate sills on a sill-
type cra te or joists of the t op.
Head ers or En d Cross Mem bers (Open Crate)
Cross members attached at the end of the skids which hold the skids
together . Also longitu dina l mem bers at each end of top joists.
Hor i zonta l Braces
Members positioned between struts and parallel to upper and lower frame
members of the sides or en ds.
Hor i z on t a l Top Br ac i ng J o i st Su ppor t
Horizontal member attached to the frame members in which the top joists
rest.
In term edia te Crosswise S i l l s
Fu ll length mem bers located between the en d sills an d par allel to them.
I n t e r m ed i a t e Fr am e M em ber s
Members of the t op panel of an open crate located between an d par allel to the
side fra mes of the t op.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 220/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-3
I n t e r m ed i a t e Long i t ud i na l S i l l s
Full length mem bers located between the side sills an d par allel to them.
I n t e r med i a t e Sk i d s
Full length beams located between an d par allel to the skids.
J ois ts Members extending across the crate that support the top and prevent
cru shing when grab hooks are used.
J o i st s Su ppor t s
Members, usua lly 2 x 4, nailed to the frame un der each joist and exten ding to
th e floor.
Ki ck B l ock s
Short m embers at tached at th e junction of the corner post an d upper or lower
edge member. They are used on end pan els ha ving no braces or th ose with a
single diagonal brace.
Lag Bo l t Re i n f o r ci ng S t r ap Galvanized strapping drilled to take lag bolts and nailed to the inner face of
the sheath ing at th e center l ine of the skid and header.
Load Bear in g Floor Mem bers
Heavier or reinforced floorboards used to hold the concentrated weight of the
cra te load.
Lower Fram e Member
Horizontal frame member at the lower edge of the side and end panels.
Formerly called lower edge member.
Open Cr a t e
A crat e formed of frame m embers only, without exterior shea thin g att ached.
Re i n f o r ced S t r a ps
Metal stra pping applied at th e corners or base corn ers to reinforce and fasten
the panels together.
Ru bb i ng S t r i p s
Board s na iled to th e un derside of skids or bottom sh eath ing.
S h e a t h ed C r a t e
A crat e in which th e frame m embers a re completely covered with sheat hing.
S h e a t h i n g Material such a s plywood, lumber , or fiberboard na iled to th e frame of a crat e
across all openings to add stren gth t o the crate, or t o prevent loss of contents,
pilferage, or ent ry of dirt, wa ter, etc., int o the crat e.
S i d e Fr am e Member s
Members of the top panel of an open crate, placed lengthwise of each side of
the top.
S i d e S i l ls
The mem bers forming t he sides of a sill base crate.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 221/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-4
S i l l s
The continu ous frame m embers of a sill base.
S i l l Bas e
A crat e which ha s its fram e members (sills) built on th e inside of th e crate to
which th e bottom sheat hing is att ached.
S i l l Br i dg i ng
Members of the same depth as the sills placed at right angles to the
intermediate lengthwise or crosswise sills of a sill base to prevent twisting or
buckling.
S k i d s
The out side longer beams of a skid base which sup port the weight of the
crate and contents.
S k i d B a se
A cra te base wh ich h as its longer beams on t he outside.
Sleeper Reinforcing members secured to the underside of the floorboards, at right
angles to th e floorboards t o provide secure a nchorage for the item.
S p a c e r s
Members which position th e end s of joist or sills.
S p r e a d e r s
Members placed at right angles to the floorboards, between the item and the
floorboard s, to distribute t he load over a wider area .
S l i n g No t ches
Open spaces between th e ends of the r ubbing strips and t he ends of th e cra te,
or cuta way sections at the ends of th e skids.
S t r u t s
Vertical fra me members between t he upper an d lower frame mem bers.
Top J o i st Spa cer s
Short members nailed between the top joists, to the inside face of the upper
fra me member s, which a ct a s end bridging.
T o p S h ea t h i n g
Board or p lywood forming t he closur e of th e top.
Upper Fr am e M em ber or Upper Ed ge M em ber Horizont al fram e member at th e upper edge of th e side an d end pan els.
R e l a t e d T er m s
Ac t ua l S i z e Lum ber
The tr ue dimen sion of a piece of lumber a s mea sured with a scale.
Cen t e r o f Ba l a nce
The point along the length of a crat e at which it would balance on a fulcru m,
placed at right a ngles to the skids of sills.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 222/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-5
E n d G r a i n N a i l in g
Nails driven pa ra llel to the gra in of the wood.
Gross Weigh t
Total weight of the crat e an d its conten ts when ready for sh ipment.
Ho l ddowns Devices constructed of wood or metal, used to secure the item to the base of
the crate.
Liner
Waterpr oof barr ier mater ial placed between th e fram e and th e sheath ing.
N e t Weight
The weight of the item a lone, excluding dun nage, wra ppings, or containers.
Nom i na l S i z e Lum ber
Dimension of lumber before it is dressed.
Over dr i v i ng
Driving n ails into wood so that the heads sink below th e sur face of the wood.
S i d e G r a i n N a i l in g
Nails driven at right a ngles to the grain of the wood.
Ta r e W ei gh t
The weight of the crate, including dunnage, holddowns, and packing
materials.
Under dr i v i ng
Driving nails into wood so that the heads protrude above the surface of the
wood.
C LASSIFICATION OF C RATES
Crat es are grouped into several categories. They may be open or sheat hed
(fig 6-1). Cra tes may be nonde moun ta ble, single trip cra tes of na iled
constru ction, or bolted, reusa ble, demount able crates. Crat es may be
designed for domestic use only, or for both domestic and oversea shipments.
Some crates are designed for general use and others are constructed in
accorda nce with a specificat ion for a par ticular item. Of cour se, th e
classification of a crate may include a combination of several of the above
factors.
O p e n C r a t e s An open cra te is a conta iner formed of fra me m embers only, without exterior
sheat hing atta ched. When plywood or paper-overlaid veneer is used to
provide additional weather protection, they may be called covered crates as
opposed to sheat hed crates. The open crates discussed in th is section are th e
most widely used (fig 6-2, 6-3, and 6-4).
S m a l l O p e n C r a t e s
Small open crates may be subdivided into the following categories:
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 223/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-6
Figure 6-1. Open an d sheath ed crat es.
S h a l lo w C r a t e s
These crates are normally not more than 12 feet in length, 4 feet in width,
and 2 feet in height, as illustr ated in figur e 6-2. The net weight of conten ts
should not exceed 1,000 poun ds. However, ther e are exceptions to these
requiremen ts wh ich a re explained in the footnote of table 6-3.
L i gh t w e i gh t C r a t e s
These crates are designed for net weight of contents not exceeding 250
pound s. The size is limited t o 4 feet in length , 3 feet in width , and 3 feet in
height (fig 6-2 a nd 6-3).
M e d iu m We i gh t C r a t e s
Crates in this classification are normally designed for a net weight of
cont ent s not exceeding 1,000 pound s. The size is limited to 6 feet in lengt h, 4
feet in h eight, a nd 4 feet in width (fig 6-2).
Hea vy Wei gh t Cr a t e s
These crates are normally designed for a net weight not exceeding 4,000
pound s. The size is limited t o 32 feet in length , 6 feet in width, an d 10 feet in
height (fig 6-2, and 6-3, Type V).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 224/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-7
Figur e 6-2. Styles of open crat es (MIL-C-52950).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 225/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-8
Figur e 6-3. Styles of open crat es (MIL-C-52950).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 226/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-9
Figur e 6-4. Assembly of open n ailed crat e (MIL-C-3774).
L a r g e O p e n C r a t e s
For milita ry use, there a re two kinds.
N a i le d C r a t e s
These crat es are designed for a net weight ran ging up to 12,000 poun ds. The
maximum size limit is n ot to exceed 16 feet in length , 8 feet in width, an d 8
feet in height (fig 6-4).
B o lt e d C r a t e s
These crates are designed for reuse with net weight ranging up to 16,000
pounds. These crates ar e designed with a size limit not to exceed 40 feet in
length , 8 feet in widt h, a nd 16 feet in h eight (fig 6-5).
S h e a t h e d c r a t e sA sheathed crate is similar to an open crate except that the frame members
are completely covered with sheat hing m ater ial, such as lum ber or plywood,
fasten ed to the frame. This adds strength to the cra te, prevents loss of
contents, r educes pilfera ge, and pr events th e direct entr y of dirt , water , etc.
The main difference between a nailed wood box and a sheathed crate is that
the top, bottom, and side faceboards of a nailed wood box provides the main
structural strength, whereas in a crate, the frame members susta in the load
and provide th e strength, Many sheat hed cra te designs exist in our military
system; however, the designs selected for this section are considered to be the
most widely an d gener ally used (fig 6-6).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 227/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-10
Figur e 6-5. Assembly of open bolted cra te (MIL-C-3774).
S h e a t h e d N a i le d C r a t e s
These crates are not designed for reuse and are constructed in the same
man ner a s bolted crat es with m inor exceptions. The crates should not exceed
30 feet in length, 9 feet in width, and 10 feet in height. The net weight of
contents m ay ra nge up t o 30,000 poun ds. These limitat ions ma y be exceeded,
however, when t he size and weight of the item require a larger crate.
S h e a t h e d B o lt e d C r a t e s
All bolted cra tes ar e designed for reu se. The size an d weight limitat ions a re
the sa me as for th e nailed crat es.
Spec i a l Us e Cr a t e s
Cra tes in th is classification ar e of special design for specific items. These
crates may be fabricated of metal or wood, either open, sheathed, nailed, or
bolted. Crat e dimensions and weight will vary depending upon the size,
weight, an d chara cteristics of the conten ts. Exam ples of special cra tes ar e
illust ra ted in figure 6-7. The slott ed angle cra te (ASTM D6255) is an
example of special meta l crat e which ma y be either open (Type I) or shea thed
(Type II with eith er plywood, paper -overlaid veneer , or fiberboard . It ma y be
fabricated without skids (Style A), or with skid blocks or skids with rubbing
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 228/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-11
strips (Style B). Both t he open and sh eath ed Style A slotted a ngle cra tes ar e
restricted to items not to exceed 200 pounds, with dimensions not to exceed
80 inches in length , 30 inches in width, an d 48 inches in height, except wh en
a specific design has been approved by the contracting activity. Both the open
and th e sheat hed St yle B carr y up to 3,000 poun ds an d ar e limited to not over
30 feet in length , 4 feet in width , and 7 feet in h eight.
Figure 6-6. Sheath ed cra tes.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 229/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-12
Figure 6-7. Special use crates.
Cr i t e r i a fo r Cr a t e Des i gn Crat es ar e selected inst ead of boxes for several rea sons. The item m ay be t oo
large to be shipped in a box. The weight of the item may exceed th e weight
limitat ions of a box specificat ion. The item may not requir e complete
enclosure for protection, yet it may require crating to facilitate storage and
ha nd ling. Cra tes provide bett er facilities for clear an ces, blocking, bra cing,
and a nchoring of th e item. To select th e proper crate for th e item or items to
be packed, it is necessary to consider certa in basic factors th at ma y influence
the selection.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 230/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-13
Si ze an d Wei gh t
Basically, it is desirable to design a crate not to exceed 30 feet in length, 9
feet in width, and 10 feet in height, with a weight limitation not to exceed
11,200 pounds. This maximum size and weight is indicated becau se the
length of 30 feet will permit lowering the crate through the average ship's
ha tch without excessive tilting. The 9-foot width a nd 10-foot height is
designed for the average width and clearance limits for transporting by railon a standa rd flat car. Taking the weight factor into considera tion will
permit ease of han dling by t he average sh ip's h oisting facilities.
Degr ee o f Dis a s s em b l y
When determining the size, weight, shape, and strength, considerations
should be given t o partial disassembly of the item or its components to redu ce
the overall size of the cra te. However, do not disassemble the item to th e
point where special tools or p ersonnel ar e needed t o reassemble it.
Wei gh t Di s t r i bu t i on
In designing crates over 5 feet in length, weight distribution becomes an
import ant factor. Whenever possible, the center of gravity of the conten tsshould coincide with the geometrical center (center of balance) of the loaded
crate.
An c h o r i n g o f t h e C o n t e n t s
A thorough study of the contents should be made in order to insure that
provisions are made for anchoring the contents within the crate to prevent
dama ge dur ing ha ndling an d shipment. When necessary, use cushioning and
padding at point s on the item wher e blocking, bracing, or stra pping is used t o
prevent movement . Bolts, steel stra pping, iron bands, rods an d lumber
holddowns ar e acceptable meth ods for anchoring an d supporting t he conten ts
(fig 6-8). Some items a re designed with pa cking an d shipping in mind an d
are provided with holddown featu res. If the item does not ha ve these
cha racteristics, ut ilize th e str onger ar eas of the item for a nchoring.
C l e a r a n c e
Normally, a minimu m of one-inch clear ance is required between th e conten ts
and t he near est fra ming member of the sides, ends, and top. This clearan ce
allows for the distortion and vibration to which the crate may be subjected
during rough han dling and tra nsit . I tems that a re fragile in na ture, or items
within floating bag barriers (submethods 53 and 43) require from 2 to 4
inches of clear an ce. Additiona l clear an ce ma y be required for shock moun ted
items. Thr ough car eful design, it is often possible to allow protru ding points
of the item to extend between the joists, or the joists may be spaced, within
specified limits, to accommodate these protrusions.
Types o f Bas e s
The selection of a skid or a sill base will depend on the physical
cha racteristics of the item to be cra ted.
Si l l Base s
Sill bases (fig 6-9) are designed for items that can be supported above their
lowest point. Exam ples are tran smission housing engines and vehicles with
brake d ru ms pr ojecting below th e frame or a xles.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 231/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-14
Figure 6-8. Methods of anchoring conten ts in crat es.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 232/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-15
Figur e 6-9. Sill base.
S k i d B a s e s
Skid bases ar e designed t o accommodate loads t ha t can be su pported on th eir
lowest portion, or items th at a re ma de to rest flat on th eir bases. Skid-type
bases are pr eferred in m ost cases; however, when t he item m ust be supportedabove its lowest point, the use of a sill base will reduce the overall height of
the crate. Savings in height should be more th an 6 inches before substituting
a sill base for a skid ba se (fig 6-10).
E n g i n e e r i n g F a c t o r s i n C r a t e D e s ig n
A crate is an en gineered cont ainer. The use of soun d engineering principles
and actual tests of crates with contents has resulted in the following design
requirements.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 233/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-16
Figure 6-10. Skid base.
Tops
The top of a sheathed crate is designed to carry a uniform, well-distributed,
superimposed load of 50 poun ds per squ ar e foot. Top loading plus t he spa n or
width of the crate will determine the kind of top an d th e size of joist required
to tran sfer th e load t o the sides.
S id e s a n d E n d s For crate design, the side and en d pan els of sheathed crat es are considered as
tru sses. The selection and size of members for th e sides and ends are
calculated on the bases of the span, height, and the amount of stress each
member can withsta nd. These cra te design factors are for sides having top
loads, with dunnage, in the amount of 200 pounds per square foot, for net
loads t o 10,000 poun ds. In a ddition, th ey may be designed for 400 pounds per
squa re foot, for n et loads over 10,000 poun ds.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 234/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-17
B a s e s
The base is treated as a unit and is designed to support the contents. In the
engineering an alysis, the skids of the base ar e considered as par t of the lower
fra me members of th e sides. The lower frame members an d skids act
together when th e cra te is lifted as a unit. This ana lysis allows the redu ction
of skid sizes, thereby saving materials and cube, but does not allow the
han dling of a loaded crate without t he sides and ends in place. Skid sizesshould be increased if it becomes necessary to raise or move the loaded crate
without th e sides and en ds in place.
L o a d F a c t or s a n d H a n d l in g a n d S t o r a g e H a z a r d s
In a ddition to the externa l forces of superimposed loads an d t hose imposed by
the weight of the contents, crates are subjected to other hazards during
han dling and shipping. Crat es are designed to be han dled by forklift tr ucks,
slings, an d grabh ooks (fig 6-11). In order to prevent cru shin g, th e gra bhook
area s should be reinforced with additional mater ial. For hand ling with
forklift t ru cks, provisions a re ma de to enter from t he sides an d ends without
dama ging the floorboards a nd conten ts. Forklift ent ry from th e ends places
stress on the headers, load bearing floorboards, and forklift members.
Therefore, these members should be well secured with nails or bolts (fig 6-9an d 6-10).
M odes o f T r a ns p o r t a t i on
Crat es may be shipped by rail, truck, plane, or ship. Some of th e hazar ds
involved in shipment are shock stresses and impact stresses resulting from
sudden stops and sta rts. Vibrat ion is also a shipping hazar d. Crat es shipped
on open cars shall always be fastened secur ely to prevent an y movement. In
closed cars, there are several preferred methods of loading, some of which
allow movement u nder cont rolled conditions. The preferred meth ods are the
snubbed load, the floating load, and the rigid braced load. The method
selected depen ds upon t he fragility, size an d sha pe of the item, and the center
of gravity of th e loaded crate. The snu bbed load utilizes ant iskid plates,
while the floating load depends entirely upon the friction between the crate
and the car floor. These loads a re designed for items with a low center of
gravity. The rigid braced loads utilize lumber and metal stra ps. This
material should be applied in such a manner as to eliminate all movement.
Shiploading involves sta cking load str esses. Dun na ge should be placed on
top of crates, which h ave been designed t o carr y such loads.
E x p o s u r e a n d S t o r a g e
Sheathed crates will provide for long-term protection in exposed storage
conditions. Open cra tes are designed for items tha t require very little
protection from the element s. Sites selected for outside storage should be
well drained in order to prevent water and moisture form entering the crate.
Well constructed tops, proper drainage, and ventilation should preventdama ge to the cont ents when stored under adverse conditions. Stacking
stresses of superimposed loads ar e of major importa nce in storage. Open
crates are designed to withstand superimposed loads in storage with
additiona l dunn age placed on the top, tra nsferring the load to the sides.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 235/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-18
Figur e 6-11. Resista nce to forces.
CRATE MATER IALS
LUMBER
Lumber used in crate construction must meet the same rigid requirements as
for oth er wooden cont ainers. Lumber u sed in cra te constr uction sh all be free
of defects th at would mat erially weaken t he conta iner. Knots an d divergence
of grain (cross-grain) are probably the most common defects in lumber used
for framing members, and will affect the strength of these members more
tha n the sheat hing boar ds. Knots or knot clusters th at exceed one-fourth t he
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 236/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-19
width of a structural member or that exceed one-third the width of a
sheat hing boar d, are prohibited.
Moisture content of lumber is an important factor and shall be not less than
12 percent nor more tha n 19 percent of its oven dry weight. Other wise,
shrink age may occur an d na il holding power ma y be reduced.
Divergence of grain (cross-grain) more than 1 inch in 10 inches in the length
of a p iece is pr ohibited.
The width and thickness of lumber used in fabricating crates are always
minimum from a design sta ndpoint. When nominal sizes are given in a crate
specification, the actual minimum sizes will be as indicated in table 6-1.
Note. All lumber dimensions referenced in th is section are nominal. Actua l
dimensions a re so indicated when actual sizes are required.
Table 6-1. Minimum Th ickness a nd Width of Lum ber
Thickness in inches
(smaller dimension)
Width in inches
(larger dimensions)
Nomina l size Minimum (actua l) Nominal size Minimum (actual)
1 3/4 2 1-1/2
3 2-1/2
2 1-1/2 4 3-1/2
3 2-1/2 5 4-1/2
4 3-1/2 6 5-1/2
5 4-1/2 8 7-1/2
6 5-1/2 10 9-1/2
7 6-1/2 12 11-1/2
P lyw ood (A-A-55057)
Plywood is used in crate construction for sheathing, for nonload bearing
flooring, for tops, an d gusset plates. While plywood is usu ally more
expensive than lumber, it required no diagonals or crate liner material when
used as sheathing, and a lighter, more economical crate may result from its
use. Tests have shown that plywood is actually stronger tha n lumber, the
dimensions being the same. When using plywood, select th e stan dar d size
sheet st ock t ha t conforms closest t o the cra te dimen sions, otherwise wast e of
ma ter ial will result. The typ e of plywood selected will be on th e basis of its
intended u se. Where prolonged exposur e to the elements or att ack by micro-organisms (mold, fungi, etc.) is expected, materials, must be selected that will
withsta nd th e extreme conditions.
Na ils (ASTM F 1667-95)
Nails are u sed in th e fabrication of the componen ts for both na iled an d bolted
cra tes. They are also used in the assembly of na iled crat es. The preferred
types of na ils used for crat e assembly are th e sinker, corker , or common. If
these nails are not available, coolers or standard box nails may be used.
Nails used for fastening plywood should be 14-gage with heads no less th an
7/32-inch diameter.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 237/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-20
Sta ples (ASTM F 1667-95)
Staples are sometimes used to fasten plywood sheathing to the framing
members. When used for th is purpose, staples should be made of 16-gage
wire with a crown not less tha n one-half inch.
Bol t s , Nu t s , an d Was he r s Many types of bolts are used in crate construction. The most common types
used ar e stan dar d steel carr iage, step, and m achine bolts (fig 6-12). Bolt
holes should be drilled the sam e size as the sha nk of th e bolt. Plain wash ers
should be used under the heads of the machine bolts and under all nuts.
Special holding plates have been designed for use under the heads of square
shan k bolts to prevent tu rn ing. The use of plates is not man dat ory. Coun ter-
sinking of bolt h eads is prohibited. The bolt th reads pr ojecting beyond t he
nut after tightening should be painted with hard drying preservative,
un thinn ed paint or oth er similar m ater ial to prevent loosening.
Lag Bo l t s
Lag bolts are sometimes referred to as "lag screws". There a re th ree types of
lag bolts, Gimlet Point ; Cone Point ; an d Cone Point, Fet ter Dr ive (fig 6-12).There ar e two different t ypes of heads, Hex head a nd Squa re head . Lag bolts
are u sed to assemble the sides, ends, an t ops of demount able cra tes. These
bolts are prohibited for use as holddowns or to tie the headers and the
floorboar ds to th e skids. When u sing lag bolts for assem bly, drill the lead
hole to the same diameter as the sh ank, although the th readed portion m ay
be lar ger than the sha nk. The size of th e lead hole for th e thr eaded portion
will depen d upon th e group of wood used. When u sing lag bolts in soft woods,
mak e smaller lead holes. Use plain washers under th e heads and tighten
firmly against the washer (table 6-2).
Note. Lag bolts should never be driven with a ha mmer . When power wrench
is used, care must be taken t ha t th e bolts are not overdr iven.
Nut S leeve As s em bl y
A nut sleeve assembly, as illustrated in figure 6-13, may be used as an
altern at e for lag bolts in demount able crat es. These bolts must be the sam e
size as the fasteners th ey replace and are spaced the same distan ce apa rt.
Meta l S t ra pp ing (ASTM D 3953 and ASTM D 4169)
Metal strapping is used for reinforcing crate corners, sill bases, securing tops,
as lag bolts reinforcing straps for demountable crates, and for strengthening
sill an d load bear ing head ers for sill-type bases. It is also used t o rein force
cra te corn ers an d the tops of open crates. Metal stra ps used for this purpose
sha ll be Class 1 Type I or II, a nd not less t ha n 3/4 x 0.028-inch (fig 6-14).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 238/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-21
Figur e 6-12. Bolts, screws, an d a ccessories.
Table 6-2. Applicat ion of Lag bolts
Diameter of
threaded portion of
lag bolts
Diameter of lead hole
Groups I, II an d
III wood
Group IV
wood
Inch Inch Inch
1/4.................. 3/16 3/16
5/16................ 1/4 1/4
3/8.................. 1/4 5/16
1/2.................. 3/8 7/16
5/8.................. 3/8 1/2
3/4.................. 1/2 5/8
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 239/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-22
Figure 6-13. Nut sleeve assem bly.
Figure 6-14. Tension a nd corn er str apping.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 240/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-23
C o r n e r S t r a p s
Metal strapping used for reinforcing tops, corners, and sill-type bases is
usua lly annea led an d predrilled for ease of application. This type of
stra pping is used on a ll nailed crates a nd on bolted crat es with n et loads over
3,000 poun ds. The legs of the corner str aps ar e usua lly 8 inches in length .
They are nailed to the frame members with a minimum of three galvanized
roofing na ils, 1 1/4 to 1 1/2 inches long. The st ra ps ar e spaced no more tha n36 inches apar t.
T e n s i on S t r a p s
Tensions st rap s are u sed to secure t he top to the sides of the cra te by anchor
plates, which ar e nailed to the frame members. The straps ar e drawn tight
with a ten sioning device an d held in tension with two seals. Tensions str aps
are spaced no more tha n 6 feet apar t.
Lag Bo lt Re i n f o r c i ng S t r ap s
This stra p is fabricated from galvanized steel and is u sed on the side an d end
panels of many demountable crates to prevent the lag screws from tearing
thr ough th e sheat hing as the cra te is lifted. The strapping material is
prep un ched or pred rilled. Lag bolts 3/8 inch in length r equire 1 1/4 X 0.035inch str aps. For 1/2 inch a nd 5/8 inch lag screws, 2 X 0.050 inch st rap s are
needed. Nail these stra ps to the lower inner face of the sh eath ing between
the lower edge of the bottom fra me mem ber an d th e bottom of th e sheat hing.
Locate them to coincide with the center of the skids and headers. Use clout
or similar nails to secur e the stra pping. Space the nails a maximum of 2
inches on center and clinch at least three-fourths of an inch (fig 6-15).
M e t a l H a n g e r
Metal hangers are used for reinforcing joists of tops, load bearing headers,
and int ermediate sills on sill-type bases. Han gers are fabricated from steel
stra ps 1 1/4 X 0.035-inch. The strapp ing material is prepun ched or
predrilled. When used t o reinforce load bearing header s or intermediat e sills,
eightpenny nails are used to secure straps in place, followed by driving from
two to four twen typenn y nails into th e end-grain of the h olding member (fig
6-16).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 241/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-24
Figure 6-15. Lag bolt reinforcing strap.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 242/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-25
Figure 6-16. Use of meta l han gers.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 243/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-26
Si ll Bas e S t r ap s
In ad dition t o the stra ps applied to other area s of th e crat e, sill bases must be
reinforced with 3/4 X 0.028-inch met al str aps (fig 6-17). Use a m inimu m of
three galvanized roofing nails 1 1/4 to 1 1/2-inch long in each leg of the strap.
Locat e all na ils to penetra te a framing mem ber.
Wat e r p r oo f L i ne r s an d Sh r oud s (P P P -B-1055) This waterproof barrier material is made by laminating layers of kraft paper
with asph alt. Seven different classes of mat erials may be used for cra te
liners. The most common classes used are E-1, E-2, and C-2. This mater ial,
when used as a liner, is placed horizontally between the sheathing and the
fra me members of the sides and ends. If more tha n one width of material is
required, use a minimum of 4-inch shingle lap for proper dra inage. The
bar rier should cover the ent ire fra med ar ea (fig 6-18) an d 6-19). When
vertical joints are required, the 4 inch lap will be located at a vertical
member. Liners ar e not required for plywood sheat hed cra tes. Inter ior
shrouds, lar ge bags, or en velopes fabricated from water proof barrier mat erial
are used in open crates to cover items which require additional protection.
All sharp projections of the item should be cushioned or padded to prevent
pun cturing the ma terial. The class of mat erial to use is optiona l, althoughthe most common class is E-2. All joint s in the ma terial are m ade by using
MMM-A-260 adh esive. Shr ouds should han g free of th e item t o provide
proper ventilation and should extend to within 6 inches of the bottom of
crat e. Mat erial conforming to Specification L-P-378 may also be used for
interior shrouds. This mat erial is constructed of polyethylene and does not
cont ain asp ha lt (fig 6-18 an d 6-19).
Roof ing Fe l t
Roofing felt is used in th e constr uction of tops for sheat hed crat es. This
material should have a smooth uncoated surface with a minimum weight of
45 poun ds per squa re (a squar e is an a rea of 10 feet by 10 feet, or 100 squar e
feet). The mater ial is placed between th e out er lumber sheat hing and inner
plywood shea th ing of th e top as illust ra ted in figur e 6-60. When a joint is
required, overlap the felt 4 inches and seal with a non-hardening caulk or
mast ic compoun d. As an a lterna tive, polyethylene film, not less tha n 4 mils
th ick, ma y be u sed in place of roofing felt.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 244/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-27
Figur e 6-17. Applicat ion of str app ing (sill base).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 245/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-28
Figure 6-18. Crat e liner.
Figure 6-19. Inter ior sh roud.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 246/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-29
S c r e e n s a n d V e n t i la t o r s
Screens are fabricated from heavy rust-resisting wire of 1/4 or 3/8 inch mesh
and used over ventilating and drainage holes to prevent entry of birds,
insects, rodent s, or other a nimals. Ventilators fabricated from metal are
sometimes u sed over ventilating holes. Some of the most common m ethods
are illustra ted in figure 6-49.
I n s p e c t i on D o o r s
When inspection doors are required, they are made without cutting into the
fra ming members. Doors ar e fabricat ed form the same material as the
sheat hing. Hinge at th e top and fasten with lag bolts or wood screws at th e
sides and bottom (fig 6-20). Make cleat s and st ops from 1-inch ma ter ial.
Drill holes th rough th e door a nd a djacent fra me mem ber to pr ovide for a sea l
wire and lead seal bearing the inspector's stamp . The size an d location of th e
doors will vary with t he n atu re of the item .
Fi gu r e 6 -20. Cr a t e i n s pec t i on doo r .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 247/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-30
WOOD CRATES , OP EN AND COVER ED , MIL-C-52950 (GE NER AL)
C RATE DESIGN
Open wood crates described in this section are designed for general use and
are em ployed for both domestic an d oversea sh ipments. Only items wh ichare not readily damaged from outside forces and which require limited
protection should be shipped in open crates. Usua lly, items which ar e
designed for outdoor use or of ru gged constru ction ar e shipped in open crates.
When t here are a var iety of items to be shipped, each crate will be designed
for each item with the necessary clearance for blocking, bracing, and
cushioning (fig 6-21).
Figure 6-21. Use of table to determine thickness of load
bearing floorboards.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 248/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-31
Class i f i ca t ion
Crates fabricated or procured under MIL-C-52950 on the basis of weight, size,
and constr uction featu res, as indicated in t able 6-3.
Wo o d R e q u i r e m e n t s
The divergence of grain (cross-grain) should not exceed one inch in ten inches
of length . Plywood, wh en u sed, will conform to A-A-55057.
Nai l s an d Na i l i ng
Nails used shall be sinkers, coolers, corkers, or common. For fastening
covering materials to members, nails shall be not less than 1 inch long but
shall not exceed the sum of the thickness of the covering material and
mem ber. Na ils sizes specified for the fabr icat ion of th e various cra tes ar e
based on Groups I a nd II woods.
When group III or IV woods are used, nail sizes may be onepenny size
smaller tha n th ose specified. The pat tern s to be used for th e nailing of two
flat pieces of lumber shall conform to the details shown in figure 6-22. Unless
otherwise specified herein, the following requirements shall determine size,
placement , and qu an tity of na ils.
• All adjacent crate members shall be securely fastened to each other,
either directly or by means of the covering.
• All nails that are not to be clinched shall be cement coated or
mechanically deformed (spiral or roun d t hrea ded).
• Nails shall be driven through thinner member into the thicker
member wherever possible.
• When the flat faces of pieces of lumber are nailed together and the
combined thickness is 3 inches or less (except for top joints and
covering material), nails shall be long enough to pass through both
thicknesses and sha ll be clinched not less tha n 1/4 inch nor more t han
3/8 inch.
• When the flat faces of lumber are nailed together and the combined
thickness is more than 3 inches or when the flat face of one or more
pieces is nailed to the edge or end face of another, nails shall not be
clinched. The portion of th e nail in the th icker piece shall not be less
than 2 times the length of the nail in the thinner pieces for tenpenny
nails and smaller, and not less than 1 1/2 inches for twelvepenny
nails and larger.
ο When splitting occurs with the use of diamond point nails, the
nails shall be slight ly blunted. When blunting does not prevent
the splitting, holes slightly smaller than the diameter of the nail
sha ll be drilled for ea ch na il.
οNails shall be driven so that neither the head nor the pointprojects above th e surface of th e wood. Occasiona l overdr iving
will be permitted, but nails shall not be over-driven more than
one-eighth the th ickness of the piece holding th e hea d.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 249/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-32
Figure 6-22. Nailing pat tern s. (All widths nominal). Similar pa tter ns
shall be used when boards cross at a ngles other tha n 900.
Table 6-3. Classification of MIL-C-52950 Crat es
Style A - Heavy Duty Style B - Light Duty
Type Maximum
net load
Maximum In side Dimensions
Maximum
net load
Maximum In side Dimen sions
Length Width Height Length Width Height
(pounds) (feet) (feet) (feet) (pounds) (feet) (feet) (feet)
I 250 4 3 3 200 4 3 3
II 1 1000 12 4 2 NO STYLE B
III NO STYLE A No load or size r est r ict ion except as limited by
handling methods.
IV 1000 6 4 4 NO STYLE B
V2 2500 12 6 6 4000 32 6 10
1Items such as ladders, tubing, and extrusions weighing less than 200 pounds and not exceeding 20 feet long, 3 feet
wide, and 2 feet high may be pa cked in Type II crat es.2Type V, Styles A and B crates shall be further classified as being nondemountable or demountable. Type V, Style B
crates ma y be open or covered.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 250/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-33
ο Nails shall be positioned not less than the thickness of the piece
from th e side end nor less th an one-ha lf the th ickness of the piece
from the edge of the lum ber whenever possible. Nails driven into
the side edge of the lumber sh all be center ed on the side edge.
ο When two members having parallel grain are attached, the
nu mber of rows of nails shall be determined by th e nominal widthof th e sur faces in conta ct, one r ow for widths u p to a nd including
2 inches, two rows for widths greater than 2 inches but not
greater tha n 6 inches, and th ree rows for widths over 6 inches.
ο When plywood is nailed to cleats, nails shall be spaced not more
tha n 4 inches apart on center s placed in staggered rows which a re
less than 1 3/4 inches ap art or less than 3/4 inches from th e edge
of th e cleat .
St ap l e s
The crown of the staples used for fastening covering materials for frame
members sha ll be not less than 3/8 inch. The length of the st aples shall not
exceed the sum of the thicknesses of the covering materials and the frame
member; however, staples sha ll be not less tha n 1 inch in length .
Bolt app l ica t i on
Holes shall be prebored to receive carriage bolts and shall be the exact
diameter of the bolt. The lead holes for lag bolts shall be the sa me diamet er
as the sha nk, even th ough th e threaded portion ma y have a greater diameter
than the shank.
Spl ices
Splices an d but t joints m ade in fram e members a nd skids of long crat es sha ll
be as sh own in figur e 6-23.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 251/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-34
Figu re 6-23. Splicing of mem ber s: A, splice of 4 x 4 inch or 4 X 6 inch sk ids; B, splice of 2 inch
mem ber; C, splice of 1 inch m ember ; D, lam ina tion of skid.
TYPE I, STYLE A - HE AVY DUT Y CR ATE (MIL -C-52950)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
L o a d a n d S iz e L im i t a t i o n s
Limitat ions sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-3.
Style A crates shall be used only for items forming a Type I load and
weighing not more tha n 250 poun ds.
B a s e
S k i d s
The skids sha ll be 2 by 4 inch lum ber.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 252/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-35
Diagonals
Diagonals sh all be 1 by 4 inches in size.
En d Floor Members
En d floor members sha ll be the sam e thickness an d width as t he skids except
when used a s loadbear ing members; their size sha ll be as specified in ta ble 6-
4. En d floor members sha ll be bolted to each skid with 3/8-inch diamet ercarriage bolts.
R u b b i n g St r i p s
Single piece rubbing strips used on each skid shall be a minimum 3 by 4
inches in size and beveled at each end at an angle of 45 degrees for at least
one-half their th ickness. The length sh all be less than t he skid length to
allow open space at each end for sling and fork lift han dling. The open space
shall be not less th an 4 inches and not more tha n 10 inches long. On crates
over 36 inches long, the rubbing strip length shall be adjusted to provide a
distance of not more th an 28 inches between end openings.
S i d e , E n d a n d T o p P a n e ls
All members of the side, end and top panels shall be 1 by 4 inch lumber.Nailing patt erns sha ll be as specified in figur e 6-22.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly of the crates shall be as shown in figure 6-24 and as specified
herein. The sides shall be fasten ed to the base by nailing the extensions of
the vertical struts an d diagonals to the skids with eightpenn y na ils. The
ends shall be fastened to the base by nailing the lower edge member of the
panels to the end floor member with eightpenny nails spaced 6 to 8 inches
apar t. The sides sha ll be fasten ed to th e ends by nailing the end vertical
struts of the sides to the vertical struts of the ends with eightpenny nails
spaced 8 to 10 inches apa rt. The sides shall be fasten ed to the top nailing the
extensions of the diagona ls and vert ical stru ts of the sides to the longitud inal
members of the top with eigthp enny na ils. The top shall be fasten ed to the
ends by nailing the extensions of the longitudinal and diagonal members of
the top to the upper edge member of the ends with eightpenny sinker nails.
The upper edge members of the ends shall be nailed to the edge lateral
members of the top with eightpen ny sinker n ails spaced 8 to 10 inches apar t.
TYPE I, STYLE B--LIG H T DU TY CRATE (MIL-C-52950)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
L o a d a n d S iz e L im i t a t i o n s
Limitat ions sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-3.
Style B crat es sha ll be used only for items forming a type I load an d weighing
not more than 200 pounds.
F r a m e M e m b e r S i ze
All frame members shall be 1 by 3 inches in size for net loads up to 100
pound s by 1 by 4 inches in size for loads bet ween 100 t o 200 pound s.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 253/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-36
Figur e 6-24. Type I, st yle A cra te a ssembly (MIL-C-52950).
Assembly
Assembly of the crat es shall be as shown in figur e 6-25. Diagona ls, struts,
cross members, and longitudinal members shall be nailed together in
patt erns a s shown in figure 6-22 with sixpenny na ils.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 254/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-37
Figur e 6-25. Type I, st yle B crat e as sembly (MIL-C-52950).
TYPE II, ST YLE A--H EAVY DUT Y CRATE (MIL-C-52950)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
L o a d a n d S iz e L im i t a t i o n s
Limitat ions sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-3.
E n d s
The end s sha ll be of lum ber or cleat ed-plywood as shown in figur e 6-26. Thecleats sh all be fasten ed to th e end board s or to th e plywood with two r ows of
nails spaced 4 inches apa rt in each row, staggered and clinched. The
minimum thickness of the end boards and plywood and the size of the end
cleat s sha ll be as shown in t able 6-5. Additiona l vertical filler cleats sh all be
used in the ends when the unsupported span between outside cleats is
greater tha n 3 feet.
Si des
The sides of the crates shall be of lumber or cleated-plywood as shown in
figur e 6-26.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 255/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-38
Figur e 6-26. Type II, st yle A cra te a ssembly (MIL-C-52950).
Table 6-4. Allowable Load P er Inch of Load-bear ing Floorboar d Widthof Groups I an d II Woods
Distance
between
skids
Nominal Th ickness of Floorboards (inches)
1 2 3 4 6 8
12 50 200 557 1090 2690 4680
18 34 134 370 740 1790 3140
24 25 100 280 545 1350 2330
30 20 80 222 450 1150 1870
36 17 66 185 361 895 1560
42 15 57 158 311 767 1335
48 12 50 139 272 671 117054 11 45 124 242 596 1039
60 10 40 111 218 537 936
66 9 37 104 198 488 850
NOTE: When Group IV woods are us ed, the above allowable loads
ma y be increased by 20 percent.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 256/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-39
Table 6-5. Thickne ss of En ds
Maximum
Net Load
Plywood Lumber Size of end
cleats
(pounds) (inch) (inches) (inches)
100 ¼ 3/4 3/4 by 2-3/4
250 3/8 3/4 3/4 by 3-1/2500 ½ 1-1/6 1-1/16 by 3-1/2
1000 ½ 1-5/16 1-1/2 by 3-1/2
Table 6-6. Thickne ss of Sides
Maximum
Net Load
Plywood Lumber Size of Clea ts for
Plywood Sides
(pounds) (inch ) (inches) (inches)
100 1/4 3/4 3/4 by 2-3/4
250 3/8 3/4 3/4 by 2-3/4
500 1/2 1-1/16 7/8 by 3-1/2
1000 1/2 1-5/16 7/8 by 3-1/2
When lumber is used, the sides sha ll be constr ucted of not more t han 3 pieces
for heights of 1 foot 3 inches or more, not more than 2 pieces for heights
between 7 1/2 inches and 1 foot 3 inches, and one piece for heights 7 1/2
inches or less.
The minimum thickness of lumber and plywood, and the minimum size of
cleat s for plywood sides sh all be as sh own in ta ble 6-6.
When lumber sides are composed of two or more pieces, cleats that are the
same thickness and width as the top and bottom crossmembers shall extend
the full depth of the side and shall be fastened to the inside surfaces of the
sides as shown in figure 6-26. The cleat s on th e sides sha ll be placed to
coincide with the crossmembers of the top, and spacing shall be no greater
than 3 feet. Cleats shall be fastened to the side boards or plywood with two
rows of nails spaced 4 inches apart in each row, staggered, and clinched.
When the overall length of the crate exceeds 14 feet, pieces of lumber used in
the construction of the sides shall be either the required full length or shall
be made u p of two pieces which t ogether ma ke up t he full length. The joint of
such pieces sha ll abut on a full depth cleat, an d both pieces sha ll be na iled to
the bottom.
When plywood is used, the sides shall be constructed on one-piece material
for width r equirement s. Butt jointing of plywood at a n inter mediate cleatlocation will be permitted when two lengths of plywood are required for
crat es in excess of 8 feet in length .
Crates may be one of the following combinations of sides and end panels, as
specified:
• Lumber ends and sides.
• Cleated-plywood ends and sides.
• Lumber ends an d cleat-plywood sides.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 257/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-40
T o p a n d B o t t o m M e m b e r s
The top and bottom members shall be 1 X 4-inch lumber for all crates up to
an d including 2 feet 6 inches in width a nd 1 X 6 inch lumber for crat es more
tha n 2 feet 6 inches in width . The angle between diagona ls and side shall be
between 300 and 600, but crossmembers sha ll be placed not more th an 3 feet
apar t in line with ba tten s or cleats of the sides. The crossmembers of th e top
and bottom shall be directly opposite each other and the bottom diagonalsshall be in r everse direction with t he t op diagonals a s shown in figure 6-26.
Ext e r i o r S ide C l ea t s
When specified, for gross weights exceeding 200 pounds, exterior side cleats
sha ll be used to facilitat e fork lift han dling of crat es on th eir sides. On
lumber sides, the exterior cleats shall replace the int erior side batten s. On
plywood sides, filler pieces shall be used under the exterior side cleats; filler
pieces shall pass between the horizontal cleats and shall be the same width
as exter ior side cleats . Spa cing of cleat s sha ll be as shown in figur e 6-27.
Size of exter ior side cleat s sha ll be 3 X 4 inches. Ext erior side cleat s sha ll be
secur ed to the side sheath ing with n ails as specified for batten s. Short one-
pan el cra tes with lumber ends sha ll ha ve end cleats a n omina l 3 inches th ick
in lieu of exter ior side cleats .
ASSEMBLY
S i d e s t o E n d s
The sides shall be na iled with sinker or corker na ils to th e ends as specified
in ta ble 6-7.
T o p a n d B o t t om M e m b e r s t o S i d e s
The top an d bottom crossmembers an d diagonals shall be na iled to th e cleats
of the sides or to the lumber sides with eightpenn y sinker na ils when t he side
cleats or sides are less than 1 inch in thickness and ninepenny sinker nails
when side members are 1 inch or more in th ickness. The end top and bottom
crossmembers shall also be nailed to the end sheathing or cleats if the ends
ar e lum ber or plywood, respectively. The na iling pat ter ns, location of na ils,
and na iling procedur es sha ll be as shown in figures 6-22 and 6-26.
TYPE III , STYLE B--LIG H T DU TY CR ATE (MIL-C-52950)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
Style B
Style B cra tes sh all be as shown in figure 6-28. Ther e sha ll be no size or load
restr ictions for th is cra te except as limited by ha ndling methods. The size
an d spacing of mem bers sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-8. Vertical end cleats
shall be long enough t o permit full na iling to the u pper h orizontal end cleatswhen t he crate is assembled.
Nai l i ng
The upper and lower halves of the crate shall be fabricated with sixpenny
nails; the vertical end cleats sh all be fastened t o the lower ha lf with clinched
nails to the lower horizont al end cleats. Two nails shall be used in each en d
of 3 an d 4 inch wide longitu dinal members a nd t hr ee nails shall be used in 6
inch wide longitudina l members.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 258/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-41
Figur e 6-27. Type II, cra te with ext erior side cleat s. (A- complete crat e, B- two pan el, C- th ree
pan el, an d D- four pan el.
R u b b i n g St r i p s
Beveled rubbing strips, of sizes shown in table 6-8, shall be attached to the
undersurface of each lower crossmember to facilitate fork truck handling.
Rubbing strips shall be fasten ed to the crossmembers with sixteenpenn y nails
placed in two rows and spaced 5 inches apart applied to each row and
clinched. Rubbing strips shall be applied at time of cra te packing after
stra pping has been secured to crossmembers.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 259/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-42
Assembly
Assembly of th e cra tes sha ll be as shown in figure 6-28. After item s have
been nested in the lower half of the crate, the upper half shall be positioned
and str apping shall be applied. The upper ends of the vertical end cleats
shall be na iled to the u pper horizonta l end cleats with four penny na ils. The
upper longitudinal members of the sides shall be nailed to the vertical end
cleats with eightpen ny na ils.
Figur e 6-28. Type III , style B cra te a ssembly (MIL-C-52950).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 260/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-43
Table 6-7. Na iling Schedu le for Assem bly to Type II, Style A Cra tes
Cleated-Plywood Sides
to Plywood or Lu mber E nds1
Lumber Sides to Lumber Ends 1
Plywood
thickness
Nail size Nail spacing Thickness of sides Nail size Nails spacing
1/4 8 3 3/4 8 2-1/2
3/8 10 3-1/4 1-1/16 10 2-3/41/2 12 3-1/2 1-5/16 12 3
NOTE: 1/ Nails shall be staggered when ends a re lumber.
TYPE IV, STYLE A - H EAVY DUT Y CRATE (MIL-C-52950)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
L o a d a n d S i z e R e q u i r e m e n t s
The limita tions sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-3.
B a s e
Skids shall be 2 X 4 inch lumber for loads through 500 pounds and 2 X 6 inch
lumber for over 500 pounds.
The size of the load-bearing floor member shall be as specified in table 6-4.
Floorboards over 2 inches in nominal thickness shall be bolted to the skids
with 3/8-inch diam eter car riage bolts. Diagonals sh all be 1 X 6 inches.
The placement of end floor members and ru bbing str ips shall be as sh own in
figure 6-29. On crates over 5 feet long, the r ubbing strips sha ll be in th ree
pieces, with the center piece 16 inches long, the fork openings 12 inches long,
an d th e end p ieces of a lengt h wh ich will allow end s ling open ings of 4 inches.
S i d e , E n d , a n d T o p P a n e lsAll the members of the side, end and top panels shall be 1 X 6 inch lumber.
Three vertical struts shall be used in the side panels when the length of the
cra te is greater t ha n 4 feet or greater t ha n 1 1/2 times the height. The latera l
members of the top panel shall coincide with the vertical struts of the side
pan els an d shall be equal in number. Nailing patt erns sha ll be as shown in
figur e 6-22.
Assembly
Assembly of th e cra tes sha ll be as shown in figure 6-29. The longitu dina l
members of the top shall bear on the upper frame members of the sides and
the end lateral members of the top shall be adjacent to the upper member of
the ends.
TYP E V, STYLE A - H E AVY DU TY (MIL -C-52950)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
L o a d a n d S iz e L im i t a t i o n s
The limita tions sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-3.
Nailing shall be as shown in figure 6-22.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 261/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-44
Figur e 6-29. Type IV, style A cra te a ssembly (MIL-C-52950).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 262/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-45
Figur e 6-30. Type V, style A cra te a ssembly (MIL-C-52950).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 263/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-46
B a s e
S k i d s
The skids sh all consist of 4 X 4 inch lumber . An inter media te 4 X 4 inch skid
shall be used when the distance between the outer skids is greater than 36
inches.
L o a d -b e a r i n g F l o or M e m b e r s
The size of the load-bearing floor members shall be as specified in table 6-4.
Floorboards over 2 inches in nominal thickness shall be bolted to each outside
skid with 3/8 inch carriage bolts.
Di agona l s
The diagona ls shall be 1 X 6 inch lum ber an d th e an gle between th e skid an d
the diagonal shall be between 30 degrees and 60 degrees, except that when
the a ngle of a single diagonal is less tha n 30 degrees, two diagona ls and a 1 X
6 inch center crossmember sh all be used.
C r o s s m e m b e r s
End crossmembers shall be 2 X 6 inch lumber for crates not greater than 4feet in width and 4 X 4 inch lumber for crat es over 4 feet in width. En d
crossmembers shall be bolted to each skid with 3/8-inch diameter carriage
bolts.
R u b b i n g St r i p s
Rubbing strips sh all be as described previously.
E n d s
Vertical stru ts sha ll be 2 X 4 inch lumber. An int ermediate str ut sh all be
used when the width of th e crat e is great er tha n 3 feet. All stru ts shall
coincide with the skids and shall bear upon the end crossmembers of the
base. The upper a nd lower frame mem bers of th e ends shall be 1 X 6 inch
lumber except the a 1 X 8 inch lower member shall be used when the end
crossmembers of the ba se are 4 X 4 inches. The diagonals of the ends sh all be
1- X 6-inch lu mber .
Si des
All side fra ming members, stru ts, and d iagonals sha ll be 1 X 6 inch lumber.
Intermediate struts shall be placed so that diagonals form an angle of
between 30 an d 60 degrees with the lower fram e member. Stru ts shall have
a ma ximu m spacing of 42 inches. A horizonta l int ermediat e fram e member is
required when th e height of the side exceeds 4 feet. Diagona ls shall be used
between each two adjacent stru ts.
Top All members of the top shall be 2 X 4 inch lum ber. The longitudin al members
shall coincide with the vertical strut s of the ends. An int ermediate
longitudina l member is required when t he width of th e cra te is greater t han 3
feet and sh all coincide with th e intermediat e stru ts of the en ds. The joists
shall be placed flat. J oists sha ll coincide with each stru t of th e side but sha ll
be spaced not more than 40 inches apart for crates up to 3 feet wide and not
more than 30 inches apar t for crates more tha n 3 feet wide. The diagona ls
shall be na iled to th e longitu dinal members. When more tha n th ree joists are
used, only each end panel of the top assembly shall be braced as shown in
figur e 6-30.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 264/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-47
Non- dem oun t ab l e Cr a t e As s em bl y
The assem bly shall be reinforced by the application of metal str aps a s sh own
in figure 6-30.
Si des t o Bas e
The sides shall be fastened to the base by nailing the overlap of the verticalstru ts and diagonals to the skids with twelvepenny nails. The nailing
patterns shall follow those shown in figure 6-22.
E n d s t o Ba s e
The ends sh all be fasten ed to the ba se by nailing t he lower fram e member of
the en d pan els to th e end crossmembers of th e base with t welvepenny sinker
nails spaced 6 to 8 inches ap art .
S id e s t o E n d s a n d E n d s t o S id e s
The edge struts of the sides shall be fastened to the edge struts of the ends
with eightp enny sinker n ails spaced 8 to 10 inches apart . The extensions of
the upper and lower frame members and the diagonals of the end shall be
nailed to the edge stru ts of the side with eightpen ny sinker na ils as sh own infigur e 6-22.
T o p t o Si d e s a n d E n d s
The top shall be fastened to the sides and ends by nailing the upper frame
members of the ends and the extensions of the vertical struts and diagonals
of the sides to the adjacent edge members of the top with eightpenny sinker
nails as shown in figure 6-22.
D e m o u n t a b l e C r a t e As s e m b ly
All demoun table crates sha ll be assembled with lag bolts. Lead holes shall be
used for all lag bolts. When specified as an altern ate, th e top, side, an d end
panels may be nailed to each other and the unit may be fastened to the skids
and end crossmembers of the base by means of lag bolts for demountable
crates.
Si des t o Bas e
Lag bolts, 3/4 by 3 1/2 inches, shall be used to fasten the sides to the skids.
Diagonals shall be arranged to provide the maximum number of fastening
points to the base near t he center of the skids. The minimum nu mber of lag
bolts sh all correspon d to th e following tabu lation. Not less tha n one edge bolt
shall be placed in each stru t a nd diagonal.
Gross Load Minimum Number of 3/8-inch Lag bolts
(cra te and contents) for each side of cra te
(pounds)
1000 4
2000 5
3000 8
E n d s t o B a s e , s i d e s t o E n d s , a n d E n d s t o T o p
Lag bolts, 5/16 by 3 inches, spaced 12 to 14 inches apart, shall be used to
fasten : the lower edge members of th e ends to the end crossmembers of the
base; the end vertical struts of the sides to the edge struts of the ends; and
the u pper edge mem bers of the en d to th e edge joists of the top.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 265/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-48
Si des t o Top
One 5/16 by 3-inch lag bolt sha ll be used to fasten each str ut an d diagonal of
the sides to th e edge longitudina l member of the top.
TYPE V, STYLE B --LIG H T DU TY CRATE (MIL -C-52950)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
L o a d a n d s iz e L im i t a t i o n s
The limitat ions sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-3. They sha ll be open , or
covered, and demounta ble or n on-demount able as specified. Nailing shall be
as shown in figure 6-22, and as specified herein.
B a s e
S k i d s
Skid sizes sh all conform t o the following:
Skid Size (Nomina l)
Net load (pounds) 2 Skids (inches) 3 Skids (inches)
Up to 500 2 X 4 (fla t ) 2 X 4 (fla t )
501 to 2000 3 X 4 (flat ) 3 X 4 (fla t )
2001 to 3000 4 X 4 3 X 4 (flat )
3001 to 4000 4 X 4 4 X 4
Cr a t e s Ove r 42 I nch es Wi de Sha l l Have Th r ee Sk i ds
Splices sha ll be located no fur th er from the en ds th an one-th ird of the length
of th e skids, and splice locations sha ll be alter na ted in a djacent skids. All 4 X
4 members may also consist of two 2 X 4's placed on edge and laminated in
accorda nce with figur e 6-23.
R u b b i n g St r i p s
Rubbing strips shall be a minimum of 3 X 4 inches in size. The str ips shall be
positioned a s shown in figure 6-31. They sha ll be na iled to the sk ids with two
rows of nails spaced 1 foot a part in each r ow in a st aggered pat tern ; nail sizes
shall be sixteenpenn y when skids a re 2 X 4 inches an d twen typenn y for 3 X 4
and 4 X 4 inch skids.
E n d H e a d e r s
Two headers spaced 2 feet apart shall be bolted to each end of the skids as
shown in figure 6-31 with 3/8-inch diameter carriage bolts. The end h eaders
shall be the same cross section a s th e skids. When crate en ds ha ve 2 X 4 inch
stru ts, bolts in the outer h eaders sh all be placed to clear th e stru ts.
L o a d -b e a r i n g F l o or b o a r d s
When concentrated loads occur, load-bearing floorboards shall be used to
tr an sfer the load to skids. The sizes sha ll be as specified in ta ble 6-4. When
end headers are used as load-bearing member, the end header size shall be
chosen from the load-bearing floorboard width specified in table 6-4.
Floorboards 2 inches or less in thickness shall be nailed to each skid in
patt erns as sh own in figur e 6-22 an d floorboards over 2 inches t hick shall be
bolted to each skid with 3/8-inch diam eter car riage bolts. Two bolts sh all be
used for floorboards over 6 in ches wide.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 266/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-49
D i a g on a l s a n d F l oo r b o a r d s
Diagonals shall be used between headers and load-bearing floorboards or
other crossmembers a nd sh all be placed at a n a ngle as close to 45 degrees as
possible. Diagonals an d floorboar ds oth er th an load-bearin g floorboar ds sha ll
be 1- by 4-inch members for net loads up to 500 pounds and outside widths
not exceeding 3 feet, and shall be 1- by 6-inch members for all other
conditions.
Si des
Sides sha ll be as shown in figur es 6-32, 6-33, and 6-34 Single-panel sides
shall be used for heights over 6 feet. An intermediat e longitudina l member
sha ll be added for height s over 4 feet. Double-pan el sides sha ll be used for
heights over 6 feet and thr ough 8 feet. Triple-pan el sides shall be used for
height s over 8 feet. Longitud ina l mem bers sha ll be in single pieces for
lengths not exceeding 16 feet, and may be spliced as shown in figure 6-24 for
lengths greater tha n 16 feet. Splice locations shall be altern ated. Member
sizes and s pacing sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-9.
E n d s
En ds sha ll be as shown in figur es 6-35 and 6-36. All members sh all be 1 by 4inches in size for net loads up to 500 pounds, and 1 by 6 inches for net loads
over 500 pounds , with t he following exceptions.
Stru ts sh all be 2 by 4 inches in size when t he crat e height is over 5 feet.
The lower frame mem ber sha ll be 1 by 6 inches in size when th e end h eaders
of the base are 2-inch thick members and 1 by 8 inches in size when larger
end headers are used.
Top
The top shall be as shown in figur e 6-37. The spa cing of th e crossmem bers
shall be the same as th e spacing of th e side stru ts. Diagona ls shall be nailed
to the inner faces of the crossmembers. The longitudina l members sha ll be 1
by 4 inches in size for loads u p to 500 pounds a nd widths t o 4 feet, an d 1 by 6
inches for all other conditions Crossmembers and diagonals shall be 1 by 4
inches for loads t o 1,000 pound s an d width s to 4 feet, an d 1 by 6 inches for a ll
other cond itions. Splicing of longitu dina l mem bers sha ll be as shown in
figur e 6-23.
Top Re i n f o r c i ng J o i s t s
When the gross weight of the crate is over 500 pounds or the inside width is
over 3 feet 6 inches, a 2- by 4-inch top-reinforcing joist shall be nailed to the
top at the loaded center of balance as sh own in figure 6-37 to prevent t he t op
of the crate from being crushed when the crate is lifted with a single set of
grabhooks. The joist shall be placed flat an d th e ends sha ll conta ct th e innerface of the upper longitudinal members of the side when the crate is
assembled. The joist shall be fastened to the longitudinal and diagonal
members of the top with sevenpenn y nails placed as sh own in figure 6-22 and
to the upper longitudinal members of the sides with two tenpenny nails in
each end.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 267/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-50
Figur e 6-31. Bases for Type V, style B cra tes (MIL-C-52950).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 268/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-51
Figur e 6-32. Simple pa nel sides for Type V, style B cra tes (MIL-C-52950): A, side of long cra te;
B, side of short crat e; C, covered side.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 269/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-52
Figur e 6-33. Double pa nel sides for Type V, style B crat es for h eights u p to 96 inches (MIL-C-
52950): A, open side ; B, covered side .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 270/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-53
Figur e 6-34. Triple pa nel sides for Type V, style B cra tes for height s over 96 inches (MIL-C-
52950): A, open side; B, covered side.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 271/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-54
Figur e 6-35. En ds for Type V, style B crat es (MIL-C-52950): A, two pa nel h orizont al; B, single
pan el covered; C, four pa nel; D, two panel vert ical.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 272/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-55
Figur e 6-36. En ds for Type V, style B cra tes (MIL-C-52950): A, wide and n ar row double-pan el
ends; B, wide and n ar row triple-pan el ends.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 273/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-56
Figur e 6-37. Tops for type V, style B cra tes (MIL-C-52950): A, na rr ow top; B, medium t op; C,
wide top.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 274/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-57
Assembly
Unless demountability is specified, the crate shall be assembled by nailing.
When demountability is specified, the sides, ends, and top as a unit shall be
secur ed to the base with lag bolts. Eightpen ny na ils, spaced 8 to 10 inches
apar t, shall be used to fasten:
• th e edge strut s of th e sides to th e sides to the edge str ut s of the en ds;• the longitudinal members of the top to the upper frame members of the
sides;
• th e end crossmembers of th e top to the upper fra me mem bers of the ends;
and,
• th e lower frame m embers of th e ends to the en d hea der of th e base.
Eightpenny nails as shown in figure 6-22 nailing patterns shall be used to
fasten:
• the upper ends of the side struts and diagonals to the longitudinal
members of the top; an d
• the ends of upper and lower frame members, horizontal members, and
diagona ls of the ends to the edge str ut s of the sides.
The bottom ends of struts and diagonals of the sides shall be secured to the
skids with eightp enny n ails as follows: A minimu m of thr ee nails shall be
used for each 3 and 4 inch wide member, four nails for each 6 inch wide
member, an d five nails for each 8 inch an d wider member. Nails shall be
staggered and sha ll be placed in two rows whenever possible. For
demountable crates, each strut and diagonal of the sides shall be fastened to
the skids with a minimu m of one lag bolt. The size of lag bolts a nd t he total
nu mber required sha ll be not less th an t hat specified in ta ble 6-10. When
more than one lag bolt is required in each strut or diagonal, the additional
lag bolts sha ll be placed in th e wider members, n ear the load-bearing point s,
and in a staggered patter n when possible. One-half the total num ber of lag
bolts required sha ll be used for each side. For demounta ble cra tes, the lower
frame members of the ends shall be fastened to the end headers of the base
with 5/16 X 3 inch lag bolts, spa ced 12 inches a par t.
C o v er e d C r a t e s
The str uctur al framework of th e covered crates sha ll be as shown in figur e 6-
32 an d 6-33. The covered crat es shall also be as shown in figures 6-32
th rough 6-38. Un less other wise specified, th e covering shall consist of
plywood or paper-overlaid veneer with a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch.
When joints ar e required in t he covering they sh all butt over th e center line of
stru ts or crossmembers. Covering shall be fasten ed with two rows of nails or
staples, spaced 8 inches apar t in each row, staggered, and clinched. Filler
pieces between struts, diagonals, and crossmembers of sides, ends, and top
shall be fastened with two rows of nails, spaced 10 inches apar t in each row,staggered, and clinched. Filler pieces shall be the sam e thickness as a djacent
panel framing members.
Si des
Four-inch wide filler pieces shall be fastened to the upper and lower frame
members between the struts and diagonals. Filler shall extend beyond the
edge of the upper frame member so as to be flush with the ends of the struts
an d diagonals. The lower edges of th e fillers sh all be flush with t he bottom
edge of the lower frame m ember.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 275/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-58
E n d s
Three-inch wide filler pieces shall be nailed to the edge struts as shown in
figur es 6-35 and 6-36. When sp ecified, end vent ilation sha ll be provided in
accordan ce with MIL-C-104.
Tops
Two-inch wide filler pieces shall be fastened to the longitudinal members.The covering of the top shall be extended to overlap the covering of the sides
and en ds. During na iling, a 4-inch wide strip of water proof barr ier mater ial
conforming to PPP-B-1055, class suitable for crate liners, shall be placed
un der each covering joint . The strip sha ll extend across the full width of the
top.
Cover ed Cr a t e As s em bl y
The assembly of covered Type V, style B crates shall be as shown in figure 6-
38. Ninepenn y nails, spaced 8 to 10 inches apart , sha ll be used through th e
covering to fasten the edge struts of the sides to the edge struts of the ends;
the st ru ts, diagonals, an fillers of the sides to the edge longitud inal members
of the top; the end crossmembers of the top to the upper frame members of
the ends; the u pper, lower, an d h orizontal mem bers, diagona ls, and fillers of the en ds to the edge stru ts of the sides; the lower frame m embers of the en ds
to the end headers of the base; and, the struts, diagonals, and fillers at the
lower edge of th e sides to th e skids of th e base. The covering of th e top shall
be nailed to the filler of the sides with fourpenny nails spaced 4 to 6 inches
apar t. When demount ability is specified, th e sides and en ds shall be fasten ed
to the ba se with lag bolts.
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS (MIL-C-52950)When specified, the contr actor sha ll fur nish applicable assem bly instru ctions.
T o l e r a n c e s
A tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch is allowable on the overall length and
width of individua l crat e pan els. Out -of-squa re deviations of individua l
panels shall be not more than 3/16 inch (3/8 inch different in diagonals).
W o r k m a n s h i p
Crate panels shall be clean and free of slivers and protruding nail points.
Crate panels be square and free of cracks, splits, or other damage which
would prevent easy an d corr ect a ssembly.
Table 6-8. Member Sizes an d Spacing for Type III, Style B Crat es
Member Size Member spacing
Depth of Cra te Width of Crate Length of Cra te
Member 0-8
inches
Over 8 to 12
inches
Over 12
inches
0 to 24
inches
over 24
inches
0 to 10
feet
Over 10 to
20 feet
Over 20
feet(inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (inches) (feet) (feet-
inches)
(feet)
Longitudinal
members
1 X 3 1 X 4 1 X 6
Vert ica l end cleats 1 X 3 1 X 4 1 X 6
Horizonta l end
cleats
1 X 3 1 X 4 1 X 6
Top and bottom
crossmembers
1 X 4 1 X 6 2 2-6 3
Rubbing st r ips 3 X 4 3 X 6
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 276/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-59
Table 6-9. Fr am e Member Sizes for sides of Type V, Style B Crates
Limits of Dimensions and Net Loads Member Sizes (nominal)
Max. Strut. Spacing (on
center)
Longitudinals
Length Net Load Single
Panel
Double &
TriplePanel
Upper Lower Intermedia te St ru ts Diagonals
(foot) (pound) (inch ) (inch) (inch ) (inch) (inch) (inch ) (inch )
12 300 42 42 1 x 4 1 x 3 1 x 3 1 x 31 1 x 4
32 500 48 54 1 x 6 1 X 4 1 X 4 1 x 41 1 X 4
28 1000 42 54 1 x 6 1 x 4 1 x 4 1 x 41 1 x 4
24 2000 36 48 1 x 6 1 x 6 1 x 6 1 x 6 1 x 6
20 3000 36 48 1 x 8 1 x 6 1 x 6 1 x 62 1 x 6
16 4000 36 42 1 x 8 1 x 8 1 x 8 1 x 8 1 x 8
1 For edge stru ts use 1 x 4 except tha t 1 x 6 members sh all be used when edge stru ts of ends ar e 2 x 4 inches in size.2 For edge struts use 1 X 8 members.
Table 6-10. Num ber a nd size of Lag Bolts Required to Assemble the Base (Demounta ble Base) of Type V, Style B Crates
Total Minimum N umber of Lag Bolts
Size of Both for Ea ch Skid Size
Gross Weight (Crate a nd
Contents
5/16 X 3 inch bolt for 2X3
or 2 X 4-nch skid (flat)
3/8 X 3 inch bolt for 3 X 3
inch skid
1/2 X 3-1/2- inch lag bolt for 4
X 4-inch or two 2 X 4-inch
skids (on edge and lam inated)
pounds
1000 8 8 6
2000 14 10 10
3000 18 16 12
4000 24 20 14
5000 30 26 18
Table 6-11. Classification of MIL-C-3774 Crat es
Assembly
Maximum
net load (lb)
Maximum dimensions
Length Width Height
Type I,Nailed1
12,000 16 8 8
Type II,
Bolted2
16,000 40 8 16
1 Nailed assem bly - nondemount able.2 Bolted a ssembly - demountable.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 277/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-60
OP EN WOOD CRATES , MIL-C-3774 (GENE RAL)
C RATE DESIGN
The open crates covered by MIL-C-3774 consist of framing members partially
sheat hed in specified area s. This sheath ing is applied to protect th e enclosed
item and acts as a reinforcement to the sides, ends, and top of the crate.These cra tes are designed to carry large or hea vy items. A minimum of 1-
inch clearance is required between the item and the nearest framing member
of the sides, ends, and top.
Class i f i ca t ion
Crat es designed un der t his specification m ay be either bolted or na iled (table
6-11).
O p e n B o lt e d C r a t e s ( De m o u n t a b l e )
These crates are designed to withstand a superimposed load of 200 pounds
per squar e foot on the top, including dunna ge. These crat es may be used as
reusa ble conta iners.
O p e n N a i l e d C r a t e s ( No n d e m o u n t a b l e)
Crates designed under this classification are considered to be "one trip"
containers. This type ma y be constru cted with a skid-or sill-type base.
L u m b e r R e q u i r e m e n t s
Lumber
Lumber used in crate construction must meet the same rigid requirements as
for oth er wooden cont ainers. Lumber u sed in cra te constr uction sh all be free
of defects th at would ma terially weaken t he conta iner.
Plywood
Requirements for plywood are stated in A-A-55057.
Fasteners
Nails, strapping, bolts, etc., are commonly used.
OP EN B OLTE D CR ATES (MIL-C-3774)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
Demountable crates are designed and constructed so that the major
components may be readily assembled or disassembled without damage to
the component pa rts. This is accomplished th rough th e use of lag bolts or
bolts (fig 6-5).
F a b r i ca t i o n o f Op e n B o lt e d C r a t e s
S k i d b a s e
S k i d s
The size of the skids is based upon t he n et load and the out side length of th e
crat e, as sta ted in table 6-12. The nu mber of skids are dictat ed by the item
being packed. However, the clear distan ce between any adjacent skid is
limited t o 48 inches cent er t o cent er (fig 6-39).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 278/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-61
Figur e 6-38. Type V, style B crat e (MIL-C-52950), open an d covered.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 279/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-62
To prevent splitting, place one carriage bolt crosswise to two to three inches
back from each end of th e skid (fig 6-39). When n ecessary, splice and
laminat e skids a ccording t o the details shown on figure 6-55.
R u b b i n g St r i p
Rubbing strips are required on all 4 X 4-inch skids and must be at least 2
inch material, approximat ely as wide as the skid. Bevel these member s at a45o angle and set back approximately 8 inches from the ends of the skids.
Bevel the inner ends of the notches at a 45o an gle. These areas will serve as
sling points and for forklift entries.
H e a d e r s
The sizes of end headers and bolts are outlined as follows:
Skid size Header size Bolt diameter
(inches) (inches) (inches)
2 X 4 2 X 4 3/8
3 X 3 3 X 3 3/8
4 X 4 4 X 4 1/24 X 6 (in edge) 4 X 4 1/2
Extend headers beyond the outside faces of the outer skids three-fourths of
an inch to support th e lower frame m embers of the sides.
Figur e 6-39. Skid base for bolted cra te (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 280/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-63
L o a d B e a r i n g F l oo r b o a r d s
Place load bearing floorboards wher e the concentra ted loads. Determine t he
size of load bear ing floorboar ds from ta ble 6-4. The en d floorboards of 2 inch
flooring may be considered as load-bearing within limits of their within limits
of th eir assigned values. The load-bearing members sh all be placed with t he
ends flush with the outside faces of the skids, as shown in figure 6-39, and
bolted to each skid with carriage bolts. One bolts sha ll be used at each skidcrossing for widths not exceeding 4 inches and two bolts, for greater widths.
Size of carriage bolts shall be the sam e as th ose used in th e end hea ders.
For k l i ft Ar ea
The forklift area extends over the area of 42 inches in from the ends of the
skids a nd ma y consist of the following:
ο Forklift h eaders spa ced 20 to 40 inches in from each end header .
ο 2-inch-thick boards extending 42 inches in from each end.
ο Plywood for narrow crates.
Di agona l s
1 X 6-inch diagonals are used between forklift areas and loadbearingmembers. The diagona ls are nailed to the skids and to each other where th ey
intersect.
Si des
The sides consist of upper, lower, an d inter mediate m embers, vertical str uts,
diagonals, and corn er shea thing.
S id e P a n e ls
The design of th e side pan el is illustra ted in figure 6-40. The nu mber of
diagonals will depend up on th e size of the crat e.
M em ber Se lec t i on
The sizes of the upper, lower, and intermediate longitudinal members are
based upon th e gross weight an d length of th e crat e as sta ted in ta ble 6-13.
Table 6-12. Skid Sizes of Bolted MIL-C-3774 Crat es
Maximum Net Load Maximum length of cra te Size of skids
Pounds Feet Inches
2,000 12 3 x 4
4,000 140 4 x 4
5,000 20 4 x 4
10,000 16 4 x 4
5,000 32 4 x 6 (on edge)
16,000 20 4 x 4 (on edge)
1 For lengths over 32 feet, crat e heights sh all be no less than 8 feet.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 281/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-64
Table 6-13. Fr ame-mem ber Sizes (Sides of Bolted Crat es)
Limits Size of members
Length Net load Upper
frame
members
Lower
frame
members
Horizontalbrace
Feet Pounds Inches Inches Inches
212 500 35/8 x 4 35/8 x 4 35/8 x 4
10 2,000 1 x 4 1 x 4 1 x 4
16 4,000 1 x 6 1 x 6 1 x 6
12 8,000 1 x 6 1 x 6 1 x 6
440 4,000 2 x 4 2 x 6 2 x 4
16 10,000 2 x 4 2 x 6 2 x 4
20 10,000 2 x 6 2 x 8 2 x 4
20 16,000 2 x 8 2 x 10 2 x 8
NOTES: 1/ For crates of 48 inches and over2/ Size limit s of crat es. In add ition to th e 12 foot length an d 500
pound gross weight limit, this cra te ha ving 5/8 inch member s sha ll
be limited to 4 foot widths an d 6 foot heights m aximum .
3/ Actua l thickness of mem bers equals 5/8 inch.
4/ Crat es over 32 feet in length shall be not less than 8 feet in height.
Open bolted crates can not be fabricated in length s over 32 feet if the
height is less than 8 feet. Long crates less than 8 feet high shall be
fabricated in accordan ce with th e requ iremen ts of MIL-C-104.
Figur e 6-40. Side for bolted crat e (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 282/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-65
Di agona l s
Use 5/8 X 6 inch diagona ls for cra tes n ot exceeding 12 feet in len gth , 4 feet in
width an d 6 feet in height, with a maximum net load of 500 poun ds. Use 1 X
8 inch for cra tes exceeding 32 feet in lengt h a nd 12 feet in height . Use 1 X 6-
inch for all other conditions. See ta ble 6-14 for the spa cing of th e diagonals.
One-half of the diagonals shall be nailed to the outside of the longitudinal
frame members and the other half shall be nailed to the inside of the samemem bers, sloped in the opposite direction. The points of fasten ing of th e
diagonals, except at the end ones, to the longitudinal members shall be the
same for inside an d outside diagona ls to permit th e same lag bolts or bolts to
pass thr ough both diagonals. At the ends of th e upper and lower fram e
members wh ere no diagona l is present on the inside sur face of the member, a
filler block 12 inches long, the same thickness as one diagonal and the same
width as the frame member, shall be used to provide continuous bearing.
The n um ber of diagonals is determ ined by th e spacing of the diagonals.
Both inner and outer diagonals shall be nailed to each 2-inch horizontal
member with sevenpenny na ils in pat tern s as shown on figure 6-50.
The outer diagona ls shall be nailed to each 1-inch h orizontal mem ber with sixnails, thr ee driven from each side, and clinched.
The inner diagonals shall be nailed to each horizontal member with
sevenpenny na ils as shown on figure 6-40. When 5/8-inch frame mem bers
are u sed, the na il sizes sha ll be reduced as required.
Ve r t i c a l St r u t s o r C o r n e r P o s t s
Fabr icate th ese members from not less than 3 X 3-inch mat erial. These
pieces must be continuous from the upper longitudinal frame member of the
side to both the lower longitudinal frame member of the side and the end
floorboard m ember. Notch th e members wh en th e top of the end floorboar d
does not come even with t he t op of the lower longitudinal m ember of the side.
Corner posts or vertical struts are designed to receive the lag bolts from the
ends of th e crate.
C o r n e r S h e a t h i n g
Locate this mater ial on th e out side at each corner of th e cra te. Boar ds used
at each end of the sides must be at least 1 X 8-inch pieces, except when
diagonals a nd a re 5/8-inch-thick, the shea th ing is 5/8 X 8-inch mat erial. Nail
sheathing boards to the vertical struts and corner posts with two rows
(staggered patt ern) of ninepenn y na ils. Space 8 inches apar t within each
row. Nail sheath ing board s to 2-inch longitu dinal members with clinched
eight penn y nails, five at each joint. Secure t o 1-inch longitudina l members
with clinched nails. Use pat tern shown in figure 6-50.
E n d s
The ends consist of the upper, lower and intermediate longitudinal members
which are the same size as the corresponding members of the sides (fig 6-41).
Intermediate longitudinal members are required only when crates are 48
inches high or higher. Vertical strut s of the ends ar e one continu ous piece.
All diagonal members of the en ds are n ot less tha n 1 X 6-inch m ater ial. An X
frame pattern is required when the width of the crate is not more than 1 1/2
times the height. When this limit is exceeded, a two-X frame pat tern is
required.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 283/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-66
P a r t i a l S h e a t h i n g (C o r n e r )
The outside vertical sheathing boards are not less than 1 X 6 inch for net
loads up to 3,000 pounds, and not less than 1 X 8 inch boards for net loads
over 3,000 poun ds. Nail the corner board t o the str uts with t wo rows of
sixpenny na ils (staggered patter n). Space th en 8 inches apart in each row
an d clinch.
Top P a n els ( fig 6-42)
Determine the number of panels to use by the length and width of the crate.
Place the diagona l fra me members a s near to 450 angles as possible.
F r a m e Me m b e r s
Use 2 X 4-inch (one edge) or 3 X 3 inch members for contents up to 4,000
pound s. Over 4,000 pound s, use 4 X 4 inch pieces. Na il 2-inch crosswise end
members with twelvepenn y na ils, th ree at each joint . Nail through th e side
grain of the edge member into the end gra in of the en d member. Nail 3 X 3-
inch and 4 X 4 inch crosswise end members with telvepenny nails, three at
each joint, toenailed from t he edge m ember int o the crosswise end member.
D i a g on a l M e m b e r sAll diagona l mem bers ar e 1 X 6 inch boar ds. Na il diagona ls to longitud ina l
members with eightpenny nails. Where diagonals cross each other, use
sevenpenny nails, five at each crossing, and clinch.
E n d S h e a t h i n g B o a r d s
All end sheath ing boar ds of the top are 1 X 8 inch in size. Nail the en d
sheat hing boards to the fram e member of the top with two rows of eight penn y
nails spaced 4 inches apa rt in a single line for 2 X 4 inch fram e members. For
larger members the na ils ar e staggered. Nail sheat hing board s to
longitudina l members with eightpenn y nails.
Table 6-14. Spa cing of Diagonals for MIL-C-3774 Crat esMaximum
spacing
Thickness of
longitudinal
members
Crate size
Height Width
Inches Inches Feet Feet
24 2 to 6 to 6
18 2 6-12 6-8
118 2 12-16 to 5
24 1 to 6 to 4
18 1 6-12 4-8
1 For crates over 32 feet in length.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 284/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-67
Figur e 6-41. En d for bolted crat e (MIL-C-3774).
Figur e 6-42. Top for bolted cra te (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 285/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-68
Fi l le r S t r i p s
Fabr icate filler strips from 1 X 4-inch material. Place them between th e
diagonals an d na il. This will level th e top in ord er to accomm odate
superimposed loads. Secur e these str ips with sixpenny n ails spaced 6 inches
apart .
T o p J o is t s
Determine the size of the top joists by the width of the crate and the net
weight of cont ent s as sp ecified in ta ble 6-15. A single joist sh all be placed
between the longitudina l frame members an d at the center of balance. For
long crates or for crates over 10,000 pounds in weight, two sets of joists shall
be used and placed not more than 43 inches on each side of the center of
balance. Nail through th e 2 inch longitu dinal members into the end grain of
the t op joist with t welvepenny coated n ails, th ree in each joist. For 4 inch
joist, use five na ils. Toenail joist with t welvepenn y coated n ails.
ASSEMBLY OF BOLTED CRATES
Requ i r em en t s fo r Lag Bo l t s o r Bo l t sLag bolts may be used as fasteners for assembling the various panels of a
bolted cra te (fig 6-5). When a single diagonal occurs on th e inside of a
longitudina l member, use a thr ee-four ths inch shorter lag bolt or bolt. When
the diagona l is on t he outside of the frame m ember, use a 3/4-inch filler st rip
between the frame member and the member to which the part is being
fasten ed (fig 6-41). If bolts ar e used, they mu st be machine bolts with
washers placed under both the head and the nut . Use washers under the
hea ds of all lag bolts. Spa ce 3/8-inch lag bolts or bolts not more t ha n 24
inches apa rt. Space 1/2-inch lag bolts or bolts not more th an 30 inches a par t.
Space 5/8-inch lag bolts or bolts m ore tha n 36 inches a part .
Assembly of the panels (fig 6-43).
F a s t e n i n g t h e S id e s t o t h e B a s e
The size and number of lag bolts used to fasten the side panels to the base
are determined by the weight contents, the wood group used, and the width
and t hickness of the m embers as specified in ta ble 6-13. The nu mber of lag
bolts or bolts specified in the tables are given for both side panels, one-half
the n umber t o be used on each side.
Conn ector plates may be used between the diagona ls and skids. When used,
use only ha lf th e nu mber of lag bolts or bolts specified in ta bles 6-20 an d 6-21.
As an example, if the gross load is 8,000 pounds, use the number of bolts
required in tables for 4,000 pounds. Use th e correct diameter an d length of
fasteners specified in tables 6-16 or 6-17, through each pair of diagonals,
through the lower longitudinal member of the side, and into the sides of theskids.
F a s t e n i n g t h e S id e P a n e l s t o t h e T o p
Determine the size and number of lag bolts or bolts used to fasten the side
pan els to the t op from th e thickness of th e diagona ls and t op fram e members
of th e side, and t he width of the longitu dinal fra me member of the t op. Use
1/2-inch lag bolts or bolts when the combined thickness of the diagonals, the
upper edge member of th e side, an d th e longitudina l member of the top, is 4-
3/4 inches or more; use 3/8-inch fasteners when th e sum is less.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 286/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-69
The length of the lag bolt should be approximately equal to the sum of the
thr ee or four thicknesses. Bolts should be long enough t o accommodat e the
nut a nd washers (under head an d nut).
Secur e the side pa nel to the t op by using a lag bolt or bolt t hr ough each pair
of diagonals and upper longitudinal member of the side, and into the
longitudina l member of the top. This is required aroun d the perimet er of thecrat e (fig 6-5).
Table 6-15. J oist Sizes
Size of joist Limits
Gross load Length (cra te
width)
Inches Pounds Inches
2 x 4 1,000 72
2 x 4 2,000 60
2 x 4 3,000 48
2 x 4 5,000 36
4 x 4 10,000 196
24 x 4 16,000 96
1 Use two joists for great er width s of top.2 Use two joists.
Table 6-16. Num ber of Lag Bolts for Assembling Sides to Base of Bolted Cra tes; Where Nominal 1-inch Longitudina l
Members
Are Used in S ides and N ominal 4-inch Wide Skids Are Used1/2 by 6-inch lag 1/2 by 5-1/2-inch lag 3/8 by 6-inch lag 3/8 by 5-1/2-inch lag
Net load 1/
Pounds
G1
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
G
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
G
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
G
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
8,000 28 24 22 18 32 28 24 22 32 28 26 22 36 32 30 26
7,000 24 22 18 16 28 24 22 18 28 24 22 20 32 28 26 22
6,000 20 18 16 14 24 20 18 16 24 22 18 16 28 24 22 18
5,000 18 16 14 12 20 18 16 14 20 18 16 14 22 20 18 16
4,000 14 12 10 10 16 14 12 10 16 14 12 10 18 16 14 12
3,000 10 10 8 6 12 10 10 8 12 10 10 8 14 12 10 10
1/2 by 5 inch lag 3/8 by 4-1/2 inch lag
3,000 18 16 14 12 20 18 16 14
2,500 14 12 12 10 16 14 12 10
Note. Refers to the wood group and applies to the skids. If bolts ar e used, they shall be the same nu mber a nd diamet er
as given for lag bolts.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 287/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-70
Figur e 6-43. Assembly details for bolted crat es (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 288/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-71
Table 6-17. Nu mber of Lag Bolts for Assembling Sides to Base of Bolted Crat es; Where Nomin al 2-inch Longitu dina l
Members Are Us ed in Sides and N ominal 4-inch Wide Skids Are Used
Net load 1/
5/8 by 7-inch lag 1/2 by 7-inch lag 1/2 by 6-1/2-inch lag 1/2 by 6-inch lag
G
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
G
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
G
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
G
I
G
II
G
II I
G
IV
Pounds
16,000 48 44 36 32 56 48 44 36 64 56 48 44 74 68 60 52
14,000 40 36 32 28 48 44 36 32 56 48 44 36 64 60 52 44
12,000 36 32 28 24 40 36 32 28 48 40 36 32 56 52 44 40
10,000 30 26 24 20 34 30 28 24 40 34 32 26 46 42 38 32
9,000 26 24 22 18 30 28 24 22 36 32 28 24 42 38 34 28
8,000 24 22 18 16 28 24 22 18 32 28 24 22 38 34 30 26
7,000 20 18 16 14 24 22 18 16 28 24 22 18 32 30 26 22
6,000 18 16 14 12 20 18 16 14 24 20 18 16 28 26 22 20
5,000 14 14 12 10 18 16 14 12 20 18 16 14 24 20 18 16
4,000 12 10 10 8 14 12 10 10 16 14 12 10 18 16 14 12
3,000 10 8 8 6 10 10 8 8 12 10 10 8 14 12 12 10
1Refers t o the wood groups and a pplies to the skids.
Note. If bolts ar e used, they shall be the same nu mber a nd diamet er as given for lag bolts.
Table 6-18. Skid Sizes for Nailed MIL-C-3774 Crat es
Ma xim um net loa d Maxim um length of cra te Size of skids
Pounds Feet Inches
500 12 2 X 4
2,000 12 3 X 3
10,000 16 4 X 4
12,000 16 4 X 6 (on edge)
Table 6-19. Size of Side and E nd Sills
Net weight of
contents
H eigh t in feet Len gt h of cr at e (feet )
4 8 12 16
Pounds
2,500 to 4,000 Over 3
3 or un der
2 X 4
2 X 8
2 X 4
2 X 8
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 6
4,001 to 6,000 Over 33 or un der
2 X 42 X 8
2 X 62 X 6
2 X 62 X 6
2 X 62 X 6
6,001 to 8,000 Over 3
3 or un der
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 8
2 X 10
8,001 to 10,000 Over 3
3 or un der
2 X 6
2 X 6
2 X 8
2 X 10
2 X 8
2 X 10
2 X 8
2 X 10
10,001 to 12,000 Over 3
3 or un der
2 X 8
2 X 10
2 X 8
2 X 10
2 X 10
2 X 12
2 X 10
2 X 12
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 289/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-72
F a s t e n i n g t h e E n d P a n e ls
The diameter and length of th e lag bolts or bolts for fasten ing th e ends of the
crate to the top, bottom, and sides, is determined in a manner similar to that
for fasten ing the sides to th e top.
E n d P a n e l s t o t h e T o p
The size and length of fastener will depend upon t he t hickness of one or twodiagonals or fillers, the top horizontal frame member of the end, and the
width of th e crosswise fram e member to the t op.
E n d P a n e ls t o t h e B a s e
The size an d length of fasten ers for securing th e end pa nels to the base is th e
same a s above.
E n d P a n e l s t o t h e S i d e P a n e l s
The size an d length of fasteners to secur e the en d pan els to the side pan els is
as specified for fastening t he sides to the t op. For 5/8-inch fram e in th e end,
for loads not exceeding 500 pounds, use 5/16-inch diameter lag screws or
bolts.
C o r n e r S t r a p p i n g
Use corner strapping on all nailed and bolted crates carrying a net load of
3,000 pounds or over, to reinforce the corners a nd to reinforce the crat e at th e
jun ction of th e pan el (fig 6-4). Fa bricate a ll corner str aps from 1-1/4 X .035-
inch st eel banding, 12 inches in length.
Apply three straps on each of the four upper corners of the crate and secure
to the frame members with sixpenny nails, four in each leg of the strap.
Space approximately 2 inches center to cent er.
Apply single stra ps at 36-inch intervals from th e corner s in all directions an d
nail to the frame mem bers.
OP EN NAILED C RATES (MIL-C-3774)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
Nondemountable crates may be designed with either a sill or skid-type base,
depending upon th e requiremen ts for th e item being packed.
S k i d B a s e s
Skid bases for open nailed crates are constructed almost identical to the
bases used for bolted crat es (fig 6-39).
Sk i d S i ze s
The size of skids depends upon th e net load an d th e length of the crate (table6-18).
H e a d e r s
Header s are bolted to the skids with carr iage bolts. The sizes of end h eaders
an d bolt sizes are as follows:
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 290/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-73
Skid size Header size Bolt diameter
(inches) (inches) (inch)
2 X 4 2 X 4 3/8
3 X 3 3 X 3 3/8
4 X 4 4 X 4 1/2
4 X 6 4 X 4 1/2(on edge)
Set the headers or end floorboards back from the ends of the skids the
thickness of the end sheathing. When necessary, notch the header s at their
ends down flush with t he top of the floorboard s. These notches will th en
accommodate and support th e lower edge members of the sides. Extend t he
header s to the outside faces of the outer skids. The end of the base will be
similar to th e base of th e MIL-C-104 crat e (fig 6-53).
L o a d B e a r i n g F l oo r b o a r d s
See t able 6-4 for s izes.
For k l i ft Ar eaRefer to th e requiremen ts sta ted in bolted crate section.
Nonl oad Bea r i ng F l oo r boa r d s (Di agona l s)
Refer to th e requiremen ts sta ted in bolted crate section.
Si l l Base s
Sill bases are designed for loads to be transmitted to the sides by means of
inter media te sills or by th e end sills. The size of th e side sills is based u pon
the weight of the conten ts an d th e length of the crat e. However, sill spacing
shall not exceed 48 inches center to center , whether required for tr an smitting
loads or for bracing (fig 6-44).
Si de and En d S i ll s
The size of th e side sills is obta ined from table 6-19. En d sills are t he sa me
size as th e side sills. Overlap the side sills over the en d sills an d na il at th e
corners using twent ypenny coated n ails. When necessary, lamina te the sills.
I n t e r m ed i a t e S il ls
Apply inter mediate sills either crosswise or lengthwise of the crate. These
members a re always required wh en th e width of th e cra te exceeds 48 inches.
Determine the size by the length of the sill and the actual weight supported
by the sill. Refer to ta ble 6-31 to calcula te th e inter media te sill size.
Attach intermediate sills at their ends to the side or end sills by a
combina tion of nailing an d meta l han gers (strap or stirru p) (fig 6-16). Metalhan gers ar e not required for fastening n onload bear ing intermediat e sills.
B r i d g i n g
Use bridging to prevent the sills from buckling and to strengthen the base.
Bridge intermediate sills at their ends, except when positioned on their flat
faces, with 1 inch lumber of th e same depth. Nail to th e inner face.
Reinforce spans 5 feet or over (either length or width of the crate) with 2 inch
lumber th e same depth a s the sills. Position the reinforcing members a t right
angles to th e sills.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 291/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-74
Figur e 6-44. Sill base for n ailed crat e (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 292/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-75
B o t t o m S h e a t h i n g
Position bottom sheathing and nail crosswise to the base (at right angles to
th e direction of th e side sills). Spa ce th e boar ds 1/4 to 3/8 inch apar t for
dra ina ge. Use boar ds 4 to 10 inches wide. For the fork lift area (42 in. from
each end of th e base) use 2 inch lumber. Use one piece sheat hing boards an d
extend them 1/2 to 5/8 of an inch beyond the outside faces of the side and end
sills. Place at least one diagonal in the un sheat hed portion of the base.
R u b b i n g St r i p s
Position rubbing strips lengthwise to the crate under each longitudinal sill.
Rubbing strips are always 2 inches thick and not less than 4 inches wide.
The clear distance between rubbing strips should not exceed 30 inches. Cut
sling notches 8 inches long in ea ch end of the ru bbing str ip. Use filler strips
in the unsheathed area between the sil l and the rubbing strip where voids
occur.
Si des
The sides consist of upper and lower frame members, vertical struts,
horizontal braces, diagonals, and gusset plates (fig 6-45).
Des i gn o f t h e S ide P an e l s
Determine the design of the side panel from the inside length and inside
height of the crat e. For crates up t o 48 inches inside height use an X type
frame and for crates with an inside height of over 48 inches use a HK type
frame.
M em ber Se lec t i on
Determine the sizes of the upper and lower members, struts, and diagonals
from ta bles 6-20 and 6-21 with th e exception of the end stru t or corn er post.
Loads referred to in the ta ble are based on the n et weight of the cont ents a nd
th e inside dimensions of th e cra te. If th e exact size of th e cra te is not given in
the table, use the member size for the crate of the next longer length, the
neat greater width, an d next smaller h eight.
Use 1 X 4 inch lum ber for m embers a nd d iagonals a nd 2 X 4 inch lumber for
upper edge members when the height of the crate is 6 feet or less and the
load does not exceed 4,000 poun ds. Use 1 inch lum ber for th e lower edge
members, struts and diagonals, and 2 inch lumber for the upper edge
members and end str uts when the height of the crate is under 6 feet an d the
load is over 4,000 pounds. Use 2 X 4 inch lumber for t he u pper a nd lower
edge members, struts and diagonals, when the height of the crate is over 6
feet.
U p p e r , L ow e r , a n d I n t e r m e d i a t e M e m b e r s
The member s are requir ed to be a single cont inu ous piece. If splicing isrequired, splice the members according to the details shown in figure 6-54.
All splicing should be ma de un der or over a stru t wh enever possible. Splicing
1 inch ma terial is not perm itted. The size of these mem bers is based upon
the gross weight an d length of the crate. Int ermediat e members (horizonta l
braces) ar e used only for crates of the H K type.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 293/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-76
Table 6-20. Pa nel Member Selection (6,000, 8,000 and, a nd 10,000 Pounds Net Load)1
4-foot width 6-foot width 8-foot width
Length Members Net load Height (feet) Height (feet) Height (feet)
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
Feet Pounds
6 Upperframe members 6,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower framemembers
6,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 6,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 6,000 ........ ......... ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
8 Upper frame member 6,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 6,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 6,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 6,000 ........ ......... ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
10 Upper frame member 6,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 6,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 6,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 6,000 ........ ......... ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
12 Upper frame member 6,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 6,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 6,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 6,000 ........ ......... ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 x 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
16 Upper frame member 6,000 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 6,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 6,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 6,000 ........ ......... ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 x 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
6 Upper frame member 8,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 8,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 8,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 8,000 ........ ......... 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 x 6 2 x 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4
8 Upper frame member 8,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 8,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 8,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 8,000 ........ ......... 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 x 6 2 x 4 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4
10 Upper frame member 8,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 8,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 8,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 8,000 ........ ......... 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 x 6 2 x 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4
12 Upper frame member 8,000 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 8,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 8,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 8,000 ........ ......... 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 x 6 2 x 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 416 Upper frame member 8,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 8,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 8,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 8,000 ........ ......... 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 x 6 2 x 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 294/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-77
Table 6-20. Panel Member Selection (6,000, 8,000 and, and 10,000 Pounds Net Load)1
(Continued)
4-foot width 6-foot width 8-foot width
Length Members Net load Height (feet) Height (feet) Height (feet)
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
Feet Pounds
6 Upper frame members 10,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame members 10,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4
Struts 10,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 x 6 2 X 4 ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4
Diagonals 10,000 ........ ......... 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 1 X 6 ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4
8 Upper frame member 10,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 10,000 ......... ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 10,000 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Diagonals 10,000 ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 1 X 6 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 1 X 6 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4
10 Upper frame member 10,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 10,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4
Struts 10,000 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4
Diagonals 10,000 ........ 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 1 X 6 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 6 1 X 6 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 6
12 Upper frame member 10,000 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 10,000 ......... ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4
Struts 10,000 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 ........ ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4
Diagonals 10,000 ........ 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4
16 Upper frame member 10,000 2 X 8 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 8 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 8 2 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4
Lower frame member 10,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4
Struts 10,000 ........ ........ ........ 2 X 4 ........ ........ 2 X 4 2 X 4 ........ 1 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4
Diagonals 10,000 1 X 6 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 4 1 X 6 1 X 6 2 X 4 2 X 6
1All blank spaces are 1 X 4's
Note. See text for size of end struts of sides.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 295/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-78
Table 6-21. Panel-Member (Selection (12,000 Pound Net Load))1
4 foot width 6-foot width 8 foot width
Length Members Net load Height (feet) Height (feet) Height (feet)
4 6 8 4 6 8 4 6 8
Feet Pounds
6 Upper frame members 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........Lower frame members 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Struts 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Diagonals 12,000 ........ ........ (*) ........ ........ (*) ........ (*) (*)
8 Upper frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Lower frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Struts 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ (*)
Diagonals 12,000 ........ (*) 2 X 6 ........ (*) 2 X 6 ........ (*) 2 X 6
10 Upper frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Lower frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Struts 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ (*) ........ ........ 2 X 6
Diagonals 12,000 ........ 2 X 6 2 X 6 ........ 2 X 6 2 X 6 ........ 2 X 6 2 X 6
12 Upper frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Lower frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Struts 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 2 X 6 ........ 2 X 6 2 X 6
Diagonals 12,000 ........ ........ 2 X 6 ........ 2 X 6 2 X 6 ........ 2 X 6 2 X 6
16 Upper frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Lower frame member 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
Struts 12,000 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 2 X 6 ........ ........ 2 X 6
Diagonals 12,000 ........ ........ 2 X 6 ........ ........ 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6
NOTES:
1. All blank spa ces are 2/4's.
* The above sizes are for un iform loads but apply also to concentra ted loads where an aster isk is shown. When a sterisk
is shown, increa se the mem ber size to 2x6 for concentrat ed load.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 296/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-79
Figur e 6-45. Side or en d pan el for nailed crat e (MIL-C-3774).
Ver t i ca l S t r u t s and Di agona l s
All vertical struts and diagonals are continuous from the lower frame
member to the upper frame member. Cut th e diagonal and horizontal braces
to fit between th e vertical stru ts.
E n d S t r u t s o r C o r n e r P o st s
The end vertical strut or corner post of the side is not less than 2 inches in
thickness in order to provide sufficient nailing space when fastening the
ends.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 297/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-80
P a r t i a l S h e a t h i n g B o a r d s
Always apply th e sheath ing board s vertically. These board s are located a t
the corn ers an d at var ious inter vals based upon the design of th e cra te.
L u m b e r S h e a t h i n g
The shea thin g boar ds ar e of one piece mat erial, 1 inch t hick, and from 4 to 10
inches wide. All end boar ds ar at least 6 inches wide, preferably wider. Tenpercent of the boards may be 4 inches wide, but no narrow boards may be
adjacent to each other .
P l y w o o d S h e a t h i n g
Plywood strips, three or five ply material, may be substituted for lumber
sheat hing in th e sides, ends, or tops. This mater ial must be th e same width
as the lumber shea thing. For loads up t o 5,000 poun ds, use 7/16 inch
plywood of group I woods; 3/8 inch of group II woods; 5/16 inch of group III
an d IV woods. For loads over 5,000 poun ds, use 1/2 inch plywood of group I
woods; 7/16 inch of group II woods; 3/8 inch of group III and IV woods.
G u s s e t P l a t e s
Gusset plates are required for crates using 1 inch fram e members. Place th egusset plates where the diagonals, struts, or horizontal braces intersect.
Plywood gusset plates are not required when p lywood sheat hing is used. Use
12 X 12 X 1/4 inch gusset plat e for 1 X 4 inch fram e mem bers. Use 18 X 18 X
1/4 inch gusset plate for 1 X 6 inch fram e members. Secure t he gusset plat es
to frame members using sevenpenny nails and clinch (fig 6-45).
N a i li n g L u m b e r S h e a t h i n g
Nail 4 to 6 inches wide sheat hing boards of horizont al an d diagonal members
with thr ee rows of ninepenn y clinched nails. Use thr ee nails in sheath ing
boar ds 4 to 6 inches wide an d four na ils in wider board s. Nail sheath ing
boar ds over 6 inches wide to horizontal an d diagonal members with four r ows
of ninepenn y clinched nails. Nail sheat hing boards 4 to 6 inches wide to
vertical struts with two rows of ninepenny nails, spaced 6 inches apart in
each row an d clinch.
N a i li n g P ly w o o d S h e a t h i n g
Nail plywood sheath ing to 4 inch wide fram e mem bers with two rows of na ils,
spaced 6 inches apar t in each row, an d clinch. Use thr ee rows in frame
members over 4 inches wide. The na iling requirement s are ident ical to those
illust ra ted in figure 6-5 except for th e spacing.
E n d s
The end frame mem bers are identical to those of the sides. The design of the
end pa nels is also based upon th e inside length a nd inside height of th e crat e.
The pa nel design will be eith er X or HK fra ming (fig 6-45).
M em ber Se lec t i on
The frame members of the ends are the same size as the corresponding
members of the sides.
T o p P a n e ls
The top panels consist of framing members, partial sheathing boards, gusset
plat es an d joists. Tops are classified according to types (table 6-22 and fig 6-
46).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 298/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-81
N u m b e r o f P a n e l s
To determine the number of panels for N, X or HK type of top, divide the
crate length by the crate width an d use th e nearest whole number.
F r a m e Me m b e r s
All top fra me members a re 1 X 6 inch m ater ial. When th e width of the t op is
24 inches or less use 1 X 4 inch material.
G u s s e t P l a t e s
Use gusset plates at the inter section of the fram e members of th e top. They
are the same size and nailed in the same manner as those for the side and
end panels.
T o p J o is t s
Determine the size of the joists by the weight of the contents and the length
of th e joists (table 6-15). Spa ce th e joists not more th an 48 inches center to
center . Extend a ll joists from the u pper longitudina l member of one side to
the u pper longitudina l member of the other side. Fast en each joist with t hr ee
twelvepenn y coated sinkers th rough th e upper edge mem bers of the side into
the end of th e joist when th e fram ing is one inch thick. Use thr eetwent ypenny na ils per joint for 2-inch upper frame member s. This nailing is
accomplished a s th e crate is being assem bled.
F ABRICATION OF OP E N NAILED C RATES
S h e a t h i n g t o th e H o r i z o n t a l a n d D i a g on a l F r a m e M e m b e r s
Use nails for securing the sheathing to the frame members (up to and
including 2-inch thickness) long enough to permit clinching at least one-
fourth of an inch. Use thr ee rows of na ils to secur e the sheath ing. Use a
minimum of thr ee nails in each shea thing board up t o 6 inches wide. Use not
less than four na ils in wider boards.
S h e a t h i n g t o t h e Ve r t i c a l F r a m e M e m b e r s
Use two rows of nails, placed on 6-inch centers, in each row and stagger
(table 6-24 an d figure 6-46).
P l y w o o d Sh e a t h i n g t o t h e F r a m e M e m b e r s
The n ails for fastening plywood to fra ming mem bers sha ll be long enough to
pass through the plywood and the frame member and be clinched not less
tha n one-four th of an inch. Sta gger all na ils in two parallel rows in each
frame member up to 3-5/8 inches wide, and in three rows in wider frame
members. Place the na ils not less tha n one-half of an inch from th e edge of
the frame mem bers. The distance between rows of na ils is not less tha n 1
inch, and the distance between adjacent nails in any row is not to exceed 6
inches.
S h e a t h i n g t o t h e S id e F r a m e M e m b e r s o f t h e T o p
Use two rows of na ils. One r ow th ree-four th s of an in ch from th e inside edge
of the frame member, and one row three-fourths of an inch from the outside
edge. Stagger th e nails between rows with a minimu m of two clinched na ils
in each shea thing board at each longitudina l member.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 299/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-82
S h e a t h i n g t o t h e E n d F r a m e M e m b e r s o f t h e T o p
Place one row of nails in three-fourths of an inch from the inside edge of the
fra me member. Place the other row in the center of the frame member s.
Space the na ils 9 inches apa rt in each row and clinch.
S h e a t h i n g t o t h e L o n g i t u d i n a l a n d D i a g on a l M e m b e r s o f t h e T o p
Use three rows of nails, with not less than three nails in sheathing boards 6inches wide. Use not less than four na ils in wider boards.
S h e a t h i n g t o t h e S t r u t s o f t h e T o p
Two rows of nails are required not less than three-fourths inch from the
edges of both th e fra me members an d the sheat hing. Space the nails on 9-
inch center s in ea ch row and clinch.
P l y w o o d S h e a t h i n g t o t h e F r a m e M e m b e r s o f t h e T o p
If plywood is substituted for lumber, stagger the nails in two parallel rows
and space them 6 inches apart in each row. Position the nails three-fourths
inch from the edge of th e fra me members. The nails must be long enough to
penetr ate both th e members an d be clinched at least t hr ee-fourth s of an in ch.
Table 6-22. Type of Tops (MIL-C-3774)
Type framing pat tern Width of top (in .)
N........................ Up to 40
X........................ Over 40 through 60
HK....................... Over 60 through 96
Table 6-23. Na iled Crate Assem bly (MIL-C-3774)
Fasten Size type of na il Maximum spacing Notes
Par t To par t
Inches
Corner stru t of end - (1-
inch member)
Corner of strut of the
side
12d 12
Corner stru t of end - (2-
in. member)
Corner st ru t of the side 20d 12
Predril l through sheathing
of end a nd
Sheathing of side Corner st ru t of the end 8d 6 to 8 corner str ut of end.
Edge frame member of
top - (through shea thing)
Upper frame member of
sides
12d 6 cen ter to center Stagger
Edge frame member of
top
Upper frame member of
sides
8d 6 to 8 Space na ils between top
sheathing
End st ru t of top Upper fr ame member of
en d
12d 6 Stagger
Table 6-24. Nailed Per Each 1,000-Pound Gross Load; Nailing Side Shea thin g to Skids or Sills and E ndSheath ing to Headers and Sills
Nail Wood groups of skids
Type Penny size II III IV
Common 7 20 21 16
Sinker or cooler 7 23 26 19
Sinker or cooler 8 or 9 19 21 16
Sinker or cooler 10 18 19 14
Corker 8 or 9 17 19 14
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 300/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-83
Figur e 6-46. Types of top pa nels (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 301/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-84
ASSEMBLY OF OP EN NAILED CRATES (FIGS 6-4, 6-47 AN D 6-48)
N a i li n g R e q u i r e m e n t s
The na iling requirement s for fasten ing the base, sides, ends, an d top together
are foun d in tables 6-23 an d 6-24.
N a i li n g P r o c e d u r e s
When attaching the sides and ends to the skids, use one row of nails
(staggered ) for 2 inch-deep skids, two rows for 3 an d 4 inch-deep sills an d
thr ee rows for deeper members. Secur e the corn er stru ts of th e end to the
corn er stru ts of the side with t wentypenn y nails spaced 12 inches apar t. Nail
the partial sheathing of the side to the corner strut of the end using
eightp enny na ils, spaced 6 to 8 inches apa rt, an d staggered. Nail through th e
top sheath ing into the u pper edge members using twelvepenny nails spaced 6
inches apa rt, center t o cent er. Nail the top sheat hing to the top joists using
twelvepenn y nails, spaced 8 inches apa rt.
Cor ne r s t r ap pin gs (f igs 6-4 and 6-18)
SH EATHE D WOOD CR ATES, MIL-C-104 (GENE RAL)MIL-C-104 covers requirements for two types and two classes of sheathed
crates each of which may ha ve two styles of bases. The crates a re designed
for net loads not exceeding 30,000 pounds and to withstand the most severe
overseas shipping an d st orage conditions.
C LASSIFICATION
Eight crate designs are possible through the combination of the following
types, classes and styles. These crates a re a vailable in different type, classes,
an d styles. For exam ple a type I (na iled), class 2 (plywood shea th ed), Style A
(skid base) crat e ma y be used.
Type I - Na iled
Type II - Bolted
Class 1 - Lumber sh eath ed
Class 2 - Plywood sheathed
Style a - Skid base
Style b - Sill base
Wei gh t L i m i t a t i ons
The gross weight of these crates should not be more than 11,200 pounds
whenever pra ctical. This weight is recommended in order to permit han dling
with ship’s gear. However, when th is limitat ion is not possible, th e gross
weight ma y be great er tha n 11,200 poun ds but less than 20,000 poun ds for
crat es with S tyle B (sill) bases, or 30,000 pound s for cra tes wit h S tyle A (skid)bases.
Di m ens i on L i m i t a t i ons
The exterior dimensions of the crate shall not exceed the following
limitations, unless specified, for overseas shipment for which dimensions of
the Int erna tional Loading Gauge shall apply.
Length - 30 feet Width - 9 feet Heigh t - 10 feet
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 302/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-85
Figur e 6-47. Assembly of open n ailed crat es (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 303/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-86
Figur e 6-48. Assembly details for na iled cra tes (MIL-C-3774).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 304/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-87
I n t e r i o r C le a r a n c e
A clearan ce of not less th an 1 inch shall be allowed between t he item and the
closest member of the sides, ends, and t op of the crate. Fr agile items or items
within floating bag barriers shall be protected with clearances of not less
tha n 2 inches. Additiona l clearan ces may be provided for shock mount ed
items. Protru ding parts at t he top may be allowed to extend between joists;
spacing of joists m ay be a djust ed slightly to accomm odate p rojections.
MATERIAL R EQUIREMENTS
M a t e r i a l
Mat erial sha ll be as specified herein . Mat eria ls not specified sha ll be selected
by the contractor and shall be subject to all provisions of MIL-C-104
specification.
L u m b e r
Lum ber component s sha ll conform to woods comm only used.
Pl ywood
Plywood shall conform t o A-A-55057 Type A or B. Plywood (type A or B) shallcomply with PS1 a nd P S2.
N a i ls a n d S t a p l e s
Nails an d sta ples shall be steel an d sh all conform to ASTM F 1667-95.
N u t s , a n d Wa s h e r s
Nu ts sha ll conform to FF -N-836, Type I or II, style 1 or 4. Wash ers sh all
conform t o FF-W-92, Type A, Grad e I, Class A.
S t r a p p i n g
Strapping shall conform to ASTM D 3953, Type 1 or 2 as applicable. Finish
sha ll be A, B, or C.
B a r r i e r M a t e r i a l
Barrier material, for crate liners, shall conforms to PPP-B-1055, class as
appr opriate for crat e liners.
C ONSTRUCTION
N a i li n g P r o c e d u r e
Na ils used sha ll be sink ers, coolers,, cork ers, or common. Na ils sizes
specified for the fabrication of the var ious crat es ar e based on Gr oups I an d II
woods. When Groups III or IV woods are used, n ails sizes ma y be onepenn y
size smaller tha n th ose specified. The pat tern s to be used for the n ailing of
two flat pieces of lumber shall conform to the details shown in figure 6-50).Unless otherwise specified herein, the following requirements shall
determine size, placement , and quan tity of nails:
• All adjacent crate members shall be securely fastened to each other,
either directly or by means of the covering.
• All na ils t hat are not t o be clinched sha ll be cement -coated.
• Nails shall be driven through the thinner member into the thicker
member wherever possible.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 305/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-88
Figure 6-49. Ventilation end screening of sheat hed crat es.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 306/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-89
Figure 6-50. Nailing pat tern s.
• Nails for fastening plywood to framing shall be clinched at least 1/4
inch. Hea ds of na ils sha ll alwa ys be on the plywood side.
• When the flat faces of pieces of lumber are nailed together and the
combined thickness is 3 inches or less (except for top joists and
covering material), nails shall be long enough to pass through both
thicknesses an d sha ll be clinched n ot less th an 1/4 inch or more th an
3/8 inch.
• When the flat faces of pieces of lumber are nailed together and the
combined th ickness is m ore tha n 3 inches or when th e flat face of one
or more pieces is nailed to the edge or en d face of another , na ils sha ll
not be clinched. The portion of th e nail in th e thicker piece shall not
be less than 2 times the length of the nail in the thinner piece fortenpenny nails and smaller, and not less than 1-1/2 inches for
twelvepenn y nails an d larger.
• When splitting occurs with the use of diamond-point nails, the nails
shall be slightly blunted. When blunting does not prevent th e
splitting, holes slight ly smaller th an th e diameter of th e nail sha ll be
drilled for ea ch na il.
• Nails shall be driven so that neither the head nor the point projects
above th e surface of th e wood. Occasiona l over-driving will be
permitted, but nails shall not be over-driven more than one-eighth
the thickness of th e piece holding th e hea d.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 307/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-90
• Nails sha ll be positioned not less th an the thickness of the piece from
the en d an d not less tha n one-half the thickness of the p iece from th e
side edge of the lum ber whenever possible. Nails driven into the side
edge of lumber sha ll be center ed on th e side edge.
• Nails securing plywood sheathing to frame members shall be spaced
as shown in figure 6-51. Machine driven na ils having a definite head
may be u sed for securing plywood sh eath ing providing th ey meet sizerequiremen ts specified herein.
St ap l i ng
Staples may be used to fasten sheat hing to frame members. They shall not
be used for fabrication of bases, fastening of framing members to each other,
or for assem bly of crat es. Sta ples sha ll ha ve crowns of not less th an 3/8 inch
wide and shall have a wire diameter of not less than 0.062 inch (16 gage).
Straight leg staples shall be long enough to provide a minimum 1/4-inch
clinch. Divergen t point st aples sha ll not be less tha n 1 inch long. Spa cing of
staples shall be the same as for na ils. Stap les shall always be driven from
th e plywood side.
Bol t App l ica t ionHoles shall be prebored to receive carriage bolts and shall be the exact
diameter of the bolt. The lead holes for lag bolts shall be the sa me diamet er
as the sha nk, even th ough th e threaded portion ma y have a greater diameter
than the sha nk, and shall be as shown in ta ble 6-25.
Lag bolts shall be placed by being tur ned in their holes th e full length of the
bolt and sha ll not be driven in with a h amm er or by an y similar mean s. If,
for any reason, the thread in the wood is stripped when the lag bolts are
placed, the lag bolt shall be removed and placed in a new hole near the old
position. A flat wa sher sh all be used un der th e head of each lag bolt and
un der th e nut of each car riage bolt. After th e nut is placed, th e thr ead of the
carr iage bolt pr ojecting beyond t he n ut sh all be painted with a su itable metal
primer or similar m ater ial.
Vent i lat io n (figs 6-49 an d 6-51)
All crates shall be provided with ventilating holes or slots which shall be
located at each end or at ends and sides of lumber and plywood sheathed
crates, or around the perimeter of plywood and lumber sheathed crates.
These vent ilating holes or slots sha ll be locat ed immediat ely below the top
frame member and be provided with a baffle as shown in figure 6-51 when
slots are used in plywood sheathed crates or when holes are in clusters in
lumber sh eath ed crat es. Single holes drilled without baffles shall be sloped
at 45 degrees to drain outwar d. No holes or slots sha ll be cut in an y fram e
member.
Class 1 Crates
Class 1 crat es sha ll be provided with vent ilation holes, 3/4 inch in diameter .
The crate liner shall be removed from the ventilating area and all splinters
and chips shall be removed from th e holes.
En d Ven t i l a t i on
Ventilating holes shall be provided in each end in one or more clusters,
placed near the upper frame members, provided with a baffle, and spaced 2
inches on center as shown in figure 6-51. In sma ll crat es, holes may be
located so tha t diagonals or str ut s can be utilized in pa rt for cleats. In crates
over 10 feet in length , the ventilating holes shall be divided equa lly between
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 308/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-91
th e sides and en ds with a baffle pr ovided for each group of holes. The
clusters of holes shall be located as near the midpoint of the side and end as
pra ctical. The nu mber of holes shall comply with ta ble 6-26.
P e r i m e t e r Ve n t i la t i o n
As an alternate to end ventilation, the 3/4 inch ventilating holes may be
spaced evenly around the perimeter of the crate just under the top framemember an d drilled at a 45 degree angle to dra in outwa rd (fig 6-49). The
total number of holes shall comply with table 6-26.
Table 6-25. Lag bolt lead hole sizes.
Diameter of Threaded
Portion of Lag Bolt
(inch)
Diameter of Lead H ole (inch)
Groups I, II, and
III Woods
Group IV Woods
1/4 3/16 3/16
5/16 1/4 1/4
3/8 1/4 5/16
1/2 3/8 7/16
5/8 3/8 1/2
3/4 1/2 5/8
Table 6-26. Ventilat ion holes an d area requ ired.
Lumber -sheathed cra tes Plywood-sheathed
crates
Volum e of crat e
(cu. ft.)
End ventilation
minimum num ber of 3/4
inch diameter holes
required in each end(place in cluster an d use
baffle)
Perimeter ventilation
(alterna te) Total m inimum
num ber of 3/4 inch diameter
holes r equired aroundperimet er (space evenly an d
slope to drain out )
Area required in each
en d
(Use baffle and screen)
(sq. in.)
0-100 3 6 7
100-150 4 8 10
150-200 5 10 14
200-400 9 18 27
400-600 14 27 40
600-800 18 36 52
800-1,000 22 44 66
1,000-1,200 27 54 80
1,200 and over 33 66 100Note. In lar ge crates, where a lar ge ventilat ing area is requ ired, two or more slots or clust ers of holes may
be used in each panel.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 309/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-92
Class 2 Crates
Class 2 crat es shall be provided with a h orizontal slot in each end. The
ventilation slots sha ll be provided with baffles and screens as shown in figure
6-51. The required ventilating area shall comply with table 6-26. In crates
over 10 feet in length, the ventilation area shall be divided equally between
the sides and ends of the crate with baffle and screen provided for each
ventilating area. The ventilatin g area sh all be placed as near th e midpointsof the sides and en ds as pra ctical. In sma ll crates, 3/4 inch diam eter h oles
may be su bstituted for th e slots in th e proportion of two holes for each squa re
inch of required ar ea.
Class 1 Crates
Class 1 crates may be either bolted or na iled. Bolted crat es shall be so
designed that the major components of base, sides, ends, and top may be
assembled to each other with lag bolts in order tha t th e crat e can be rea dily
disassembled and, if desired, reassembled without major dama ge to the par ts.
Nailed crates are assembled with nails and straps, are not easily
demountable, and because of probable damage during disassembly, are not
generally reused. A combinat ion of top, side, an d end pan els may be
fabricated an d assembled to each other a s specified for n ailed cra tes, an d th eun it fastened t o the ba se as specified for bolted crates.
B a s e s
Bases sha ll be designed t o support the weight of the crat ed ar ticle only when
the sides and en ds are fastened in place.
Sk i d Type ( St y l e a )
Style a bases shall consist of longitudinal skids and rubbing strips, headers,
load-bearing floorboards, and flooring as shown on figures 6-52 and 6-53.
Details of constru ction sha ll be the sa me for bolted an d na iled crates.
Table 6-27. Allowable minimu m skid sizes
Maximum
netload (lb.)
Maximum
length of crate
(ft.)
Nominal size of skids (in.)
300 16 2 X 4 (fla t) 1/
1,000 12 2 X 4 (fla t) 1/
2,000 20 3 X 3 or 3 X 4 (fla t ) 2/
10,000 32 4 X 4
30,000 20 4 X 6 (on edge)
1/ For nailed cra tes only.
2/ For crat es with 2-inch-thick lower fram e member or 2-inch end struts.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 310/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-93
Figur e 6-51. Ventilat ion of lumber a nd plywood shea th ed cra tes (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 311/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-94
Figu re 6-52. Skid ba se plywood floorin g (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 312/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-95
Figur e 6-53. Skid base lu mber floorin g (MIL-C-104).
S k i d s
Any species of wood except Groups I sh all be used for skids. Skids sh all be
spaced no farther apart than 48 inches, center to center, across the width of
the base. Minimum size sha ll be as shown in table 6-27. When either the
length or net load exceed the maximum shown, the next larger skid shall be
used.
When necessary, skids may be spliced or laminated according to the details
shown in figures 6-54 and 6-55, but the use of 2 x 4 inch skids shall be limited
to such length s tha t no splicing would be required . When ever possible splices
shall be made not more th an one-third of the length of the ba se from th e ends
of the skid an d the splice locations alter na ted in adjacent skids. To prevent
splitting, all skids shall have a carriage bolt placed crosswise and 2 to 3
inches back from each end of th e skid as shown in figur e 6-55. Bolt sizes
sha ll comply with t able 6-28.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 313/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-96
Figur e 6-54. Splicing of mem bers (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 314/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-97
Figur e 6-55. Lam ina tion of skid or sill mem bers (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 315/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-98
Table 6-28. Required header sizes and carr iage bolt sizes
Skid size
(in.)
Header size
(in.)
Bolt Diameter
(in.)
2 X 4 2 X 4 1/ 3 8
3 X 3 3 X 3 3/8
3 X 4
4 X 4 4 X 4 1/2
4 X 6
1/ For n ailed cra tes only in width t o 48 inches. For wider crates or
bolted cra tes, u se 3X3.
R u b b i n g S t r i p f or S k i d s
Rubbing strips of 3-inch thick lumber, the same width as the skids, shall be
att ached to the sk ids with two staggered rows of na ils spaced 12 inches apar t
in each row The nails shall be driven th rough the ru bbing strip into the skid,
shall be of such length as to penetrate a minimum of approximately 70
percent of the skid thickness, and sh all not protrude th rough the skid. The
strips shall be beveled full depth a t an an gle of 45 degrees at sling andfork lift openin gs. Openin gs in the rubbin g str ips for fork lift-tr uck access
shall be 12 inches in length, 28 inches center to center, and positioned to
stra ddle the center of balance of the loaded crate. Sling openings not less
tha n 4 inches in length, an d preferably 8 inches, shall be provided at t he en ds
of the rubbing strip where permitted by the length of the crate and by the
location of th e forklift-tr uck access open ings. No cent er pieces of th e ru bbing
stirps shall be less tha n 16 inches in length. On crates 5 feet and less in
length, th e forklift openings sh all be omitted; end sling openings sh all not be
less tha n 6 inches long a nd sha ll serve as both forklift a nd sling openings.
H e a d e r s
Headers shall be placed at each end of the base and shall be bolted to each
skid with one carr iage bolt. Sizes of header s an d bolts sh all be as shown in
ta ble 6-28.
For k l i ft Mem b er s
The forklift members shall consist of the header and two members of equal
size, spaced 20 to 40 inches (on center) from each end of the skids and bolted
as shown in figur e 6-52. Where th e form of the item to be cra ted ma kes it
impractical to use these members, or when crat es are sh ort or nar row, 2 inch-
thick lumber shall be used in the 48-inch end areas as shown in figure 6-52.
When 2-inch lumber is used in the forklift area and intermediate skids are
required because of the width of the base, the 2-inch forklift members shall
be bolted to the intermediat e skids. Forklift mem bers sha ll be notched or set
back a specified for head ers. If loaded conta iner s cent er of balan ce is oth ertha n t he center of the base, the spa ce for forklift entr y shall be positioned so
tha t t he center of balance is center ed in between forklift openings.
Headers shall be of a single piece and not built up to two or more pieces to
meet th e dimension requirem ents. Header s shall be placed atop the plywood
when p lywood floorin g is used. Hea der s sha ll be placed a dista nce back from
the en ds of th e skids equal to the th ickness of the en d sheat hing. The ends of
the headers shall be notched for bases floored with lumber; ends of headers
for plywood floored bases s ha ll be set back from th e outside ed ges of th e outer
skids (see figur es 6-52 and 6-53). The n otched and set back distan ces sha ll be
equal to th e th ickness of the lower fram e members of th e skids.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 316/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-99
L o a d -b e a r i n g F l o or b o a r d s
Load-bearing floorboards shall be placed where the concentrated loads of the
cont ent s occur. The cross section sha ll be deter min ed from ta ble 6-29. The
forklift members and any 1 or 2 inch flooring may be considered as load-
bearing within limits of th eir assigned values. The ends of load-bearing
floorboar ds sha ll be notched or set back from t he edge of the base in the samema nn er as described for header s (see figur es 6-52 an d 6-53). Load-bearin g
floorboards 4 inches wide shall be bolted to each skid with one carriage bolt,
and load-bearing floorboards over 4 inches wide shall be bolted to each skid
with two carriage bolts, and the intermediate skid where one is required.
Bolt diameters shall be the same as specified for corresponding skid sizes.
L u m b e r F l oo r i n g
Lumber floorboards shall be neither less than 1 inch thick not less than 4
inches wide, an d shall be placed at right an gles to the skids. Boards sh all be
spaced 1/4 inch a part for dr ainage an d th e ends placed flush with th e outside
face of the skids. When a large area of the base is floored with 2-inch thick
lumber, the use of filler strips 2 inches wide shall be used along each side
over he thinner flooring to equal the thickness of the 2 inch flooring as shownin figure 6-53. The filler strips sha ll be nailed to the floorin g with t wo
staggered rows of sixpenn y nails spaced 10 inches apart . Nailing of
floorboar ds to skids sh all be as sh own on figur e 6-50.
P l y w o o d F l oo r i n g
Plywood 3/8 inch in thickness, may be used in place of 1 inch lumber flooring
as shown in figures 6-52 and 6-53, but not as load-bearing floorboards.
Plywood flooring shall be laid flush with the outer edges of the skids and with
the face grain perpen dicular to the skid length. Header s and load-bearing
floorboards shall be placed on top of the plywood and bolted to the skids after
th e plywood has been n ailed in place. Plywood flooring sha ll be nailed to
each skid with t wo rows of sevenpenn y na ils, staggered a nd spaced 6 inches
apa rt in ea ch row. A spa cing of 1/4 inch sha ll be allowed between s heet s of
plywood for dra inage. When 1/3 to 1/2 the ar ea of th e base is floored with 2
inch boards, the plywood flooring shall be used only between these areas.
Filler strips shall be nailed over the plywood as shown on figure 6-51 with
na iling a s specified.
D r a i n a g e
A drainage hole, 1/2 inch in diamet er, sha ll be drilled next to each hea der or
load-bearing member in each outer edge of plywood floored section of the
base. Holes should not be covered with conten ts ar e placed on the ba se of the
crate.
Si l l Type (Sty le b )Style b bases sha ll be const ru cted as shown in figure 6-56. The load
contained on Style b bases shall always be transmitted to the side sills by
mean s of int ermediate sills or by th e ar ticle itself.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 317/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-100
Si de and En d S i ll s
The size of th e side sills sha ll be determ ined from table 6-30. En d sills sha ll
be of th e same size as side sills. The side sills sha ll overlap t he en d sills as
shown in figur e 6-56. Sills sha ll be lam inat ed as shown in figur e 6-55, when
necessary.
I n t e r m e d i a t e S i lls a n d L o a d -b e a r i n g H e a d e r sInt erm ediat e sills sha ll be app lied crosswise of th e base. The size of
interm ediate sills shall be determined from table 6-31. The weight u sed to
determine the size of an intermediate sill shall be that amount of the load
actually supported by that sill. Load-bearing headers sha ll be of the sa me
size as intermediate sills. Load-bearing headers an d intermediat e sills will
not be required when a ll of th e load is supported by the side sills. Load-
bearing headers shall be attached at their ends to intermediate sills and
intermediate sills shall be attached at their ends to side sills by a
combina tion of nailing an d th e use of metal str ap h an gers fabricated from 1-
1/4 inches wide by 0.035 inch t hick na il-on str app ing as sh own in figur e 6-57.
B r i d g i n g
Intermediate sills shall be bridged at the ends with 1-inch lumber and atintervals along the spa n n ot exceeding 4 feet with 2-inch lum ber of th e same
depth as th e inter mediate sills (see figure 6-56).
Table 6-29. Allowable load in lb per in ch of floorboar d width gr oups I an d II woods
Distance
between skids
(in.)
Thickness of load-bearing floorboard (in.)
3/4 1-1/2 2-2/2 3-1/2 5-1/2 7-1/2
12 57 287 600 1170 2900 5000
18 38 191 400 780 1930 335024 29 143 300 590 1400 2500
30 23 115 240 470 1160 2000
36 19 95 200 390 960 1680
42 16 82 170 335 830 1440
48 14 71 150 290 720 1250
54 12 63 030 260 645 1120
60 11 57 120 234 580 1000
66 10 52 110 212 525 910
72 9 48 100 195 480 840
84 8 41 85 140 360 710
96 8 35 75 167 300 630
108 7 34 66 130 233 560
120 7 30 60 117 210 500
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 318/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-101
Table 6-30. Nomin al size of side sills (in.)*
Gross weight of
cra te (lb.) Length of cra te (ft .)
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
to 2,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6
2,001 - 4,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 8
4,001 - 6,000 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 8 2 X 8
6,001 - 8,000 .......... 2 X 4 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 8
8,001 - 10,000 .......... 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 10
10,001 - 12,000 .......... 2 X 6 2 X 6 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 10 2 X 10
12,001 - 14,000 .......... 2 X 6 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 10 2 X 10 2 X 10
14,001 - 16,000 .......... 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 10 2 X 10 2 X 10 2 X 8
16,001 - 18,000 .......... 2 X 8 2 X 8 2 X 10 2 X 10 2 X 10 2-2 X 8 2-2 X 8
18,001 - 20,000 .......... 2 X 8 2 X 10 2 X 10 2 X 10 2-2 X 8 2-2 X 8 2-2 X 8
* The above sizes ar e for cra tes with a h eight of 3 feet or less. For h eights of over 3 feet, increase 2X4 sizes
to 2X6; increa se 2X6 to 2X8; increa se 2X8 to 2X10; an d increa se 2- 2X8 to 2- 2X10.
Table 6-31 Allowable load for intermediate sills (in lb per inch of sill width)
Length of
sill (ft)
Sill depth (inch)
Groups I a nd II woods
1-1/2 2-1/2 3-1/2 5-1/2 7-1/2 9-1/2 11-1/2
4 71 150 290 720 1,250 2,000 3,000
5 57 120 234 580 1,000 1,640 2,400
6 48 100 195 480 840 1,320 2,020
7 41 85 167 399 710 1,170 1,730
8 35 75 140 350 630 1,020 1,500
9 34 66 130 300 560 910 1,350
10 30 60 117 270 500 820 1,200
B o t t o m S h e a t h i n g
Style b bases sha ll be sheat hed on th e bottom with lumber securely nailed to
the bottom surface of the sills at right angles to the direction of the side sills.
Boards shall be 4 to 10 inches wide and of not less than 1 inch material for
spans of less than 30 inches between longitudinal members and of not less
tha n 2-inch mater ial for spans of 30 inches or more. Bottom sheat hing shall
be flush with the outside face of all side and end sills and be spaced 1/4 inch
apar t fro drain age. One-inch board s shall be nailed with eightpen ny na ils, 2
inch boards with twelvepenny nails, and nailing shall be as shown in figure
6-50.
R u b b i n g st r i p s
Style b bases shall have rubbing strips 3 inch thick material, the width of
which sha ll not be less than 4 inches. The rubbing strips shall always be
applied lengthwise of the base and positioned under each longitudinal
member. When require, interm ediate rubbing strips of th e same size are
located so that the clear distance between rubbing strips does not exceed 36
inches.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 319/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-102
Figure 6-56. Sill bases (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 320/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-103
Figur e 6-57. Atta ching inter media te sills to side sills (MIL-C-104).
TopsTops sha ll be double sheat hed an d sha ll be
• na rrow, width s thr ough 54 inches;
• interm ediate, widths over 54 inches th rough 60 inches;
• wide, over 60 th rough 120 inches in width .
Plywood sheathing 1/4 inch thick, shall be attached to the lumber framing
with its face grain pa ra llel with th e width of the t op and its edges flush with
th e out side edges of th e fra min g. All joint s of th e plywood sheat hin g shall be
ma de over joists or oth er fram e member s. Roofing felt, or polyethylene film
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 321/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-104
not less tha n 4 m ils th ick, sha ll be applied over th e plywood with a m inimum
4-inch overlap at joints. A nonh ard ening caulk or mast ic sha ll be applied in
the overlap area. Top sheat hing board s not less tha n 4 inches wide shall be
placed over the plywood sheathing and waterproof barrier and shall extend
beyond the outer edges of the top framing by an amount equal to the
thickness of side and end pa nel sheat hing less 1/8 inch. Head ers joining the
joists t ogether shall be 1 inch th ick by th e depth of the joists for int ermediateand wide tops.
N a r r o w T o p s
Nar row tops shall be fra med on 2 X 4 inch mem bers as sh own in figur e 6-58.
Top shea thing board sh all be applied para llel to th e width of the t op and sha ll
be of single pieces. At plywood joints on t he in side of th e top, 2 X 3 inch
pieces shall be used as shown in figure 6-58.
I n t e r m e d i a t e To p s
Intermediate tops shall be framed on 2-inch joists placed flat and headers 1
inch by the t hickness of th e joists. The top sheat hing boards sha ll be placed
para llel to the length of th e top (see figur e 6-59). When th e crat e length is
over 10 feet, end joint s will be permitt ed in top shea th ing boar d. All joint sshall be made over joists, two joints sh all be adjacent to each other , and not
more th an one-th ird of th e joints sh all be made over a ny one joist.
Wide Top s
Wide tops shall be constructed similar to intermediate tops except that the
wide tops shall be framed in joists and headers placed on edge as shown in
figur e 6-60.
F a b r i ca t i o n N a i li n g
Fa brication na iling of tops sha ll be as shown in figur es 6-61 and 6-62. All
plywood mem bers sha ll be na iled on at least th ree edges.
Al t er n a t e P l yw o o d S h e a t h e d T o p
For tops not exceeding 96 inches wide, single sheathing of 1/2-inch thick
plywood ma y be used in lieu of th e double sheat hed t op. Face grain of the
plywood sha ll be para llel with th e width of th e top. When joists do not
coincide with plywood joints, a joint cover of 1 X 4 inch lumber shall be used
on the inside of th e top. Pr ior to securing th e plywood to th e joists or joint
covers, caulking of a nonhardening type shall be applied at three places at
each joint - between the plywood panels at their butt joint, and between the
plywood and joint cover or joist on either side of th e butt joint. The cau lk
shall be applied as a continuous bead a nd m ay be either performed or a pplied
with a gun.
Si des
Nu m ber an d Type of Pane l s
Sides sha ll be constr ucted as sh own in figures 6-63, 6-64, an d 6-65. In crat es
with style b bases, the sheathing of sides and ends shall reach below the
lower horizonta l fram e member a distan ce equal to th e depth of the sills plus
floor th ickn ess, less 1/8 inch. The type of side panels sha ll var y with t he
inside cra te height a s specified in table 6-32. The nu mber of pan els for each
full length side shall be computed by dividing the inside crate length by the
inside height, and using the nearest whole number.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 322/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-105
Mem ber Select ion
The sizes of the upper and lower frame members, struts, and diagonals shall
be determ ined from tables 6-34 to 6-43 except a s other wise specified. Loads
referred to in the tables are the net loads and the dimensions are the inside
measu remen ts of th e crat e. The member sizes shall be based on Group II
woods. If th e exact size of th e cra te is not given in th e tables, mem ber sizes
for the crate of the next greater length and width, and the next smallerheight sha ll be used.
Upper and Lower Fr am e Member s
Except where vertical joist supports are required, upper frame members for
crat es over 54 inches wide shall always be 2 inches t hick and a m inimum of 2
X 4 inches in size. Splicing of upp er or lower fram e member s sha ll be done
over or un der a stru t an d sha ll be as shown in figure 6-64.
Ver t i ca l S t r u t s
Vertical strut s shall be continuous from th e lower frame m ember t o the upp er
frame member and the diagonal and horizontal braces shall be cut in
between. The end stru ts sha ll be as shown in ta ble 6-33.
Hor i zonta l braces
Horizontal braces for Types B and C panels (figures 6-64 and 6-65) shall be
the same thickness as th e struts and 4 inches wide.
Diagonals
Size of diagonals shall be as specified in the member selection tables 6-34 to
6-43 an d sha ll be located as sh own in figures 6-63, 6-64 an d 6-65. When
frame members are 1 inch thick, gusset plates shall be cut from 1/4-inch
plywood and sha ll be 12 inches minimum , in th e shortest dimension. The
corners sh all coincide with th e center line of th e diagona ls as sh own in figur e
6-65.
J o i st S up por t s
The upper frame members shall serve as supports for tops. When cra tes are
6 feet wide and 12 feet high or 8 feet wide and 10 feet high (tables 6-34 to 6-
43) and when the struts are 1 inch thick, vertical joist supports shall be
provided as shown in figur e 6-66. These sh all consist of 2 by 4 inch mem bers
placed on and nailed to the frame members of the side and extending under
each in ter ior joist to th e floor.
Table 6-32. Side panel types - class 1 crat es
Inside height of crate
(in.)
Type of pa nel Refer en ce figu re
No.
Over 24 to 60 A 13
Over 60 to 108 B 14
Over 108 to 144 C 15
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 323/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-106
Table 6-33. E nd strut requirement s
Net load (lb.)
Nominal size of end stru ts
Bolted cra te (in .) Nailed cra te (in .)
1,000 or under 2 X 4 2 X 4
Over 1,000 but under 5,000 3 X 3 2 X 4
5,000 and over 4 X 4 2 X 4
Figur e 6-58. Na rr ow tops (width s up t o 54 inches) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 324/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-107
Figur e 6-59. Int erm ediat e tops (width s over 54 inches to 60 inches) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 325/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-108
Figur e 6-60. Wide tops (width s over 60 inches t o 120 inches) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 326/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-109
Figur e 6-61. Fa brication of tops (na rr ow an d inter media te) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 327/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-110
Figur e 6-62. Fa brication of tops (wide t op) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 328/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-111
Figur e 6-63. Sides type A pan el (lum ber) (height s over 24 inches to 60 inches)
(MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 329/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-112
L iners
A crate liner shall be applied between the sheathing and frame members of
sides and ends of all lumber-sheathed crates and shall conform to the crate
liners specified in PPP -B-1055. The pap er sha ll be placed horizont ally as
un rolled, with a 4-inch minimu m sh ingle lap a pplied for pr oper draina ge and
shall cover th e entire framed ar ea. Vertical joints, when r equire, shall have a
minimum 4-inch lap and shall be located at a vertical member.
S h e a t h i n g
Sheathing for the side and end panels of crates shall be applied vertically,
shall extend t o the bottom of the skids one side panels and to the tops of skids
on the end panels of skid type base crat es. Sheat hing shall extend to the
bottom of sills on sill-type base crates. Sheat hing sh all be eith er t ongue-an d-
groove or squ ar e and sh all be 1 inch th ick. At least one side of all boar ds
shall be dressed and t he dressed side placed out ward. No boar ds shall be less
tha n 4 inches in width. En d boards sh all be not less tha n 6 inches wide and
preferably wider. No more th an 10 percent of the boards (not more tha n one
out of 10 board s) shall be of the minimu m width , nor sha ll the n arr ow boards
be adjacent t o each other . Short boards, not less tha n 2 feet in length, may be
used un der th e following conditions (figure 6-67):
• boards sh all be cut at r ight angles,
• the center of a short sheathing board shall be at the approximate
center of the width of a diagonal an d sh all have full coverage by t he
diagona l, or sha ll be joined on a horizont al mem ber,
• at least every second board and all end boards shall be full length,
and
• nailing shall be as shown in figure 6-67.
F a b r i ca t i o n N a i li n g
Nails securing sheathing to framing up to and including 2 inch thickness
shall be driven th rough th e sheat hing an d shall be of such length as t o permit
a minimum of 1/4-inch clinch on the fra ming. For nailing sheath ing to
horizontal and diagonal frame members 4 to 6 inches wide, three rows of
nails shall be used. There sha ll be a minimum of th ree na ils per crossing in
sheathing boards 4 to 6 inches wide and a minimum of four nails in wider
boar ds (figure 6-67). For na iling sheat hing to horizonta l and diagonal frame
mem bers over 6 inches wide, four rows of na ils sha ll be used. Ther e shall be
a m inimum of four na ils per crossing in sh eath ing boards 4 to 8 inches wide
an d a minimu m of five nails in wider boards (figure 6-65). For na iling
sheat hing to strut s 4 to 6 inches wide, two rows of nails shall be used. The
nails shall be spaced approximat ely 8 inches apa rt in each row and st aggered.
For wider stru ts use three rows of na ils. The nails shall be spaced
appr oximately 12 apart an d staggered. Nail spacing at vertical butt joints
shall be as shown in figure 6-67. Gusset plates sha ll be secur ed withsevenpenny nails driven through and clinched on the sheath ing. Nailing
sha ll be shown in figure 6-66. Vertical joist supp orts sha ll be secur ed with
two tenpenny nails at each horizontal frame member crossing and one
tenpen ny nails at each diagona l crossing as shown in figur e 6-66. Where
vertical joists coincide with struts, there shall be two rows of nails on 30 inch
centers.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 330/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-113
Figure 6-64. Sides type B panel (lumber) (heights over 60 inches to 108 inches)
(MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 331/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-114
Figure 6-65. Sides type C panel (lumber) (heights over 108 inches to 144 inches)
(MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 332/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-115
L a g S c r e w R e i n fo r c in g S t r a p fo r B o l t e d C r a t e s
Reinforcing strap shall be used on side and end panels of all demountable
crat es as shown in figures 6-68, 6-69 and 6-70. Galvanized steel stra p,
punched or drilled, 1-1/4 inches by 0.035 inch of 3/4 inch lag screws, and 2
inches by 0.050 inch for 1/2 and 5/8 inch lag screws, shall be nailed to the
inner face of the sheathing between the lower edge of the bottom frame
member an d the bottom of the shea thing as shown in figur e 6-68. The stra pshall be located to coincide with t he center of the skid or header an d sha ll be
nailed on maximum 2 inch centers to the sheathing with clout or similar
na ils. Na ils sha ll be clinched at least 3/8 inch.
E n d s
En d types a nd size of members for en ds in crat es over 30 inches wide sha ll be
determined in a manner similar to the sides, except that in all cases the
thickness of the upper and lower frame members shall be the same as the
stru ts specified in tables 6-34 to 6-43. The member arr angemen t shall
conform, to the details shown in figure 6-81. For crates less tha n 30 inches
wide, single diagonals only are r equired an d all fram e members sh all be 1 by
4 inches in size as sh own in figure 6-81.
ASSEMBLY (CLASS 1 CRATES )
B OLTED CRATE
G e n e r a l
Type II (bolted) crat es sha ll be assembled with la g bolts. Lead h oles sha ll be
used for la g bolts.
F a s t e n i n g S id e s t o B a s e
The sides sha ll be secur ed to th e skids with lag bolts. For 3 X 4 inch skids,
3/8 inch diameter by 3-inch long lag bolts shall be used; for 4 X 4 inch skids,
1/2 inch diamet er by 4 inch long lag bolts sha ll be used. The nu mber of lag
bolts sh all be as specified in ta ble 6-44. One-ha lf th e num ber sha ll be used on
each side an d the spa cing shall be uniform along th e skid. Maximum spa cing
shall be 16 inches for 3/8-inch lag bolts and 20 inches for 1/2 inch lag bolts.
Lead holes shall be drilled in line with and through the center of the metal
reinforcing strap, as well as through the sheathing and into the skid.
Assembly and placement details sha ll be as shown on figur es 6-71 an d 6-72.
Fa s t en i n g S ides t o Top
Lag bolts, 3/8 inch diameter by 3-1/2 inches long, shall be used to fasten the
sides to the t op. These lag bolts shall be placed so tha t th ere is one in th e end
of each joist at th e appr oxima te center (figur e 6-73). For tops without joists,
lag bolts shall be placed at the a pproximat e center of the side frame m ember
of the t op and spaced no great er th an 24 inches apar t.
F a s t e n i n g E n d s t o T o p , S id e s , a n d B a s e
Lag bolts for fastening ends to tops shall be 3/8 inch in diameter by 2-1/2
inches long. Lag bolts for fasten ing ends to sides sha ll be 3/8 inch diam eter
by 3-1/2 inches long. Placement a nd oth er assem bly details sha ll be as sh own
in figure 6-71 an d 6-73. Lag bolts for fasten ing ends to base sha ll be the
sam e size. Locat ion an d spacing shall be as sh own in figures 6-71 and 6-72.
Lead holes shall be centered on the r einforcing stra p.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 333/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-116
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 334/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-117
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 335/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-118
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 336/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-119
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 337/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-120
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 338/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-121
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 339/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-122
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 340/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-123
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 341/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-124
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 342/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-125
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 343/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-126
Figur e 6-66. J oist supp orts an d guss ets (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 344/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-127
Figur e 6-67. Fa brication nailing of lum ber shea th ing (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 345/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-128
Figur e 6-68. Lag screw r einforcing str ap for bolted crat es (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 346/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-129
Table 6-44. Lag bolts re quired t o ass emble sides to base of bolted cra tes u sing lag bolt reinforcing
str ap (skids to be Group I I, III, or IV woods).*
Weight of crate and
cont ent s (lb.)
Size of lag bolt
3/8 x 3-inch (3x3 or
3x4 inch skids)
1/2 x 4-inch (4 x 4 inch
skids)
5/8 x 4-inch (4 x 6 inch
skids)
2,000 6 6 6
3,000 10 6 6
4,000 14 8 6
6,000 20 12 8
8,000 ... 16 10
10,000 ... 18 12
12,000 ... 22 14
14,000 ... 26 16
16,000 ... 30 18
18,000 ... 32 22
20,000 ... 36 24
24,000 ... ... 28
28,000 ... ... 3232,000 ... ... 36
36,000 ... ... 42
40,000 ... ... 46
* Use one-half the nu mber on ea ch side:
Maximu m sp acing - 3/8 x 3 - 16 inches on cent er
1/2 x 4 - 20 inches on center
5/8 x 4 - 20 inches on center
Minimum nu mber - 3 per side, 2 per end
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 347/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-130
Figure 6-69. En d pan els over 30 inches wide lum ber shea th ed crates (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 348/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-131
Figure 6-70. Narr ow end pa nels (lum ber sh eath ed crates) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 349/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-132
Figur e 6-71. Assembly of bolted crat e (lum ber or pylwood sh eat hed ) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 350/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-133
Figu re 6-72. Assem bly of bolted cra te (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 351/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-134
F igur e 6-73. Assem bly of bolted crat e (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 352/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-135
NAILED CRATE
G e n e r a l
Type I crat es shall be assembled with na ils and m etal stra ps. Genera l rules for
crat e assembly sha ll be as shown in table 6-45 an d figures 6-74 and 6-75.
F a s t e n i n g S i d e s a n d E n d s t o Ba s eSides and ends sh all be na iled to the skids an d hea ders with cement -coated na ils
(figure 6-74). Two rows of nails sha ll be used for 2 by 4 inch, 3 by 3 inch, 3 by 4
inch a nd 4 by 4 inch skids or h eaders a nd for style b bases. The nu mber of nails
required for t he perimet er of th e crate sha ll be as sh own in table 6-46, and ba sed
on the gross load. Nail spacing sha ll be no greater t ha n 6 inches in each row, an d
not less than t wo nails shall be used in each sheat hing board .
F a s t e n i n g E n d s t o S id e s a n d S id e s t o E n d s
The end panels shall be nailed to the side panels with twentypenny cement-
coated nails spaced 12 inches apa rt as sh own in table 6-45 and figure 6-74. The
nails shall pass through the sheathing and the edge struts of the ends into the
edge of the corner str ut s of th e sides. Predr illing sha ll be used for these na ils to
prevent splitting a nd t he bit for dr illing sh all be approximat ely 75 percent of th ediameter of the n ail sha nk. The edge sheat hing board s of the side panels shall be
nailed to the edge str uts of th e ends with eight penn y cement -coated na ils spaced
6 to 8 inches a par t (figure 6-74).
F a s t e n i n g T o p t o Si d e s a n d E n d s
Tops shall be fastened to sides and ends with corner reinforcing straps and
tensioned straps with anchor plates as shown in figure 6-75. Corn er stra ps shall
be of such length as to allow nailing into framing of sides and ends.
S t r a p p i n g
Stra pping sha ll be used a s shown in figure 6-75 on a ll bolted crates with net loads
over 3,000 lb and for all nailed crat es. Tensioned meta l strapping an d corn er
straps shall conform to ASTM D 3953, Type 1 or 3, Zinc-Coated finish, Grade 2,
not less tha n 3/4 inch wide by 0.028 inch thick. Corn er stra pping shall be
prepun ched or drilled. In addition, on crat es with style b bases, corner
reinforcing str aps sh all be applied at t he bottom corn ers a s shown in figure 6-76.
Na ils shall be 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inch galvan ized roofing na ils. A minim um of th ree
nails shall be used for each strap leg and strapping shall be located so that
nailing is in a frame member .
C LASS 2 C RATES
Class 2 crates shall be Type I or II as specified and shall have the same use
limitat ions as described for lumber-sheath ed.
B a s e s The constr uction of bases sh all conform t o bases of Class 1 crat es.
Tops
The constr uction of tops for Clas s 2 cra tes is ident ical to th at described for Class 1
tops.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 353/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-136
Sides ( see f igur es 6-77 thr u 6-79)
N u m b e r a n d T y p e o f P a n e l s
Types of panels for va rious heights a nd corresponding illust rat ive figure nu mber
shall be as shown in table 6-47.
Type B panels include a h orizontal bra ce an d Type C pan els have two horizonta lbraces. These shall be located so as to equally divide the space between u pper
and lower fram e members. For all types of side panels, strut s shall be spaced 24
inches on centers except at one or both ends so that 48 inch-wide plywood can be
utilized with a minimu m of waste. Sides shall be constru cted as shown in figures
6-80 to 6-81. In crates with Style b bases, the sh eath ing of sides an d ends sh all
reach below the horizontal frame member a distance equal to the depths of the
sills.
Table 6-45. Assembly Na iling of Na iled Crat e (MIL-C-104)1
Fasten Nail size an spacing
Notes
Par t To par t Lumber shea thing Plywood shea thing
Sheathing of
side and end
Skid and end header
(skid base)
Eightpenny minimum
size
3-inch maximum spacing
Sevenpenny minimum
size 3-inch ma ximum
spacing.
See ta ble 6-40 for n umber
of nails required
End a nd side sills
(sill base )
Two rows up t o 4 x 4
skids
Three rows for 4 x 6 skid
(on edge)
Three rows for all sill
bases
Two rows up t o 4 x 4
skids
Three rows for 4 x 6 s kid
(on e dge)
Three rows for all sill
bases
Predr ill holes for t wenty
penny na ils, 75 percent of
shank diameter
Corner str ut
of end
Corner st ru t of s ide Twen t ypenny-p red r ill 12-
inch spacing
Twelvepenny 12 inch
spacing
Sheathing of
side
Cor n er s tr ut of e nd E igh tp en n y m in im u m
size 6- to 8-inch s pacing
Sevenpenny minimum
size 6- to 8-inch s pacing
1For fastening top to sides and ends use str apping.
Table 6-46. Num ber of nails per ea ch 1,000 pound gross load (nailing sheath ing to base around per imeter of nailed crate).*
Type of na il Size of na il
Wood grou p of skid
II III IV
Sinker or cooler 7d
8d or 9d
10d
12d
23
19
18
15
26
21
19
16
19
16
14
12
Corker 7d
8d or 9d
10d
12d
24
17
15
15
26
19
16
16
19
14
12
12*Nails shall not be less tha n 2 per board (lumber sh eath ing) and sh all neither be more tha n 3 inches apart n ot less than 1-1/2
inches apar t .
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 354/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-137
M em ber Se lec t i on
The sizes of the upper and lower frame members and struts shall be determined
from tables 6-34 to 6-43, except as other wise specified. Loads referr ed to in th e
tables shall be the inside measu remen ts of the crat e. The member sizes sha ll be
based on Groups II woods. If the exact size of the cra te is not given in th e ta bles,
member sizes for the crate of the nest greater length and width, and smaller
height, shall be used.
U p p e r a n d L ow e r F r a m e M e m b e r s
The requirements for upper and lower frame members shall comply with those
described for lum ber-sheath ed side pan els in an d listed by size in tables 6-34 to 6-
43.
Ver t i ca l S t r u t s
The requirements for struts shall comply with those described for lumber-
sheat her side panels a nd listed by sizes in table 6-34 to 6-43.
Di agona l s
No diagona ls are required for Class 2 crates.
J o is t S u p p o r t s
The joist supports shall comply with those described for class 1 side panels.
L i n e r s
No liners ar e required for Class 2 crates.
S h e a t h i n g
Plywood sheathing shall be 3/8 inch thick for net loads up to 10,000 lb, and 1/2
inch of net loads over 10,000 lb, and shall be applied so that the face grain is
vertical. Fa ce gra in may be horizonta l for cra tes 4 feet or less in height . Vertical
joints in plywood sheathing sha ll be made over th e center of a str ut . Horizont al
joints in plywood sheat hing shall not be permitt ed in Type C panels. All
horizonta l joints sh all be made over t he center of a h orizonta l brace.
F a b r i ca t i o n N a i li n g
Nailing plywood sheath ing to frame m embers of various widths shall be as shown
in figure 6-80. For all fabrication, na ils sha ll be driven th rough th e plywood an d
clinched a minimu m of 1/4 inch. Sta ples may be used to fast en plywood
sheathing to framing members.
Lag-s c r ew R e i n f o r c i ng S t r ap f o r Bo l t ed Cr a t e s
Reinforcing straps shall be used on side and end panels of all bolted crates as
shown in figures 6-77 to 6-79.
E n d s Panel types and sizes of members for ends shall be determined in a manner
similar to the sides, except th at in all cases, the t hickness of the upper and lower
frame members shall be the same as the struts specified in table 6-34 to 6-43.
The member arr an gement sha ll be as shown in figur e 6-81. Fabr ication shall be
as sh own on figur e 6-80.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 355/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-138
Figur e 6-74. Assembly of na iled cra te, lumber or plywood sheat hin g (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 356/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-139
Figure 6-75. Corner and top strapping, (lumber or plywood sheathing (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 357/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-140
Figur e 6-76. Sill base str app ing (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 358/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-141
ASSEMBLY (C LASS 2 C RATES)
Bo l t ed -c r a t e As s em bl y
The assembly of plywood-sheathed nailed crates shall comply with the details
specified for Class 1 crates except for size of nails which shall be as specified in
ta ble 6-45.
R e i n fo r c i n g S t r a p s
The reinforcing straps shall be as specified for Class 1 crates.
T o l e r a n c e s
A tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch is allowable on the overall length and width
of individua l complet ed crat e pan els. Out -of-squa re deviation of individua l
panels shall be not more than 3/16 inch (3/8 inch difference in diagonals).
W o r k m a n s h i p
Crate panels shall be clean and free of slivers and protruding fastener points.
Crate panels shall be square and free of cracks, splits, or other damage which
would pr event easy a nd correct a ssembly and adversely affect t he per forma nce of
assembled cra tes.
F i r e R et a r d a n t
When specified, all lumber an d plywood shall be tr eated in a ccorda nce with MIL-
L-19140. Special markings sha ll be used to indicate the lum ber an d plywood
have been treated with non-leachable fire retardant materials.
CR ATE, SLOTTE D ANGLE, STEE L OR ALUMINUM (ASTM D6255)
DESIGN R EQUIREMENTS
The slotted a ngle cra te is designed t o permit ra pid fabricat ion of a crate t hr ough
assembly of slotted angle steel or aluminum with nuts, bolts, and lockwashers
and disassembly and reu se of component mat erial.
Class i f i ca t ion
The following classificat ions h ave been est ablished for th is cra te.
T y p e s
Type I - cra te, slotted an gle, steel or a luminu m, open.
Type II - crate, slotted angle, steel or aluminum, full enclosed or sheathed with
solid ma terial.
Styles
Style A - crate, slotted, a ngle, steel, or aluminu m, without skids or ru bbing str ips.
Style B - crate, slotted angle, steel, with skid blocks or skids with rubbing strips
and provisions for forklift truck handling.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 359/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-142
Figur e 6-77. Sides - type A pan el (plywood) (height s over 24 inches t o 60 inches) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 360/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-143
Figur e 6-78. Sides - type B pa nel (plywood) (heights over 60 in ches to 96 inches) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 361/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-144
Figur e 6-79. Sides - type C pa nel (plywood) (heights over 96 in ches to 144 inches) (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 362/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-145
Figur e 6-80. Fa brication na iling plywood shea th ing (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 363/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-146
Figur e 6-81. En d pan els plywood shea th ing cra tes (MIL-C-104).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 364/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-147
G r a d e s
Grade 1 - Crate for domestic and oversea shipments intended for outside or
indeterminate storage.
Grade 2 - Crate for domestic and oversea shipments intended for inside or
protected storage.
Us e
These crates a re su itable for:
ο Pa cking lightweight, bulky items, including airframe component s.
ο Oversea and domestic air an d surface shipment s.
ο Packing items requiring rigid blocking and bracing assemblies, such as
support panels, cushioned saddles, solid and slat cradles, specially
designed brackets, yoke pan el assemblies, etc.
ο Adaptat ion of suspen sion systems or sh ock m ounts for shock a bsorption.
ο Packing repairable, returnable items where a desirable light-weight,
reusable container is specified.
M at e r i a l s
S l o t t ed me t a l an g l es
This material comes in either st eel or aluminum . There ar e thr ee different sizes
of slotted metal angles, variations being based on the size of the flanges and the
thickness of the m etal used in fabricating th e angles. The slotted a ngle mater ial
sha ll conform to Specificat ion MIL-S-21041, as a guide for t he selection of slotted
an gle based on size of cra te a nd weigh t of load.
Steel slotted angle material for Grade 1 crates shall have a zinc protective
coating. Steel slotted angle material for Gra de 2 crat es shall be trea ted with a
primer or a phosphatized base and a baked-on synthetic enamel of high grade
comm ercial qua lity. The color sha ll be DOD Gra y, un less oth erwise specified, in
accordance with F ederal Stan dard 595.
The h ole pat ter n for th e 1-1/2-inch by 1-1/2-inch a ngle sh all be of such a design a s
to provide one line of holes or slots in each flan ge. The 1-1/2-inch by 2-1/4-inch
angle shall have one line of holes or slots in the narrow flange and two lines of
holes or slots in the wide flange. The 1-1/2-inch by 3-inch an gle shall ha ve one
line of holes or slots in the narrow flange and three lines of holes or slots in the
wide flan ge. The hole patter n sha ll be of continua l repetition an d shall be
visua lly indexed at 3-inch inter vals.
Occasiona lly, it may be necessar y to splice pieces. When th is occurs, either th e
lap or butt splice may be m ade.
Bo l t s an d N u t s
Bolts and nuts used in joining slotted angle frame members of the crate shall
conform t o Specification MIL-S-21041, except t ha t n ut s sh all conform t o MS51922
with t he exception tha t 5/16 nut s sha ll be .551 to .564 inches a cross th e flats.
Bolts and nuts used in attaching sheathing and wood members of the crate (and
any wood blocking and bracing therein) shall be fastened to a slotted angle
material with not less than two bolts on each panel edge, with additional bolts
being employed, if necessary, to mainta in th e interval between bolts at not m ore
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 365/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-148
tha n 12 inches. When sheat hing is att ached to the top by na iling to a wooden
strip wh ich is secured t o the slotted a ngle portion of the cra te by bolts spaced not
less than 24 inches apart, the nailing strip will be at least 1 by 2 inches and the
nails will be at least sixpenny in size, spaced not more than 5 inches apa rt.
Vent i l a t ion
Crates completely enclosed or sheathed with plywood or paper-overlaid veneerwill be ventilat ed. Ventilat ion will be accomplished by mea ns of holes or slots in
the ends or ends and sides around th e perimeter of the crat e. They shall be place
immediately below the tip fra me members of the ends an d sides. When crates
are over 10 feet in length, the ventilation holes or slots will be divided equally
between both ends and both sides and located as near the midpoint of the sides
and ends as pr acticable. Place baffles or sh ields inside the crat e to deflect t he
water blowing into the crate, thus preventing the water from coming in contact
with th e conten ts. The following ta ble establishes th e area of the h oles or slots
required t o provide ventilation for gradu ated ra nge of volume for a crate (table 6-
47).
P a n e l s fo r M a r k i n g O p e n C r a t e s
To provide sufficient area for placing r equired ma rkings on open crates, a pan elof 1/4-inch p lywood will be bolted to t he crat e.
Spec i fi c Cr a t e s
Type 1 , S ty le A
This crate is of simple construction, usually consisting of one panel in each
section, requiring minimum bracing and used for light, bulky, and small items
not exceeding 200 pounds. Eith er the slotted angle aluminu m or the smaller
slotted an gle steel is usu ally str ong enough of th is crat e. Un less specifically
excepted, it is limited t o maximum dimensions of 80 inches in width .
Table 6-47. Vent ilation requir ement s
Area of holes or slots for ventilation
Volum e of crat e in
cubic feet
Cumulative area in squar e
inches of ventilation holes
or slots
0-106............ 7
106-141.......... 10
141-176.......... 13
176-388.......... 27
388-600.......... 33
600-777.......... 54
777-989.......... 66
989-1236......... 81
1236-and over .... 101
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 366/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-149
Si des
The met al an gle used for t he side r ails (horizont al mem bers) should be positioned
with th e wider flange par allel to the plan e or su rface of the side. The bottom rail
should be positioned so that the wide flange points up, while the top rail should
have th e wide flange point ing down. Vert ical members (stru ts) should be equal
in length and be positioned so that they are within horizontal rails when the
crat e is assembled. Vertical members should not exceed 48 inches in length a nddistance between vertical members (struts and intermediate struts) shall not
exceed 1-1/3 the height of the crat e. Where greater side strength or special
mounting provisions are required along the side of the crate, extra vertical
members may be added with the wide flange against the wide flange of the
horizont al members (side rails) of th e crate. Additiona l or int ermediat e vertical
members sh ould be added wh ere th e length-to-height r atio dictat es.
E n d s
The crat e ends sha ll consist of slotted an gle crossmembers joining t he t wo crat e
sides. Additiona l crossmember s joining th e two crat e sides. Additional
crossmembers or intermediate struts to provide mounting or attaching points
within th e cra te for specific items may be added to crat e end as r equired. The
distance between the lateral members (crossmembers and intermediate struts)shall not exceed 1/1/3 the width of the crate.
B a s e
The base is not a separate panel which is bolted to the sides and ends, but is
formed by the addition, as necessary, of crossmembers, (loadbearing members,
floorin g, an d br aces).
Fl oo r i ng
The crat e will be sufficient ly floored to protect the conta ined item . The flooring
need not be continuous throughout the base; however, it will be placed in such
locations that will provide protection to the areas of the contained item that are
subject to damage by forklift trucks or other material handling equipment.
Plywood flooring (except loadbearing floorboards) will be a minimum of 1/4 inch
thick for crates through 12 inches wide 3/8, inch for crates over 12 inches wide
and through 24 inches wide, and 3/4 inch thick for crates over 24 inches wide.
Flooring will be cut to fit snugly in place and securely bolted to the lower side
ra ils of th e cra te. Ea ch piece of floorin g shall be bolted in place with a m inimu m
of two bolts in each lower side ra il. The dista nce between bolts used to secur e the
floorin g sha ll not exceed 12 inches. When t he flooring is 3/8 inch or less in
thickness it is reinforced on top by an additional strip of wood 1 X 2, through
which th e holddown bolt will pas s. Bolts u sed of securin g floorboards sh all not be
less than 5/16 inch in diam eter.
L o a d b e a r i n g M e m b e r s
Loadbearing members shall be located within the crate base to carry the load of the contained item, except when suspensions systems are used or when the item
is attached to the side structur e. The size of wood members sh all be determ ined
from table 6-48. The size of steel mem bers sh all be deter min ed from ta ble 6-49.
C r o s s m e m b e r s
Crossmembers will be of the same strength and quality as the slotted angle used
of the side rails and st rut s. Crossmembers in the base will be spaced not more
tha n 24 inches apar t. If loadbear ing members are employed, they should be
included in t he considerat ions for base crossmembers.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 367/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-150
B r a c e s
The base should be reinforced with braces of the same slotted angle as the
crossmembers. These braces should be used in unfloored areas of the crat e.
When one-third of the base is floored with 12-inch or wider floor panels, braces
are n ot r equired.
C r a t e T o pThe top, like the base, is not a separate panel which is attached to the sides and
ends. It is formed by crossmembers, crossties members, and braces inst alled
between the two cra te sides. The crossmembers ar e placed perpendicular to the
sides and ar e placed at each point where a vertical stru t is bolted t o the side rail,
being bolted as sh own in figur e 6-82. Altern ate m ethods of att aching members
are shown in figur e 6-83. The crosstie members ar e slotted angle members
placed at intermediate points between, and parallel to, crossmembers with the
distance between t he crossmembers an d crossties not exceeding 1-1/3 th e width of
the crate. Braces of the sam e type slotted an gle ma terial as that u sed for
crossmembers are placed diagonally in t he r ectan gle form ed by the side rails an d
the crossmembers an d crossties. The ends will be cut a t an a ngle to give
maximum contact of the flanges being bolted t ogether .
Figure 6-82. Joining of Intermediate members (ASTM D6255).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 368/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-151
Table 6-48. Allowable Load per in ch of floorboard widt h for Group s II, III a nd IV woods
Distance between
outside skids
Actual thickness of floorboards (inches)
3/4 1-1/2 2-1/2 3-1/2
(inches) (pounds) (pounds) (pounds) (pounds)
12 48 220 574 1,095
18 32 147 382 731
24 24 110 287 548
30 19 88 229 438
36 16 73 192 365
42 14 63 164 313
46 12 55 144 274
59 9 44 115 219
72 8 37 96 182
If groups III or IV woods are u sed, the a bove allowable loads m ay be increases 20 per cent.
Table 6-49. Load capa city of slotted an gle steel beams. 1/
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 2.6mm - 38mm X 76mm
(12 GUAGE (0.014") - 1-1/2" x 3")
(Length of beam in cm (feet) - load in kg (pounds))
60(2) 90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6)
Recommended
load
659(1450) 445(980) 336(740) 227(500) 150(350)
Recommended
load
2045(4500) 1409(3100) 954(2100) 545(1200) 454(1000)
Recommended
load
4727(10400) 3409(7500) 2409(5300) 1977(4350) 1590(3500)
Recommended
load
704(1550) 454(1000) 345(760) 263(580) 222(490)
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 1.9mm - 38mm X 57mm
(14 GUAGE (0.074") - 2-1/2" x 2-1/4")
(Length of beam in cm (feet) - load in k g (poun ds))
60(2) 90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6)
Recommended
load
572(1260) 386(850) 277(610) 181(400) 90(200)
Recommendedload 1090(2400) 772(1700) 522(1150) 372(820) 284(625)
Recommended
load
2359(5190) 1522(3350) 1227(2700) 954(2100) 772(1700)
Recommended
load
363(800) 231(510) 177(390) 136(300) 113(250)
1/ Table 49 is usable for slotted angle steel with flange dimensions that are plus or minus 3mm (1/8 inch) the
flange sizes sta ted.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 369/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-152
Table 6-49a. Load capa city of slotted an gle steel beams. 1/
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 1.9mm - 38mm X 38mm
(14 GUAGE (0.074") - 1-1/2" x 1-1/2")
(Length of beam in cm (feet) - load in k g (poun ds))
90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6)
Recommended load 225(495) 122(270) 86(190) 65(145)
Recommended load 268(590) 179(395) 134(295) 86(190)
Recommended load 606(1335) 470(1035) 313(690) 245(540)
1/ Table 49a is usable for slotted angle steel with flange dimensions that are plus or minus 3mm (1/8 inch) the
flange sizes sta ted.
Table 6-49b. Load capa city of slotted an gle steel beams. 1/
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 1.9mm - 38mm X 38mm
(14 GUAGE (0.074") - 1-1/2" x 1-1/2")
(Length of colum n in cm (feet) - load in kg (pounds))
90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6)
Recommended load 672(1480) 536(1180) 427(940) 336(740)
Recommended load 1740(3830) 1579(3475) 1350(2970) 1125(2475)
Recommended load 1772(3900) 1620(3565) 1440(3170) 1190(2620)
1/ Table 49b is usable for slotted angle steel with flange dimensions that are plus or minus 3mm (1/8 inch) the
flange sizes sta ted.
Table 6-49c. Load capa city of slotte d angle steel colum ns. 1/(Contin ued)
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 1.9mm - 38mm X 57mm
(14 GUAGE (0.074") - 1-1/2" x 2-1/4")
(Length of beam in cm (feet) - load in k g (poun ds))
90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6) 210(7)
Recommended load 1131(2490) 840(1850) 695(1530) 581(1280) 427(940)
Recommended load 2500(5500) 2272(5000) 1977(4350) 1727(3800) 1522(3350)
Recommended load 2545(5600) 2450(5390) 2272(5000) 2036(4480) 1186(4150)
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 370/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-153
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 2.6mm - 38mm X 76mm
(12 GUAGE (0.104") - 1-1/2" x 3")
(Length of beam in cm (feet) - load in k g (poun ds))
90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6) 210(7)
Recommended load 1568(3450) 1304(2870) 1072(2360) 759(1670) 522(1150)
Recommended load 3618(7960) 3200(7040) 2836(6240) 2454(5400) 2045(4500)
Recommended load 4045(8900) 3609(7940) 3045 (6700) 2636(5800) 2113(4650)
1/ Table 6-49c is usable for slotted angle steel with flange dimensions that are plus or minus 3mm (1/8 inch)
the flange sizes stated.
TABLE 6-49d. Load capa city of slotted angle alum inum configura tions. 1/
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 2.6mm - 38mm X 57mm
(13 GUAGE (0.089") - 1-1/2" x 2-1/4")
(Length of beam in cm (feet) - load in k g (poun ds))
90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6)
Recommended load 204(450) 159(350) 118(260) 81(180)
Recommended load 431(950) 272(600) 2/181(400) 2/159(350)
Recommended load 100(2200) 727(1600) 563(1240) 427(940)
SLOTTED ANGLE STE EL - 1.9mm - 38mm X 57mm
(13 GUAGE (0.089") - 1-1/2" x 2-1/4")
(Length of beam in cm (feet) - load in k g (poun ds))
90(3) 120(4) 150(5) 180(6) 210(7)
Recommended load 454(1000) 409(900) 318(700) 272(600)
Recommended load 1409(3100) 1240(2730) 1104(2430) 986(2170) 795(1750)
Recommended load 1590(3500) 1409(3100) 1227(2700) 1090(2400) 954(2100)
1/ Table 6-49d is usable for slotted angle aluminum with flange dimensions that are plus or minus 3mm (1/8
inch) the flan ge sizes sta ted.
2/ On spa ns of th is length, cross bracing gives a better str uctur e, higher r ecommended load.
Us e o f Cor n e r Br aces fo r L i gh t Cr a t e s
Where crates a re inten ded for n et loads not in excess of 200 poun ds an d limited to
the maximum dimensions of 60 inches in length, 30 inches in width, and 48
inches in height, corner bracing may be utilized in lieu of full diagonal bracing.
Type I I , S ty le A Cra te
This crat e is ident ical to the Type I, Style A crat e, except t ha t it is fully closed or
sheathed using plywood, paper-overlaid veneer, or fiberboard, as specified above.
Sheat hing should be added.
Type I , S t y le B Cr a t e
The Style B (skidded) crate is intended for use in crating larger and/or heavier
items, employing a skidded base; braced sides, ends and top; loadbearing and
att aching members; an d provisions for truck and cargo sling han dling. Only
slotted angle steel (not aluminum) will be used in fabricating this style crate.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 371/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-154
Unless specific approval is given for a larger size crat e, th e ma ximum dimensions
ar e 360 inches in heigh t (see figur e 6-86 for a typical cra te).
Si des
Crate sides consist of horizontal members (side rails), vertical members (struts),
and full diagonal bra ces.
Figur e 6-83. Alter na te meth ods of at ta ching members (ASTM D6255).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 372/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-155
Figur e 6-84. Meth ods of shea th ing or covering cra tes (ASTM D6255).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 373/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-156
I n t e r m e d i a t e H o r i zo n t a l Me m b e r s
When a crate exceeds 48 inches in height, and intermediate horizontal member
should be placed between the top and bottom side rails and should run the full
length of th e crat e. In addition to the requ irement for additional inter mediate
horizontal members because of the height, extra strength requirements may
deman d additional horizontal members.
I n t e r m e d i a t e Ve r t i c a l St r u t s
Intermediate struts shall be evenly and systematically spaced throughout the
length of the crat e side between the en d or corner vertical strut s. The spacing of
intermediate struts for crates with sides not provided with an intermediate
horizonta l member sha ll be determ ined by the height an d length . The distance
between the vertical struts sh all not exceed 1-1/4 the h eight of th e cra te. The
spacing of intermediate struts for crates with sides provided with intermediate
horizonta l member shall be determined by the sa me meth od as above, except th at
the height shall be considered as the distance between the two adjacent
horizonta l members.
E n d s
The ends are not assembled panels which are bolted to the sides but are formedby the upper and lower crossmembers, intermediate crossmembers, and braces
which join the sides. In addition to the upper a nd lower crossmembers,
intermediate crossmembers are required when the height of the crate exceeds 48
inches or when the h eight of the cra te exceeds 1-1/4 width of th e cra te. The
maximum interval between any two adjacent crossmembers is 48 inches.
Intermediate crossmembers shall be installed with the wider flange of the angle
in a vertical position. Int ermediat e vertical members ma y be added to the ends
for special mount ings and special blocking an d bracing. Bra cing of th e ends may
be done either with slotted an gle materials equal t o that used for side bra cing or
with flat st eel stra pping (as above). When a cra te is in excess of 60 inches long,
18 inches wide, or subject to being pushed by forklifts or other equipment, it
should be equipped with push plates to protect the crate and contents (figure 6-
87). The push plat es are positioned across the lower par t of the en d pan el with
the lower par t of plate flush with top of th e skids an d sha ll be bolted to th e corn er
stru ts with a m inimum of two bolts in each end of the plat e. Group II, III, or IV
wood or plywood may be used for crates having a gross weight up to 500 pounds.
They shall be Group III or IV wood when the gross weight exceeds 500 pounds.
When push plates are made from wood they shall be a minimum 1-5/8 inches
thick and 7-1/2 inches wide. Plywood push plates sh all be a minimum 3/4 inch
thick and 12 inches wide.
Top
The top, like the ends, if formed by joining the two sides together, through the
use of crossmember s, crossties, an d braces of slotted angle mat eria l. The end
crossmembers serve also as the top crossmembers of th e ends. Additiona lcrossmembers a re bolted as sh own in figur e 6-84, the wider flan ge being vertical
and t he na rrow flange at he top. Figure 6-84 and 6-85 show methods which ma y
be used in sheat hing or covering cra tes. When the distance between the
crossmembers is greater than 1-1/4 times the width of the crate, intermediate
crossmembers (crossties) should be used, pacing them equidistant between the
crossmembers. Sufficient crossties should be used to maint ain a n inter val not in
excess of 1-1/4 times the width of the crate between any two adjacent
crossmembers and/or crossties. Fu ll diagonal braces should be used in th e
interval between a djacent crossmembers an d/or crossties. Tension bra ces of steel
stra pping may be u sed in lieu of slotted an gle material.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 374/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-157
B a s e
Crossmembers and crossties tying the side panels together at the bottom of the
crat e plus r equired loadbearing mem bers, forklift h an dling members, skid blocks,
full skids, headers, and flooring comprise the base.
Sk i d B l ocks an d Fu l l Sk i dsWhen th e load cont ained by th e cra te exceeds 500 poun ds, full skids run ning th e
length of the crate sha ll be used. Fu ll length skids may be used for lesser
contained weights, but ar e not mandat ory. Fu ll length skids shall be fabricated
from minimu m n omina l 2 X 4 inch lumber for n et loads up t o 1,000 poun ds an d 4
X 4 inch lumber for net loads exceeding 1,000 poun ds. They sha ll be provided
with 2 X 4 inch ru bbing strips. When full length skids ar e not used, 2 X 4 inch
skid blocks 16 inches long ar e used. Skids an d skid blocks shall be beveled 45
degrees on each end. Skid blocks located a t th e ends of the crat e shall be set 2-
1/2 to 4 inches from each crat e end to permit th e use of slings. Rubbin g strips on
full length skids shall be set back an equal distance from each crate end.
Intermediate skid blocks shall be placed in locations that will support loads
tra nsferred to th e lower side rails by loadbear ing members an d strut s. The
center of balance of the loaded crate shall be the determining factor in locatinginterm ediate skid blocks to provide the forklift entr y. The maximu m distan ce
between sk id blocks sha ll not exceed 48 inches. Skid blocks, skids, an d ru bbing
strips shall be bolted to the lower side rails with minimum 5/16 inch diameter
bolts.
L o a d b e a r i n g M e m b e r s
To provide direct support to loads resting on the base, loadbearing members are
used. These members may be either wood, plywood, metal, or a combination of
wood and m etal ar e placed at right a ngles to the length of the crate, being bolted
to both of the lower side members. See tables 6-47 and 6-48 for tabulat ed dat a t o
be used in determ ining the size, etc., of mat erial for loadbearing m embers.
Fl oo r i ng
Flooring may be lumber or plywood and need not be continuous throughout the
base; however, it shall be placed in such locations as will provide protection to the
areas of the contained item that is subject to damage by forklift trucks or other
mat erial han dling equipment . The flooring should be cut t o fit snu gly in place
and should be bolted to both of the lower side each end of each piece of flooring
with a min imum of two bolts to a ra il. Plywood floorin g shall have a m inimu m
th ickn ess of 3/8 inch for cra tes t hr ough 12 inches wide, 1/2 inch for cra tes 12 t o 24
inches wide, an d 3/4 inch for crat es over 24 inches wide. Lum ber floorin g shall
have a minimum thickness of 3/4 inch.
F o r k l i ft H a n d l i n g M e m b e r s
Forklift handling members of lumber of metal, the side of which is based onstrength required as applied to the data shown in tables 6-47 and 6-48, will be
placed 24 inches from each end of the crate and at right angles to the length,
being bolted to both of th e lower side ra ils. When t he crat e is in excess of 36
inches in width, forklift handling members should be placed at the location
provided for side entry of forklifts and, if the crate is over 8 feet in length, they
should be in addition to th ose placed 24 inches form the end. Loadbear ing
members, if suitably located, may serve as forklift h an dling members.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 375/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-158
Type I I , S t y le B Cr a t e
Except for th e sheath ing, this crat e is fabricated in th e same ma nn er as t he Type
I, Style B cra te. The sheat hing is accomplished in th e man ner described above.
C r o s s t ie s a n d H e a d e r s
When the distance between loadbearing members exceeds the width of the crate
and the flooring is less than 3/4 inch thick, intermediate crossties should beinst alled, being bolted t o both of th e flanges of both lower side ra ils (figur e 6-82).
Figur e 6-85. Meth ods of at ta ching sheat hin g (ASTM D6255).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 376/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AF J P AM 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
6-159
Figur e 6-86. Type I, style B crat e (ASTM D6255).
Figure 6-87. Method of atta ching pu sh plat es, skids, an d hea ders (ASTM D6255).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 377/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-1
Chapter 7
CONSOLIDATION AND UNITIZATION FOR
SHIPMENT AND USE OF CARGO CONTAINERS
CONSOLIDATION AND UNITIZATION FOR SHIP MENTConsolidation is the bringing together of like or unlike items for shipment.
Once the items are assembled, they must be kept together as a single unit
un til th ey reach a break-bulk point or the ultimate consignee. Unitization
results in economy through reduction in handling and documentation, one
un it tak ing the place of several un its.
ADVANTAGES
Figur e 7-1 gives advan ta ges of un itizing loads wh ich a re a follows:
• Eliminates laborious and expensive manual handling of individualitems.
• Reduces dama ge to items by eliminating ma nu al han dling.
• Perm its savings in h and ling costs.
• Reduces personnel accidents by eliminating manual handling and
lifting.
• Simplifies inventorying and reduces inaccuracies.
• Utilizes storage heights n ot possible by man ua l means.
Figur e 7-1. Advant ages of cargo un itization.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 378/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-2
• Reduces pilferage because of unitization of items by steel straps and
other bonding methods.
• Perm its faster movement of supplies an d equipment . Reduces
mar king requirement s on individua l containers.
METHODS OF UNITIZATION
The t wo basic form s of un itization a re--
• Palletization . Palletization is the placing of a number of packages on
a low, portable platform constructed of wood, metal, or fiberboard, or
a combina tion of these m ater ials.
• Conta inerization. Conta inerization is th e placment of a nu mber of
packages into a intermodal container, which not only reduces the
number of units and documentation, but provides additional
protection to th e packages.
P ALLETIZING UN IT LO ADS (MIL-HD BK-774)MIL-HDBK-774 gives the palletized unit load requirements for Department
of Defense mat erial using th e pallets discussed in Chapter 3. The stan dar d
establishes loading patterns for various types of commodities, listing the
patt ern for stacking containers a nd t he met hods of unitizing to be used.
TYPE S OF P ALLETS
• NN -P-71. Types I (2-way entr y), an d III of NN -P-71 are int end ed for
use in stora ge oper at ions. Types IV an d V of NN -P-71 ar e for use in
storage and shipment worldwide regardless of mode of
transportation.
• MIL-P-15011. Type I (4-way entr y) of MIL-P-15011 should be used
for the palletization of military supplies whenever 4-way entry is
required in the storage and distribution system and in support of
NATO forces. Nonst an da rd 4-way ent ry 40- by 48-inch pallets sh ould
be reused for the storage and shipment of materiel to CONUScons ignee s. (fig 7-2)
Li m i t a t i ons
The following size and weight limitations apply to the complete load
including th e pallet an d th e bonding and storage aids (fig 7-3).
Unless otherwise specified by the procuring activity, load units prepared for
shipment in MILVANs and SEAVANs shall not exceed 40 inches in length.
All other loads shall not exceed 43 inches in length, which permits an
overhang of 1 1/2 inches at each end of the pallet.
Unless otherwise specified by the procuring activity, load units prepared for
shipment in MILVANs and SEAVANs shall not exceed 48 inches in width.All other loads shall not exceed 52 inches in width, which permits an
overhang of 2 inches at each side of the pallet.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 379/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-3
Figur e 7-2. Types of pallets .
Load units prepared for shipment in containerization media such as
SEAVANs, etc. shall not exceed 43 inches in height and in MILVANs, 41
inches. All other loads sha ll not exceed 54 inches in height , except as
permitted for loads of compressed gases in cylinders.
The ma ximum gross weight of a load sha ll not exceed 3,000 poun ds per single
pallet load for domestic, intercoastal, or overseas shipments.
TYPE S OF P ALLETIZED LOADS
Types of supplies that can be palletized are--
• Items wh ich a re identical and identified by the sam e stock nu mber.
• Items uneconomical or impractical to pack.
• Rugged and dur able items th at r equire minimum physical protection.
• Boxed items un iform in size requiring a dditiona l protection.
• Items that are moved in large quantities.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 380/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-4
Figur e 7-3. Pa llet size limitat ions.
LOAD ARRANGEMENT
The arrangement of items to the pallet must provide a rigid, compact, uniform
size load, strongly secured to prevent shifting, and capable of resisting impact,
vibration, racking, and compression encountered during handling, storage, and
shipment . Basic principles for a rr an ging and securing loads to pallets are--
• Items should be inter locked, nested, or bun dled whenever possible.
• The load patt ern should eliminat e or reduce void space.• Wood separators or spacers are placed in voids between rows and layers
of irregular-shaped item s to insure a firm a nd st able load.
The top surface of the loading pallet must be level, or made level for stacking
pur poses. This can be accomplish ed by app lying a wood top fra me or leveling
boar ds with a sup porting fra mework.
Loads difficult to stabilize or which are compressible and not sufficiently firm to
support superimposed loads, will be reinforced with a su pporting framework.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 381/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-5
Boxed items are arranged on the pallet so that the markings on individual
cont ain ers do not show on two adja cent sides of th e palletized load. This will
provide clear ar eas for u nit load ma rking.
The load is secured to th e pallet, using ASTM D 3950 requirement s for a pplying
lengthwise an d crosswise stra pping. Horizont al stra pping is the width and
th ickn ess size as th e tie-down str ap size. The gross weight of th e load, divided by
the total number of tie-down straps to be used, determines the weight whichmust be born e by each strap . Non-metallic stra pping is not auth orized for the
str ap ping of palletized loads of wooden , plywood, or m eta l shipping conta iner s.
Strapping is applied in a manner that will eliminate any possibility of slippage.
Wood cleats, tie blocks, or br aces are u sed un der st ra ps when necessary to insure
stability or to bridge un supported spa ns.
L o a d i n g
To properly load a pallet, consideration must be given to the type of item, its
weight, and destin at ion. It is recommend ed tha t MIL-HDBK-774 be followed
when loadin g 40- by 48-inch pallets . Figur e 7-4 shows one type of palletized load
illustrated in the sta ndard.
Figur e 7-4. Exa mples of palletized load.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 382/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-6
SHR INK FILM AND STRE TCH FILM P ALLETIZATION
SH R I N K F ILM
Plastic films such as polyethylene are now being used in accordance with the
requ iremen ts of MIL-HDBK-774 as a mean s of bonding palletized loads. The
plastic film is stretched in the manufacturing process; this is called "orientation".
The str etched film sh rinks wh en subjected to a cont rolled flow of heat air. The
heated air is supplied by the use of a heat shrink cannon or a shrink film
chamber (fig 7-5). The heat causes the film to shrink, conforming to the contour of
the load. For th is reason, it can be used for pa llet loads containing a variety of
items which form irregular shap ed configura tions tha t could n ot be palletized by
conventiona l means. The tightly adhering film immobilizes the contents a nd
provides stability. It also provides some weath er protection for exposed car go.
Shrink film palletization provides a reduction of labor and material cost by the
use of automatic equipment and eliminates the problem of damage caused by
stra pping containers t oo tight.
S t r e t c h F i lm
Stretch films can be used as a means of bonding palletized loads for many
commodities shipped in th e Contin enta l United Sta tes (CONUS) or when sh ippedcont ain erized. The str etch films ar e polyethylene (PE ), polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
or ethyl vinyl acetat e (EVA). The film is wrapped a round t he load in mu ltiple
layers from t he t op of the bottom deckboard to not less tha n t wo inches above the
height of the load. The required th ickness of the wra p is determined by the kind
of film being used a nd t he weight of the load. Additional bonding str ength can be
provided by placing a sh eet of weath er-resistant fiberboar d, the sa me size as t he
top dimensions of the load, on top of the load prior to stretch wrapping.
CONSOLIDATION CONTAINER S (GENER AL)Consolidation containers may be constructed of fiberboard, paper-overlaid veneer,
plywood, or lumber . They ma y be demounta ble or non-demoun table. They are
usua lly secured t o a pallet base or a skid base for handling purposes. Some
containers are intended to be expendable, while others are intended to bereusa ble. Some consolidation conta iners ar e designed t o be compatible with th e
requiremen ts of th e 463L Materials H an dling System of the Air F orce. Others a re
designed t o be used as insert s in tr ansport ers such a s MILVANs, SEAVANs, or to
be used as separa te shipping containers.
BOXES , SH IP P ING INSE RT CON SOLIDATION, MIL-B-43666 (GENE RAL)
DE S C R I P T I O N
These boxes are constructed of wood cleated plywood, plywood wirebound,
double-wall fiberboar d, or tr iple-wall fiberboar d. They are moun ted on pallet-
type bases for ea se of ha ndling. Their constr uction va ries widely depending u pon
the ma terials used. The sizes are such tha t they are modular in concept.
G e n e r a l U se
These boxes are intended for use as inserts in cargo transporters such as
MILVANs, SEAVANs, or as sepa ra te exter ior cont aine rs. They ar e to be used for
Level A or B shipments.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 383/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-7
Class i f i ca t ion
Ther e are th ree types of consolidat ion inser t cont ain ers. Type I is of wood cleated
plywood const ru ction and has two styles depending u pon th e style of pallet base
used . Type II is of plywood wireboun d constr uction of th e pallet base. Type III is
const ru cted of double-wall or tr iple-wall fiberboar d. Type III has four st yles
depending u pon th e const ruction featu res of the box.
M a r k i n g The marking for shipment will be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
Figure 7-5. Shr ink film cha mber u sed for heat shrin king film ar ound palletized load.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 384/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-8
TYPE I , WOOD CLEATED PLYWOOD CONSOLIDATION INSERT BOX
(MIL-B-43666)
DE S C R I P T I O N
These containers are wood cleated plywood boxes similar in construction to the
PP P-B-601 cleat ed plywood boxes. They are pr ovided with a four-way entr y
pallet base (fig 7-6).
USE
These boxes may carry Type 1, 2, or 3 loads not exceeding a density of 37 pounds
per cubic foot. Loads exceeding this den sity requir e additiona l box reinforcemen t.
They may be used for domestic an d overseas shipment s. They are inten ded for
consolidation of like and u nlike stock nu mbered items. These cont ainers m ay be
used as inserts in SEAVANs or MILVANs
S IZE AND WE I G H T L IMITATIONS
There are 15 sizes available in the wood cleated plywood consolidation insert
conta iners. The outside length ran ges from 29 to 86 inches. The outside width
ra nges from 31 3/4 to 45 inches. The outside h eight ra nges from 20 to 52 1/2
inches. For MILVAN shipments, the overall height sha ll be not more th an 41inches. The weight capacity for the various sizes ran ges from 1,000 to 2,600
pounds. Table I and II of MIL-B-43666 specifies the length, width, height, and
weight combinat ions for each of the 15 s izes.
C LOSURE
Nail the t op to the top cleats of the sides and ends u sing sixpenn y cement -coated,
chemically etched, or m echa nically deformed na ils spaced thr ee inches a par t. Do
not drive the na ils into the en d gra in of th e vertical cleats.
ST R A P P I N G R EQUIREMENTS
Each vertical corner shall be reinforced with two 8-inch pieces of 3/4-inch flat
steel strapping 0.023 inches thick. The stra pping will be att ached to the cleats
with pneumatically driven galvanized staples 7/16 inches long or with 1-inch longnails pneum atically driven. As an a lterna te, 3/4-inch wide flat, na il-on st ra pping,
0.025 or 0.028-inch in thicknes s, ma y be used . This stra pping, which is
perforat ed with holes spaced 1/2 to 1 3/4 inches apa rt, m ay be secured with lar ge
headed galvanized roofing nails, zinc coated steel roofing nails, or 1-inch
mechanically driven nails. Each stra p will be secur ed with four fastener s. Two
will be driven into th e th rough cleat on th e end of th e box and t wo will be driven
into th e filler cleat on th e side of th e box.
• On boxes 41 inches high, strapping will be placed 13 to 26 inches from the
top of the box.
• One boxes 20 inches high, strapping will be placed 2 and 15 inches from
th e top of th e box.
• On box sizes 5 and 10, which are 43 inches wide, an a dditiona l stra p sh all
be placed to the center of each corner formed by the bottom and end
panels.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 385/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-9
Figu re 7-6. Type I, Style I, wood cleat ed plywood cons olidat ion box (MIL-B-43666).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 386/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-10
Figur e 7-7. Type II, plywood wireboun d consolidat ion boxes (MIL-B-43666).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 387/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-11
TYP E II , P LYWOOD WIREBOUND CONSOLIDATION INSERT BOX
(MIL-B-43666)
DE S C R I P T I O N
The body and top of these boxes are constructed of plywood panels bound together with
bindin g wires. The bottom pan el is fabr icat ed from 1/2-inch plywood which is secur ed to
eith er a skid bas e or a pa llet base (fig 7-7).
USE
The use of Type II plywood wirebound boxes is the same as Type I wood cleated
plywood boxes.
C LASSIFICATION
There are two styles of boxes available under the Type II classification:
• Style 1 box utilizes a double-wing, block-type p allet base (fig 7-6).
• Style 2 box utilizes a skid base having three lengthwise skids which are
cut out to facilitate side entry by forklift trucks.
Si ze an d Weigh t L i m i t a t i ons There are several sizes available in the plywood wirebound consolidation
conta iners. The ran ge of outside dimensions and weight limitations ar e the sam e
as t hose specified for th e Type I, cleated plywood boxes. Tables I, an d II, of MIL-
B-43666 specify the length, width, and height combinations for each of the sizes.
C LOSURE
After the box body is assembled by securing the wire loops with a sallee closure
hand tool, or similar suitable alternate tool, and nailed to the base, make the
closur e by nailing th e plywood top to the t op cleats with t hr eepenny n ails. Space
the n ails 4 1/2 inches apa rt. Complete the closure by applying length wise and
girthwise straps.
ST R A P P I N G R EQUIREMENTS
Requirements for t he size, nu mber, an d location of straps var y for each style and
size of Type II conta iner s. Consult t he Append ix of MIL-B-43666 for deta iled
requirements for reinforcing the particular plywood wirebound container being
used.
TYP E II I , FIBE RBO ARD CONSO LIDATION INS ER T BOX (MIL-B-43666)
Des c r i p t i on
These boxes ar e made of double-wall or triple-wall fiberboard . The box design
an d constr uction differs for each of th e four designa ted styles. Un less oth erwise
specified, they are furn ished with a pallet base.
USE
Type III fiberboard insert boxes should be restricted to MILVAN, or SEAVAN
when used for level A overseas shipmen ts. They may be used as shipping
containers for Level B overseas shipments and as domestic consolidation
container s. Style 3 should be used for items of assorted stock nu mbers t o be
loaded at origin as inserts only for shipment in MILVAN, and SEAVAN to a
single consign ee ad dres s code. Style 5 should be used for un it
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 388/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-12
loads of nonperishable subsistence as required by MIL-L-35078 and sized (in
height) depending on th e ant icipated height of the conten ts.
C LASSIFICATION
Ther e ar e four styles of boxes available un der Type II I classificat ion:
• Style 3, regular slotted box (RSC), is the same as the alternate
construction of the Style E ASTM D5168 fiberboard box with a 1 1/2-inchoverlap of th e out er flaps (fig 7-8). The box ma y be fur nish ed with or
without a pallet base. When a pallet base is used, it ma y be either a
double-wing block-type or double-wing notched runner-type.
• Style 4 half slotted container (HSC) with telescoping sleeve and cap,
consists of a half slotted container bottom section without top flaps, a
sleeve (with stiffening flaps) which fits over the bottom section, and a top
cap which extends down six inches over th e sleeve (fig 7-8). The
requiremen ts for th e pallet base are the sa me as for Style 1.
Style 5 flanged bottom tube with cap, pad, and pallet, consists of a fiberboard
tube with 4-inch bottom flanges, a bottom pad, a nd a t op cap which fits d own over
the body tube (fig 7-8). This type is fur nished with a st ringer t ype pallet base.
Style 6, half slotted container (HSC) with cap and pallet base, consists of a body
having a regular slotted bottom an d a flanged top, and a top cap (fig 7-9). Unless
otherwise specified, it is furnished with a pallet base.
Figur e 7-8. Type III, styles 3 and 4, fiberboar d consolidat ion boxes
(MIL-B-43666).
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 389/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-13
S IZE AND WE I G H T L IMITATIONS
There are several sizes available in the fiberboard consolidation containers,
depending upon the styles. The outside length ran ges from 29 to 86 inches. The
outside width ran ges from 31 3/4 to 42 inches. The outside height ra nges for 20
to 52 1/8 inches. The weight limit ra nges from 1,500 to 2,600 poun ds. Style 3 is
available in sizes 1 through 10; Style 4 is available in sizes 23 and 24; Style 5 is
available in sizes 16, 17, 18, and 24; and Style 6 is available in sizes 14 and 15.
Tables I and II of MIL-B-43666 must be consulted for the various length, width,height , an d weight combin at ions of each of th e sizes specified for Type II I boxes.
C LOSURE
The closur e requ irem ent s var y for each style of box. Type III boxes are
constructed in accordance with Specifications ASTM D5168 and MIL-B-43666.
The boxes are closed in accordance with the Appendix of the applicable
specification.
ST R A P P I N G R EQUIREMENTS
Either metal or nonmetallic strapping may be used to reinforce Type III boxes.
Requirements for t he size, nu mber, an d location of straps var y for each style and
size of box. Consult t he Append ix of MIL-B-43666 for the det ailed requ iremen ts
for reinforcing the particular style and size of fiberboard consolidation box being
used.
P ACKING CONSOLIDATION CONTAINER
P ROBLEMS INVOLVED IN C ONSOLIDATION
The main problem involved in consolidation of materials becomes one of shock
mitigation. The packer mu st be skilled in placing packages in the conta iner so
tha t each pa ckage "wedges in" oth er packages. The packer m ust be able to block
or brace the load as he progresses, in a minimum of time and with the cheapest
and lightest ma terial, yet strong enough to do the job. Essent ially, the problem
becomes one of converting a type 3 load to a type 2 load for protection againstshock a nd vibrat ion.
SHOCK M ITIGATION
In order to meet the problem of shock mitigation relative to consolidation
containers, there are certain basic procedures to follow:
• Try to maint ain level layers.
• Fill all inter na l voids as t he load progresses.
• Keep the center of gravity low an d centered by placing heavy items in the
bottom portion of the container and centering them in the container as
much as possible.
• Block and bra ce the int erior load adequat ely to prevent movement caused
by shock a nd vibrat ion.
B LOCKING AND BRACING THE LOAD
The ideal conditions for full utilization of consolidation containers is to tailor a
container t o the size of un iform interior packages. Of course, th e required
consolidation containers a re genera lly of standa rd dimen sion a nd a re n ot related
to product package sizes.
These ideal conditions a re n ot always present at the depot or base level, but with
a variety of package sizes to place in consolidation containers most of the
available space can be ut ilized in some instan ces.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 390/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-14
Voids tha t occur at t he top of th e pack are pr obably th e most usu al (fig 7-10). In
order to provide holddown media for the load, first cover the packs with pad(s)
and th en place cells between the pads and t he conta iner cover. The use of
adh esives will hold the cells between th e pads an d th e container cover. Cells
should be locat ed wher e stra pping will be placed. Wher e feasible, the corn ers of
the container may be split down to the top of the load and the excess portion of
each side panel, above the top of th e load, ma y be folded in, th us eliminat ing th e
need for cells.
Voids tha t occur a t t he sides of th e pack can be blocked with pa ds an d cells, the
sam e as top blocking a nd bra cing (fig 7-11).
Interior voids (fig 7-12) are the hardest to cope with and the most time-
consu min g. All voids th at would per mit sh ifting of th e packages should be filled
with cells or foamed-in-place materials as t he layers pr ogress. If the packages
ar e un iform, one sleeve may fill th e void for sever al layer s or packa ges.
Compound voids (top and side, two sides, etc. may take a little more skill, but
pads a nd cells can be u sed to block and br ace the sa me as previously discussed.
P ACKING SEMI-P ERISHABLE SUBSISTENCE ITE MSUnit loads of semi-perishable items sh all be prepa red in conforma nce with MIL-
L-35078, Loads, Unit: Prepa rat ion of Semi-perishable Subsistence Items:
Clothing, Personal Equipmen t, Equipage; Genera l specification. This
specification esta blishes pa tter ns, met hods, mat erials, and techniques a pplicable
to the pr epara tion of unit loads of nonperisha ble subsistence items by loading th e
shipping containers onto a pallet or within a consolidation container for
shipm ent . The choice of un it load type an d class based upon th e level of
protection provided can be determined from paragraph 6.1 of MIL-L-35078.
Deta iled specificat ion s heet s, MIL-L-35078/1 th rough MIL-L-35078/7, pr ovide th e
requiremen ts for each unit load type and class. The types and classes of un it
loads a re sh own in ta ble 7-1.
Table 7-1. Classification of un it loads of sem iperish able subist ence items (MIL-P-35078)
Types Classes
I - Palletized unit load................................. A - Stra pped or film bonded.
B - Capped and str apped.
C - Sheat hed, capped and stra pped.
D - Shrouded, sheat hed, capped and stra pped.
II - Containerized unit load......................... E - Capped and stra pped fiberboard box.
F - Wood cleated or wirebound, strapped plywood
box.
III - Commercial load base.......................... G - Palletized.
H - Load base.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 391/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-15
Figur e 7-9. Blocking and bra cing top voids.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 392/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-16
Figur e 7-10. Sleeve an d X bra cing.
CARGO CONTAINER S (GENER AL)
DEFINITIONS
The following d efinitions app ly:
T r a n s p o r t e r - A cargo container is a large shipping container in which packed or
un packed mater ial is placed for movement t o a break-bulk point or to an u ltimate
consignee.
MILVAN - The MILVAN is a Government-owned or leased noncollapsible,
reusable cargo container capable of being coupled to another container of like
description. It can be lifted by top or bott om corner fittin gs; can be used eith er
singly or coupled together; an d can be car ried by highway, ra il or wa ter modes of
transportation.
SEAVAN - A SEAVAN is a privately-owned container of various sizes and
configurations which may be leased to the Government for the consolidation
movement of mat erial by highway, rail or wa ter modes of tran sportat ion.
Note - Cargo that is hard to handle in closed vans, such a large, heavy or bulky
items, or m achinery, may be shipped in flat ra cks.
AIR/LAND - The M2 AIR/LAND container is a lightweight intermodal container
that permits land and air freight transportation without rehandling of the
cont ents. The cont ainer is 8 feet in height, 8 feet in width, a nd 20 feet in length.
They have a gross weight capa city of app roximat ely 45,000 pound s. The
container and its contents must not exceed the structural limitations of the
transporting aircraft.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 393/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-17
Figur e 7-11. Blocking and bra cing side voids.
Figur e 7-12. Blocking an d bracing int erior voids
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 394/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-18
Stuf f ing - The ter m "stuffing", as r elated to cargo containers, m eans th e placing
of cargo into cargo containers as distinguished from the process of loading
containers on board ship. See MTMC Pam phlet No. 55-2 "Mana gement an d
Stu ffing of Conta iner s".
P URP OSE AND ADVANTAGES OF LARGE C ONTAINERS
P u r p o s e The purpose of cargo containers reduce the number of miscellaneous small
package shipments to unit loads of the best possible size for the direct application
of mechanical han dling equipmen t.
A d v a n t a g e s
The use of mechanical handling procedures increases the speed, security,
accuracy, flexibility, and economy of supply and transportation operations:
• Use of cargo conta iners redu ces the cost of ha ndling an d reh an dling man y
small packages.
• Loss due to damage to containers and supplies during handling and
shipping is redu ced.
• Loss due to pilferaging and misplacement or misrouting of individual
packs is redu ced.
• The consolidation of packs within cargo containers reduces the need for
marking and documentation of individual packs destined for one
consignee.
• Savings are realized through the elimination or reduction of heavy or
expensive sh ipping conta iners.
USE OF MILVANS AND SE AVANS
DE S C R I P T I O N O F MILVAN (MIL-C-52661)
A MILVAN has inside dimensions of 231 inches in length, 92 inches in width, and
87 inches in height . The gross weight ra ting for each 20-foot cont aine r is 44,800pound s. A MILVAN can be coupled to anoth er MILVAN cont ain er to ma ke a
single unit 40 feet in length . A MILVAN ha s th e capa bility of being moved by
semitrailer tractor when used in conjunction with a tandem bogie arrangement
which serves as th e rear wheels. When th e double doors are properly closed, the
MILVAN a ffords wa ter proof pr otection.
DE S C R I P T I O N O F SEAVAN
SEAVANS vary from approximat ely 20 to 40 feet in length. The sta nda rd length
ut ilized by th e military is 40 feet. SEAVANs ar e 8 feet in heigh t an d 8 feet in
width. They have a maximum gross weight capacity of 67,200 poun ds.
SEAVANs are compatible for movement by motor a nd rail an d m ay be st ored for
shipment on specially conta inerized ships. They may be tran sported on a
semitrailer chassis and are lifted easily and loaded, minus the chassis, on board
by modern mater ials-han dling equipment . There are four genera l types an d
th ree sp ecialized types of SEAVANs:
D r y C a r g o C o n t a i n e r
The dr y cargo container is weather proof and is designed to protect th e cargo from
water . It is ideally suited for shipping items packed in domestic packs an d an y
comm odities sus ceptible to wat er dam age. The dry car go cont ain er is complet ely
inclosed an d mu st be loaded and un loaded by ha nd or forklift t ru ck.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 395/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-19
Dr y Ca r go --can vas Top Con t a i ne r
The canvas, or so-called "rag" top container, is similar to the dry cargo container,
but h as a r emovable canva s top. With t he top removed, the cargo can be loaded
and u nloaded by crane as well as forklift. Canvas t op containers a re not 100
percent weatherproof; therefore, all items loaded in such containers must be in
water proof packs or oth erwise be susceptible to water dam age.
F l a t r a c k C o n t a i n e r The flatrack container resembles a flatbed truck with varying styles of side
bracing and corner posts and corner posts and comes in a variety of sizes.
Generally, the flatrack has about two-thirds the cubic capacity of a dry cargo
container, but with t he sam e weight capacity. It is designed to car ry high density
and oddly shaped cargo that require little protection against the elements,
although some ar e equipped with fabric covers. Brackets on th e sides of the bed
facilitate efficient tiedown or banding of heavy items to the bed of the container.
Removable sides facilitate th e loading and un loading by cran e or forklift tru ck.
Reef e r (Re f r i ge r a t o r ) Con t a i ne r
Perishable cargo that must be refrigerated or frozen must be transported in a
refer. Most of the commer cial reefers have stan dar d refrigeration units th at a re
fuel operated for r oad use a nd electrically operated for storage or ocean tra nsit.
The stan dar d container can refrigerate or freeze from ambient t empera tu re to -10
degree Fah renheit .
Figur e 7-13 MILVAN car go cont ain ers coup led for tr an sport
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 396/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-20
Figur e 7-14 SE AVAN loaded for highway movement
I n s u l a t e d C o n t a i n e r
This is a specialized container. It is used for cargo tha t sh ould not be subjected to
rap id temper atu re cha nges. It should be used when extreme cha nges in ambient
temperatur es are indicated.
C a r - c a r r i e r
This specialized container is designed to carry two or four privately-ownedvehicles for ocean tr an sport at ion. The cont ain er which car ries four vehicles is 35
feet long and h as double-deck frames. Due to its additional height, the four
vehicle container has one and one-half times the cube capacity of a dry cargo
container.
T a n k C on t a i n e r
This also is a specialized container. It is a sma ll tan k, inclosed in a fram ework,
tha t can be used for small lot sh ipments of bulk liquids.
Wei gh t Di s t r i bu t i on
Distribute the load evenly throughout the container with heavier items on the
bottom.
Car go Mus t be Com p a t i b l e Wi t h t h e S ize o f t he Con t a i n e r
When the density of one commodity is not compatible with the container size,
select a n a dequat e commodity mix tha t will yield th e best cube utilization. At
least 80 percent of the cube sh ould be used.
Wei gh t L i m i t a t i ons
There ar e two overall tran sporter-weight: First, th e rat ed capa city of MILVANs
and SEAVANs; and second, the road-weight limitation imposed by the States
over wh ich t he conta iner m ust tra vel by motor vehicle.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 397/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-21
SHIP MENT OF H AZARDOU S MATER IALSHa zardous mater ials must be compatible with the rem ainder of th e load. Do not
stuff food or medical supplies in the same container as insecticides, chemical
products, radioactive materials, biological materials, poisons, or toxic materials.
Do not ship n oncompatible hazardous ma terials together.
Pack, mark, label, and placard hazardous materials in strict accordance with
Department of Transportation and International Maritime Organization
regulations.
The U. S. Coast Guard regulations prohibit certain explosives and other
ha zardous ma terials from being shipped in cargo containers.
GENERAL R U L E S F O R ST U F F I N G MILVAN S AND SEAVAN S
The general rules discussed below concern the stuffing of general cargo into
MILVANs a nd d ry cargo type SE AVANs.
Place heavy items on t he bottom of the load, ma intaining a n even distribution of
weight t hr oughout t he cargo container .
When stuffing standard 43-inch high modular containers, double-tier them
when ever possible. If double-tiering is not possible, top off the load with "fluff
cargo" of low densit y. "Fluff cargo", which mu st be ma n-ha nd led, should not
exceed 200 pounds per item or pa ck.
Leave several inches of head space between the t op of the load a nd the top of the
car go container so that the load can be r emoved easily with a forklift tru ck.
Pack th e load as t ightly as pra cticable. Do not wedge the load or pack it so
tightly tha t pr oblems will occur dur ing un stuffing operations.
Always position palletized or skidded loads to rest on th eir pallets or skids. Fa cepallet access slots toward the doors to minimize forklift maneuvering during
un stuffing operations.
Never place a heavy crate or box so that it rests on top of, and inside the four
corn ers of th e box benea th it. Place dun na ge over th e lower level of cont ainer s
when den se loads in th e upper t ier may cause dama ge to the cont ainers below.
Place boxes, crates, and cartons, which contain liquids that may leak, on the
bottom of the load whenever practicable.
Keep dru ms tha t contain petroleum products separ ated from general car go. Stow
dru ms with their bungs on top. Pack the dru ms tightly. When possible, pelletize
dru ms. When not palletized, place strips of dun nage between tiers of dru ms. Uselumber, burlap, fiberboard or paper, as applicable, to prevent it from shifting
durin g tran sit. Use dun na ge when it is available for filling spacing between large
boxes or crat es.
A load checker should keep a running account of the weight of individual items
being stu ffed to ensure th e correct total net weight. En ter t he overall load weight
and cube on the loading list or the Transportation Control Movement Document
(TCMD). Bra ce cargo of aver age or high densit y to preven t it from falling out
when t he conta iner doors ar e opened.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 398/399
F M 38-701/MCO P 4030.21D/NAVSUP P UB 503/AFP AM(I) 24-209/DLAI 4145.2
7-22
Clos ing an d Sea l ing MILVANs and SEAVANs
Place the shipping document s in th e space provided on th e door. Make sure t hat
both rear doors on MILVANs and SEAVANs are closed by sliding the closure
bolts int o th e holes provided in the body of th e car go cont ain ers. Position the
door handles over the latches in the doors and attach a numbered railway car
seal. MILVANs require that both door latches ar e provided with a seal.
Make sure th at the serial num bers on t he seals correspond with t he nu mbers onthe shipping docum ents. Threa d the seals thr ough the latches on the doors and
sna p th e seals int o th e seal locking devices. Use pa dlocks of app roved design on
car go cont ainer cont aining classified mater ial. Be sure th at k ey control measures
are provided.
Mar kin g of MILVANs an d SE AVANs
Shipment units and shipment units in consolidation will be address marked in
accordance with Military St an dard MIL-STD-129, Stand ard Pra ctice for Military
Marking. The address mar kings for MILVANs an d SEAVANs shall be
accomplished by attaching a waterproofed Military Shipping Label (DD Form
1387) adjacent t o the seal, if required, or a t t he r ear of the van . Data for t he label
will be in conformance with DOD 4500.32R, Military Standard Transportation
and Movement Procedures (MILSTAMP) and MIL-STD-129.
8/14/2019 Army - fm38 701 - Packaging of Material - Packing
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/army-fm38-701-packaging-of-material-packing 399/399
F M 38-701
MCO P 4030.21D
NAVSUP P UB 503
AFP AM(I) 24-209
DLAI 4145.2
1 DECEMBER 1999
B y O r d e r o f t h e S e c r e t a r y o f t h e A r m y :
Official :
ER IC K. SHINSEKI
G e n e r a l , Un i t e d S t a t e s Ar m y
Ch ief of S ta f f
J OEL B. HUDSON
Adm i n i s t r a t i ve As s i s t an t t o t he
S e c r e t a r y o f t h e A r m y
9932206
Active Army, Arm y N ational Guard , and U . S. Arm y Reserve: To be distributed in a ccorda nce
With the initial distribution nu mber 115793, requirement s for F M 38-701.
R. B . FRE DERI CK
Ac t in g , H e a d q u a r t e r s
C om p l e x C om m a n d a n t
M. E. FINLE Y
Cap t a i n , SC, USN
D e p u t y C om m a n d e r
F l ee t Log i st i c s Ope r a t i ons
N a v a l Su p p l y Sy s t e m s C om m a n d
J OHN W HANDY Lt G l USAF